Micom p437

MiCOM P437
Distance Protection Device P437/EN M/Am8
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
Contents
1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.2 2.9.3 2.10 2.11 2.12 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2
Application and Scope Technical Data Conformity General Data Tests Type Tests Routine Tests Environmental Conditions Inputs and Outputs Interfaces Information Output Settings Deviations Deviations of the Operate Values Deviations of the Timer Stages Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition Recording Function Power supply Current Transformer Specifications Operation Modular Structure Operator-Machine Communication Configuration of the Measured Value Panels Serial Interfaces PC interface Rear port communication interface 1 Rear port communication interface 2 Rear port communication interface 3 IEC 61850 Communication interface Time Synchronization via the IRIG-B Interface Configurable Function Keys Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs Measured data input Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the "PT 100 Analog Input" on the Analog (I/O) Module Y Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays Measured data output BCD measured data output Analog measured data output Output of External Measured Data
1-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-3 2-3 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-9 2-12 2-12 2-13 2-13 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-18 2-19 3-1 3-1 3-3 3-4 3-7 3-7 3-9 3-18 3-21 3-26 3-33 3-34 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-42
(Function Group LOC) (Function Group PC) (Function Group COMM1) (Function Group COMM2) (Function Group COMM3) (Function groups IEC, GOOSE, and GSSE) (Function Group IRIGB) (Function Group F_KEY) (Function Group INP) (Function Group MEASI)
3.9 3.10 3.10.1 3.10.2 3.10.3
(Function Group OUTP) (Function Group MEASO)
3-43 3-46 3-49 3-54 3-60
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
Contents
(continued)
3.11 3.12 3.12.1 3.12.2 3.12.3 3.12.4 3.12.5 3.12.6 3.12.7 3.12.8 3.12.9 3.12.10 3.12.11 3.12.12 3.12.13 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.21.1 3.21.2 3.21.3 3.21.4 3.21.5 3.22 3.23 3.24 3.25 3.26 3.27 3.27.1 3.27.2 3.27.3 3.27.4 3.27.5 3.27.6 3.27.7 3.27.8 3.27.9 3.28 6
Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators Main Functions of the P437 Conditioning of the Measured Variables Operating Data Measurement Configuring and Enabling the Protection Functions Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint) Multiple blocking Blocked/faulty Monitoring and processing of CB status signals Close command Starting Signals and Tripping Logic Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization Resetting Actions Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels Test mode Parameter subset selection Self-monitoring Operating data recording Monitoring signal recording Overload data acquisition Overload recording Fault data acquisition Fault recording Distance protection Starting Selection of Measured Variables Distance and Directional Measurement Impedance-time characteristics Selection of Trip Mode for Zone 1 Power swing blocking Measuring-circuit monitoring Backup overcurrent-time protection Switch on to fault protection Protective signaling Auto-reclosing control High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR) Rapid Reclosure (RRC) Secondary Fault Treatment Parallel Blocking Zone Extension Control Using External AutoReclosing Control (ARC) General control functions Counters Automatic synchronism check
(Function Group LED) (Function Group MAIN)
3-61 3-64 3-64 3-66 3-84 3-86 3-88 3-89 3-90 3-92 3-94 3-105 3-107 3-110 3-111 3-112 3-114 3-117 3-118 3-119 3-120 3-123 3-134 3-140 3-140 3-158 3-164 3-186 3-195 3-197 3-212 3-221 3-223 3-227 3-259 3-266 3-278 3-280 3-283 3-284 3-287 3-289 3-290 3-293 3-294
(Function Group PSS) (Function Group SFMON) (Function Group OP_RC) (Function Group MT_RC) (Function Group OL_DA) (Function Group OL_RC) (Function Group FT_DA) (Function Group FT_RC) (Function Group DIST)
(Function group PSB) (Function Group MCMON) (Function Group BUOC) (Function Group SOTF) (Function Group PSIG) (Function Group ARC)
(Function Group ASC)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
Contents
(continued)
3.29 3.30 3.31 3.32 3.33 3.34 3.35 3.36 3.37 3.38 3.39 4 4.1 4.2 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 6.5.6 6.5.7 6.5.8 6.5.9 7 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.3.1 7.1.3.2 7.1.3.3
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling Definite-time overcurrent protection Inverse-time overcurrent protection Thermal overload protection Time-voltage protection Over-/underfrequency protection Directional Power Protection Circuit breaker failure protection Limit value monitoring Programmable logic Design Designs Modules
(Function Group GFSC) (Function Group GSCSG) (Function Groups DTOC) (Function Groups IDMT) (Function Group THERM) (Function Group V<>) (Function Group f<>) (Function Group P<>) (Function Group CBF) (Function Group LIMIT) (Function Group LOGIC)
3-311 3-332 3-347 3-361 3-378 3-382 3-393 3-400 3-413 3-425 3-431 4-1 4-2 4-7 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-11 5-12 5-12 5-15 5-15 6-1 6-2 6-6 6-7 6-7 6-8 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-19 6-20 6-21 7-1 7-1 7-2 7-6 7-54 7-54 7-59 7-75
Installation and Connection Unpacking and Packing Checking Nominal Data and Design Type Location Requirements Installation Protective and Operational Grounding Connection Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits Connecting the IRIG-B interface. Connecting the Serial Interfaces Local Control Panel Display and Keypad Changing between Display Levels Display Illumination Control at Panel Level Control at the Menu Tree Level Navigation in the Menu Tree Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode Change-enabling function Changing Parameters Setting a List Parameter Memory Readout Reset Password-Protected Control Actions Changing the Password Settings Parameter Device Identification Configuration parameters Function Parameters Global General Functions Parameter Subsets
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
Contents
(continued)
8 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.1.1 8.1.1.2 8.1.1.3 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 9 9.1 9.2 10 11 12 13 14
Information and Control Functions Operation Cyclic Values Measured Operating Data Physical State Signals Logic state signals Control and testing Operating data recording Events Event counters Measured event data Event recording Commissioning Safety Instructions Commissioning Tests Troubleshooting Maintenance Storage Accessories and Spare Parts Order Information Appendix
8-1 8-1 8-1 8-1 8-8 8-14 8-37 8-43 8-44 8-44 8-46 8-48 9-1 9-1 9-3 10-1 11-1 12-1 13-1 14-1
Address list: See chapters 7, 8 and 10 and the settings in the operating program MiCOM S1 / S&R-103.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
1 Application and Scope
Application and Scope
The MiCOM P437 distance protection device is designed for selective short circuit protection and overload protection with 1-/3-pole high-speed reclosure (HSR) in effectively grounded high-voltage and extra-high voltage (E.H.V.) power systems. The multitude of protection functions incorporated into the device enable the user to cover a wide range of applications in the protection of cable and line sections. Moreover there are numerous backup protection and automatic control functions available. The relevant protection parameters can be stored in four independent parameter subsets in order to adapt the device to different operating and power system management states. General Functions General Functions are complete function groups, which may be individually configured or cancelled, depending on the application (e.g. included in or excluded from the devices configuration). (An exception is the function M AIN , which is always visible.) A function is selected by a mouse click in the operating program:
Unused or de-configured function groups are hidden to the user, thus simplifying the menu. Communication functions and measured value functions may also be configured or excluded. This concept provides a wide choice of functions and makes wide-ranging application of the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the other hand simple and clear parameter settings and adaptations to each protection scheme can be made. The powerful programmable logic provided by the device also makes it possible to accommodate special applications.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
1-1

(continued)
General Functions
21 DIST Distance protection
P437
> Six distance stages, including one that can be used as a special stage > Overcurrent starting, undervoltage starting and underimpedance
starting with load blinding
> Polygonal (quadrilateral) or circular tripping characteristics > Eight time stages, two of which are final time stages > Directional voltage memory > Optional parallel line compensation
68 PSB MCMON BUOC 50/27 85-21 79 SOTF PSIG ARC Power swing blocking and power swing starting Measuring-circuit monitoring Backup overcurrent-time protection (Backup DTOC) Switch on to fault protection Protective signaling Auto-reclosing control High-speed reclosure (HSR), time-delayed reclosure (TDR), rapid reclosure (RRC) Automatic synchronism check Ground fault (short-circuit) protection Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling Definite-time overcurrent protection 4 stages, phase, negative-sequence and residual current measuring systems Inverse-time overcurrent protection one stage, directional, phase, negative-sequence and residual current measuring systems Thermal overload protection Time-voltage protection 2 stages each, phase, positive-sequence, negative-sequence and neutraldisplacement voltages Frequency protection 4 stages, may be combined with (df/dt) and (f/t) Power directional protection Circuit breaker failure protection Limit value monitoring Programmable logic 1/3p
25 67N 85-67N 50/51 P,Q,N
ASC GFSC GSCSG DTOC
Optional
51/67 P,Q,N
IDMT
49 27/59 P,Q,N
THERM V<>
81 O/U
f<> P<>
50BF/62
CBF LIMIT LOGIC
Communication Functions
COMM1, COMM2 IRIGB COMM3 2 information interfaces IRIG-B InterMiCOM protective interface
P437
Optional
IEC, GOOSE, GSSE IEC 61850 communications protocol
Input/output functions
INP / OUTP Binary signal inputs / Output relays (maximum number)
P437
28 / 46
Measured Value Functions

MEASI / MEASO Analog input / output (2 x 20 mA output, 20 mA and resistance thermometer inputs)
P437
Optional
1-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Global functions In addition to the listed features, and extensive self-monitoring, the P437 offers the following global functions: Global functions
PSS OP_RC OL_DA OL_RC FT_DA FT_RC Parameter subset selection System measurements to support the user during commissioning, testing and operation Operating data recording (time-tagged event logging) Overload data acquisition Overload recording (time-tagged event logging) Fault data acquisition for a particular, settable point in time during a fault Fault recording (time-tagged event logging together with fault value recording of the three phase currents, the residual currents, the three phase-to-ground voltages, the neutralpoint displacement voltage and the reference voltage before, during and after a fault).
Further functions Further functions

MAIN DVICE F_KEY LED LOC PC SFMON MT_RC Main function Device Function keys LED indicators Local control panel PC link Comprehensive self-monitoring Monitoring signal recording
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
1-3

(continued)
Functional diagram
Communication
COMM1
COMM2
IRIGB
Self Monitoring
to SCADA / substation control / RTU / modem ... via RS485 or Fibre Optics using IEC60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier, UCA2, IEC61850 Vref
Recording and Data Acquisition
Overload rec. Ground flt. rec.
LIMIT
Metering
Fault rec.
21 DIST I V IN,par
50/27 SOTF
VTS/CTS MCMON
51 P,N BUOC
50/51 P,Q,N DTOC
51/67 P,Q,N IDMT
67N GFSC
49 THERM
25 ASC
79 ARC
85-21 PSIG
68 PSB
85-67N GSCSG
27/59 P,Q,N V<>
81 O/U f<>
LOGIC
conventional signalling
protection communication InterMiCOM MEASI/MEASO always available

optional
Distance Protection P437
1-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Design The P437 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust aluminum case and electrically interconnected via one analog module and one digital module. Inputs and outputs The P437 has the following inputs and outputs: Current-measuring inputs 4 or 5 voltage-measuring inputs (ordering option) Up to 32 binary signal inputs (opto couplers) with user-definable function assignment Up to 46 output relays with user-definable function assignment 1 PT 100 input (optional) 1 input, 0 to 20 mA (optional) 2 outputs, 0 to 20 mA (optional) The nominal current and voltage values of the measuring inputs on the P437 can be set with the function parameters. The nominal voltage range of the optical coupler inputs is 24 to 250 V DC. As an option binary signal input modules with a higher operate threshold are available. The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended range. The nominal voltage ranges are 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. A 24 V DC version is also available. All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes. The optional PT 100 input is lead-compensated, balanced and linearized for PT 100 resistance thermometers as per IEC 751. The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input variable via 20 adjustable interpolation points. Two selectable measured variables (cyclically updated measured operating data and stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct current via the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined via 3 adjustable interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA, for example) for slave-side open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine scaling, and a limitation to lower nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where sufficient output relays are available, a selectable measured variable can be output in BCD-coded form by contacts.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
1-5

(continued)
Local control and display Local control panel 17 LED indicators, 12 with user-definable functional assignment PC interface Communication interfaces (optional) Information interfaces Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or two optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2). Using the first communication interface, the numerical protection device can be wired either to the substation control system or to a telecontrol system. The first communication interface is optionally available with a switcheable protocol (per IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, DNP 3.0, Modbus or Courier) or as an IEC 61850 interface. The second communication interface (communication protocol per IEC 60870-5-103 only) is designed for remote control. External clock synchronization can be accomplished by using the optional IRIG-B input. A direct link to other MiCOM protection devices can be set up by applying the optional InterMiCOM protective interface (channel 3).
1-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2 Technical Data
2 2.1 Notice
Technical Data Conformity
Applicable to P437, version -308-408/409-613. Declaration of conformity The product designated P437 Distance Protection Device has been designed and manufactured in conformance with the European standards EN 60255-6 and EN 60010-1 and with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive issued by the Council of the European Community. 2.2 General device data Design Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush-mounted case for 19" cabinets and for control panels. Installation Position Vertical 30 Degree of Protection Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529. IP 52 for the front panel Flush-mounted case IP 50 for the case (excluding the rear connection area) IP 20 for the rear connection area, pin-terminal connection IP 10 for the rear connection area, ring-terminal connection Surface-mounted case IP 50 for the case IP 50 for the fully enclosed connection area with the supplied rubber grommets fitted Weight Approx. 11.7 kg Dimensions and Connections See dimensional drawings (Chapter 4) and terminal connection diagrams (Chapter 5). General Data
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2-1
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Terminals PC interface (X6): Communication Interface: Optical fibers (X7, X8 and X31, X32): F-SMA optical fiber connection per IEC 874-2 and DIN 47258 (for plastic fibers) or optical fiber connection BFOC-ST connector 2.5 per IEC 874-10 and DIN 47254-1 (for glass fibers) (ST is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors) or connection of wire leads (X9, X10 and X33): M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections up to 1.5 mm EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin
or RS 232 for InterMiCOM only (X34): EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin. or (for IEC 61850 only via 100 Mbit/s Ethernet board) (X13): IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug Current Measuring Inputs: Threaded terminal ends for pin-type cable lugs: M5, self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 4 mm2 or: Threaded terminal ends for ring-type cable lugs: M4 Other Inputs and Outputs: Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M3, self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 or: Threaded terminal ends, ring-type cable lugs: M4. Creepage Distances and Clearances Per EN 61010-1 and IEC 664-1. Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V, overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV. Glass fiber SC and wire RJ45
2-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.3 2.3.1 Type tests
Tests Type Tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Interference Suppression Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A. 1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test Per IEC 255 Part 22-1 or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV Test duration: > 2 s, Source impedance: 200 Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge Per EN 60255-22-2 or IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 4. Contact discharge, single discharges: > 10 Holding time: > 5 s Test voltage: 8 kV Test generator: 50 to 100 M, 150 pF / 330 Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy Per EN 61000-4-3 and ENV 50204, severity level 3. Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 % Single test at 900 MHz AM 200 Hz / 100 % Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements Per EN 61000-4-4 and IEC 60255-22-4, severity levels 3 and 4 Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns Amplitude: 2 kV / 1 kV or 4 kV / 2 kV Burst duration: 15 ms Burst period: 300 ms, Burst frequency: 5 kHz or 2.5 kHz Source impedance: 50
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2-3
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test Per EN 61000-4-5 or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4 Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical lines. Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 s Short-circuit current, front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 s Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV Pulse frequency: > 5 / min, Source impedance: 12 / 42 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields Per EN 61000-4-6 or IEC 61000-4-6, severity level 3. Test voltage: 10 V Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Per EN 61000-4-8 or IEC 61000-4-8, severity level 4. Frequency: 50 Hz Test field strength: 30 A / m Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity Per IEC 255-11. 12 % Insulation Voltage Test Per DIN EN 61010-1 and IEC 255-5 2 kV AC, 60 s. Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test. Impulse Voltage Withstand Test Per IEC 255-5. Front time: 1.2 s Time to half-value: 50 s Peak value: 5 kV Source impedance: 500 Corrosive Environments Per IEC 60068-2-60: 1995, Part 2, Test Ke, Method (class) 3 industrial corrosive environment/poor environmental control, mixed gas flow test. 21 days at 75% relative humidity and +30C exposure to elevated concentrations of H2S, NO2, Cl2 and SO2
2-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Mechanical robustness 1 (*) Vibration Test Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 1 Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2, acceleration and pulse duration: Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation), test severity class 1 , 5 g for 11 ms, Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport), test severity class 1 , 15 g for 11 ms Seismic Test Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 1 Frequency range: 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle. Mechanical robustness 2 (**) Vibration Test Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 2 Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 2 g Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2, acceleration and pulse duration: Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation), test severity class 2, 10 g for 11 ms; Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport), test severity class 1, 15 g for 11 ms Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during transport), test severity class 1, 10 g for 16 ms Seismic Test Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 2 Frequency range: 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 7.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 20 / 10 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle. (*) Mechanical robustness 1: Valid for P437, if the following case variant is used: Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 1 (without angle brackets and frame) (**) Mechanical robustness 2: Valid for P437, if one of the following case variants is used: Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) Surface-mounted case
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2-5
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.3.2
Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6 and DIN 57435 Part 303. Voltage Test Per IEC 255-5. 2.2 kV AC, 1 s. Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test. Additional Thermal Test 100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded. 2.4 Environment Temperatures Recommended temperature range: -5C to +55C (23F to 131F) Storage and transit: -25C to +70C (-13 F to +158 F) Ambient Humidity Range 75 % relative humidity (annual mean), 56 days at 95 % relative humidity and 40C (104F), condensation not permissible. Solar Radiation Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided. 2.5 Measuring inputs Current Rated current: 1 and 5 A AC (settable). Nominal burden per phase: < 0.13 VA at Inom Load rating: continuous: 4 Inom for 10 s: 30 Inom for 1 s: 100 Inom Nominal surge current: 250 Inom Voltage Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (settable) Nominal burden per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC Load rating: continuous 150 V AC Frequency Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable) Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz Inputs and Outputs Environmental Conditions
2-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Binary signal inputs Threshold Pickup and Drop-off Points as per Ordering Option 18V standard variant (VA,nom: = 24 to 250 V DC): Switching threshold in the range 14 V ... 19 V Special variant with switching thresholds from 58 to 72 % of the nominal supply voltage (i.e. definitively ,low for VA < 58 % of the nominal supply voltage, definitively ,high for VA > 72 % of the nominal supply voltage) "Special variant 73 V": Nominal supply voltage 110 V DC "Special variant 90 V": Nominal supply voltage 127 V DC "Special variant 146 V": Nominal supply voltage 220 V DC "Special variant 155 V": Nominal supply voltage 250 V DC Power consumption per input Standard variant: VA = 19 ... 110 V DC: 0.5 W 30 %, VA > 110 V DC: VA 5 mA 30 %. Special variant: Vin > Switching threshold: VA 5 mA 30 %. Notes The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto couplers) is recommended in most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19V. Special versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where a higher switching threshold is expressly required. The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300V DC. IRIG-B interface Minimum / maximum input voltage level (peak-peak): 100 mVpp / 20 Vpp. Input impedance: 33 k at 1 kHz. Electrical isolation: 2 kV Direct current input Input current: 0 to 26 mA Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA) Maximum permissible continuous current: 50 mA Maximum permissible input voltage: 17 V Input load: 100 Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable) Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable) Resistance thermometer inputs Resistance thermometer: only PT 100 permitted, Mapping curve as per IEC 751. Value range: -40.0 ... +215.0 C 3-wire configuration: max. 20 per conductor. Open and short-circuited input permitted Open-circuit monitoring: > +215 C and < -40 C
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2-7
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Output relays Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC Continuous current: 5 A Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms 4 A at 230 V AC and cos = 0.4 BCD measured data output Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399 Analog measured data output (DC current output) Value range: 0 to 20 mA Permissible load: 0 ... 500 Maximum output voltage: 15 V
2-8
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.6 Local control panel
Interfaces
Input or output: via 7 keys and a 4 x 20 character-LCD display State and fault signals: 23 LED indicators (4 permanently assigned, 19 freely configurable) PC interface Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable) Communication interfaces 1 to 3 The communication module can be provided with up to three communication channels, depending on the module variant. Channel 1 and 3 may either be equipped to connect wire leads or optical fibers and channel 2 is only available to connect wire leads. For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS or DNP 3.0 (as of version P437 -610 Courier) can be set. Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol based on IEC 60870-5-103. Communication interface 3 permits end-end channel-aided digital communication schemes to be configured for real time protective signaling between two protection devices (InterMiCOM protective interface).
For Wire Leads Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation Distance to be bridged: Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m Multipoint connection: max. 100 m Transmission rate BA-no. -910 (one channel) BA-no. -921 (two channels) 300 to 19,200 baud (adjustable) 300 to 64 000 baud (adjustable for COMM1) 300 to 57 600 baud (adjustable for COMM2) 600 to 19 200 baud (adjustable) Communication Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Can be set by user for one channel
BA-no. -951 (InterMiCOM)
1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2-9
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Plastic Fiber Connection Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm Optical input: max. -5 dBm Distance to be bridged:1) max. 45 m Transmission rate BA-no. -910 (one channel) BA-no. -922 (two channels) 300 to 38,400 baud (adjustable) 300 to 64 000 baud (adjustable for COMM1) 300 to 57 600 baud (adjustable for COMM2) 600 to 19 200 baud (adjustable) Communication Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Can be set by user for one channel
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125 Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm Optical output: min. -19.8 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -24 dBm Optical input: max. -10 dBm Distance to be bridged:1) max. 400 m Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125 Optical wavelength: typically 820 nm Optical output: min. -16 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -24 dBm Optical input: max. -10 dBm Distance to be bridged:1) max. 1400 m Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125 or G 62.5/125 Transmission rate BA-no. -910 (one channel) BA-no. -924 (two channels) 300 to 38,400 baud (adjustable) 300 to 64 000 baud (adjustable for COMM1) 300 to 57 600 baud (adjustable for COMM2) 600 to 19 200 baud (adjustable) Communication Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Can be set by user for one channel
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation. 2-10
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
1)
2 Technical Data
(continued)
IRIG-B interface B122 format Amplitude modulated signal Carrier frequency: 1 kHz BCD-coded variation data (daily) Data transmission using the IEC 61850 protocol Order ext. No. -936: Interface to connect a 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber-SC and wire RJ45 For Wire Leads per RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation Distance to be bridged: max. 100 m Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125 Optical wavelength: typically 1300 nm Optical output: min. -23.5 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -31 dBm Optical input: max. -14 dBm Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125 Optical wavelength: typically 1300 nm Optical output: min. -20 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. -31 dBm Optical input: max. -14 dBm The second communication interface (RS 485 connection, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol) is also available.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2-11
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.7
Information Output
Counters, measured data, signals and LED indications: see Chapter 8. 2.8 Typical characteristic data Main function Minimum output pulse duration for trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable) Output pulse duration for a close command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable) Distance protection Minimum starting time: 12 ms Starting reset time: 30 ms 10 ms Directional sensitivity up to 2 s after fault detection: up to 2 s after fault detection and for switching on to fault: 200 mV 20 % Shortest tripping time: approx. 19 ms Starting and measurement resetting ratio (hysteresis): 0.95 Definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection Operate time inclusive of output relay (measured variable from 0 to 2-fold operate value): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms Reset time (measured variable from 2-fold operate value to 0): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95 Time-voltage protection Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value to 1.2-fold operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8-fold operate value): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms Reset time (measured variable from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal value or measured variable from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value): 45 ms, approx. 30 ms Resetting ratio for V<>: 1 to 10 % (adjustable) for operate values > 0.6 Vnom and Vnom/3: approx. 0,95 for operate values < 0.6 Vnom and Vnom/3: approx. 1.05 Settings
2-12
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9 2.9.1 Definitions
Deviations Deviations of the Operate Values
Reference Conditions Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2 %, ambient temperature 20C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom Deviation Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions. Distance protection Starting V<, VNG>, VNG>> Deviation: 3 % Starting I>, I>>, IN> with setting range 0.1 to 0.25 Inom: 5 % with setting range > 0.25 Inom: 3 % Starting Z< at k = 0, 30, 60, 90 Deviation: 5 % Impedance Measurement Z< Deviation at k = 0, 90: 3 % Deviation at k = 30, 60: 5 % Direction Determination Deviation: 3 Measuring-circuit monitoring Operate values Ineg, Vneg Deviation: 3 % Backup overcurrent-time protection (Backup DTOC) Operate value I> Deviation: 3 % Time-overcurrent protection Operate Values Deviation: 5 % Time-voltage protection Operate Values V<>, Vpos<>: Deviation 1 % (in the range 0.6 to 1.4 Vnom) VNG>, Vneg>: Deviation 1 % % (in the range > 0.3 Vnom)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2-13
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Frequency protection Operate Values fnom = 50 Hz: Deviation: 30 mHz fnom = 60 Hz: Deviation: 40 mHz df/dt protection Operate Values fnom = 50 Hz: Deviation: 0.1 Hz/s fnom = 60 Hz: Deviation: 0.1 Hz/s Thermal overload protection (reaction time) Operate value Deviation 7.5 % when I/Iref = 6 Direct current input Deviation: 1 % Resistance thermometer Deviation: 2 or 1 % Analog measured data output Deviation: 1 % Output residual ripple with max. load: 1 % 2.9.2 Definitions Reference Conditions Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2 %, ambient temperature 20C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom. Deviation Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions. Definite-time stages Deviation 1 % + 20 ms to 40 ms Inverse-time stages Deviation when I 2 Iref: 5 % + 10 to 25 ms For IEC characteristic 'extremely inverse' and for thermal overload protection: 7.5 % + 10 to 20 ms Delays with the frequency protection Deviation 1 % + max. 80 ms (depending on gate time) Deviations of the Timer Stages
2-14
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9.3 Definitions
Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
Reference Conditions Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2 %, ambient temperature 20C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom. Deviation Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions. Operating Data Measurement Measuring Input Currents Deviation: 1 % Measuring Input Voltages Deviation: 0.5 % Internally Formed Resultant Current and Negative-Sequence System Current Deviation: 2 % Internally Formed Neutral-point Displacement Voltage and Voltages of Positive- and Negative-Sequence Systems Deviation: 2 % Active and Reactive Power / Active and Reactive Energy Deviation: 2 % when cos = 0.7 Deviation: 5 % when cos = 0.3 Load Angle Deviation: 1 Frequency Deviation: 10 mHz Direct Current of Measured Data Input and Output Deviation: 1 % Temperature Deviation: 2 C Fault data acquisition Short-Circuit Current and Voltage Deviation: 3 % Short-Circuit Impedance Deviation: 5 % Fault Location Deviation: 5 %
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2-15
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Internal clock With free running internal clock: Deviation: < 1 min/month With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval 1 min): Deviation: < 10 ms With synchronization via IRIG-B interface: 1 ms 2.10 Recording Functions Organization of the Recording Memories: Operating data memory Scope for signals: Depth for signals Monitoring signal memory Scope for signals: Depth for signals Overload memory Number: Scope for signals: Depth for signals Ground fault memory Number: Scope for signals: Depth for signals The 8 most recent ground fault events All signals relevant for a ground fault event from a total of 1024 different (see Address List: "Ground fault memory") 200 entries per ground fault event The 8 most recent overload events All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of 1024 different (see Address List: "Overload Memory") 200 entries per overload event All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of 1024 different logic state signals (see Address List: "Monitoring Signal Memory") Up to 30 signals All operation-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic state signals (see Address List: "Operating Data Memory") The 100 most recent signals
2-16
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2 Technical Data
(continued)
Fault memory Number: Scope for signals: The 8 most recent faults Signals: All fault-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic state signals (see Address List: "Fault Memory")
Depth for fault values: Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages Depth for signals Signals: 200 entries per fault event Depth for fault values: max. number of cycles per fault can be set by user; 820 periods in total for all faults, that is 16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for fnom = 60 Hz)
Resolution of the Recorded Data Signals Time resolution: Fault values Time resolution: Phase currents system Dynamic range: 100 Inom / 25 Inom (adjustable) Amplitude resolution: 6.1 mA r.m.s / 1.5 mA r.m.s for Inom = 1 A 30.5 mA r.m.s / 7.6 mA r.m.s for Inom = 5 A Residual current Dynamic range: 16 Inom Amplitude resolution: 0.98 mA r.m.s. for Inom = 1 A 4.9 mA r.m.s. for Inom = 5 A Voltages Dynamic range: 150 V AC Amplitude resolution: 9.2 mV r.m.s. 20 sampled values per period 1 ms
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2-17
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.11 Power supply Power supply Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom: 24 V DC or 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (ordering option) Operating range for direct voltage: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom Operating range for alternating voltage: 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom Nominal burden where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration (relays de-energized/energized): approx. 13 W / 37 W Start-up peak current: < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms Permitted supply interruption: 50 ms for interruption of VA 220 V DC
2-18
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.12 Current Transformer Specifications The following equation is used to calculate the specifications of a current transformer for the offset maximum primary current:
' Vsat = (Rnom + Ri ) n Inom (Rop + Ri ) k I1 ,max
where: Vsat: I'1,max: Inom: n: k: Rnom: Rop Ri
saturation voltage (IEC knee point) non-offset maximum primary current, converted to the secondary side rated secondary current rated overcurrent factor over-dimensioning factor rated burden actual connected operating burden internal burden
The specifications of a current transformer can then be calculated for the minimum required saturation voltage Vsat as follows:
' Vsat (Rop + Ri ) k I1 ,max
As an alternative, the specifications of a current transformer can also be calculated for the minimum required rated overcurrent factor n by specifying a rated power Pnom as follows:
' ( + Ri ) Pop + Pi ) I1 ' n k Inom = k ,max (Rnom + Ri ) (Pnom + Pi ) Inom op
(R
where:
2 Pnom = Rnom Inom 2 Pop = R op Inom 2 Pi = Ri Inom
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated for lack of saturation by inserting instead of the required over-dimensioning factor k its maximum value:
k max 1 + T1
where: : T1:
system angular frequency system time constant
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2-19
2 Technical Data
(continued)
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to calculate the overdimensioning factor k such that the normal behavior of the analyzed protective function is guaranteed under the given conditions. The over-dimensioning factor 'k' necessary for the distance protection may be read from figure 2-1. The dotted line depicts the theoretical characteristic k(T1) = 1 + T1. Current transformers should observe the error limit values for class 5P. CTs class TPY per IEC 44-6 Part 6 ("Current Transformers with Anti-remanence Cores") should preferably be used in case a HSR is applied.
2-1
Required over-dimensioning factor for distance protection with fnom = 50 Hz
2-20
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
3 3.1
Operation Modular Structure
The P437, a numeric device, is part of the MiCOM P 30 family of devices. The device types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware modules. Figure 3-1 shows the basic hardware structure of the P437.
3-1
Basic hardware structure
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-1
3 Operation
(continued)
The external analog and binary quantities electrically isolated are converted to the internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X. Commands and signals generated by the device internally are connected to external plant via contacts through the binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power supply module V, which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally. Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus module B to the processor module P. The processor module contains all the elements necessary for the conversion of measured analog variables, including multiplexers and analog/digital converters. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y is transferred to the processor module P via the digital bus module. Binary signals are fed to the processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor handles the processing of digitized analog variables and of binary signals, generates the protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor module also handles overall device communication. As an option, communication module A can be mounted on the processor module to provide serial communication with substation control systems. The control and display elements of the integrated local control panel and the integrated PC interface are housed on control module L.
3-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.2
Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between the user and the device:

Integrated local control panel (LOC) PC interface Communication interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the device family. The main branches are: Parameters branch All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings, including the device identification data, the configuration parameters for adapting the device interfaces to the system, and the function parameters for adapting the device functions to the process. All values in this group are stored in non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if the power supply fails. Operation branch This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured operating data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here, for example those for resetting counters, memories and displays. Events branch The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this group is therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the measured fault data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can be read out when required. Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in accordance with the users choice. Chapters 7,8 and 10 describe the settings, signals and measured values available with the P437. The possible setting values can be found in the P437's data model file associated with the PC operating program (MiCOM S1). The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of Measured Value 'Panels on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically displayed for specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal operation to operation under overload conditions and finally to operation following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P437 provides the measured data relevant for the prevailing conditions.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-3
3 Operation
(continued)
3.3
Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (Function Group LOC)
The P437 offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured values relevant at a given time. During normal power system operation, the Operation Panel is displayed. As an event occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel - provided that measured values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of overload event, the display will automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the event of a fault, the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset. Operation Panel The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on the Operation Panel by means of an m out of n parameter. If more measured values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e f o r P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC:Fct. Operation Panel [ 053 007 ] Measured value 1 Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value n Select. meas. values FT RC: Record. in progress [ 035 000 ] OL RC: Record. in progress [ 035 003 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] FT RC: Reset record. USER [ 003 006 ] 1: execute FT RC: Reset record. EXT [ 005 243 ] MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
m out of n LOC: Autom. return time [ 003 014 ] LOC: Hold-time for Panels [ 031 075 ] 1 C LOC: Autom. Return time LOC: Hold-time for Panels
S1 1 R1
Operation Panel
47Z1301A_EN
3-2
Operation Panel
3-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault panel The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared. The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e f o r P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC: Fct. Fault Panel [ 053 003 ] Measured value 1 Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value n Select. meas. values LOC: Hold-time for Panels [ 031 075 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] FT_RC: Reset record. USER [ 003 006 ] 1: execute FT_RC: Reset record. EXT [ 005 243 ] MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
m out of n
=1
Fault Panel
50Z01EJA_EN
3-3
Fault panel
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-5
3 Operation
(continued)
Overload Panel The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel. The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e f o r P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC: Fct. Overload Panel [ 053 005 ] Measured value 1 Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value n Select. meas. values LOC: Hold-time for Panels [ 031 075 ] R MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] OL_RC: Reset record. USER [ 100 003 ] 1: execute OL_RC: Reset record. EXT [ 005 241 ] MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
m out of n
=1
Overload Panel
47Z1302A_EN
3-4
Overload Panel
Reset Key The P437 includes a reset key, the CLEAR key, to which one of several possible reset functions may be assigned by selecting the required function at L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e s e t k e y . See section Resetting Actions in chapter 3 for details about resetting counters.
3-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4
Serial Interfaces
The P437 has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A is optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels, depending on the design version. Communication between the P437 and the control stations computer is through the communication module A. Setting and interrogation is possible through all the P437's interfaces. If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed, settings for two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of communication interface 1 (COMM1) may be assigned to the physical communication channels 1 or 2 (see section "Main Functions"). If the COMM1 settings have been assigned to communication channel 2, then the settings of communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for communication channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P437 if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead". It will only be enabled again after the PC interface Time-out has elapsed. If tests are run on the P437, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this way the PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals accordingly (see section "Main Functions"). 3.4.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC)
Communication between the device and a PC is through the PC interface. In order for data transfer between the P437 and the PC to function, several settings must be made in the P437. There is an operating program available as an accessory for P437 control (see Chapter 13).
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-7
3 Operation
(continued)
3-5
PC interface settings
3-8
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.2
Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)
Communication between the P437 and the control stations computer is done through the communication interface. Depending on the design version of communications module A (see "Technical Data") there are several interface protocols available. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is always supported. The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use with the P437:
IEC 60870-5-103, "Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI Recommendation, "Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility level 2", February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring IEC 870-5-101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks," first edition 1995-11 ILS-C, internal protocol of Schneider Electric MODBUS DNP 3.0 COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P437. Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-9
3 Operation
(continued)
3-6
Communication interface 1, selecting the interface protocol
3-10
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line idle state [ 003 165 ] COMM1: Baud rate [ 003 071 ] COMM1: Parity bit [ 003 171 ] COMM1: Dead time monitoring [ 003 176 ] COMM1: Mon. time polling [ 003 202 ] COMM1: Octet comm. address [ 003 072 ] COMM1: Test monitor on [ 003 166 ] COMM1: Name of manufacturer [ 003 161 ] COMM1: Octet address ASDU [ 003 073 ] COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable [ 003 177 ] COMM1: Selected protocol 304 415 COMM1: IEC 870-5-103 [ 003 219 ] COMM1: General enable USER [ 003 170 ] 1: Yes COMM1: Command blocking [ 003 174 ] MAIN: Test mode [ 037 071 ]
COMM1: Select. spontan.sig. [ 003 179 ] COMM1: Transm. enab.cycl.dat [ 003 074 ] COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel. [ 003 175 ] COMM1: Delta V [ 003 050 ] COMM1: Delta I [ 003 051 ] COMM1: Delta P [ 003 054 ] COMM1: Delta f [ 003 052 ] COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel [ 003 150 ] COMM1: Delta t [ 003 053 ] COMM1: Delta t (energy) [ 003 151 ] COMM1: Contin. general scan [ 003 077 ]
Communication interface
COMM1: Sig./meas. block.USER [ 003 076 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT [ 037 074 ] MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled [ 038 046 ]
47Z11FFA_EN
COMM1: Sig./meas. val.block. [ 037 075 ]
3-7
Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-11
3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line idle state [ 003 165 ] COMM1: Baud rate [ 003 071 ] COMM1: Parity bit [ 003 171 ] COMM1: Dead time monitoring [ 003 176 ] COMM1: Mon. time polling [ 003 202 ] COMM1: Octet comm. address [ 003 072 ] COMM1: Test monitor on [ 003 166 ] COMM1: Name of manufacturer [ 003 161 ] COMM1: Octet address ASDU [ 003 073 ] COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable [ 003 177 ] COMM1: Select. spontan.sig. [ 003 179 ] COMM1: Transm. enab.cycl.dat [ 003 074 ] COMM1: Max. recording time [ 003 075 ] COMM1: Delta V [ 003 050 ] COMM1: Delta I [ 003 051 ] COMM1: Delta P [ 003 054 ] COMM1: Delta f [ 003 052 ] COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: Delta t [ 003 153 ] COMM1: Delta t (energy) [ 003 151 ] COMM1: Contin. general scan [ 003 077 ] COMM1: Comm. address length [ 003 201 ] COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr. [ 003 200 ] COMM1: Cause transm. length [ 003 192 ] COMM1: Lnge Adresse ASDU [ 003 193 ] COMM1: Octet 2 addr. ASDU [ 003 194 ] COMM1: Addr. length inf.obj. [ 003 196 ] COMM1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj. [ 003 197 ] COMM1: Inf.No. <->funct.type [ 003 195 ] COMM1: Time tag length [ 003 198 ] COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv. [ 003 190 ] COMM1: ASDU2 conversion [ 003 191 ] COMM1: Initializ. signal [ 003 199 ] COMM1: Balanced operation [ 003 226 ] COMM1: Direction bit [ 003 227 ] COMM1: Time-out interval [ 003 228 ]
COMM1: Selected protocol 304 415 COMM1: IEC 870-5-101 [ 003 218 ] COMM1: General enable USER [ 003 170 ] 1: Yes COMM1: Command blocking [ 003 174 ] MAIN: Test mode [ 037 071 ]
COMM1: Sig./meas. block.USER [ 003 076 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes Communication interface COMM1: Sig./meas. val.block. [ 037 075 ]
COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT [ 037 074 ] MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled [ 038 046 ]
47Z11FGA_EN
3-8
Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-12
3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line idle state [ 003 165 ] COMM1: Baud rate [ 003 071 ] COMM1: Parity bit [ 003 171 ] COMM1: Dead time monitoring [ 003 176 ] COMM1: Mon. time polling [ 003 202 ] COMM1: Octet comm. address [ 003 072 ] COMM1: Test monitor on [ 003 166 ] COMM1: Name of manufacturer [ 003 161 ] COMM1: Octet address ASDU [ 003 073 ] COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable [ 003 177 ] COMM1: Select. spontan.sig. [ 003 179 ] COMM1: Selected protocol 304 415 COMM1: IEC 870-5, ILS [ 003 221 ] COMM1: General enable USER [ 003 170 ] 1: Yes COMM1: Command blocking [ 003 174 ] MAIN: Test mode [ 037 071 ]
COMM1: Transm. enab.cycl.dat [ 003 074 ] COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel. [ 003 175 ] COMM1: Delta V [ 003 050 ] COMM1: Delta I [ 003 051 ] COMM1: Delta P [ 003 054 ] COMM1: Delta f [ 003 052 ] COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel [ 003 150 ] COMM1: Delta t [ 003 053 ] COMM1: Delta t (energy) [ 003 151 ] COMM1: Contin. general scan [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: Sig./meas. block.USER [ 003 076 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT [ 037 074 ] MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled [ 038 046 ]
47Z11FHA_EN
COMM1: Sig./meas. val.block. [ 037 075 ]
3-9
Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS_C interface protocol
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-13
3 Operation
(continued)
3-10
Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol
3-14
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-11
Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-15
3 Operation
(continued)
3-12 Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol
3-16
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous signals For interface protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, or ILS_C it is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the control station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered via setting parameters.
3-13
Checking spontaneous signals
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-17
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.3
Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol. In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P437.
3-18
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
COMM2: Line idle state [ 103 165 ] COMM2: Baud rate [ 103 071 ] COMM2: Parity bit [ 103 171 ] COMM2: Dead time monitoring [ 103 176 ] COMM2: Mon. time polling [ 103 202 ] COMM2: Positive ackn. fault [ 103 203 ] COMM2: Octet comm. address [ 103 072 ] COMM2: Name of manufacturer [ 103 161 ] COMM2: Octet address ASDU [ 103 073 ] COMM2: Spontan. sig. enable [ 103 177 ] COMM2: Select. spontan.sig. [ 103 179 ] COMM2: Transm. enab.cycl.dat [ 103 074 ] COMM2: Cycl. data ILS tel. [ 103 175 ] COMM2: Delta V [ 103 050 ] COMM2: Delta I [ 103 051 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled [ 038 046 ] COMM2:Command block. USER [ 103 172 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes MAIN: Test mode [ 037 071 ] COMM2: Delta P [ 103 054 ] COMM2: Delta f [ 103 052 ] COMM2: Delta meas.v.ILS tel [ 103 150 ] COMM2: Delta t [ 103 053 ]
COMM2: General enable USER [ 103 170 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes
COMM2: Sig./meas. block.USER [ 103 076 ]
47Z11FNA_EN
3-14
Settings for communication interface 2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-19
3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous signals It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the control station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered via setting parameters.
3-15
Checking spontaneous signals
3-20
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.4 Application
Communication interface 3 is designed to establish a digital communication link between two MiCOM devices over which up to 8 binary protection signals may be transmitted. Whereas communication interfaces 1 and 2 are designed as information interfaces to connect to data acquisition subsystems and for remote access, communication interface 3 is designed as a protection signaling interface that will transmit real time signals (InterMiCOM protection signaling interface). Its main application is to transmit signals from protective signaling (function group PSIG). In addition, any other internal or external binary signals may also be transmitted. Physical medium COMM3 is provided as an asynchronous, full-duplex communication interface. To transmit data the following physical media are available: Direct link without use of external supplementary equipment:

Glass fiber (e.g. via 2 x G62.5/125 up to max. 1.4 km) Twisted pair (RS 422 up to max. 1.2 km)
Use of external transmission equipment:

FO module (e.g. OZD 485 BFOC-1300 / Hirschmann up to max. 8/14/20 km) Universal modem (e.g. PZ 511 via twisted pair 2x2x0.5 mm up to max. 10 km) Voice frequency modem (e.g. TD-32 DC / Westermo up to max. 20 km)
Digital network:
Asynchronous data interface of primary multiplexing equipment
Activating and Enabling In order to use InterMiCOM, the communication interface COMM3 has to be configured using the parameter C O M M 3 : F u n c t i o n g r o u p C O M M 3 . This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication module is fitted. After activation of COMM3, all addresses associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting COMM3: General enable USER. Telegram configuration The communication baud rate is settable (C O M M 3 : B a u d r a t e ) to adapt to the transmission channel requirements. Sending and receiving addresses (C O M M 3 : S o u r c e a d d r e s s and C O M M 3 : R e c e i vi n g a d d r e s s can be set to different values, thus avoiding that the device communicates with itself. The InterMiCOM protection signaling interface provides independent transmission of eight binary signals in each direction. For the send signals (C O M M 3 : F c t. a s s i g n m . s e n d x , with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection table of the binary outputs (OUTP) can be chosen. For the receive signals (C O M M 3 : F c t. a s s i g n m . r e c . x, with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection table of the binary inputs (INP) can be chosen.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-21
3 Operation
(continued)
For each receive signal, an individual operating mode can be set ( C O M M 3 : O p e r . m o d e r e c e i v e x , with x = 1 to 8), thus defining the required checks for accepting the received binary signal. In addition a specifically selected telegram structure subdivides the 8 binary signals into two groups. The signal encoding along with the set operating mode for the telegram check defines the actual balance of "Speed", "Security" and "Dependability" for each signal:
Binary signals 1 to 4: Operating mode settable to 'Blocking' or 'Direct intertrip' Binary signals 5 to 8: Operating mode settable to 'Permissive' or 'Direct intertrip'
EN 60834-1 classifies 3 categories of command-based teleprotection schemes according to their specific requirements (see figure 3-16). By selection of a binary signal and by setting its operating mode appropriately, these requirements can be fulfilled as follows:
Direct transfer trip or intertripping: Preference: Security Implication: No spurious pickup in the presence of channel noise. Recommended setting: Select binary signal from groups 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and set operating mode 'Direct intertrip' Permissive teleprotection scheme: Preference: Dependability. Implication: Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the presence of channel noise. Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 5 to 8 and set operating mode 'Permissive' Blocking teleprotection scheme: Preference: Speed. Implication: Fast peer-to-peer signal transfer. Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 1 to 4 and set operating mode 'Blocking'
3-22
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Speed
fast
Permissive
Blocking
slow low
high
Security
3-16
Direct Intertrip
high
Dependability
47Z1030A_EN
Comparison of speed, security and dependability offered by the three operating modes.
Communication monitoring C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t c o m m . f a u l t is used for monitoring the transmission channel (this timer is re-triggered with each complete and correct received telegram). The wide setting range allows adaptation to the actual channel transmission times and above all this is needed for time-critical schemes such as the blocking scheme. After the timer has elapsed, signals C O M M 3 : C o m m u n i c a ti o n s fa u l t and SF M O N : C o m m u n i c .fa u l t C O M M 3 are issued and the received signals are automatically set to their user-defined default values (C O M M 3 : D e fa u l t va l u e r e c . x, with x = 1 to 8). As the main application for this protective signaling the fault signal may be mapped to the corresponding input signal in function group PSIG with the C O M M 3 : Si g .a s g . c o m m .fa u l t setting. C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k fa i l . is used to determine a persistent failure of the data transmission channel. After the timer has elapsed, signals C O M M 3 : C o m m . l i n k fa i l u r e and SF M O N : C o m m .l i n k fa i l .C O M M 3 are issued.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-23
3 Operation
(continued)
Telegramm received
Character frame & Source address check Blocking signals accepted
Telegram receive check
Permissive signals accepted
Telegram CRC check
Direct Trip signals accepted
(Re-)Trigger of the monitoring timer
COMM3: Time-out comm.fault [120 033] COMM3: Communications fault [120 043]
COMM3: Time-out link fail. [120 035] COMM3: Comm. link failure [120 044]
47Z1031B_EN
3-17
Message processing and communication monitoring
3-24
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Supervision of communication link quality After a syntax check of each received message, InterMiCOM updates the ratio of incorrectly received messages, based on a total of the last 1000 received messages. The result is provided as an updating measurand C O M M 3 : N o . te l . e r r o r s p .u . and the overall maximum ratio can be read from COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored. If the set threshold C O M M 3 : L i m i t te l e g r . e r r o r s is exceeded the corresponding signals C O M M 3 : L i m .e xc e e d . , t e l . e r r . and SF M O N : L i m .e xc e e d . , t e l . e r r . will be issued. All corrupted telegrams are counted (C O M M 3 : N o . te l e g r a m e r r o r s ) . This counter as well as the stored maximum ratio of corrupted messages can be reset via C O M M 3 : R s e t . N o . t l g . e r r . U S E R (or via binary C O M M 3 : R e s e t . N o . t l g . e r r . E X T signal , see section Resetting Actions) . Commissioning tools The actual values of send and receive signals can be read from the device as physical state signals (C O M M 3 : Sta te s e n d x and C O M M 3 : Sta te r e c e i ve x, with x = 1 to 8). In addition, InterMiCOM provides 2 test facilities for commissioning of the protection interface. For a loop-back test, the send output is directly linked back to the receive input. After setting the bit pattern wanted (as an equivalent decimal number at C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k s e n d ) the test can be triggered via C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k t e s t . This bit pattern is sent for the duration of the hold time set at C O M M 3 : H o l d ti m e fo r te s t. For this test only, the source address is set to '0'; this value is not used for regular end-to-end communication. The test result can be checked as long as the hold-time is running by reading the measured operating data C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e s u l t and C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e c e i v e . As soon as the hold-time has expired, the loopback test is terminated and InterMiCOM reverts to the normal sending mode (e.g. sending the actual values of the configured send signals, using the set source address). Thus, in case of problems with the InterMiCOM protection signaling interface, the loopback test can be used to verify or to exclude a defective device. The transmission channel including the receiving device can be checked manually by setting individual binary signals (C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l f o r t e s t ) to user-defined test values (C O M M 3 : L o g . s t a t e f o r t e s t ). After triggering the test by C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l , t e s t , the preset binary signal is sent with the preset value for the set hold time C O M M 3 : H o l d ti m e fo r te s t. The 7 remaining binary signals are not affected by this test procedure and remain to be sent with their actual values. During the hold time, a received signal can be checked at the receiving device, e.g. by reading the physical state signal. After the hold time has expired, the test mode is reset automatically and the actual values of all 8 signals are transmitted again.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-25
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5
Communication interface IEC 61850 (Function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE)
The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups and the Ethernet module. Note: Function group IEC is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1 (hardware ordering option!). 3.4.5.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC) IEC 61850 The IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard. The main target of the IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation. Now this new communication standard IEC 61850 has created an open and common basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level, for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands. For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal images. The following documentation with the description of the IEC 61850 data model, used with the P437, is available:
IDC file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language) with a description of data, properties and services, available from the device, that are to be imported into the system configurator. PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available services. MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available object types. ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with the device data model as per IEC 61850.
3-26
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Ethernet Module The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of the two interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter IEC : Eth e r n e t m e d i a . There are two ordering variants available for the fiber optic interface: the ST connector for 10 Mbit/s and 850 nm and the SC connector for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm. The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s. The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote access with the operating program MiCOM S1 (function group COMM2). Notes: The P437 may only be equipped with the optional Ethernet module as an alternative to the optional standard communication module. Therefore the Ethernet based communication protocol IEC 61850 is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1.
Activating and Enabling The function group IEC can be activated by setting the parameter IEC : F u n c ti o n g r o u p I E C . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of IEC, all data points associated with this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting IEC: General enable USER. The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command IEC : E n a b l e c o n fi g u r a ti o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with MAIN: Device on-line. Client Log-on Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is common with other protocols. Instead server or client functionalities, as defined in the 'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the devices. A 'server' is always that device which provides information to other devices. A client may log-on to this server so as to receive information, for instance 'reports'. In a network a server can supply any number of clients with spontaneous or cyclic information. In its function as server the P437 can supply up to 16 clients with information.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-27
3 Operation
(continued)
Clock Synchronization With IEC 61850 clock synchronization occurs via the SNTP protocol, defined as standard for Ethernet. Here the P437 functions as an SNTP client. For clock synchronization one can select between the operating modes Broadcast from SNTP Server or Request from Server. In the first operating mode synchronization occurs when a broadcast message is sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the network. In the second operating mode the P437 requests the device specific time signal during a settable cycle. Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably performed by the first server. The second server is used only when messages are no longer received from the first server. When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the MAIN function then, by selecting "COMM1/IEC", synchronization per IEC 61850 is automatically active but only if this communication protocol is applied. Fault Transmission Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer". Transmission of "Goose Messages" The so-called "Goose Message" is a particular form of data transmission. Whereas normal server-client-services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level, the "Goose Message" is transmitted directly at the Ethernet level with a high transmission priority. Furthermore these "Goose Messages" can be received by all participants in the respective sub-network, independent of their server or client function. In IEC 61850 "Goose Messages" are applied for the accelerated transmission of information between two or more devices. Application fields are, for example, a reverse interlocking, a transfer trip or a decentralized substation interlock. In future the "Goose Message" will therefore replace a wired or serial protective interface. According to IEC 61850 there are two types of "Goose Messages", the GSSE and the IEC-GOOSE. The GSSE is used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by 'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. However the IEC-GOOSE enables transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary information, integer values or even analog measured values. But this will require more extensive configuration with the help of the data model from the field unit situated on the opposite side. With the IEC-GOOSE the P437 at this time supports sending and receiving of binary information or two-pole external device states. Communication with the Operating Program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet Interface Direct access by the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface on the device may occur according to the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the associated operating program MiCOM S1 (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client communication and "Goose Messages". Available are all the familiar functions offered by the operating program MiCOM S1 such as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data. The various settings, measured values and signals for function group IEC are described in chapters 7 and 8.
3-28
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE) For high-speed information exchange between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic devices) in a local network, the P437 provides function group GOOSE as defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission for trip commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals. "Goose Messages" are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. "Goose Messages" therefore remain in the local network to which the device is logged-on. Activating and Enabling The function group GOOSE can be activated by setting the parameter G O O S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G O O S E . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GOOSE, all data points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GOOSE: General enable USER. The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command IEC : E n a b l e c o n fi g u r a ti o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with M AIN : D e vi c e o n - l i n e . In addition the function group IEC must be configured and enabled. Sending GOOSE With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent from the P437. Selection of binary state signals is made by setting G O O S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). The assignment of data object indexes to logic state signals is made in the range from 1 to 32 according to the assignment to GOOSE outputs. GOOSE is automatically sent with each new state change of a configured binary state signal or an external device. There are numerous send repetitions in fixed ascending time periods (10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms). If after 2 seconds there is no further state change apparent, GOOSE is then sent cyclically at 2second intervals.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-29
3 Operation
(continued)
In order to have unambiguous identification of GOOSE sent, characteristics such as the Goose ID number, MAC address, application ID and VLAN identifier must be entered through parameter settings. Further characteristics are the 'Dataset Configuration Revision' with the fixed value "100" as well as the 'Dataset Reference', which is made up of the IED name (setting in function group IEC) and the fixed string "System/LLNO$GooseST".
GOOSE-DataSet: LLN0$GooseST
Identification: Multicast MAC address: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00 VLAN Identifier: 0 VLAN Priority: 4 Application ID: 12288 Goose ID: "Local IED" DataSet Ref. : "Local IEDSystem/LLNO" DataSet Cfg. Revision: 100 Data range: Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out1/stVal Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out2/stVal Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out32/stVal GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig.
64Z6090B_EN
3-18 Basic structure of sent GOOSE
3-30
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
With GOOSE up to 16 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the logic state signals received (G O O S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 16)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs). For each state signal to be received from an external device the "Goose Message" must be selected that includes the information wanted by setting the Goose ID, the Application ID and the 'Dataset Reference'. With the further setting of the data object index and the data attribute index through parameters, the selection of the information wanted from the chosen GOOSE will occur. The device will not evaluate the identification features VLAN identifier and Dataset Configuration Revision that are also included in the GOOSE received. Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this GOOSE again (i.e. because of a communications fault), the received signals will automatically be set to their respective default values G O O S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t (n = 1 to 16). The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are described in chapters 7 and 8. 3.4.5.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE) For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic devices) in a local network, the P437 provides, as an additional functionality, the function group GSSE (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GSSE features high-speed and secure transmission of logic binary state signals such as trip commands, blocking, enabling and other signals. Activating and Enabling The Function Group GSSE can be activated by setting the parameter G S S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G S S E . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GSSE, all data points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GSSE: General enable USER. The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command IEC : E n a b l e c o n fi g u r a ti o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with M AIN : D e vi c e o n - l i n e . In addition the function group IEC must be configured and enabled.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-31
3 Operation
(continued)
Sending GSSE With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary state signals is made by setting G S S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). Each state signal selected is to be assigned to a bit pair in GSSE (G S S E : O u t p u t n b i t p a i r (n = 1 to 32)), which will transmit this state signal. GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter G S S E : M i n . c yc l e . The cycles for the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the parameter G S S E : I n c r e m e n t . Should no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed (G S S E : M a x . c yc l e ) , then GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the max. cycle time. In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used which was set in function group IEC. Receiving GSSE With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the logic binary state signals received (G S S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs). For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the information wanted, must be selected by setting the IED name (G S S E : I E D n a m e ) . Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair (G S S E : b i t p a i r ) . Each GSSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this GSSE again (i.e. because of a fault in communication), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective default value ( G S S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t (n = 1 to 32)). The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GSSE are described in chapters 7 and 8.
3-32
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.5
IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)
If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal clock of the P437 can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface. It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the current year). Using this information and the year set at the P437, the P437 calculates the current date (DD.MM.YY). Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter. Synchronization readiness If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P437 checks the received signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P437. If the P437 does not receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will not be ready any longer.
3-19
IRIG-B interface
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-33
3 Operation
(continued)
3.6
Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)
The P437 includes six additional function keys that are freely configurable. As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure 2-1. Function key F1 is only enabled after the associated password, as defined at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y 1 , has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function keys F2 to F6. Configuration of function keys with a single function Each function key may be configured with a single function by selecting a logic state signal at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6), but with the exception: L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). This function is triggered by pressing the respective function key on the P437. Configuration of function keys with menu jump lists Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two menu jump lists assigned at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) by selecting the listing at L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). The functions of the selected menu jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the assigned function key. Both menu jump lists are assembled at L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x (x: 1 or 2). Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters, event counters and/or event logs may be selected. Note: LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the respective function key configuration. Configuration of the READ key As with L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x up to 16 functions may also be selected from the same menu jump list at L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y . They are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the "READ" key. Operating mode of the function keys For each function key the operating mode may be selected at F _ K E Y : O p e r a t i n g m o d e F x (Fx: F1 to F6). Here it is possible to select whether the function key operates as a key or as a switch. In the operating mode "Key" the selected function is active while the function key is pressed. In the operating mode "Switch" the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed. The state of the function keys can be displayed.
3-34
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Handling keys If backlighting for the LCD display is switched off it will automatically light up when a function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be triggered when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for the other keys.
3-20
Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a menu jump list.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-35
3 Operation
(continued)
3.7
Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)
The P437 has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation. The functions that will be activated in the P437 by triggering these binary signal inputs are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs. In normal operation, the trigger signal should be maintained for at least 20ms to ensure reliable detection by the P437. With the start of the general starting signal, response times up to 40 ms may be encountered in unfavorable cases. Configuring the binary inputs One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several control points having different signal voltages. In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked 'EXT' in the address description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration. It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization commands are not mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog module as these have an increased reaction time due to internal elaboration. Operating mode of the binary inputs The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify whether the presence (active 'high' mode) or the absence (active 'low' mode) of a voltage should be interpreted as the logic '1' signal. The display of the state of a binary signal input 'low' or 'high' is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the signal input.
3-21
Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-36
3 Operation
(continued)
3.8
Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)
When the P437 is equipped with the analog (I/O) module Y it has two analog inputs available for measured data input. Direct current is fed to the P437 through the 20 mA analog input (input channel 1). The other input is designed for connection of a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The input current IDC present at the analog (I/O) module Y is displayed as a measured operating value. The current that is conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDC,lin) is also displayed as a measured operating value. In addition, it is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring"). The measured temperature is also displayed as a measured operating value and monitored by the limit value monitoring function to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring"). Disabling or enabling the measured data input function The measured data input can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.
3-22
Disabling or enabling the measured data input function
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-37
3 Operation
(continued)
3.8.1
Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y
External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured the temperature, for example. If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the measured quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged, provided that the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for certain applications it may be necessary to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range with a higher or lower sensitivity. By setting the value pair M EASI: ID C x and M E A S I : I D C , l i n x , the user specifies which input current IDC will correspond to the current that is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e., IDC,lin. The resulting points, called "interpolation points", are connected by straight lines in an IDC-IDC,lin diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are also used as limiting values (see figure 3-23). Up to 20 interpolation points are available to implement a complex characteristic. When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a rising/rising or falling/falling curve sense is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If the setting differs, the signal SF M O N : In va l i d s c a l i n g ID C will be generated.
3-23
Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin
3-38
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
IDClin / IDC,nom
0,8
Interpolation points IDC,lin20

0,7
0,6
IDC,lin4
0,5
0,4
IDC,lin3
0,3
IDC,lin2
0,2
IDC,lin1
0,1
0 0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1 1,1 1,2
IDC1 Enable IDC p.u.
IDC2
IDC3
IDC4
IDC20
IDC / IDC,no
D5Z52KEB
3-24
Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken line)
Zero suppression Zero suppression is defined by setting M E A S I : E n a b l e I D C p . u . If the direct current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and the current IDC,lin will be displayed as having a value of 0. Open-circuit and overload monitoring The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below the set threshold M E A S I : I D C < o p e n c i r c u i t , the signal M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . 2 0 m A i n p . is issued. The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA analog input against overloading. If it exceeds the set threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal M E A S I : O v e r l o a d 2 0 m A i n p u t is issued.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-39
3 Operation
(continued)
3-25
Analog direct current input

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-40
3 Operation
(continued)
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and are available for further processing by protection functions.
3-26
Scaling of the linearized measured value
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-41
3 Operation
(continued)
3.8.2
Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the "PT 100 Analog Input" on the Analog (I/O) Module Y
This analog input on the analog (I/O) module Y is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The mapping curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in standard IEC 751. If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method, then no further calibration is required. Open-circuit monitoring If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . P T 1 0 0 is issued.
3-27
Temperature measurement using a PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to the analog (I/O) module
3-42
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.9
Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays (Function Group OUTP)
The P437 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal assignment is freely configured by the user. Configuration of the output relays One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be assigned to several output relays by configuration. Operating mode of the output relays The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines whether the output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or normally closed arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode. Latching can be disabled either manually via a setting parameter, or by an appropriately configured binary signal input, at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the selected operating mode. Blocking the output relays The P437 offers the option of blocking all output relays via a setting parameter or by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise blocked if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs. In these cases the relays are treated according to their set operating mode, i.e. relays in a normally open arrangement (NO) are not triggered, whereas relays in a normally closed arrangement (NC) are triggered. This does not apply to the relays associated with the signals SF M O N : W a r n i n g ( r e l a y) or M AIN : Bl o c k e d /fa u l ty. Self-monitoring alarms are thus correctly indicated. If the self-monitoring detects a serious hardware fault (see error messages in chapter 10, which will lead to a blocking of the protection), all output relays are reset regardless of the set operating mode or signal configuration.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-43
3 Operation
(continued)
3-28
Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays
3-44
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the output relays For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via a setting parameter. Therefore protection must be disabled. Triggering persists for the duration of the set hold time.
MAIN: Protection enabled No (off)
47Z1050A_EN
3-29
Testing the output relays
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-45
3 Operation
(continued)
3.10 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO) Measurands made available by the P437 can be provided in BCD (binary coded decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output. Output as direct current can only occur if the device is equipped with analog module Y. BCD output is always possible, whether the device is equipped with analog module Y or not. Disabling or enabling the measured data output function The measured data output can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.
3-30
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function
3-46
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling measured data output The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that the function M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has been configured. If the function M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has not been configured to a binary signal input, then the measured data output is always enabled.
3-31
Enabling measured data output
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-47
3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the measured data output function BCD or analog output of measurands is terminated for the duration of the hold time if one of the following conditions is met:
The measured data output is reset either via a setting parameter or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. There is a general reset. LED indicators reset
3-32
Resetting the measured data output function
Scaling Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the device inherent setting range. Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault measurands, in particular fault location in percent.
3-48
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.1 BCD measured data output The user can select a measurand for output in BCD form by assigning output relays. The selected measurand is available in BCD form for the duration of the set hold time M E A S O : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t B C D . If the selected variable was not measured, then there is no output of a measurand value. Output of measured event values If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability at the output of the updated value. Output of measured operating values The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is restarted. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-49
3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling of BCD output In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range (Mx,min ... Mx,max) in scaled form (as Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max) and the associated BCD display range (BCD,min ... BCD,max) have to be set.

MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD MEASO: BCD-Out min. value MEASO: BCD-Out max. value
The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded. If this should occur or if the measurand is outside the acceptable measuring range, then the value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Measurands Measurands of the variable Mx Associated scaled measurands Range Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2 0 ... 1
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103 - PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)
Measurands to be output Measurands to be output Scaled measurands to be output Range Mx,min ... Mx,max Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max with: Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1 Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1 Designation of the set values in the data model Measurands Measurands in the range "Measurands to be output" Measurands: Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min Measurands Mx: Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2 Measurands Mx: Mx < Mx,RL1 or Mx > Mx,RL2 "Scaled min. val. BCD" ..."Scaled max. val. BCD"
BCD display values BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value (Valid BCD value) BCD-Out min. value (BCD value not valid) BCD-Out max. value (BCD value not valid) BCD-Out max. value (Overflow)
3-50
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of BCD output The value range for the fault measurand is set from 320.00% to +320.00%. The PU fault location is given in the range from 0% to 200%.
Measurands Fault measurand: FT_DA: Fault locat. percent Associated scaled measurands Measurands to be output Measurands to be output Scaled measurands to be output Range -320.00% ... +320.00% 0 ... 1 Range 0% ... 200% 0.5 ... 0.813 with: 0.500 = 320/640 0.813 = 520/640 BCD display values 0 ... 200
Measurands Measurands in the range "Measurands to be output"
In this example the following device settings are selected: /Parameter/Config.parameters/ Address 056 020 031 074 053 002 010 010 037 140 037 141 037 142 037 143 Description MEASO: MEASO: MEASO: MEASO: MEASO: MEASO: MEASO: MEASO: Current value 'With' 'Yes' FT_DA: Fault locat. percent 1.00 s 0.500 0.813 0 200 Function group MEASO General enable USER Fct. assignm. BCD Hold time output BCD Scaled min. val. BCD Scaled max. val. BCD BCD-Out min. value BCD-Out max. value
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-51
3 Operation
(continued)
The following figure displays the values output as a function of the fault location. The BCD value and the signal M E A S O : V a l i d B C D v a l u e = 'Yes' are only issued in the value range 0% to 200%.
[004.027] FT_DA: Fault locat. percent = Not measured
[037.050] MEASO: Valid BCD value = Yes
[004.027] FT_DA: Fault locat. percent = Not measured
200 BCD value 0 -320% 0% 200% 320% [004.027] FT_DA: Fault locat. percent
47Z1040A_EN
3-33
Example of BCD output of fault location
Note: Except from radial, single circuit lines the fault location value gives a reasonable value only for faults up to the line end. For any fault on a subsequent line the fault location is more or less incorrect due to unknown fault current infeed in the remote substation. It is recommended to limit the calculation of a fault location to a practical and sensible range on the line by setting F T _ D A: O u tp u t fa u l t l o c a t. = 'Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze'.
3-52
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
MEASO: Enabled [ 037 102 ]
MEASO: Hold time output BCD [ 010 010 ] MEASO: 1-digit bit 0 (BCD) [ 037 051 ] MEASO: 1-digit bit 1 (BCD) [ 037 052 ] MEASO: 1-digit bit 2 (BCD) [ 037 053 ] MEASO: 1-digit bit 3 (BCD) [ 037 054 ] MEASO: 10-digit bit 0 (BCD) [ 037 055 ] MEASO: 10-digit bit 1 (BCD) [ 037 056 ] MEASO: 10-digit bit 2 (BCD) [ 037 057 ] MEASO: 10-digit bit 3 (BCD) [ 037 058 ] MEASO: 100-digit bit 0 (BCD) [ 037 059 ] selected measured operating value Selected measured event value is updated selected measured value not activated selected measured value Overflow MEASO: 100-digit bit 1 (BCD) [ 037 060 ]
Setting blocked
MEASO: Enable
304 600
MEASO: Reset meas.val.outp.

304 601
MEASO: Valid BCD value [ 037 050 ]
MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD [ 053 002 ] Measured value 1 Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value n Scaling of the BCD output ++
Measured value > 399
Selected meas. val.
1 2
MEASO: Output value x [ * ] 0 ... 100 %
1...2
MEASO: Output value x x: 1 x: 2 x: 3
Address 037 120 037 121 037 122
Scaling of the BCD output MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD MEASO: BCD-Out min. value MEASO: BCD-Out max. value 037 140 037 141 037 142 037 143 19Z5264B_EN
3-34
BCD measured data output. Overflow behavior is displayed in BCD example (see previous figure)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-53
3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.2 Analog measured data output Analogue output of measured data is two-channel. The user can select two of the measurands available in the P437 for output in the form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel can be defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value. The selected measurand is output as direct current for the duration of the set hold time M E A S O : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t A - x . If the selected variable was not measured, then there is no output of a measurand value. Output of measured event values If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability at the output of the updated value. Output of measured operating values The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is restarted. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset. Configuration of output relays assigned to the output channels The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays assigned to the output channels are configured for M E A S O : V a l u e A - x O u t p u t, since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited (see terminal connection diagrams).
3-54
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling the analog display In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range in scaled form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional value for the knee point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an analog output characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Figure 3-32. Measurand range to be output The measurand range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max), with: Mx,min: minimum value to be output Mx,knee: Knee point value for the measurand range to be output Mx,max: maximum value to be output This measurand range to be output is defined by setting the following parameters:

MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-x MEASO: Scaled Knee val. A-x MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-x
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103 - PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)
Measurands Measurands of the variable Mx Associated scaled measurands Measurands to be output Measurands with knee-point to be output Scaled measurands with a scaled knee-point to be output Range Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2 0 ... 1 Range Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max with: Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 Mx,RL1 Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 Mx,RL1) Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data model
"Scal. min. value Ax" ... ... "Scal. knee-point Ax" ... ... "Scal. max. value Ax"
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-55
3 Operation
(continued)
Associated display range The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:

MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-x MEASO: AnOut Knee Point A-x MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-x
Analog display values "AnOut min. val. A-x" ...... "AnOut knee point A-x" ... ... "AnOut max. val. A-x" (Value A-x valid) "AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid) "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid) "AnOut max. val." (Overflow)
Measurands Measurands in the range "Measurands to be output" Measurands: Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min Measurands Mx: Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2 Measurands Mx: Mx < Mx,RL1 or Mx > Mx,RL2
3-56
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of analog display ranges Voltage A-B is selected as the measurand to be transmitted by channel A-1. The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V. The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vnom with the associated display range from 4 mA to 18 mA. The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vnom with an associated display of 16 mA.
Measurands Measurands of the variable Mx Associated scaled measurands Measurands to be output Measurands with knee-point to be output Associated scaled measurands Range 0 V ... 150 V 0 ... 1
Range 2 V ...10 V... 100 V 0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67 with: Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013 Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.067 Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.67
Measurands Measurands in the range "Measurands to be output" 0.02 ... 0.1 Vnom ... 1 Vnom
Analog display values 4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA
In this example the following device settings are selected: /Parameter/Config. parameters/ Address 056 020 031 074 053 000 010 114 037 104 037 105 037 106 037 107 037 108 037 109 Description MEASO: Function group MEASO MEASO: General enable USER MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 MEASO: Hold time output A-1 MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1 MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 Current value 'With' 'Yes' MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u. 1.00 s 0.013 (corresponds with 0.02 Vnom) 0.067 (corresponds with 0.10 Vnom) 0.667 (corresponds with 1.00 Vnom) 4 mA 16 mA 18 mA
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-57
3 Operation
(continued)
By setting M E A S O : A n O u t M i n . v a l . A - x , the user can specify the output current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured value to be transmitted. The setting at M E A S O : A n O u t m a x . v a l . A - x defines the output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted. By defining the knee-point, the user can obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. When entering this setting the user must keep in mind that only a rising/rising or falling/falling curve sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed). If the setting was not properly entered, the signal SF M O N : In va l i d s c a l i n g A- x will be issued. Note: A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the device, if the setting was properly entered, will only occur after the device, with the setting M AIN : D e vi c e o n l i n e , is again switched on-line.
3-35
Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting value is = 0; also possible is directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data Output).
3-58
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-36
Analog measured data output
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-59
3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.3 Output of External Measured Data Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be written to the following parameters of the P437 via the communications interface.

MEASO: Output value 1 MEASO: Output value 2 MEASO: Output value 3
These "external" measured values are output by the P437 either in BCD data form or as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured data output function or the channels of the analogue measured data output function are configured accordingly.
3-60
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.11 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED) LED indicators The P437 has 23 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Figure 6-1 in chapter 6 shows the layout of the LED indicators situated on the local control panel. Four of the LED indicators (H1 to H3, H17) are permanently assigned to fixed functions. The other LED indicators are freely configurable. These freely configurable LEDs will emit either red or green or amber light (amber is made up of red and green light and may not be configured independently). Configuring the LED indicators One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color indications. For LED H 5, for example, this is done by assigning the required binary signal to F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g . H 5 r e d , or F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g . H 5 g r e e n . The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or colors), if required. LED indicators H1 H 17 Label 'HEALTHY' 'EDIT MODE' Configuration Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the device (supply voltage is present). Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input mode. Only when the device is in this mode, can parameter settings be changed by pressing the up and down keys. (See Chapter 6, section 'Display and Keypad') Permanently configured with function M AIN : Bl o c k e d /fa u l ty. Permanently configured with function SF M O N : W a r n i n g ( L ED ) . With the P437 this LED indicator is customarily configured with function M A I N : G e n . T r i p c o m m a n d the configuration may be modified. The factory setting for this LED indicator is shown in the terminal connection drawings included in the documentation or the appendix. These 18 LED indicators are freely configurable.
H2 H3 H4
'OUT OF SERVICE' 'ALARM' 'TRIP'
H 5 to H 16 H 18 to H 23
----
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-61
3 Operation
(continued)
Operating mode of the LED indicators For each of the freely configurable LED indicators, the operating mode can be selected separately. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will operate either in energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode, whether it will be flashing and whether it will be in latching mode. Depending on the operating mode selected latching is disabled either manually from the local control panel or by an appropriately configured binary signal input (see "Main Functions of the P437 (Function Group MAIN)"), at the onset of a new fault or a new system disturbance. Therefore the operating modes turn out to be the 23=8 possible combinations of the following components: flashing / continuous, energize-on-signal (ES) / normally-energized (NE), updating / latching with manual reset,
in addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new fault (flashing / continuous) and energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new system disturbance (flashing / continuous),
so that there are 12 possible operating modes in total.
3-62
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
LED: Operating mode Hxx [ xxx xxx ] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: ES ES ES ES NE NE ES ES ES ES NE NE updating manual reset reset (fault) reset (syst.dist) updating manual reset updating bl manual reset bl reset (fault) bl rst (syst.dst) bl updating bl manual reset bl ! G ! -Hxx (red color)
& & & S1 1 R1
LED: State Hxx red [ zzz zzz ]
& LED: Fct.assig. Hxx red [ yyy yyy ] Signal Signal Signal Signal 1 2 3 n
m out of n & Selected signal & LED: Fct.assig. Hxx green [ yyy yyy ] S1 1 R1
& &
LED: State Hxx green [ zzz zzz ]
Signal Signal Signal Signal
1 2 3 n
m out of n
-Hxx (green color)
Selected signal
&
FT RC: Record. in progress [ 035 000 ] FT RC: System disturb. runn [ 035 004 ] MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
& &
12Z6200A_EN
3-37
Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-63
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12 Main Functions of the P437 (Function Group MAIN) 3.12.1 Conditioning of the Measured Variables The secondary phase currents and voltages of the system transformers are fed into the P437 and are electrically isolated converted to standardized electronics levels. Airgap transformers are used in the phase current path to suppress low frequency (DC decays and offsets) signal components. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further processing. Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P437 to nominal quantities. The user must therefore set the secondary nominal currents and voltages of the system transformers. The connection direction of the measuring circuits on the P437 must also be set. Figure 3-38 shows the standard connection. By this setting the phase of the digitized currents is rotated by 180.
3-64
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
------
47Z0203B_EN
3-38
Connecting the measuring circuits of the P437. (Where markings P1 P2 and S1 S2 are used for CT polarity the dots shown here represent the P1 and S1 terminals.)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-65
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.2 Operating Data Measurement The P437 has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and voltages measured as well as quantities derived from these measured values. For the display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be exceeded, to avoid fluctuating small values from noise. If these lower thresholds are not exceeded, the value "not measured" is displayed. The following measured variables are displayed:

Phase currents for all three phases Maximum phase current Minimum phase current Positive-sequence current and negative-sequence current, taking into account the set phase sequence. Residual current measured by the P437 at the T 14 transformer Residual current of the parallel line, which is measured by the P437 at the T 24 transformer Phase-to-ground voltages Sum of the three phase-to-ground voltages Phase-to-phase voltages Maximum phase-to-phase voltage Minimum phase-to-phase voltage Positive-sequence voltage and negative-sequence voltage, taking into account the set phase sequence. Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P437 at the T 90 transformer Reference voltage measured by the P437 at the T 15 transformer Active and Reactive Power Active power factor Load angle in all three phases Angle between measured residual current and measured neutral-point displacement voltage Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current Angle between phase-to-ground voltage A and the residual currents Frequency
The measured data are updated at approx. 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if the self-monitoring function detects a hardware fault or in case of a general starting (primary system short-circuit) condition.
3-66
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured current values The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the nominal quantities of the P437 and as primary quantities. To allow display in primary values, the primary nominal current of the system current transformer should be set in the P437. According to the following formulas the P437 will determine the negative-sequence current and positive-sequence current, taking into account the set phase sequence: Phase sequence A-B-C: 1 2 I neg = I A + a I B + a I C 3
Phase sequence A-C-B: 1 2 I neg = I A + a I B + a I C 3
I pos =
1 2 I + a I B + a IC 3 A
I pos =
1 2 I + a I B + a IC 3 A
a = e j120 a 2 = e j240
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-67
3 Operation
(continued)
3-39
Measured operating data phase current, negativye-sequence current, and positive-sequence current
3-68
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-40
Measured operating data - residual current
3-41
Measured operating data residual current of the parallel line
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-69
3 Operation
(continued)
Delayed maximum phase current display The P437 offers the option of a delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase currents (thermal ammeter function). The delayed maximum phase current display is an exponential function of the maximum phase current IP,max (see upper curve in Figure 3-42). The time after which the delayed maximum phase current display will have reached 95 % of maximum phase current IP,max is set at M A I N : S e t t l . t . I P , m a x , d e l . Stored maximum phase current display The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. If the value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest value of the delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display remains constant until the actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase current (see middle curve in Figure 3-42). The stored maximum phase current to the actual value of the delayed maximum phase current is set at M A I N : R e s e t I P , m a x , s t o r e d (see lower curve in Figure 3-42).
3-70
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-42
Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-71
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured voltage values The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the nominal quantities of the P437 and as primary quantities. To allow a display in primary values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer needs to be set in the P437. According to the following formulas the P437 will determine the negative-sequence voltage and positive-sequence voltage, taking into account the set phase sequence: Phase sequence A-B-C: 1 2 V neg = V A G + a V B G + a V C G 3
V pos =
1 2 V A G + a V B G + a V C G 3
) ) )
Phase sequence A-C-B: 1 2 V neg = V A G + a V B G + a V C G 3
V pos =
1 2 V A G + a V B G + a V C G 3
a = e j120 a 2 = e j240
3-72
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase sequence
1: A-B-C 2: A-C-B
47Z0106B_EN
3-43
Determining the minimum and maximum phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages as well as the negative-sequence and positivesequence voltages
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-73
3 Operation
(continued)
3-44
Measured operating data - phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages
3-74
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-45
Measured operating data - neutral-point displacement voltage
3-46
Measured operating data reference voltage
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-75
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured values for power, active power factor, and angle Calculation of these derived operating quantities is subject to the following conditions:
Values for active and reactive power will always be calculated and displayed as these quantities are required for the subsequent energy measurement. Greater deviations in measurements may occur with low phase currents or a critical power factor value (see chapter Technical Data). The active power factor will be calculated only if the apparent power value exceeds 5% of the nominal apparent power Snom. Load angles will be displayed only if the respective phase current exceeds 0.1 Inom (0.025 Inom with the Dynamic range set to Sensitive) and if the phase-to-ground voltage exceeds 1.5 V. The angle between the measured values for the residual current and the neutral-point displacement voltage will only be displayed if the residual current exceeds 0.02 IN,nom and the neutral-point displacement voltage exceeds 1.5 V.
3-76
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Hardware fault

306 018
MAIN: Dynamic range I [ 031 082 ] IA > 0.1 Inom
IB
> 0.1 Inom
IC
> 0.1 Inom
VA-G
> 1.5 V
VB-G
> 1.5 V
VC-G
> 1.5 V
IN
> 0.02 IEnom & C
VN-G
> 1.5 V MAIN: Load angle phi A [ 004 055 ]
&
MAIN: Load angle phi B [ 004 056 ]
&
MAIN: Load angle phi C [ 004 057 ] C
&
MAIN: Angle phi N [ 004 072 ] &
MAIN: Active power P p.u. [ 004 051 ] MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u. [ 004 053 ] MAIN: Active power factor [ 004 054 ] MAIN: Inom C.T. prim. [ 010 001 ] MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim. [ 010 002 ] MAIN: Active power P prim. [ 004 050 ] MAIN: Reac. power Q prim. [ 004 052 ] 47Z1310A_EN
3-47
Measured operating data - power, active power factor, and angle
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-77
3 Operation
(continued)
Phase relation IN
The P437 checks if the phase relations of calculated residual current and measured residual current agree. If the phase displacement between the two currents is 45, then the indication Equal phase is displayed.
3-48
Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current
3-78
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Angle between phase-toground voltage A and residual currents The P437 determines the phase displacement between the phase-to-ground voltage VA-G and the residual currents measured by the P437 at transformers T 14 and T 24.
3-49
Phase relation between phase-to-ground voltage A and residual current
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-79
3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency The P437 determines the frequency from the voltage VA-B. This voltage needs to exceed a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for frequency to be determined.
3-50
Frequency measurement
3-80
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Active and reactive energy output and input The P437 determines the active and reactive energy output and input based on the primary active or reactive power. Active and reactive energy are determined approximately every 2 s. Whenever the maximum value of 655.35 MWh or 655.35 MVAr h is exceeded, a counter is incremented and the determination of the energy output is restarted. The value that exceeded the range is transferred to the new cycle. The total energy is calculated as follows: Total energy = number of overflows 655.35 + current count Energy output and input can be reset jointly at M AIN : R e s e t m e a s .v. e n .U SER (or via external signal M AIN : R e s e t m e a s .v. e n . EXT , see section 3.12.11 Resetting Actions) .
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-81
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Active power P prim. [ 004 050 ] R
P(t) dt
MAIN: Act.energy outp.prim [ 005 061 ]
-P(t) dt R MAIN: Reac. power Q prim. [ 004 052 ] MAIN: Reset meas.v.en.USER [ 003 032 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute MAIN: Reset meas.v.en. EXT [ 005 212 ] 1 R Overflow Transfer R
MAIN: Act.energy inp.prim [ 005 062 ]
Q(t) dt
MAIN: React.en outp.prim [ 005 063 ]
-Q(t) dt
MAIN: React.en inp.prim [ 005 064 ]
MAIN: No.overfl. act.en.out [ 009 090 ]
Overflow Transfer
MAIN: No.overfl. act.en.inp [ 009 091 ]
Overflow Transfer
MAIN: No.ov/fl. reac.en.out [ 009 092 ]
Overflow Transfer
MAIN: No.ov/fl. reac.en.inp [ 009 093 ]
47Z1321A_EN
3-51
Determining the active and reactive energy output and input
3-82
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting the procedure to determine energy output Unlike other MV protection devices from the Px3x series, the P437 does not provide parameter settings for the procedure to determine energy output. The features of the selected procedure are equivalent to requirements typical in the EHV and HV range. Characteristics
Applications
Determination of the active and reactive energy every 2 s (approximately) Reduced system loading
Constant load and slow load variations (no significant load variations within 1 second). Phase angles below 70 (cos > 0.3 ).
The maximum phase-angle error of the P437 of 1 leads to greater errors in measurement when the phase angle increases, as shown in the following diagram.
5%
2%
Fault
45
3-52
70 Phase angle S8Z0401B
Error of measurement in the determination of energy output resulting from the phase angle error of the P437
Error of measurement:
Approx. 2 % of the measured value for cos = 0.7 Approx. 5 % of the measured value for cos = 0.3
For phase angles in excess of 70 or when the error of measurement resulting from the maximum phase-angle error is not acceptable, external counters should be used to determine the energy output.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-83
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.3 Configuring and Enabling the Protection Functions The device can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system by configuring the available function range. By including the relevant protection functions in the device configuration and canceling all other protection functions, the user creates an individual device appropriate to the application. Parameters, signals, and measured values of canceled protection functions are not displayed on the local control panel. Functions of general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main functions (MAIN) cannot be canceled. Canceling a protection function The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be canceled:

The protection function in question must be disabled. None of the elements of the protection function to be canceled may be assigned to a binary input. None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or an LED indicator. None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals. No functions of the device function to be canceled may be selected in a list parameter setting.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the Configuration branch of the menu tree to access the setting relevant for the protection function to be canceled. If, for example, the "LIMIT" function group is to be canceled, the setting L IM IT : F u n c ti o n g r o u p L I M I T is accessed and its value is set to "Without". To re-include the "LIMIT" function in the device configuration, the same setting is accessed and its value is changed to "With". The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: In the following description of the protection functions, it is presumed that this protection function is included in the configuration.
3-84
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling and enabling the protection function Protection functions that are included in the configuration may still be disabled via a function setting or via binary signal inputs. Protection can only be disabled or enabled through binary signal inputs if the M AIN : D i s a b l e Pr o te c t. EXT and M A I N : E n a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T functions are both configured. When neither or only one of the two functions is configured, the condition is interpreted as "Protection externally enabled". If the triggering signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible i.e. both are at logic level = "1" then the last plausible state remains stored in memory. Note: If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for M A I N : D i s a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T , the signal M AIN : Bl o c k e d /F a u l ty is not issued.
3-53
Enabling or disabling protection
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-85
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.4 Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint) The inrush stabilization function detects high inrush current flows that occur when transformers or machines are switched on, and, if detected, it will then block the following functions:

Overcurrent and underimpedance fault detection logic of distance protection Backup overcurrent-time protection (backup DTOC) Definite-time overcurrent protection Inverse-time overcurrent protection
The inrush stabilization function identifies an inrush current by evaluating the ratio of the second harmonic current components to the fundamental. If this ratio exceeds the set threshold, then the inrush stabilization function operates. Another settable current trigger blocks inrush stabilization if the current exceeds this trigger. The setting of the operating mode determines whether inrush stabilization will operate phase-selectively or across all phases.
3-86
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Op. mode rush r. PSx [ * ]
MAIN: I> lift rush r. PSx [ * ]
MAIN: Rush I (2fn)/I(fn)PSx [ * ]
Parametre set set set set 1 2 3 4
MAIN: Op. mode rush r. PSx 017 097 001 088 001 089 001 090
MAIN: I> lift rush r. PSx 017 095 001 085 001 086 001 087
MAIN: Rush I (2fn)/I(fn)PSx 017 098 001 091 001 092 001 093
47Z1144A_EN
3-54
Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-87
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.5 Multiple blocking Two multiple blocking conditions can be defined via 'm out of n' parameters. The functions defined by selection may be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-55
Multiple blocking
3-88
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.6 Blocked/faulty If the protective functions are blocked, the condition is signaled by continuous illumination of the amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal from an output relay configured M AIN : Bl o c k e d /F a u l ty . In addition functions can be selected that will issue the M AIN : Bl o c k e d /F a u l ty signal by setting a m out of n parameter.
47Z11EHA_EN
3-56
"Blocked/Faulty" signal
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-89
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.7 Monitoring and processing of CB status signals Within the main function group it is possible to select whether the multiple signals CB closed 3p / CB open 3p or pole selective Closed status signals will be monitored. Simultaneous monitoring of all status signals is not feasible and should therefore not be undertaken. Figure 3-57 shows the logical processing of the various input signals. The plausibility logic will be triggered should one of the following discrepancies be detected:
A minimum of one 3-pole monitoring signal and one 1-pole monitoring signal are configured at the same time. Both input signals M AIN : C B c l o s e d 3 p EXT and MAIN: C B o p e n 3 p E X T are present simultaneously. There is no pole-selective status signal M AIN : C B c l o s e d x EXT present (i.e. CB contact is open) but at the same time there is a current flow in this conductor exceeding 0.05 Inom.
In order to suppress triggering during transient actions, the signal issued when a discrepancy in plausibility is detected has a delayed pickup of 100 ms. Besides monitoring for signaling purposes, status signals are also processed in these functions: If the (re-)close command is to be terminated by the 'CB closed' signal (setting M A I N : R C i n h i b i t b y C B c l o s e = Yes) then the resulting signal M AIN : C B c l o s e d 3 p will now be read (instead of the previous input signal M AIN : C B c l o s e d s i g . EXT shown in figure 3-58 as close command"). ARC: Ready indication If the ARC should only be available when the circuit breaker has already been closed (setting AR C : C B c l o s .p o s .s i g . PSx = with) then the resulting signal M AIN : C B c l o s e d 3 p will now be read (instead of the previous input signal M AIN : C B c l o s e d s i g . EXT shown in the figure as ARC availability"). ARC: Plausibility check on single-pole HSR If pole selective status signals have been configured (see Monitoring and processing of CB status signals, function group MAIN)) then the device will check that just this CB contact will be opened during a single-pole HSR. The single-pole HSR is terminated and a three-pole trip command is issued when at least one further CB contact is opened. This trip command is either final (with A R C : H S R o p e r . m o d e P S x = 1-pole or 1-/3-pole and with the timer stage AR C : tD i s c r i m . PSx having elapsed ) or the dead time for the three-pole HSR is triggered (with AR C : H SR o p e r . M o d e P S x = 1-/3-pole and with the timer stage AR C : tD i s c r i m . PSx still running). The same procedure is carried out should the multiple signal M AIN : C B c l o s e d 3 p EXT occur during the dead time of a single-pole HSR. PSIG and GSCSG: Undelayed echo if CB is open If the CB is open, the echo signal (if enabled) is issued without additional delay. For this feature, the signal M AIN : C B o p e n 3 p is now used (instead of the previously inverted input signal M AIN : C B c l o s e d s i g . EXT - see Echo functions figures in the description of function groups PSIG and GSCSG). MCMON: Release of negative-sequence voltage protection using CB status indication With the operating mode set to Vneg w.CB cont.enab. the internally generated signal M AIN : C B c l o s e d 3 p is now used instead of the input signal M AIN : C B c l o s e d s i g . EXT (see figure Monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuit, function group MCMON).
3-90
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: CB open 3p EXT [031 028]
& & &
&
MAIN: CB open 3p [ 031 040 ]
[031 028] configured
&
MAIN: CB open >= 1p [ 031 039 ]
MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [036 051]
& & &
&
MAIN: CB closed 3p [ 031 042 ]
[036 051] configured
&
MAIN: CB closed >= 1p [ 031 038 ]
MAIN: CB closed A EXT [031 029]
&
&
MAIN: CB closed A [ 031 035 ]
& [031 029] configured
&
MAIN: CB open A [ 031 032 ]
MAIN: CB closed B EXT [031 030]
&
&
MAIN: CB closed B [ 031 036 ]
&
MAIN: CB open B [ 031 033 ]
MAIN: CB closed C EXT [031 031]
&
&
MAIN: CB closed C [ 031 037 ]
&
MAIN: CB open C [ 031 034 ]
10 5
100 ms 0 t MAIN: CB pos.sig. unplaus. [ 031 041 ]
>0.05 Inom IA IB IC
Plausibility check
47Z1021C_EN
3-57
Monitoring of CB status signals
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-91
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.8 Close command The circuit breaker can be closed by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC), by a setting parameter or via an appropriately configured binary signal input on the P437. The close command from the local control panel, a setting parameter or a binary signal input is executed only if there is no trip command 1 present and no trip has been issued by a protection device operating in parallel. Moreover, with the setting of M A I N : R C i n h i b . b y C B c l o s e to Yes, the close command is not executed if there is a "CB closed" position signal present. The signal M AIN : C B c l o s e d 3 p is read for this purpose. The duration of the close command can be set. The close command is reset when the trip command is issued. Close command counter. The number of close commands are counted. The close command counter can be reset either individually or together with other counters, see section 3.12.11 Resetting Actions.
3-92
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-58
Close command
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-93
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.9 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic Starting signals The starting signals of the distance protection and backup overcurrent time protection functions are linked to form common starting signals. The number of general starting signals (GS) is counted.
MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] DIST: General starting [ 036 240 ] BUOC: Starting [ 036 013 ] DIST: Starting A
303 529
MAIN: No. general start. [ 004 000 ]
MAIN: General starting [ 036 000 ]
MAIN: Starting A [ 036 001 ]
BUOC: IA> triggered
304 750
DIST: Starting B
303 530
MAIN: Starting B [ 036 002 ]
BUOC: IB> triggered
304 751
DIST: Starting C
303 531
MAIN: Starting C [ 036 003 ]
BUOC: IC> triggered
304 752
DIST: Signal block start.G

303 594
DIST: Starting N1
303 535
MAIN: Starting GF [ 036 004 ]
BUOC: SN
304 757
47Z13ASA_EN
3-59
Starting signals
For solidly grounded systems (setting M AIN : N e u tr .p t. tr e a t. PSx = Low-imped. grounding), it can be selected whether a ground fault is determined by an 'OR'-linked or an 'AND'-linked condition of the IN> and VNG> detectors in the distance protection. The parameter setting M A I N : G r o u n d s t a r t i n g P S x may then be used.
3-94
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Phase selection logic Various internal protection functions, such as distance protection, issue a phaseselective trip signal. Processing of such trip signals is shown in figure 3-61 below. Other internal protection functions (e.g. overcurrent protection in the residual current system in function groups DTOC-N and GFSC) and external protection devices (MiCOM P547 for example) issue only a 3-pole trip signal. In order to allow phaseselective single-pole tripping in case of single-phase-to-ground short circuits the P437 now provides a faulted phase detection and trip selection logic. This phase-selective trip is controlled by a new setting parameter and an existing binary input function (see figure 3-60). The P437 now features an 'm out of n' selection of trip signals in order to offer maximum flexibility. Note: In order to obtain a single-pole trip the selected trip signals must not be configured into the trip command 1! (Setting M A I N : F c t . a s s i g . t r i p c m d . 1 ) In addition the function must be enabled by setting the four parameters MAIN: Enable 1p trip PSx. When setting M AIN : F c t.a s s .1 p tr i p c m d 1 the following signals may be selected: All trip signals issued by functions DTOC, IDMT and GFSC All output signals issued by function group LOGIC MAIN: Par. Trip (1p) EXT In addition the P437 now provides a time delayed 3-pole transfer trip feature. This is issued if during the time period set at M AIN : 3 p tr a n s f 1 p tr p PSx no phase starting takes place and therefore no phase-selection is possible. The internal ARC is also controlled by this trip logic. If at least one phase starting takes place, then the ARC operative timer stages are triggered, as usual, with general starting. The ARC dead time is started if the trip signal is terminated within the set operative time. In this case it is assumed that the operating mode HSR permits that the ARC dead time is not triggered if only a singlepole HSR has been set and the trip is multi-pole. In case no starting takes place and the 3-pole trip is issued, then the ARC operative timer stages are triggered together with the general trip signal 1. The ARC dead time is started if the trip signal is terminated within the set operative time. In this case it is assumed that a 3-pole HSR (for a 3-pole trip) is permitted. Phase-selective trip-logic
Number of phases selected Trip decision 1-pole
ARC: Operating mode HSR

1/3-pole 3-pole 3-pole for 1-pole
0 1 >1
3-pole 1-pole 3-pole
No Yes No
Yes (3-pole) Yes (3-pole) Yes (3-pole) Yes (1-pole) Yes (3-pole) Yes (3-pole) Yes (3-pole) Yes (3-pole) No
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-95
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Fct.ass.1p trip cmdl [ 002 060 ] DTOC: tI> elapsed [ 040 010 ] DTOC: Trip signal tIN> [ 035 043 ] MAIN: Par. trip (1p) EXT [ 002 066 ] ...
m out of n Selected signals
MAIN: Enable 1p trip PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes

&
Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4
MAIN: Enable 1p trip PSx 002 061 002 062 002 063 002 064
MAIN: 3p transf 1p trp PSx 002 184 002 185 002 186 002 187
>1
MAIN: Trip 1,A

306 009

& >1
MAIN: Trip 1,B

306 010
MAIN: Starting B [ 036 002 ]

& >1
MAIN: Trip 1,C

306 011
MAIN: Starting C [ 036 003 ]

& >1 >1
MAIN: Blocking 1p trip EXT [ 041 078 ]

& &
MAIN: 3p transf 1p trp PSx [ * ]

t 0
47Z1101A_EN
3-60
Phase selection for single-pole tripping
3-96
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Trip 1,A

310 003
MAIN: Trip 1,B

310 004
MAIN: Trip signal 1, 1p [ 037 252 ] MAIN: Trip signal 1, 3p [ 037 253 ]
MAIN: Trip 1,C

310 005
0 1 0: No 1: Yes
*
Parametre set set set set 1 2 3 4
MAIN: 3p tr. if HSR off PSx 015 065 024 034 024 094 025 054
47Z1123A_EN
3-61
Phase-selective trip
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-97
3 Operation
(continued)
Trip command The P437 provides two trip commands. The functions required to trip can be selected by setting an 'm out of n' parameter independently for each of the two trip commands. The minimum trip command closure time may be set. The trip signals are present only as long as the conditions for the signal are met.
3-98
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
47Z10AUA_EN
3-62
Forming the trip commands
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-99
3 Operation
(continued)
Direct transfer trip These input signals allow a direct transfer trip without need of protective signaling scheme logic (function group PSIG): MAIN: Transfer trip EXT MAIN: Transfer trip A EXT MAIN: Transfer trip B EXT MAIN: Transfer trip C EXT This feature makes it possible to use direct transfer tripping and any classical scheme logic (such as permissive or blocking schemes) at the same time. Send transfer trip There are special send signals for the direct transfer trip of the switch at the other end: MAIN: Send transfer trip MAIN: Send transfer trip A MAIN: Send transfer trip B MAIN: Send transfer trip C These send signals were designed for applications with a bi-directional transfer trip so as to avoid that, for instance, a transfer trip signal is sent only because such a transfer trip signal was received from the remote station. With a 3-pole trip, the signal M AIN : s e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p is sent as soon as the signal M A I N : G e n . T r i p c o m m a n d 1 has been issued, except when this trip command was caused when the signal M AIN : tr a n s fe r tr i p . EXT was received (see figure 3-63). With a 1/3-pole trip the same applies to 1-pole send signals. Note: The P437 should either be used with a phase-selective transfer trip (1-pole) or a 3-pole transfer trip, but never with both transfer trip types used simultaneously. The reason for this is that with each 1-pole trip command a 3-pole general trip command 1 is issued. If, for instance, the signal M AIN : T r a n s fe r tr i p . A EXT is received without a local trip being present, then the P437 will issue a 1-pole M A I N : T r i p c o m m a n d 1 , A as well as the 3-pole M A I N : G e n . t r i p c o m m a n d 1 . Since no 3-pole transfer trip signal M AIN : T r a n s fe r tr i p . EXT was received, the P437 will send the signal M AIN : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p (but not the signal M A I N : S e n d t r a n s f e r t r i p . A ).
3-100
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Signal assignment Kxx: 001.207 MAIN: Send transfer trip.
Signal assignment Kxx: [001.207] MAIN: Send transfer trip.
Signal assignment Uxx: 120.046 MAIN: Transfer trip. EXT
V in
V in
Signal assignment Uxx: [120.046] MAIN: Transfer trip. EXT
&
[136.071] MAIN: Gen. trip command 1
S R
11 1
P437
P437
47Z1020A_EN
3-63
3-pole transfer trip
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-101
3 Operation
(continued)
Manual trip command Phase-selective as well as 3-pole manual trip commands may be issued via setting parameters or appropriately configured binary signal inputs. However, a 3-pole manual trip command will be executed only if it is included in the selection of possible functions to cause a trip.
MAIN: Man.trip cmd.Lx USER [ 003 040 ]
MAIN: Man def. trip A EXT [ 038 030 ]
MAIN: Man def. trip B EXT [ 038 031 ]
MAIN: Man def. trip C EXT [ 038 032 ]
47Z11AVA_EN
3-64
Manual trip command
3-102
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Blocking of the trip commands The trip commands can be blocked via a setting parameter or an appropriately configured binary signal input. This blocking is then effective for all trip commands. The trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip commands are both blocked, it is indicated by the continuously illuminated amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal from an output relay configured to "Blocked/Faulty".
3-65
Blocking of the trip commands
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-103
3 Operation
(continued)
Counter of trip commands The number of trip commands is counted. The counters can be reset either individually or jointly with other counters, see section 3.12.11 Resetting Actions.
3-66
Counter of trip commands
3-104
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.10 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the event memories are date- and time-tagged. In order for time tagging to function properly the date and time of day must be set at the P437 or synchronized through the IRIG-B interface or the communication interface. The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an appropriately configured binary signal input. The P437 evaluates the rising edge. This will set the clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is evaluated.
3-67
Date and time setting and clock synchronization
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-105
3 Operation
(continued)
Priority control of time synchronization The protection device provides numerous options to synchronize the internal clock: o o o o Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC (full time) Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC (full time) IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only) Pulse every minute presented at a binary signal input (MAIN), see figure 3-67 and previous section.
With previous software versions these interfaces where equal ranking i.e. clock synchronization was carried out regardless of which sub-function initiated triggering. No conflicts have to be taken into account as long as synchronization sources (communication master, IRIG-B and minute pulse source) operate at the same time of day. Should the synchronization sources operate with a different time basis unwanted step changes in the internal clock may occur. On the other hand a redundant time of day synchronization is often used so as to sustain time synchronization via IRIG-B interface even if and while the SCADA communication is out of service. A primary and a backup source for time of day synchronization may now be set, where both provide the four options listed in the above. MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as long as time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set at M A I N : T i m e s yn c . t i m e - o u t . When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the device will expect time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1 has become defective, before it will switch over to the backup source. Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out stage is blocked.
3-106
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.11 Resetting Actions Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways. The following types of resetting actions are possible:
Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. In this case only the displays on the local control panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory. Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local control panel LCD by pressing the "CLEAR" key C located on the local control panel. Further memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when the "CLEAR" key is pressed. (See section 2.1 "Configurable Reset Key (Function Group LOC)".) Selective resetting, e.g. fault memories only, from the local control panel. (For this example: Navigate to menu point F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . U S E R and set to 'Execute', see also the exact step-for-step description in section 6.5.7 "Reset" in chapter 6.) Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example: Assign parameter F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T to the relevant binary signal input e.g. I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 8 0 1 .) Group resetting from the local control panel, by navigating to menu point M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x U S E R and setting it to 'Execute'. For this the relevant memories (i.e. those to be reset) must be assigned to parameter MAIN: Fct.assign. reset x. Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (That is assign parameter M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t . x E X T to the relevant binary signal input, e.g. I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 8 0 1 after memories to be reset have been assigned to parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .) General resetting from the local control panel (menu point M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t U S E R ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration options. General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t E X T is assigned to the relevant binary signal input.) All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory then they all have equal priority. In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-107
3 Operation
(continued)
Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make access especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by configuring them to a function key.
Function keys may be configured such that resetting of a specific memory is assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately configured binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a binary signal input is simulated. (See section 2.1 "Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)".) Similar to this, but one step less direct, is the possibility to assign one of the two menu jump lists (L O C : T r i g . M e n u j m p x E X T ) to a function key and to include the relevant menu point for a resetting action (e.g. O U T P : R e s e t l a t c h . U S E R ) in the definition (L O C : F c t . M e n u j m p l i s t x ) of the selected menu jump list. The same may be achieved with the "READ" key by assigning it a menu point for a resetting action through L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y .
3-68
General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel
3-108
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
LOC: Reset key active

310 024
&
OP_RC: Reset record. EXT [ 005 213 ]
LOC: Fct. reset key [ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC: Reset record. EXT [005 213]
MAIN: Group reset x USER [ * ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute MAIN: Group reset x EXT [ * ] MAIN: Fct.assign. reset x [ * ] 1 &
m out of n x OP_RC: Reset record. EXT [005 213] 1 2 MAIN: Group reset x USER 005 253 005 254 MAIN: Group reset x EXT 005 209 005 252
005 248 005 249
12Z61RMB_EN
3-69
"CLEAR" key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data recording; further examples for resetting signals generated in this way are: (005 242) GF_RC: Reset record. EXT (005 243) FT_RC: Reset record. EXT (005 241) OL_RC: Reset record. EXT (005 240) MT_RC: Reset record. EXT (005 255) MAIN: General reset EXT (005 211) MAIN: Reset IP,max,st.EXT (005 210) MAIN: Reset.c.cl/tr.cEXT (005 212) MAIN: Reset meas.v.en.EXT (040 138) MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT (040 015) OUTP: Reset latch. EXT
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-109
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.12 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels There are two communication channels available. These physical communications channels may be assigned to communications interfaces COMM1 and COMM2. If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2, then the settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically assigned to communications channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P437 if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".
3-70
Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels
3-110
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.13 Test mode If tests are run on the P437, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all incoming signals - only if they are supported by the protocol selected - via the serial interfaces are labeled accordingly.
3-71
Setting the test mode
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-111
3 Operation
(continued)
3.13 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS) With the P437, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user may switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the protection function. Selecting the parameter subset The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or binary signal input) may be selected via the function setting P S S : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R or via the external signal P S S : C o n t r o l V i a U s e r E X T . Correspondingly, the parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function setting P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R or in accordance with external signals. The parameter subset actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning the logic state signals P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t or P S S : P S x a c t i v e . Selecting the parameter subset via binary inputs If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the P437 first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for parameter subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset selected via the function setting will be active. The P437 also checks whether the signals present at the binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter subset selection. This is only true when only one binary signal input is set to a logic level of "1". If more than one signal input is set to a logic level of "1", then the parameter subset previously selected remains active. Should a dead interval occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is the case if all binary signal inputs have a logic level of "0"), then the stored hold time is started. While this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset remains active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of "1", the associated parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is still no signal input with a logic level of "1", the parameter subset selected via the function parameter becomes active. If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of "1" is present at any of the binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the parameter subset selected via the function parameter will become active once the stored time has elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while the stored hold timer stage is running. Parameter subset selection may also occur during a general starting condition. In this case, however, the settings for distance measurement and impedance-time characteristics remain unchanged. They are not updated until the general starting condition ends. When subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of approximately 100 ms must be taken into account. Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally effective for all four parameter subsets.
3-112
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-72
Activating the parameter subsets
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-113
3 Operation
(continued)
3.14 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P437 ensure that internal faults are detected and do not lead to malfunctions. Tests during start-up After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full operability of the P437. If the P437 detects a fault in one of the tests, then start-up is terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred. No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P437 can only be initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again. Cyclic tests After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory the monitoring signal memory along with the assigned date and time (see also Monitoring Signal Recording). The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data loss if the supply voltage should fail. Chapter 11 gives further instructions on battery replacement. Signaling The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured S F M O N : W a r n i n g . The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is detected.
3-73
Monitoring signals
3-114
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Device response The response of the P437 is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The following responses are possible:
Signaling Only If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow. Selective Blocking If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions, then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface. Warm Restart If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system restart such as a fault in the hardware , then a procedure called a warm restart is automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any start-up, the computer system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure. A warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action. During a warm restart sequence the protective functions and the communication through serial interfaces will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked but communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again. Cold Restart If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary because the protection device cannot identify which parameter in the subset is corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state. This means that all the protection device settings are also erased after a cold restart. In order to establish a safe initial state, the default values have been selected so that the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring signal memory.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-115
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring signal memory Depending on the type of internal fault detected the device will respond by trying to eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read also about device behavior with problems in Chapter 10 ,Troubleshooting.) Whether or not this measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has not already been stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous fault. If it was already stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on the type of fault detected, the device will be blocked after the second warm restart. Previously this occurred independently of the time duration that had passed since the first monitoring signal was issued. The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the device if the monitoring signal memory has not been reset in the interim, for example, because the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out and clearing of the monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces was not enabled. A timer stage "memory retention time" has been introduced to defuse this problem. SFMON: Mon.sig. retention Now device blocking only occurs, when the same internal device fault is detected twice during this time duration. Otherwise, the device will continue to operate normally after a warm restart. In the default setting this timer stage is blocked so that, when an internal fault is detected, the device will operate in the same way as the previous versions. Monitoring signal memory time tag Because of these changes the significance of the time tag for entries to the monitoring signal memory has been re-defined. The time when the device fault occurred first was previously recorded. The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.
3-116
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.15 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events, a non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The "operationally relevant" signals, each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in chronological order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as function disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end of events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as overloads, ground faults or short circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory can be cleared/reset. Counter for signals relevant to system operation The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
3-74
Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-117
3 Operation
(continued)
3.16 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of 30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory clearance, the S F M O N : O v e r f l o w M T _ R C signal is entered as the last entry. Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered in the monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can select this option by setting an 'm out of n' parameter (see 'Self-Monitoring'). If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry causes the LED to flash (on/off/on....). The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if the corresponding test in a new test cycle now shows the device to be healthy. The contents of the monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interface. The time and date information assigned to the individual entries can be read out through the PC or communication interface or from the local control panel or operating program. Monitoring signal counter The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the monitoring signal counter (M T _ R C : N o . m o n i t. s i g n a l s ).
3-75
Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter
3-118
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.17 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) In the event of an overload, the P437 determines the overload duration. The overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OL_ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
3-76
Overload duration
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-119
3 Operation
(continued)
3.18 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) Start of overload recording An overload exists and consequently overload recording begins if at least the signal T H E R M : S t a r t i n g k * I r e f > is issued. Counting overload events Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
OL_RC: Record. in progress [ 035 003 ] THERM: Starting k*Iref> [ 041 108 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] OL_RC: Reset record. EXT [ 005 241 ] OL_RC: Reset record. USER [ 100 003 ] 1: execute + R OL_RC: No. overload [ 004 101 ]
50Z01C3B_EN
3-77
Counting overload events
3-120
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an overload event when the event begins can be read out from the overload memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload) can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or one of the communication interfaces. Overload logging Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then OL_ R C : O ve r l . m e m . o v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal. In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the overload memory. The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interfaces.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-121
3 Operation
(continued)
OL_RC: Record. in progress [ 035 003 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n 1 1 1 1 =1
C OL_RC: Overl. mem. overflow [ 035 007 ]
+ R
CT200
OL_RC: Overload recording n [ * ]
Measured value 1 Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value n MAIN: Time tag
306 021
n 1 2 3 4 5 & R OL_RC: Reset record. USER [ 100 003 ] 0 1 1 6 7 8
OL_RC: Overload recording n 033 020 033 021 033 022 033 023 033 024 033 025 033 026 033 027
FT_RC: Record. in progress [ 035 000 ]
MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] OL_RC: Reset record. EXT [ 005 241 ]
0: don't execute 1: execute
12Z6117A_EN
3-78
Overload memory
3-122
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.19 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) When there is a primary system fault, the P437 collects the following measured fault data:

Running time Fault duration Fault current Fault voltage (short-circuit voltage) Short-Circuit Impedance Fault reactance (short-circuit reactance) in percent of line reactance and in Fault angle Fault distance Ground fault current Ground fault angle Ground fault current of parallel line Fault location in km or percentage of the protected line Load data at end of fault
Running time and fault duration The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting signal, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the F T _ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
MAIN: General starting [ 036 000 ] =1
+ R
FT_DA: Running time [ 004 021 ]
FT_RC: Record. in progress [ 035 000 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
+ R =1 =1
FT_DA: Fault duration [ 008 010 ]
47Z13DMA_EN
3-79
Running time and fault duration
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-123
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data acquisition time The setting at F T _ D A : S t a r t d a t a a c q u . determines the point during a fault at which acquisition of fault data takes place. The following settings are possible:
End of fault Acquisition at the end of the fault. Trigger/Trip/End Acquisition at the following points:
When an appropriately configured binary signal input is triggered during a general starting state. When a general trip signal is issued. At the end of the fault.
Output of fault location occurs - depending on the setting under one of the following conditions:

Option 1: At the same time as the other short circuit data. Option 2: Only if a zone 1 trip is issued. Option 3: Only if the short circuit occurs in zone 1 or in extended zone 1.
3-80
Enabling of measured fault data acquisition and fault location output
3-124
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Selection of the measuring loop for determining fault data If the distance protection function detects a fault, one of the measuring loops that is used by distance protection for measurement purposes is selected, and the data from this loop are displayed as the fault data. Selection of the measuring loop is based on the following criteria: When there is a general starting condition for distance protection, calculation of impedances is enabled as a function of ground starting (zero-sequence starting): either phase-to-ground impedances (in the case of grounded starting) or phase-to-phase impedances (in the case of ungrounded starting). If the distance protection function decides in favor of a trip in none or in all phases, then the impedance loop having the lowest impedance is selected. In the case of multi-pole ungrounded starting and a trip decision in a phase-to-phase loop, the loop in which the trip decision is made is selected. If there is multi-pole grounded starting and a trip decision is made in only one phase, the corresponding phase-to-ground loop is selected.. If there is a trip decision in two phases, then the ratio of the impedances of these two phase-to-ground loops is determined according to the following formula:
Z loop1 Z loop2 Z min
Z loop1 : Impedance of phase-to-ground loop 1 Z loop2 : Impedance of phase-to-ground loop 2

Z min :
Lowest impedance of the two phase-to-ground loops
If the ratio is smaller than 0.1, then the phase-to-phase loop is selected, and if the ratio is 0.1, then the phase-to-ground loop having the lowest impedance is selected. The phase-to-ground impedances are determined depending on the setting based on the residual current of the parallel line.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-125
3 Operation
(continued)
3-81
Conditioning of the phase currents for determination of phase-to-ground impedances
3-126
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
1 DIST: Trip signal A DIST: Trip signal B DIST: Trip signal C

303 664 303 665 303 666
2 > -1 > -1
& & & & & & & =1 & & &
Z loop 1 Z loop 2 Z min
c 1 c 2 c 3
Z loop 1 Z loop 2 Z min
< 0.1
0.1
DIST: Multipole starting

303 534
& =2 =1 &
& & & & & & >1 & & c 1,2,3 c 4,5,6
> -1 >1 > -1
c c c c c c c c
2 1,2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIST: General starting [ 036 240 ] DIST: Starting N1

303 535
PP,min
A-G B-G A B C-G C
+ + + + + + -
PG,min A-B B-C C-A A-G B-G B-G 1 2 3 4 5 6 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FT_DA: Meas FT_DA: Meas FT_DA: Select. meas.loop A-B FT_DA: Select. meas.loop B-C FT_DA: Select. meas.loop C-A FT_DA: Select. meas.loop A-G FT_DA: Select. meas.loop B-G FT_DA: Select. meas.loop C-G FT_DA: Select. meas.loop PG
305 058 305 059 305 060 305 055 305 056 305 057 305 064 305 054 305 053
FT_DA: A,corr.
305 061
2 3 4 5 6
1 ... 8 1 ... 8 1,3 1,4 1,5 2,6 2,7 2,8 > -1
FT_DA: B,corr. FT_DA: C,corr.

305 063 305 062
47Z11AMA_EN
3-82 Selection of the measuring loop for determining fault data
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-127
3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of short circuit data The fault must last for at least 60 ms in order for fault data (short-circuit data) to be determined. One phase current is selected as the fault current in accordance with the measuring loop selected by the fault data acquisition function. If a phase-to-phase loop has been selected, then the fault current will be the current of the leading phase in the cycle. The primary fault reactance is calculated from the per-unit fault reactance using the nominal data for the set primary current and voltage transformers. The ground fault data are only determined if a phase-to-ground loop has been selected for display. The geometric sums of the three phase currents of the line being protected or of the parallel line are displayed as the ground fault current. The ground fault angle is the phase displacement between ground fault current and measuring voltage as selected by the fault data acquisition function. If the fault is detected by the backup overcurrent-time protection function, then only the fault current can be determined. The maximum phase current is displayed. Fault current and voltage are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom and Vnom. If the measured or calculated values are outside of the acceptable measuring range, overflow is displayed.
3-128
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
[ 036 240 ]
MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
47Z11APB_EN
3-83
Acquisition of short circuit data
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-129
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault location acquisition In order to determine the fault location in percentage of the line length and in km, the value of the line reactance, which corresponds to 100% of the line section, as well as the corresponding line length in km, must be set.
FT_DA: Line length PSx [ * ] FT_DA: Line reactance PSx [ * ] FT_DA: Outp. fault location
305 076
FT_DA: Fault reactance,sec. [ 004 028 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
FT_DA: Fault location [ 004 022 ]
FT_DA: Fault locat. percent [ 004 027 ] R
FT_DA: Line length PSx 010 005 010 006 010 007 010 008
FT_DA: Line reactance PSx 010 012 010 013 010 014 010 015
47Z13DQB_EN
3-84
Fault location acquisition
3-130
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of load data In addition to fault data and fault location, the following load data are determined when the general starting signal of distance protection drops out:

Load impedance Load Angle Residual current
The same measuring loop used to determine fault impedance is used to determine load impedance and load angle. The load current and the voltage must exceed the thresholds 0.1 Inom and 0.1 Vnom , respectively, in order for the load data to be determined. If the thresholds are not reached or if the general starting signal of distance protection was shorter than 60 ms, the display Not measured will appear.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-131
3 Operation
(continued)
3-85
Acquisition of load data
3-132
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data reset After pressing the reset key C on the local control panel, the fault data value is displayed as "Not measured". However, the values are not erased and can continue to be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-133
3 Operation
(continued)
3.20 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) Start of fault recording A fault exists and fault recording begins if at least one of the following signals is present:

MAIN: General starting MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1 MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2 FT_RC: Trigger
In addition, the user can set a logical "OR" combination of logic signals ('m out of n' parameter) whose appearance will trigger fault recording. Fault counting Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
3-134
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
FT_RC: Fct. assig. trigger [ 003 085 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n Selected signals m out of n
FT_RC: Trigger EXT [ 036 089 ] FT_RC: Trigger USER [ 003 041 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute 0 1 min
FT_RC: Trigger [ 037 076 ]
FT_RC: Record. trig. active [ 002 002 ]
MAIN: General starting [ 036 000 ] MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1 [ 036 005 ] MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2 [ 036 023 ] FT_RC: No. of faults [ 004 020 ]
MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] FT_RC: Reset record. USER [ 003 006 ] 1: execute FT_RC: Reset record. EXT [ 005 243 ]
> + > R
> + > R
FT_RC: No. system disturb. [ 004 010 ]
ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ]
& & >S 1 1 >R 1
FT_RC: System disturb. runn [ 035 004 ]
47Z1311B_EN
3-86
Start of fault recording and fault counter
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-135
3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A faults individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication interfaces. Fault recordings Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-fault windows, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault. Recording of binary events is limited to 60s even if starting is still pending. A total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been recorded, the oldest fault recording will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then F T _ R C : F a u l t m e m . o v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal F T _ R C F a u l ty ti m e ta g is generated. In addition to the fault signals, the RMS measured fault data will also be entered in the fault memory. The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interfaces.
3-136
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
FT_RC: Record. in progress [ 035 000 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3 Signal n 1 1 1 1 1 FT_RC: Pre-fault time [ 003 078 ] FT_RC: Post-fault time [ 003 079 ] =1
C FT_RC: Fault mem. overflow [ 035 001 ]
+ R
CT200
FT_RC: Fault recording n [ *
Fault memory n
n 1 2 3
FT_RC: Fault recording n 003 000 033 001 033 002 033 003 033 004 033 005 033 006 033 007
Measured value 1 Measured value 2 Measured value 3 Measured value n MAIN: Time tag
306 021
4 5 6 7 8
MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] FT_RC: Reset record. EXT [ 005 243 ]
& 1 R
FT_RC: Reset record. USER [ 003 006 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute 12Z6161A_EN 1: execute
3-87
Fault memory
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-137
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault value recording The following analog signals are recorded:

Phase currents Phase-to-ground voltages Residual current measured by the P437 at the T 14 transformer Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P437 at the T 90 transformer Reference voltage measured by the P437 at the T 15 transformer Residual current of the parallel line, measured by the P437 at the T 24 transformer
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for oscillography (disturbance) recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of 16.4 s is available for recording. This period can be divided among a maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a fault, including the set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set maximum recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum recording time is reached. The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the maximum recording time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero. If the maximum recording time of 16.4 s is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten. The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or communication interfaces. When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults remain stored.
3-138
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
C FT_RC: Max. recording time [ 003 075 ] FT_RC: Pre-fault time [ 003 078 ] FT_RC: Post-fault time [ 003 079 ]
IA
Analog channel 1 R
IB
Analog channel 2 R
IC
Analog channel 3 R
VA-G
Analog channel 4 R
VB-G
Analog channel 5 R
VC-G
Analog channel 6 R
IN
Analog channel 7 R
VN-G
Analog channel 8 R
Vref
Analog channel 9 R
IN,par FT_RC: Reset record. USER [ 003 006 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] FT_RC: Reset record. EXT [ 005 243 ]
Analog channel 10 R
47Z1319A_EN
3-88 Fault value recording
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-139
3 Operation
(continued)
3.21 Distance Protection (Function Group DIST) Disabling or enabling distance protection Distance protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting (see figure 3-89). 3.21.1 Starting The fault detection logic in distance protection serves to detect short-circuits phaseselectively. Fault detection logic is divided into the following areas:

Overcurrent detection Ground fault detection Undervoltage detection Underimpedance detection
The fault detection decisions of the individual areas are linked by the fault detection logic. Short-circuit currents that are greater than the maximum operating load currents can be detected by the overcurrent detection logic. Undervoltage detection logic is provided for short circuits that cannot be identified by overcurrent detection. In order to control difficult conditions for fault detection, the P437 is also equipped with a highly angledependent true underimpedance detection logic function. Ground fault detection logic distinguishes between grounded and ungrounded faults. The measurement loops, in which fault impedances are to be determined, are selected depending on the phase-selective fault detection decisions. The fault detection logic is blocked if one of the following conditions is met:
The protection function is disabled via setting parameters or appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Monitoring (VT supervision) detects a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit.
If distance protection is blocked, the user may switch to backup overcurrent-time protection provided that the appropriate setting has been selected.
3-140
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: General enable USER

[ 031 073 ]
0 1 0: No 1: Yes
>1 -
DIST: Enabled
[ 036 104 ]
DIST: Starting blocked

303 500
[ 038 023
MCMON: Meas. circ. V faulty

]
MAIN: Protection active

306 001
60
D5Z5029A_EN
3-89
Fault detection blocking
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-141
3 Operation
(continued)
Overcurrent detection Overcurrent fault detection monitors the phase currents for values in excess of the threshold values I>> and I>>>. I>>> is equal to 2 I>>. The thresholds are identical for all three phases. The output signals of the I>> trigger assume a logic value of 1 if the threshold is exceeded in two consecutive half-waves. In the case of the I>>> trigger only one halfwave must exceed the threshold for the output signals to assume a logic value of 1.. Triggering of the inrush stabilization prevents operation of the I>> trigger. If I>> is exceeded in one phase, then it is sufficient for overcurrent detection if I>>> is exceeded in the other phases. In this case the fault detection time is shortened since there is no longer any need to wait for the second half-wave. Evaluation of the trigger decisions is a function of the type of neutral-point treatment set in the P437. If isolated neutral/resonant grounding or short-duration grounding is set, then I>> overcurrent detection occurs in the phase(s) in which the I>> threshold is exceeded. With the setting low-impedance grounding the following condition must also be satisfied:
2 I 3 max
3-142
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx [ ] * 1: Low-imped. grounding 2: Isol./res.w. start.PG 3: Isol./res.w/o st. PG 4: Short-durat. ground. MAIN: Rush restr. A trig. MAIN: Rush restr. B trig. MAIN: Rush restr. C trig.
041 029 ] 041 028 ] 041 027 ]
>1 -
[ [

303 500
DIST: I>> PSx

[ *
] & & &

> -1
IA IB IC I>>> = 2*I>>
DIST: I>> triggered

303 597
>1 -
DIST: I>>> triggered

303 501
&
COMP (2/3)*Imax Imax

& & & & & & & & & & & &
> -1 >1 >1 > -1 > -1 > -1 >1 > -1
>1 -
> -1
DIST: IA>> triggered

303 511
&
DIST: IB>> triggered

303 512
&
MAIN: Neutr.pt. DIST: I>> treat. PSx PSx

010 001 001 001 048 076 077 078
010 010 010 011 054 074 094 014
DIST: IC>> triggered

303 513
&
205
47Z0155A_EN 47Z1155A_EN
3-90
Overcurrent detection
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-143
3 Operation
(continued)
Ground fault detection
To detect grounded faults, the ground fault detection function monitors the average magnitude of the residual current calculated from the phase currents and the neutraldisplacement voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages for values exceeding set thresholds. For the two possible dynamic ranges of current measurement, one parameter each is available for setting the fault detection value for ground fault monitoring. 5% of the current maximum phase current is added to the set threshold IN>, which means that the operate value of the ground current function increases with an increasing phase current level as a form of stabilization.
3-144
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Dynamic range I [ 031 082 ] 2: Sensitive range 1: Highest range
IA IB IC Imax
COMP
DIST: IN> high PSx C range [ * ] DIST: IE> C (max.Ber.) [ * |Ix| PSx ]
DIST: Start. IN> triggered

303 502
0,05*|Imax|
|Ix|+IN> DIST: tIN> PSx [ * ]

303 500
DIST: tIN> elapsed
303 503
DIST: tIN> running [ 036 105 ] MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx [ * ] 4: Short-durat. ground. DIST: VNG> C PSx [ *
50ms
DIST: VNG>> exceeded

303 596
VA-G VB-G VC-G DIST: VNG>> C PSx [ * DIST: tVNG>> PSx [ *
DIST: Start.VNG> triggered

303 504
MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx [ * ] 1: Low-imped. grounding
DIST: tVNG>> elapsed

303 506
DIST: VNG>> triggered [ 036 015 ] DIST: tVNG>> elapsed [ 036 016 ]
* Parameter
set set set set
1 2 3 4
MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx 010 048 001 076 001 077 001 078
DIST: IN> high range PSx 010 055 010 075 010 095 011 015
DIST: IN> sens. range PSx 010 123 010 124 010 125 010 126
DIST: tIN> PSx 010 057 010 077 010 097 011 017
DIST: VNG> PSx 010 056 010 076 010 096 011 016
DIST: VNG>> PSx 010 062 010 082 011 002 011 022
DIST: tVNG>> PSx 010 061 010 081 011 001 011 021 47Z1156B_EN
3-91
Monitoring the residual current and the neutral-displacement voltage
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-145
3 Operation
(continued)
The ground fault detection mode is a function of the neutral-point treatment set in the P437.
MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. = Low-impedance grounding With this setting ground fault detection (D IST : Z e r o - s e q u . s t a r t i n g ) w i l l occur when the threshold of the stages IN> or/and VNG> is exceeded. (Selecting the link for the trigger decisions is made by setting MAIN : G r o u n d s t a r t i n g P S x ). In this operating mode the timer stage tIN> should be set to zero delay. Furthermore, triggering of stage VNG>> and the lapse of timer stage tVNG>> is signaled (see Figure 3-91). MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. = Isolated neutral/resonant grounding If the setting isolated neutral/resonant grounding is selected, instantaneous ground fault detection (D I S T : Z e r o - s e q u . s t a r t i n g ) operates in the event of multiple phase-to-ground fault detection when the thresholds of stages IN> and VNG> are exceeded. Even in the case of a single-phase fault, that is, in the event that only one base point is detected, ground fault detection will operate, but not until tIN> has elapsed. MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. = Short-duration grounding Operation here corresponds to operation with the setting isolated neutral/resonant grounding except that in the case of a sustained ground fault the timer stage tIN> remains activated due to the operating trigger VNG>> and therefore no longer has any effect in the event of subsequent short-duration grounding.
MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx 2: Isol./res.w. start.PG 3: Isol./res.w/o st. PG 4: Short-durat. ground. 1: Low-imped. grounding DIST: Start. IN> triggered DIST: Start. VNG> triggered
303 504 303 502
> -1
&
>1 -
&
> -1
DIST: Starting G
303 507
&
&
>1 -
DIST: Start. switch. to PG

040 052 ]
DIST: tIN> elapsed DIST: IA>> triggered DIST: IB>> triggered DIST: IC>> triggered DIST: VPP< triggered DIST: Start. ZPP< triggered
303 510 303 509 303 513 303 512 303 511 303 503
> -1
> -1
>2 -
>1 -
100
47Z1150A_EN D5Z5007B_EN
3-92
Evaluation of trigger signals
3-146
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling undervoltage and underimpedance fault detection
The undervoltage and underimpedance fault detection functions are enabled by I>(Imin) in the corresponding measuring systems. For the two possible dynamic ranges of current measurement, one parameter each is available for setting the fault detection value for I>(Imin). In order to control contention problems when current and voltage appear at the same time (branch voltage transformers), measuring system enabling is delayed by 10 ms. For sensitive detection of double ground faults with isolated neutral/resonant grounding, the P437 checks to determine whether the base point current I>(Imin) is exceeded in one phase only and whether the measured value falls below the set threshold for underimpedance fault detection in two phases. Enabling proceeds in the phases where the voltage is below the set threshold.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-147
3 Operation
(continued)

303 500
MAIN: Dymamic range I [ 031 082 ] 2: Sensitive range 1: Highest range IA IB IC DIST: V< PSx [ * ] VA-G VB-G VC-G
DIST: I> (Ibl) sens. r. PSx [ * ] DIST: I> (Ibl) high r. PSx [ * ] DIST: IA>(Ibl) trigg. 303 598 DIST: IB>(Ibl) trigg. 303 599 DIST: IC>(Ibl) trigg.
303 600
Meas.val.>set value
DIST: Enable V<, Z<, A

303 514
DIST: Enable V<, Z<, B

303 515
DIST: Enable V<, Z<, C

303 516
Meas.val.<set value VA-G VB-G VC-G
MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx [ * ] 2: Isol./res.w. start.PG 4: Short-durat. ground. DIST: Start. IN> triggered
303 502
DIST: I> (Ibl) high r. PSx 010 068 010 088 011 008 011 028
DIST: I> (Ibl) sens. r. PSx 010 119 010 120 010 121 010 122
DIST: V< PSx 010 069 010 089 011 009 011 029
47Z1151A_EN
3-93
Enabling undervoltage and underimpedance fault detection
3-148
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Undervoltage detection
Undervoltage fault detection monitors the phase-to-ground voltages or the phase-tophase voltages to determine whether they fall below the set threshold V<. Operation of undervoltage fault detection can be determined by selecting the operating mode. The following operating modes are possible:

Undervoltage fault detection is deactivated. The undervoltage fault detection function evaluates only the decisions of the phaseto-ground loops, once these functions have been enabled by ground fault detection. Ground fault detection brings about a switch from phase-to-phase to phase-to-ground loops.
3-94
Undervoltage detection
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-149
3 Operation
(continued)
Underimpedance detection
Underimpedance fault detection determines the impedances of the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase loops. The underimpedance fault detection mode can be determined by selecting the operating mode. The following operating modes are possible:

Underimpedance fault detection is deactivated. The underimpedance fault detection function evaluates only the decisions of the phase-to-ground loops, once these functions have been enabled by ground fault detection. Ground fault detection brings about a switch from phase-to-phase to phase-to-ground loops.
All underimpedance fault detection measuring loops are blocked when the trigger I>>> operates (see Overcurrent Fault Detection). When overcurrent or undervoltage fault detection operates, the corresponding measuring loops are blocked phase-selectively.
3-150
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-95
Enabling underimpedance fault detection
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-151
3 Operation
(continued)
If measurement is enabled, the loop impedance is determined and compared to ascertain that it is within the set impedance range. The loop impedance of the phase-toground loops is determined, depending on the setting, by using the ground current corrected by the set ground factor kG or by using the phase current multiplied by 2 or by (1+kG). The following values must be set in order to determine the underimpedance fault detection characteristic:

Reactance in the forward direction Load Angle Ratio (Impedance in backward/reverse direction: Zbw Impedance in forward direction: Zfw) Phase-to-ground impedance in forward direction Phase-to-phase impedance in forward direction Phase-to-ground resistance in forward direction Phase-to-phase resistance in forward direction
Xfw
Zbw/Zfw
Zfw,PG Zfw,PP Rfw,PG Rfw,PP
If, on the basis of the settings, the reach in the backward (reverse) direction is greater than 3 Znom, then the range is limited to 3 Znom (Znom = Vnom / Inom).
3-96
Fault detection characteristic of the underimpedance fault detection function
3-152
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-97
Formation of currents corrected by the ground factor
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-153
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Enable ZP-G

303 508
DIST: IA-kG
303 601
DIST: Z evaluation PSx [ * ]
DIST: IB-kG
303 602
DIST: Xfw PSx [ * DIST: PSx [ *
] ]
DIST: IC-kG
303 603
1 2
DIST: Zbw/Zfw PSx [ * ] DIST: Zfw,PG C PSx [ * ] DIST: Zfw,PP C PSx [ * ] C C DIST: Rfw,PG PSx [ * ] DIST: Rfw,PP PSx [ * ] COMP DIST: ZA< start. triggered
303 526
IA IB IC
2*IA 2*IB 2*IC 1 ... 3 1: ZPG=VPG/(IP + kG*IN) 2: ZPG=VPG/2*IP 3: ZPG=VPG/IP*(1 + kG) 3
DIST: Enable ZA-G starting

303 520
VA-G ZA-G
COMP DIST: Enable ZB-G starting

303 521
C COMP
DIST: ZB< start. triggered

303 527
VB-G ZB-G COMP
DIST: ZC< start. triggered

303 528
DIST: Start.ZPP< triggered

303 510
COMP DIST: Enable ZC-G starting

303 522
C COMP
VC-G ZC-G
DIST: Enable ZA-B starting

303 523
ZA-B
DIST: Enable ZB-C starting

303 524
ZB-C
DIST: Enable ZC-A starting

303 525
C
*
Parameterset set set set 1 2 3 4
ZC-A
DIST: Rfw,PG PSx 010 051 010 071 010 091 011 011 DIST: Zfw,PP PSx 010 105 010 106 010 107 010 108
DIST: Rfw,PP PSx 010 052 010 072 010 092 011 012
DIST: Z evaluation PSx 025 093 024 013 024 073 025 033
DIST: Xfw PSx 010 050 010 070 010 090 011 010
DIST: PSx 010 063 010 083 011 003 011 023
DIST: Zbw/Zfw PSx 010 053 010 073 010 093 011 013
DIST: Zfw,PG PSx 010 101 010 102 010 103 010 104
47Z1459A_EN
3-98
Underimpedance detection
3-154
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault detection logic
The fault detection logic links the phase-selective output signals from

Overcurrent detection (I>>) Ground fault detection Undervoltage detection (V<) Underimpedance detection (Z<)
to form common phase-selective starting decisions (SA, SB, and SC) and SN1. The phase-selective starting decisions are combined to form general starting and thus produce the MAIN : G e n e r a l s t a r t i n g signal. Ground fault detection alone does not bring about general starting. If fault detection operates via overcurrent fault detection, single-phase fault detection may operate without ground fault detection. In order for the measuring loops for distance and directional measurement to be properly selected even in this case, either SN1 or starting in another phase must be triggered as well. It is possible to specify whether, in the case of single-phase starting, SN1 will always be triggered or whether depending on the magnitude of the phase currents SN1 or starting in one phase will be transfer-triggered.
M A I N : T r a n s f e r f o r 1 p Ground With single-phase overcurrent fault detection, SN1 is started and transferred after the timer stage tIN> has elapsed (see Ground Fault Detection for setting). If there is a change from single-phase overcurrent fault detection without ground to multi-phase fault detection or single-phase-to-ground fault detection, starting will occur instantaneously.
MAIN: Transfer for 1p P or G = f(Imed,Imax) For single-pole overcurrent fault detection, the decision as to whether starting in one phase or SN1 starting will be transferred depends on the Imed / Imax ratio. The magnitude of the medium phase current must be more than 2/3 the magnitude of the maximum current for the phase to be transfer-triggered. If the current with the medium-sized magnitude is smaller, SN1 will be triggered after timer stage tIN> has elapsed. If there is a change from single-phase overcurrent fault detection without ground to multi-phase fault detection or single-phase-to-ground fault detection, starting will occur instantaneously.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-155
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: VA< triggered DIST: ZA< start. triggered DIST: IA>> triggered
303 511 303 526 303 517
>1 -
DIST: Starting A
303 529
& &
DIST: VB< triggered DIST: ZB< start. triggered DIST: IB>> triggered
303 512 303 527 303 518
>1 -
DIST: Starting B
303 530
& &
DIST: VC< triggered DIST: ZC< start. triggered DIST: IC>> triggered
303 513 303 528 303 519
>1 -
DIST: Starting C
303 531
> -1
& &
=1
DIST: General starting

036 240
303 533
DIST: 1-pole starting DIST: Multipole starting
DIST: Starting G
303 507
303 534
=1
&
DIST: tIN> PSx

[ *
>1 -
&
DIST: Starting N1
303 535
]
>1 -
MAIN: Transfer for 1p PSx 1: Ground

[ * ]
[ &
>1 -
DIST: Zero-sequ. starting

036 021 ]
>1 -
2: P or G = f(Imed,Imax)
c
IA IB IC I max
COMP
|I medium|/| Imax| 2/3
|Imedium|/|I max|>2/3 COMP COMP COMP
I medium
BUOC: IN> triggered

304 753
DIST: tIN> PSx

010 010 010 011 057 077 097 017
MAIN: Transfer for 1p PSx

010 001 001 001 040 079 080 081
11
220
47Z0160A_EN 47Z1152A_EN
3-99
Fault detection logic
3-156
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
If a general starting condition is present, then the fault detection decisions of the following systems are signaled:

Overcurrent fault detection Undervoltage fault detection Underimpedance fault detection

[ 036 240 ] &
DIST: Starting I>> A

[ 040 064 ]
DIST: IA>> triggered

303 511
&
DIST: Starting I>> B

[ 040 065 ]
DIST: IB>> triggered

303 512
&
DIST: Starting I>> C

[ 040 097 ]
DIST: IC>> triggered

303 513
&
DIST: Starting V< A

[ 040 067 ]
DIST: VA< triggered

303 517
&
DIST: Starting V< B

[ 040 075 ]
DIST: VB< triggered

303 518
&
DIST: Starting V< C

[ 040 096 ]
DIST: VC< triggered

303 519
&
DIST: Starting Z< A

[ 040 070 ]
DIST: ZA< start. triggered

303 526
&
DIST: Starting Z< B

[ 040 071 ]
DIST: ZB< start. triggered

303 527
&
DIST: ZC< start. triggered

303 528
DIST: Starting Z< C

040 072 ]
DIST: Starting Z<

[ 036 241 ] D5Z5014B_EN 47Z1160A_EN
3-100
Fault detection signals of distance protection
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-157
3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.2 Selection of Measured Variables
The P437 selects measuring loops based on the phase-selective fault detection decision. The short-circuit impedances (fault impedances) and the fault direction are determined from the voltage and current of these measuring loops. For multi-phase-to-ground faults, the user can specify whether phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase variables will be used for measurement. For single-phase faults, it is possible to disable impedance and directional measurement.
Measurement PG Loops with Phase-toGround Fault Detection PP Loops or No Loops PG Loops PP Loops PG Loops PP Loops
Measuring Loop 1 Starting A, B, C, G A, B, C A, B, G B, C, G A, C, G A, B B, C A, C A, G B, G C, G Vmeas,1 Imeas,1 VA-G VA-B VA-G VB-G VA-G VA-B VB-C VC-A VA-G VB-G VC-G Vmeas,1 Imeas,1 IA-B IA-B IA-B IB-C IC-A IA-B IB-C IC-A / / /
Measuring Loop 2 Vmeas,2 Imeas,2 VB-G VB-C VB-G VC-G VC-G Vmeas,2 Imeas,2 IB-C IB-C / / /
Measuring Loop 3 Vmeas,3 Imeas,3 VC-G VC-A Vmeas,3 Imeas,3 IC-A IC-A
IA,corr. VA-B IA-B VA-B
IB,corr. VB-C IB-C IB,corr. IC,corr. IC,corr. VB-C / / /
IC,corr. VC-A IC-A VC-A
IA,corr. VA-B IB,corr. VB-C IA,corr. VC-A IA-B IB-C IC-A IA,corr. IB,corr. IC,corr. VA-B VB-C VC-A / / /
Only one measuring loop is shown in the following block diagrams. If several measurement loops are selected, the P437 links the measuring decisions with an OR operator.
3-158
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-101
Selection of measuring loops
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-159
3 Operation
(continued)
Parallel line compensation
In the case of grounded faults, it is possible to activate parallel line compensation if the proper setting has been made. If parallel line compensation has been enabled, then the residual current of the parallel line will be included in distance and directional measurement as a function of the decision of the 'zero current scale'. The 'zero current scale' compares the magnitude of the residual currents in the line and the parallel line. Compensation is only permitted if the ratio of the residual current in the parallel line to the residual current in the line to be protected is lower than the value set at MAIN: kPar. PSx. . Otherwise there is the danger of incorrect compensation in the healthy line with a residual current in the shorted parallel line. The ratio should be set to a value smaller than 1, so as to prevent such incorrect compensation, even with faults at the lines end (with residual currents of differing magnitude caused by unbalanced lines).
3-160
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-102
Parallel line compensation
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-161
3 Operation
(continued)
CVT stabilization
Only the fundamental component of the selected measuring voltages is evaluated. If stabilization for capacitive voltage transformers (CVT stabilization) has been enabled, the device checks to determine whether the second harmonic exceeds the threshold of 0.01 Vnom. If so, a special filter designed specifically for CVTs is activated.
3-162
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-103
CVT stabilization and selection of measured variables
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-163
3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.3 Distance and Directional Measurement The P437 determines the fault impedance and the fault direction in all measuring loops on the basis of the selected measured variables. A voltage memory is available so that measurement will function correctly, even with very low fault voltages. Voltage memory Voltage VA-B is the reference voltage for the voltage memory. If the voltage exceeds the permanent value of 0.65 Vnom and there is no starting of the distance protection function, then the voltage memory will be synchronized. Synchronization requires approximately 300 ms. Then a check is carried out to determine whether the frequency satisfies the following condition: 0.95fnom < f < 1.05fnom If the condition is satisfied, the voltage memory is enabled. The frequency condition is checked cyclically. As soon as the frequency condition is no longer satisfied, the enable is canceled and the voltage memory is blocked without delay. If the magnitude of the reference voltage drops below the set threshold or if a starting of the distance protection function occurs, synchronization of the voltage memory is terminated. The voltage memory is then free-running and remains enabled for 2 s.
3-164
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: I>> triggered
303 597
DIST: General starting [ 036 240 ]
>0.65*Vnom DIST: corr corr

303 547
0.95fnom<f<1.05fnom DIST: Voltage mem. enabled

303 549
DIST: tVmemory running [ 040 034 ]
VA-G VB-G
DIST: VA-B (stored)
303 548
47Z1161A_EN
3-104
Storing the VAB reference voltage in memory
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-165
3 Operation
(continued)
Angle determination When general starting of distance protection occurs, the angles F and S are determined for each measuring loop. Angle F is the fault angle that is determined using the selected measuring voltage Vmeas and the selected measuring current Imeas. Angle S is determined on the basis of the voltage stored in memory and the selected measuring current Imeas. Since the frequency of the stored voltage can differ from the nominal frequency, a phase correction must be made. This correction is determined by the frequency deviation and the time that has elapsed since synchronization was terminated. Furthermore, an angle correction based on the measuring loop and the setting M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e is required. The resulting angle X is used for further processing.
3-105
Angle determination
3-166
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
For distance and directional measurement, the following angles are used as a function of the magnitude of the selected measuring voltage and the fault duration:

Fault angle F Angle X Set angle
Selecting the angle for direction determination If the selected measuring voltage Vmeas exceeds D IST : O p e r .va l .Vm e m o r y PSx when the fault occurs, the direction is determined with fault angle F. If the measuring voltage is below the threshold set at D IST : O p e r .va l .Vm e m o r y PSx, angle X is used for directional measurement. If the voltage memory is not enabled, angle X cannot be determined. In this case the measuring voltage Vmeas is checked. If it is within the range 0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x , fault angle X is used for directional measurement.. Direction determination using X or F is not possible if the voltage memory is not enabled or if the measuring voltage is less than 0.002 Vnom. In these cases, set angle is used for directional measurement. This means that a decision is made in favor of the forward direction. Angle for Direction Determination with: V memory Enabled Not enabled 0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx X F Vmeas < 0.002 Vnom X
A decision is made for the forward direction if the angle selected for direction determination is in the range -45 < < +135. In the case of angles outside this range, a decision is made for the backward direction.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-167
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Voltage mem. enabled

303 549
< 0.002 Vnom
DIST: Vmeas
303 546
DIST: Forw. w/o meas. y [ 1* ] DIST: Dir.using Vmeas y [ 1* ]
DIST: Oper.val. Vmemory PSx [ * ] DIST: Dir.using Vmem y [ 1* ]
DIST:
303 552
DIST: F
303 550
DIST: X
303 551
N
*
DIST: Fault forward / LS [ 036 018 ] DIST: Fault backward/ BS [ 036 019 ] DIST: Fault forwd. / LS, x [ 2* ] DIST: Fault backwd / BS, x [ 2* ]
DIST: Oper.val. Vmemory PSx 010 109 010 116 010 117 011 118
y: Sys1, Sys2, Sys3 Starting 1p, 2p, 3p 2p, 3p 3p Active measur. loop Measuring loop 1 Measuring loop 2 Measuring loop 3 DIST: Dir.using Vmeas y 038 045 038 105 038 108 DIST: Dir.using Vmem y 038 047 038 106 038 109 DIST: Forw. w/o meas. y 038 044 038 104 038 107
Selected meas. variable x: A, B, C Vmeas VA-G VB-G VC-G VA-B VB-C VC-A Imeas IA,corr. IB,corr. IC,corr. IA-B IB-C IC-A
Possible signals DIST: Fault forwd. / LS, x 038 010 038 012 038 014 038 038 038 038 038 038 010 012 012 014 010 014 DIST: Fault backwd / BS, x 038 011 038 013 038 015 038 038 038 038 038 038 011 013 013 015 011 015
47Z1162A_EN
3-106
Directional measurement
3-168
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting the angle for impedance calculation The angle that is used to calculate fault impedance is selected according to the following criteria:
If the selected measuring voltage Vmeas exceeds D IST : O p e r .va l .Vm e m o r y PSx when the fault occurs, fault angle F. is used to calculate the fault impedance. If the fault voltages are below the threshold set at D IST : O p e r .va l .Vm e m o r y PSx and the enabled voltage memory, they are compared if angles F and X are oriented in the forward direction (-45 < < +135).
If both angles are in the same direction, either forward or backward, then fault angle F is selected for distance measurement. If angle F is in the forward direction and angle X is in the backward direction, then an angle of 180 + is specified for the calculation. If angle X is in the forward direction and angle F is in the backward direction, then set angle is used for distance measurement.
If voltage memory is not enabled, the measuring voltage is checked:
If the measuring voltage Vmeas is within the range 0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < D I S T : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x , fault angle F. is used to calculate the fault impedance. If the selected measuring voltage Vmeas < 0.002 Vnom, the set angle is used for the impedance calculation.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-169
3 Operation
(continued)
< 0.002 Vnom
DIST: Vmeas
303 546
DIST: Oper.val. Vmemory PSx [ * ]
DIST: Voltage mem. enabled

303 549
DIST: F
303 550
DIST: X
303 551
DIST:
303 552
DIST: Z
303 553
DIST: Oper.val. Vmemory PSx 010 109 010 116 010 117 011 118
47Z1163A_EN
3-107
Selecting the angle for impedance calculation
3-170
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Distance measurement One of the following types of characteristics may be selected for distance measurement by way of the setting at D IST : C h a r a c te r i s ti c :

Circle characteristic Polygon (quadrilateral) characteristic
3-108
Selecting the characteristic
Extending the measuring range for single-phase fault detection The user has the option of specifying whether the measuring range of impedance zone 1 shall be extended by zone extension factor kze HSR in the case of single-phase fault detection. If this is desired, the measuring range of impedance zone 1 is extended if the following conditions are met:

There is an enable. ARC (auto-reclosing control) was ready before general starting occurred.
The enable is issued from the local control panel or through an appropriately configured binary signal input. If the enable signal is to be issued from the local control panel, it is possible to define conditions that must be met so that the enable signal is issued.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-171
3 Operation
(continued)
3-109
Extending the measuring range for single-phase fault detection
3-172
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Circle characteristic The fault impedance value ZF is determined for each measuring loop using the selected measuring quantities Vmeas and Imeas. If the setting Arc compensation: yes has been chosen, then a correction to the measured fault impedance is calculated for angles Z in the range of 45 < Z < or 135 < Z < ( + 180 ) as follows:
Z F ,corr = ZF 1 + sin
The following relation applies in the range 45 < Z < : = Z The following relation applies in the range 135 < Z < ( + 180 ) : = Z + 180
3-110
Impedance measurement with the circle characteristic
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-173
3 Operation
(continued)
In the R-X diagram, the characteristic shown in Figure 3-111 is obtained. If the characteristic were to be measured with sine variables for the setting Arc compensation: yes, the dot-dash line would be obtained.
3-111
P437 impedance and directional characteristics for the Circle setting n = 1 to 6 = 60 Dot-dash line: with arc compensation Dashed line: kze = 1.2 (adjustable in zone 1 only)
3-174
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
The calculated impedance |Zmeas| is compared with the set impedance in the six impedance zones. If the measured impedance is smaller than or equal to the set impedance, then a distance decision is made for the corresponding zone(s).
DIST: Zn (circle) PSx [ * ] DIST: PSx [ n (circle) * ] DIST:
303 552
DIST: |Zmeas|
303 567
|Zmeas| f(Zn, n)
DIST: Dist. decision zone n

303 561
Impedance zone 2 (n=2)

* Parameter
DIST: Z2 (circle) DIST: 2 (circle) PSx PSx set 1 012 043 072 095 set 2 073 092 073 095 set 3 074 092 074 095 set 4 075 092 075 095 Impedance zone 3 (n=3) DIST: Z3 (circle) DIST: 3 (circle) PSx PSx set 1 012 044 072 096 set 2 073 093 073 096 set 3 074 093 074 096 set 4 075 093 075 096 Impedance zone 4 (n=4) DIST: Z4 (circle) DIST: 4 (circle) PSx PSx set 1 012 045 072 099 set 2 073 094 073 099 set 3 074 094 074 099 set 4 075 094 075 099 Impedance zone 5 (n=5) DIST: Z5 (circle) DIST: 5 (circle) PSx PSx set 1 012 148 012 164 set 2 012 149 012 165 set 3 012 150 012 166 set 4 012 151 012 167 Impedance zone 6 (n=6) DIST: Z6 (circle) DIST: 6 (circle) PSx PSx 012 152 012 168 012 153 012 169 012 154 012 170 012 155 012 171 47Z1467B_EN
* Parameter
* Parameter
* Parameter
* Parameter
set set set set
1 2 3 4
3-112
Setting impedance zones 2 to 6 and distance measurement
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-175
3 Operation
(continued)
In addition to the settings described above, the zone extension factors kze for high-speed reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set separately for phase-toground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for impedance zone 1. The impedances modified by the zone extension factor kze are calculated as follows:
Z1,kze = k ze Z1
The increase in reach by the zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the following:

Protective signaling (P S I G : Z 1 e x t e n d e d ) Internal auto-reclosing control, if protective signaling is not ready or irrespective of the readiness of protective signaling during the reclose command. Switch on to fault protection (SO T F : Z 1 e x t e n d e d ) An external signal (D IST : Z o n e e x t e n s i o n E X T ).
The impedance characteristic is extended by the zone extension factor kze TDR if a timedelayed reclosure is carried out by internal auto-reclosing control.
3-176
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: Ready [ 037 027 ] ARC: Zone extension TDR

303 000
DIST: Zone extension TDR [ 038 022 ]
ARC: Zone extension HSR

303 001
ARC: Meas.r. extd. ext.ARC

303 025
DIST: Zone extension HSR [ 036 103 ] DIST: Zone extension [ 036 065 ]
PSIG: Z1 extended [ 035 075 ] ARC: Zone extension RC

303 002
SOTF: Z1 extended [ 035 076 ] DIST: Zone extension EXT [ 036 046 ] DIST: Zone ext. HSR 1pG [ 039 029 ] DIST: Select. meas.loop P-G
303 543
DIST: Z1 (circle) PSx [ * ] DIST: PSx [ 1 (circle) * ] DIST:
303 552
DIST: kze,PG TDR C PSx [ * ] C DIST: kze,PP TDR PSx [ * ] DIST: kze,PG HSR PSx [ * ]
DIST: Select. meas.loop P-P

303 544
DIST: kze,PP HSR C PSx [ * ]
|Zmeas| f(Z1, 1) DIST: |? meas|

303 567
DIST: Dist. decision Z1, x

303 629
|Zmeas| f(Z1, 1,kze)
DIST: Dist.decis. Z1ze, x

303 630
MAIN: General starting [ 036 000 ] ASC: Manual close request

305 000
DIST: Dist. decis.Z1 stored

303 565
x: A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C, C-A DIST: Z1 (circle) DIST: 1 (circle) DIST: kze,PG TDR PSx PSx PSx 012 042 072 090 012 046 073 091 073 090 012 096 074 091 074 090 013 046 075 091 075 090 013 096 DIST: kze,PP TDR PSx 012 047 012 097 013 047 013 097 DIST: kze,PG HSR DIST: kze,PP HSR PSx PSx 012 034 012 035 012 084 012 085 013 034 013 035 013 084 013 085
* Parameter
set set set set
1 2 3 4
47Z1468A_EN
3-113
Setting impedance zone 1 and distance measurement
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-177
3 Operation
(continued)
Polygon (quadrilateral) characteristic The fault impedance value ZF is determined for each measuring loop using the selected measuring quantities Vmeas and Imeas. By multiplying this value by the cosine or sine of the angle selected for distance measurement Z, we then calculate the fault resistance RF or fault reactance XF.
3-114
Impedance measurement with the polygon characteristic
The calculated quantities RF and XF are compared with the reference quantities Rref and Xref of the six impedance zones. The reference quantities are determined using the settings for determining the impedance zone(s). If both quantities lie within the set impedance zone(s), then a distance decision is made for the corresponding zone(s).. The impedance zones are determined by the following settings:

Reactance X Resistance R, separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops Angle Angle
Using these settings in the R-X diagram we obtain the characteristic shown in Figure 3-115.
3-178
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-115
P437 impedance and directional characteristics for the Polygon setting Example for: Xn = 6.5 Rn = 2.0 n = 70 n = -20 n = 1 to 6 Dashed line: kze = 1.2 (adjustable in zone 1 only)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-179
3 Operation
(continued)
The resistances for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops can be set separately for each zone. The different impedances are therefore compared with different impedance characteristics.
DIST: Xn,PG (polygon) [ * DIST: n (polygon) [ * DIST: n (polygon) [ * DIST: Select.meas. loop P-G
303 543
PSx ] PSx ] PSx ] DIST:
303 552
DIST: Rn,PG (polygon) PSx [ * ] DIST: Rn,PP (polygon) PSx [ * ]
DIST: Select.meas. loop P-P

303 544
DIST:
Rnref=f(Rn, n, n, Z) Rn,ref RF
303 553
Xnref=f(Xn, n, n, Z) Xn,ref DIST: RF

303 554
XF
DIST: Dist. decision zone n

303 561
DIST: XF
303 555

* Parameter
set set set set
1 2 3 4
DIST: X2,PG (polygon) PSx 012 002 012 052 013 002 013 052 DIST: X3,PG (polygon) PSx 012 003 012 053 013 003 013 053 DIST: X4,PG (polygon) PSx 012 004 012 054 013 004 013 054 DIST: X5,PG (polygon) PSx 012 100 012 101 012 102 012 103 DIST: X6,PG (polygon) PSx 012 104 012 105 012 106 012 107
DIST: R2,PG (polygon) PSx 012 007 012 057 013 007 013 057 DIST: R3,PG (polygon) PSx 012 009 012 059 013 009 013 059 DIST: R4,PG (polygon) PSx 012 011 012 061 013 011 013 061 DIST: R5,PG (polygon) PSx 012 108 012 109 012 110 012 111 DIST: R6,PG (polygon) PSx 012 116 012 117 012 118 012 119
DIST: R2,PP (polygon) PSx 012 008 012 058 013 008 013 058 DIST: R3,PP (polygon) PSx 012 010 012 060 013 010 013 060 DIST: R4,PP (polygon) PSx 012 012 012 062 013 012 013 062 DIST: R5,PP (polygon) PSx 012 112 012 113 012 114 012 115 DIST: R6,PP (polygon) PSx 012 120 012 121 012 122 012 123
DIST: 2 (polygon) 012 014 012 064 013 014 013 064 DIST: 3 (polygon) 012 015 012 065 013 015 013 065 DIST: 4 (polygon) 012 016 012 066 013 016 013 066 DIST: 5 (polygon) 012 124 012 125 012 126 012 127 DIST: 6 (polygon) 012 128 012 129 012 130 012 131
DIST: 2 PSx (polygon) 072 087 073 087 074 087 075 087 DIST: 3 PSx (polygon) 072 088 073 088 074 088 075 088 DIST: 4 PSx (polygon) 072 089 073 089 074 089 075 089 DIST: 5 PSx (polygon) 012 156 012 157 012 158 012 159 DIST: 6 PSx (polygon) 012 160 012 161 012 162 012 163
PSx

* Parameter
PSx
set set set set
1 2 3 4

* Parameter
PSx
set set set set
1 2 3 4

* Parameter
PSx
set set set set
1 2 3 4

* Parameter
PSx
set set set set
1 2 3 4
47Z1469A_EN
3-116
Setting impedance zones 2 to 6 and distance measurement
3-180
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
In addition to the settings described above, the zone extension factors kze for high-speed reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set separately for phase-toground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for impedance zone 1. As a result of these settings, impedance zone 1 is extended accordingly in the R and X directions. The R and X values modified by the zone extension factor kze are calculated according to the following formulas:
R1,kze = k ze R1
X 1,kze = k ze X 1
The increase in reach by the zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the following:

Protective signaling (P S I G : Z 1 e x t e n d e d ) Internal auto-reclosing control, if protective signaling is not ready or irrespective of the readiness of protective signaling during the reclose command. Switch on to fault protection (SO T F : Z 1 e x t e n d e d ) An external signal (D IST : Z o n e e x t e n s i o n E X T ).
The impedance characteristic is extended by the zone extension factor kze TDR if a timedelay reclosure is carried out by internal auto-reclosing control. Reactive reach settings Xn,PP and Xn,PG The reactive component of the distance zones may be set separately for the phase-tophase (PP) and phase-to-ground (PG) measuring loops. DIST: Xn,PG (polygon) PSx DIST: Xn,PP (polygon) PSx (n= 1 ... 6) (n= 1 ... 6)
This feature may be helpful with double-circuit lines without using mutual compensation. In order to cope with effects of mutual coupling, the zone 1 reach for faults with grounding can now be set to the smallest possible reactance value (depending on possible switching states of the parallel circuit), while the phase-to-phase loop measurement is set to a "normal" underreaching reach. A further application is to selectively block the phase-to-ground measurement in protection schemes where backup protection for ground fault short circuits is provided with time-graded directional neutral overcurrent protection elements. Note: Zone 1 extension already provides various factors for phase-to-phase and phase-toground measuring loops. Further precaution measures are therefore not required here.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-181
3 Operation
(continued)
Increased reach settings The maximum setting values for R and X zone reaches, including the underimpedance starting zone, are 400 at Inom = 1 A (and 80 at Inom = 5 A). Therefore exceptionally high secondary impedances in backup protection applications may now be taken into account. Note: For such especially high reach settings the accuracy of an impedance measurement will naturally be limited because of the then very low short circuit currents available, so that the user will have to abide with tolerance deviations in the order of 10%.
3-182
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: Ready [ 037 027 ] ARC: Zone extension TDR

303 000
DIST: Zone extension TDR [ 038 022 ]
ARC: Zone extension HSR

303 001
ARC: Meas.r. extd. ext.ARC

303 025
PSIG: Z1 extended [ 035 075 ] ARC: Zone extension RC

303 002
DIST: Zone extension HSR [ 036 103 ] DIST: X1,PG (polygon) PSx [ * ] DIST: X1,PP (polygon) PSx [ * ] DIST: 1 (polygon) [ * DIST: 1 (polygon) [ * PSx ] PSx ] DIST:
303 552
DIST: Zone extension [ 036 065 ]
SOTF: Z1 extended [ 035 076 ] DIST: Zone extension EXT [ 036 046 ] DIST: Zone ext. HSR 1pG [ 039 029 ]
DIST: Select. meas.loop P-G

303 543
DIST: kze,PG TDR PSx [ * ] DIST: kze,PP TDR PSx [ * ] DIST: kze,PG HSR PSx [ * ] DIST: kze,PP HSR PSx [ * ] DIST: R1,PG (polygon) PSx [ * ] DIST: R1,PP (polygon) PSx [ * ]
DIST: Select. meas.loop P-P

303 544
DIST:
R1,ref1 = f(R1, 1, 1, Z)
303 553
R1,ref1 > RF DIST: Dist. decision Z1, x X1,ref1 > XF

303 629
X1,ref1 = f(X1, 1, 1, Z)
R1,ref2 = f(R1, 1, 1, Z,kze) X1,ref2 = f(X1, 1, 1, Z,kze) DIST: RF

303 554
R1,ref2 > RF DIST: Dist. decis. Z1ze, x X1,ref2 > XF

303 630
DIST: Dist. decis.Z1 stored

303 565
DIST: XF
303 555
MAIN: General starting [ 036 000 ] ASC: Gen. close request

306 012
x: A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C, C-A
* Parameter
set set set set
1 2 3 4
DIST: X1,PG (polygon) PSx 012 001 012 051 013 001 013 051 DIST: R1,PP (polygon) PSx 012 006 012 056 013 006 013 056
DIST: X1,PP (polygon) PSx 002 076 002 077 002 078 002 079
DIST: 1 (polygon) 012 013 012 063 013 013 013 063
DIST: kze,PG HSR PSx PSx 012 034 012 084 013 034 013 084 DIST: 1 (polygon) 072 086 073 086 074 086 075 086 PSx
DIST: kze,PP HSR DIST: R1,PG PSx (polygon) PSx 012 035 012 005 012 085 012 055 013 035 013 005 013 085 013 055
* Parameter
set set set set
1 2 3 4
DIST: kze,PG TDR DIST: kze,PP TDR PSx PSx 012 046 012 047 012 096 012 097 013 046 013 047 013 096 013 097
47Z1457A_EN
3-117
Setting impedance zone 1 and distance measurement
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-183
3 Operation
(continued)
Distance decision for 2pG-faults To provide correct operation for cross-country faults or inter-system faults on double circuit lines (2pGG faults), it is mandatory to evaluate only the both phase-ground loop impedances. This is possible by setting, yet during tests this setting resulted in staggered tripping for very close 2pG faults, because one PG loop impedance could appear in backward direction. The reason for this is that the impedance is calculated by using the ground factor kG of the line, yet as no line impedance is involved in the measuring loop any more and as the source ground factor was significantly smaller than the line factor, thus one PG loop impedance is misleading. Therefore the following solution is implemented: If starting identifies a 2pG fault condition, and PG loops evaluation is selected, than the phase-phase voltage is used to determine whether it is a close fault, which is the case ir VPP < 10% Vnom. In this case, the PG-loop impedances (for the distance and directional measurement) are calculated with kG = 0; otherwise normal equation with set kG is used. Additionally to the 2 PG impedances the PP impedance is calculated, too, to secure simultaneous 3-pole tripping, because it could happen that the 2 PG impedances settle in zone 1 (or Z1e) with different speed just depending on the fault transients. Always all 3 impedances (e.g. BN, CN and BC for a BCN fault) are calculated, and the zone decisions are then compared: 1) If both PG impedances are in zone 1, P437 immediately trips 3-pole. 2) If one PG and the PP impedance are in zone 1 and the 2nd PG loop is in forward direction, then P437 trips 3-pole, too. Taking care for the directional decision acertains, that just in case of cross-country and intersystem faults (2pGG faults) both PG faults are on the protected line. The zone 1 decision of the PP loop then is sufficient to secure that both faults are in zone 1, too. In applications with parallel lines, during intersystem faults one PG fault could be on the parallel line, but then either its direction is backwards or the PP loop impedance is outside zone 1. 3) If after the first calculation loop just one zone 1 decision is determined, than the DIST processing task duration is prolonged and all 3 impedances are calculated again. This is done to make shure that normal 2pG faults are immediately tripped 3-pole and the risk of staggered tripping is minimized. The disadvantage is that for parallel line applications in case of crosscountry/intersystem faults the correct 1pole trip could be delayed by up to ~7 ms. So in order to get a proper balance of speed and correct 1p/3p trip decision, this measuring repitition is only done once.
3-184
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
1pG starting during 2pG faults In some cases a fast 1pG starting was observed during a 2pG fault. This incomplete fault type determination also forced an initial 1-pole trip. During the 2nd processing cycle the correct type of fault was identified and 3-pole trip was issued, thus a unfortunate staggered tripping took place. To solve this problem, the starting conditions are now checked again during the first distance measuring cycle. Settable directional characteristic In some cases with external phase-phase faults with a high intermediate infeed at the remote busbar, the apparent directional angle (calculated from memorised voltage and fault current) appeared at about 40...-70, i.e close to the directional line, sometimes even in the forward section. This resulted from a severe phase shift of VAB voltage upon fault inception. The solution implemented for this condition is a settable directional characteristic angle as figure below.
3-118
New settable distance directional characteristic
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-185
3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.4 Impedance-time characteristics A maximum of six impedance zones and eight timer stages are available for impedance time grading. All impedance zones can be operated in a forward direction, backward (reverse) direction, or non-directionally. Distance-independent timer stage t7 can also operate forward-directionally, backward-directionally, or non-directionally. Timer stage t8 operates independently of distance and direction. All zone timer stages are triggered by the general starting of distance protection if an appropriate setting has been selected at D I S T : Z o n e t i m e r s t a r t (otherwise see below "Separate zone timer start"). Timer stage logic for extended zone 1 The measuring range of zone 1 can be extended by the set zone extension factors. If neither protective signaling nor auto-reclosing control (ARC) is active or if zone extension proceeds while the ARC close command is present, then tripping in the extended zone takes place once the set time (D IST : t1 ,z e ) has elapsed. If protective signaling is ready, there is a trip in the extended zone after the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed. If protective signaling is not ready but ARC is active, then the following occurs in the 1-/3-pole ,3-pole and 3-pole (only for 1p) ARC modes: in extended zone 1 a trip is issued once the ARC tripping time has elapsed, whereas with standard reach (nonextended zone) it is issued after timer stage t1 of distance protection has elapsed or after the HSR tripping time of ARC has elapsed. (The shortest time setting is the controlling setting.) In the 1-pole ARC mode, a three-pole trip occurs in zone 1 after t1 has elapsed and in extended zone 1 after timer stage t1,ze of distance protection has elapsed. A singlepole trip is issued in extended zone 1 once the ARC tripping time has elapsed, whereas with standard reach (non-extended zone) it is issued after timer stage t1 of distance protection has elapsed or after the HSR tripping time of ARC has elapsed. (The shortest time setting prevails.) Separate zone timer start If at D I S T : Z o n e t i m e r s t a r t the mode with zone starting has been selected, then only the timer stage of the specific distance protection zone Zn is triggered for which the measured loop impedance is inside the zone. The trigger is issued by the respective signal D IST : Z o n e n s t a r t i n g These signals are only supported if the mode with zone starting has been selected, otherwise as is mandatory in IEC 61850 modeling all zone startings are still visible, but will have no influence on the functional sequence. Compensation of starting time The P437 automatically subtracts starting time from grading time.
3-186
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: Zone extension RC

303 002
SOTF: Z1 extended [ 035 076 ] DIST: Zone extension EXT [ 036 046 ] DIST: General starting [ 036 240 ] DIST: Zone timer start [ 001 236 ] 0 1 0: With DIST gen. start. 1: With zone starting
DIST: t1 PSx [ *
DIST: t1,ze PSx [ * ] DIST: t1 elapsed [ 036 026 ] DIST: t1,ze elapsed [ 035 079 ]
ze
DIST: Zone 1 starting [ 001 094 ] DIST: Zone 1,ze starting [ 002 067 ] ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx [ * ] 1: 1-pole 2: 1-/3-pole 3: 3-pole 4: 3-pole (only for 1p) DIST: Zone extension HSR [ 036 103 ] DIST: Zone extension TDR [ 038 022 ] ARC: Trip time elapsed
303 003
DIST: Timer st. 1 elapsed

303 614
MAIN: Trip signal 1, 1p [ 037 252 ]
PSIG: Trip time elapsed

305 150
ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx 015 051 024 025 024 085 023 045
DIST: t1 PSx 012 028 012 078 013 028 013 078
DIST: t1,ze PSx 026 025 027 025 028 025 029 025
47Z1153A_EN
3-119
Timer stage logic for impedance zone 1
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-187
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: General starting [036 240 ]
DIST: Zone timer start [ 001 236 ] 0 1 0: With DIST gen. start. 1: With zone starting DIST: t2 PSx [ *
] DIST: t2 elapsed [ 036 027 ]
DIST: Zone 2 starting [ 001 095 ]
DIST: t3 PSx [ *
DIST: t4 PSx [ *
DIST: t5 PSx [ *
DIST: t6 PSx [ *
DIST: t7 PSx [ *
DIST: t8 PSx [ *
DIST: t2 PSx 012 029 012 079 013 029 013 079
DIST: t3 PSx 012 030 012 080 013 030 013 081
DIST: t4 PSx 012 031 012 081 013 031 013 081
DIST: t5 PSx 012 032 012 082 013 032 013 082
DIST: t6 PSx 012 033 012 083 013 033 013 083
DIST: t7 PSx 012 140 012 141 012 142 012 143
DIST: t8 PSx 012 144 012 145 012 146 012 147
47Z1154A_EN
3-120
Time settings for timer stages 2 to 8
3-188
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-121
Directional settings
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-189
3 Operation
(continued)
A trip signal is issued for each measuring loop in zones 1 to 6 if the following criteria are satisfied simultaneously:

A distance decision exists for the zone. The timer stage of this impedance zone has elapsed. The measured direction agrees with the directional setting of this impedance zone.
If several timer stages and directions are set to the same values, a distance trip occurs in the zone having the highest number. A trip signal is issued in zone 7 if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:

Timer stage t7 has elapsed. The measured direction agrees with the directional setting for N7.
After timer stage t8 has elapsed, a trip signal for zone 8 is issued. Trip signals from all zones may be blocked individually by the power swing blocking function (P S B : B l o c k i n g i n i t i a t e d , see section "Power Swing Blocking").
3-122
Linking of loop-selective distance decisions for impedance zone 1
3-190
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
PSB: Block. sel. zone 304 862 DIST: Block.Z1 (1pHSR) PSx [ * ] DIST: Blocking Z1 EXT [ 036 034 ] DIST: Blocking Z1,ze EXT [ 036 036 ] DIST: Dist. decision Z1, A
303 649
DIST: Block.Z1 (1pHSR) PSx 002 068 002 069 002 070 002 071
DIST: Timer st. 1 elapsed 303 614 DIST: N1,fw, A

303 631
DIST: N1,bw, A
303 634
DIST: Dist. decision Z1, B

303 650
S11 11 R50,70,90,110,130,150,170 S21 21 R60,80,100,120,140,160,180 S12 12 R50,70,90,110,130,150,170 S22 22 R60,80,100,120,140,160,180 S13 13 R50,70,90,110,130,150,170 S23 23 R60,80,100,120,140,160,180 S31 31 R50,70,90,110,130,150,170 S41 41 R60,80,100,120,140,160,180 S32 32 R50,70,90,110,130,150,170 S42 42 R60,80,100,120,140,160,180 S33 33 R50,70,90,110,130,150,170 S43 43 R60,80,100,120,140,160,180
DIST: Trip zone 1, A

303 655
DIST: Trip zone 1, B

303 656
DIST: N1,fw, B DIST: N1,bw, B
303 632
303 635 303 651
DIST: Dist. decision Z1, C DIST: N1,fw, C
DIST: Trip zone 1, C

303 657
303 633
DIST: Trip zone 1

303 584
DIST: N1,bw, C 303 636 DIST: Dist. decis. Z1ze, A

303 652
DIST: t1,ze elapsed [ 035 079 ]
DIST: Trip signal Zone 1 [ 035 072 ] DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, A
303 658
DIST: Dist. decision Z1ze,B

303 653
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, B

303 659
DIST: Dist. decision Z1ze,C

303 654
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, C

303 660
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze

303 595
DIST: Trip signal Z1,ze [ 035 074 ]
R
47Z1158A_EN
3-123
Distance protection trip signals in zone 1
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-191
3 Operation
(continued)
PSB: Block. sel. zone 304 862 DIST: Block.Z2 (1pHSR) PSx [ * ] DIST: Blocking Z2 EXT [ 036 037 ] DIST: Blocking Z3 EXT [ 036 039 ] DIST: Blocking Z4 EXT [ 036 041 ] DIST: Blocking Z5 EXT [ 036 044 ] DIST: Blocking Z6 EXT [ 036 061 ] DIST: Blocking Z7 EXT [ 036 067 ] DIST: Blocking Z8 EXT [ 036 068 ] DIST: Dist.decision zone 2
303 581
DIST: Block.Z2 (1pHSR) PSx 002 072 002 073 002 074 002 075
DIST: t2 elapsed [ 036 027 ] DIST: N2,fw

303 574
DIST: DIST: DIST: [ 036 DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: [ 036 DIST:
N2,bw 303 573 Dist.decision zone 3 303 582 t3 elapsed 028 ] N3,fw
303 576
S50 50 R1x,3x,70,90,110,130,150,170 S60 60 R2x,4x,80,100,120,140,160,180 S70 70 R1x,3x,50,90,110,130,150,170 S80 80 R2x,4x,60,100,120,140,160,180 S90 90 R1x,3x,50,70,110,130,150,170 S100 100 R2x,4x,60,80,120,140,160,180 S110 110 R1x,3x,50,70,90,130,150,170 S120 120 R2x,4x,60,80,100,140,160,180 S130 130 R1x,3x,50,70,90,110,150,170 S140 140 R2x,4x,60,80,100,120,160,180 S150 150 R1x,3x,50,70,90,110,130,170 S160 160 R2x,4x,60,80,100,120,140,180 S170 170 R1x,3x,50,70,90,110,130,150 S180 180 R2x,4x,60,80,100,120,140,160 R
DIST: Trip zone 2

303 585
DIST: Trip signal zone 2 [ 041 084 ] DIST: Trip zone 3

303 586
DIST: Trip signal zone 3 [ 040 056 ]
N3,bw 303 575 Dist.decision zone 4 303 583 t4 elapsed 029 ] N4,fw
303 578 303 577
DIST: Trip zone 4

303 587

303 588
DIST: N4,bw
DIST: Dist.decision zone 5 303 619 DIST: t5 elapsed [ 036 030 ] DIST: N5,bw DIST: DIST: [ 036 DIST:

303 621
303 579
Dist.decision zone 6 303 620 t6 elapsed 031 ] N6,fw

303 616
DIST: Trip signal zone 6 [ 040 059 ]
DIST: N6,bw 303 615 DIST: t7 elapsed [ 037 127 ] DIST: N7,fw DIST: N7,bw
303 618
DIST: Trip zone 7

303 622

303 626
303 617
DIST: t8 elapsed [ 037 128 ] DIST: [ 036 DIST: [ 036 Fault forward / LS 018 ] Fault backward/ BS 019 ]
DIST: Trip signal zone 8 [ 037 130 ] DIST: Trip sig. zone 2-8 [ 035 073 ]
DIST: General starting [ 036 240 ] DIST: Trip signal Z1, A 303 623 DIST: Trip signal Z1, B 303 624 DIST: Trip signal Z1, C
303 625
DIST: Trip signal [036 009 ]
47Z1159A_EN
3-124
Distance protection trip signals in zones 2 to 8
3-192
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-125
Example of a feasible impedance-time characteristic
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-193
3 Operation
(continued)
For special applications (such as the application of the impedance dependent blocking scheme - see function group PSIG), the P437 generates the signal D IST : Im p e d a n c e i n z o n e 6 , if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:

A distance decision exists for zone 6. The measured direction agrees with the directional setting of zone 6.
3-126
D I S T : I m p e d a n c e i n zo n e 6 signal
3-194
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.5 Selection of Trip Mode for Zone 1 For zone 1 (including the extended zone) the user can specify whether the distance trip in zone 1 shall be single-pole or three-pole. This selection is possible independently for single-pole ground faults (1pN) and two-phase ungrounded faults (2p). In the case of a two-phase ungrounded fault, the P437 checks if there is a ground fault detection signal. If this is the case, there is a three-pole trip transfer. If there is no ground fault detection signal and if a single-pole trip for a two-phase ungrounded fault has been selected , then a trip decision is issued in the leading or trailing phase, depending on the setting. This is based on the M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e setting. A three-pole trip can be forced via an appropriately configured binary signal input. If the P437 carries out a single-pole trip when a two-phase ungrounded fault has occurred, then a fault change is ignored for 100 ms if a trip decision is reached in the phase, which has not been cleared. This takes differing fault clearing time periods at both line ends into account that lead to a transient ground starting. If, after a fault change, a trip decision is reached in the third phase, which was not involved previously, then a three-pole transfer occurs instantaneously.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-195
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: Zone extension RC

303 002
SOTF: Z1 extended [ 035 076 ] DIST: Zone extension EXT [ 036 046 ] PSIG: Not ready [ 037 028 ] PSIG: Trip enable
305 157
DIST: Trip zone 1 PG PSx [ * ] 3: 3-pole 1: 1-pole 3 1
PSIG: Trip enable, ch. 1

305 166

305 167
DIST: Trip signal Z1, A

303 623

305 168
DIST: Trip signal Z1, B

303 624
DIST: Trip zone 1, A 303 655 DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, A 303 658 DIST: Trip zone 1, B 303 656 DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, B 303 659 DIST: Trip zone 1, C 303 657 DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, C
303 660
DIST: Trip signal Z1, C

303 625
DIST: Signal block start.G

303 594
DIST: General starting [036 240 ]
DIST: Starting N1
303 535
DIST: Trip zone 1 PP PSx [ * ] 3: 3-pole 1: 1-pole leading phase 2: 1-pole trailing phase 3 1 2
MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] 1: A-B-C 2: A-C-B MAIN: Blocking 1p Trip EXT [ 041 078 ]
DIST: Trip zone 1 PG PSx 011 050 011 051 011 052 011 053
DIST: Trip zone 1 PP PSx 011 054 011 055 011 056 011 057
47Z1164A_EN
3-127
Selection of zone 1 trip mode
3-196
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.22 Power Swing Blocking (Function Group PSB) The power swing blocking (PSB) function offers these options should a power swing occur in the power system:
The user can block distance trip signals in selected distance zones. This will prevent unwanted tripping by apparent low impedances during a power swing. AND / OR A trip signal can be generated so as to end a power swing, by initiation of system splitting (or islanding).
Disabling or enabling power swing blocking The power swing blocking function can be disabled or enabled individually in each parameter subset via the setting parameter P S B : E n a b l e P S x . When the monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuit is triggered the PSB function will be blocked.
PSB: General enable USER [ 014 050 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes PSB: Enable PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes MAIN: Protection active
306 001
PSB: Enabled [ 040 095 ] PSB: Ready

304 859
MCMON: Meas. circ. V faulty [ 038 023 ]

3-128 Disabling or enabling power swing blocking
PSB: Enable PSx 015 090 015 091 015 092 015 093
47Z11CBA_EN
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-197
3 Operation
(continued)
Measurement The P437 continuously measures the positive-sequence impedance and the apparent power of the positive-sequence system. Because of this measurement in the positivesequence system, the protection is also available during a single-pole HSR. Blocking of selected zones of the distance protection or a power swing starting occurs only when the measured positive-sequence impedance lies within the settable power swing polygon.
3-129
Measurement
3-198
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-130
Trajectory of the positive-sequence impedance during a power swing 1 stable power swing 2 instable power swing The quadrilateral shape is defined by the settings for R(PSB), posX, negX and : PSB: R [014 060] PSB: posX [014 061] PSB: negX [006 185] PSB: [014 062]
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-199
3 Operation
(continued)
Power swing blocking, operating mode S Every 40 ms the P437 determines the apparent power change as referred to the actual apparent power.
Spos =
S pos,2 S pos,1 S pos,2
Spos,1: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1 Spos,2: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1 + 40 ms If the apparent impedance lies within the swing polygon and the deviation is greater than the set value P S B : O p e r a t e v a l u e then a blocking of the selected distance zones will be issued after an associated time delay (P S B : O p e r a t e d e l a y ) has elapsed. This blocking signal will be prolonged by the set value P S P : R e l e a s e d e l a y .when the measured apparent power change falls below the operate value. In order to avoid problems arising from mutual interference the PSB function is blocked when a starting signal is issued by zone Z1 or the overreach zone Z1,ze. The maximum duration of this blocking has a time limit. This time limit can be set. The PSB function is unblocked without time delay if the following current elements detect a short circuit during a power swing:
Phase current element for measurement of symmetrical 3-phase faults: IP ( PSB: IP> * Inom) Negative-sequence current element for sensitive measurement of 2-phase faults: Ineg (0.1 Inom + P S B : I n e g > * IP,max) Residual current element for sensitive measurement of ground faults: IN (0.1 Inom + P S B : I N > * IP,max)
The distance zones to be blocked are set at P S B : F c t . a s s i g n . b l o c k . These zones may be selected for blocking: Zx (x=1 to 8) and Z1,ze.
3-200
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
PSB: Ready
304 859
PSB: Z within polygon [ 036 024 ] DIST: Trip signal zone 1 [ 035 072 ] DIST: Trip signal Z1,ze [ 035 074 ] PSB: Oper. value Delta S [ 014 054 ] PSB: Operate delay [ 014 052 ] PSB: Release delay [ 014 053 ]
PSB: Spos
304 861
|S1-S2|/|S2| PSB: Operate delay runn. [ 036 058 ]
PSB: Max. blocking time [ 014 055 ]
PSB: IP> [ 014 058 ] IA IB IC PSB: Ineg> [ 014 057 ] PSB: IP> triggered [ 036 012 ]
|Imax|
0.1 Inom + Ineg>*Imax
Ineg
PSB: Ineg> triggered [ 036 011 ]
PSB: IN> [ 014 056 ]
0.1 Inom + IN>*Imax
IN PSB: Blocking init. EXT [ 036 069 ] PSB: Fct. assign. block. [ 012 017 ]
PSB: IN> triggered [ 036 010 ] PSB: Blocking initiated [ 036 032 ]
Selected zone
PSB: Block sel. zone

304 862
47Z13CDA_EN
3-131
Power swing blocking, operating mode S
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-201
3 Operation
(continued)
Power swing blocking, operating mode Z

The setting P S B : O p e r a t i n g m o d e defines that a power swing detection can be based on impedance variation (Delta Z) as an alternative to apparent power change (Delta S). In operating mode Z, the rate of change of the resistance component of positivesequence impedance Rpos, when entering the power swing polygon, is measured and interpreted. The function decides on power swing only if the rate of change is smaller than the set threshold Rx/T and subsequently blocks all selected zones. The threshold Rx has a fixed value: Rx = 5 for Inom = 1A Rx = 1 for Inom = 5A. Timer stage T can be set at P S B : O p e r . v a l u e D e l t a T. A power swing decision once made is stored until one of the following conditions is met:

The positive-sequence impedance locus exits the power swing polygon. The set maximum blocking time has elapsed. One of the PSB current stages has started.
The available time delay of the blocking effect may be used to delay distance protection blocking for a short time. This may become necessary with series-compensated lines on which, in some cases, a relatively slow swing subsidence of the measured short circuit impedance is observed. With the operating mode Z, general blocking of the power swing after the trip decision by the overreach zone is no longer necessary. Only blocking by the trip decision from zone 1 is available. Note: MiCOM P437 operates task oriented. The PSB task is processed approximately every 15 ms. The internal Rx threshold value will be adapted according to the measured actual time delay between 2 consecutive measurings. With each task processing, the impedance Zpos is determined and stored. Thus Rpos is calculated from 2 consecutive processings:
Rpos = Rpos(n) - Rpos(n-1)

Where Rpos(n) Rpos(n-1) : the first measurement inside the power swing detection polygon : the previous measurement outside the power swing detection polygon
3-202
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-132 Power swing detection zone. The quadrilateral shape is defined by the settings for R(PSB), posX, negX and : PSB: R [014 060] PSB: posX [014 061] PSB: negX [006 185] PSB: [014 062] Timer stage T can be set at PSB: Oper. value Delta T The threshold Rx is fixed. [014 090]
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-203
3 Operation
(continued)
Out-of-Step Tripping
A power swing starting may become necessary when a power swing with low damping has to be terminated by deliberately splitting system sections. For such a procedure the device has three independent methods available: 1st criterion for an early system split at high swing frequencies. The apparent power change Spos exceeds the threshold set to a high value at P S B : O p e r . V a l u e d S , t r i p for the duration set at P S B : O p e r . D e l a y d S , t r i p and the positive-sequence impedance lies within the power swing polygon. This criterion may be applied with high swing frequencies (and therefore large changes in the apparent power). The system split will then occur very early so as to avoid system loads from high currents during the first power swing cycle. Every 40 ms the P437 determines the apparent power change as referred to the actual apparent power. Spos =
S pos,2 S pos,1 S pos,2
Spos,1: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1 Spos,2: apparent power of the positive-sequence system at time t1 + 40 ms Note: This feature is only operational, if operating mode S is set. 2nd criterion for a safe system split at an instable power swing. The positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing polygon on the opposite side (see impedance trajectory 2 in figure 3-130). The sign for the positive-sequence impedances resistive component is stored when the measured positive-sequence impedance locus enters the power swing polygon. This stored sign is compared with the sign when exiting the power swing polygon (in operating mode S) or when crossing the R(OOS) boundary (in operating mode Z, description of R(OOS) below). Should the signs differ, a trip signal is issued immediately. When this criterion is applied an instable power swing will be determined, regardless of swing frequencies. Note: This feature is operational independent of the set operating mode, but - as mentioned above - the resistive decision line is depending on the operating mode. To achieve backward-compatible operation, the reach setting PSB: R(OOS) has to be set equal to the power swing detection polygon reach (PSB: R) 3rd criterion Enhanced counting-based tripping. Detailed description follows below. Note: This feature is operational independent of the set operating mode.
The trip signals of the 1st and 2nd criterion are linked together to form the P S B : T r i p signal. The counting-based trip signals per 3rd criterion are available as individual signals, described below. They are not linked into this PSB trip signal, but could be individually linked into the general trip commands.
3-204
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
PSB: Ready
304 859
PSB: Instable power swing

304 860
PSB: Z within polygon [ 036 024 ] PSB: Oper.value dS, trip [ 014 059 ] PSB: Oper.delay dS, trip [ 014 063 ] & PSB: Spos
304 861
|S1-S2|/|S2
PSB: Trip signal [ 036 025 ]
&
47Z13CEA_EN
3-133
Out-of-Step Tripping (only 1 and 2 trip criterion!)
st
nd
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-205
3 Operation
(continued)
Enhanced counting-based trip logic

The basic considerations could be discussed on a simple (simplified) 2-machine power system as shown in figure 3-134. Sources A and B represent power system equivalents, impedance A-B represents (positive sequence) line impedance. The distance protection to be discussed is located on the line at end A.
3-134 Power system equivalent circuit
Based on this equivalent circuit, the impedance plot per figure 3-135 could be drawn. The origin of the complex plane is put at the location of the distance protection device, that is at system bus A. For this simplified description any apparent impedance Z measured from the distance protection during a steady-state out-of-step condition moves along circles with its origin in either AS or BS source, depending on the ratio of the absolute values of the 2 source voltages. The rotation sense further depends on which source is leading. This description of power swings is rather simplified but sufficient to describe the functionality as implemented in the P437.
3-206
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-135 Power system equivalent impedances
The basic power swing detection zone of P437 is of quadrilateral shape. While resistive reach in forward and backward direction is equal, the reactive reaches can be set independently to provide coverage adjustable to the power system impedances (essentially to cover differences in reverse source impedance and forward line plus remote source impedances). Power swing detection is done by measuring the rate of change of the resistance (real part) of the positive sequence impedance. A power swing is detected, if a resistance change of Rx = 5 (at Inom = 1 A) takes more time than a settable timer T (fig. 3132).
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-207
3 Operation
(continued)
Inside the power swing detection zone, 2 more lines are defined by a settable resistance PSB: R (OOS) to determine an out-of-step condition. Thus this decision could be taken before leaving the power swing detection zone. The relay checks that settings are valid: The resistive lines have to be inside the power swing detection zone: R(OOS) R(PSB). Otherwise the internal R(OOS) variable is limited to the R(PSB) value as per figure 3-137a and an alarm SF M O N : Se tti n g e r r o r PSB is raised. The resistive lines must not cross the X-axis. Otherwise the lines are limited to the X-axis as per figure 3-137b.
Counters
An out-of-step condition is determined if the apparent positive-sequence impedance moves along its trajectory from the right side into the power swing detection zone and then crosses the left side OOS detection line (trajectory c in figure 3-136 below), or vice versa (trajectory d). In both cases the out-of-step counter nOOS is incremented by 1. If the apparent positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing detection zone on the same side as it entered, a stable power swing is determined (e.g. trajectory e). In this case the power swing counter nPSB is incremented by 1. By this definition, the counter values are only available during a power swing or out-ofstep condition, respectively. As it is desirable to have the counter values available for post-mortem analysis, the values are stored as event counters, too. The following counters are implemented to count unstable and stable swings as described above: nOOS nPSB PSB: No. OOS-Swing P S B : N o . s ta b . P S w i n g
Counter reset
During a power swing a dedicated timer stage is triggered upon each incrementing the counter. If this timer elapses while no further incrementing of the same counter takes place, then it is assumed that the power swing condition has stopped and this counter is reset to 0. For this timer stage the setting P S B : M a x . b l o c k i n g t i m e is used, which is recommended to be set to the anticipated maximum power swing cycle time. As of version -613, the counters are reset automatically with the detection of a new power swing. A manual reset of the counters, however, can also be done by setting the parameter P S B : R e s e t c o u n t e r s to Execute.
3-208
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-136
Out-of-step detection and counter incrementing conditions. R(OOS) is set at PSB: R(OOS) [006 184] Counters: nOOS : P S B : N o . O O S - S w i n g [006 026] nPSB : P S B : N o . s t a b . P S w i n g [006 025]
3-137 Automatic limiting for the position of the resistive lines
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-209
3 Operation
(continued)
Counter comparators
Out-of-step tripping is raised, if the number of counted out-of-step swings nOOS reaches a settable limit. In order to take into account the electrical center of the oscillation, the impedance area between the OOS detection lines inside the power swing detection zone is split into 3 areas, divided by 2 settable reactances as per figure 3-138. The reactances are set at: PSB: posX (OOS) PSB: negX (OOS) The inner main area is used to identify swings with electrical center on the line. The back-up area is the remaining part of this corridor. Typically the back-up area counter is set to a higher number of swings to provide only back-up tripping (system splitting) in case the protection system closest to the electrical center of the oscillation failed to operate. As the OOS counter is incremented when the positive-sequence impedance trajectory crosses the resistive detection lines, the decision which counter limit to compare with is practically linked to the section on this resistive detection line rather than the area the impedance moved through. The figure shows 2 cases: c OOS tripping as nOOS reaches nOOS,trp,a d OOS tripping as nOOS reaches nOOS,trp,b In the same way, an additional power swing tripping is raised if the number of counted power swings nPSB reaches a settable limit nPSB,trp (case e). This feature may be used as back-up protection, if stable swings persist for too many power swing cycles. These counter thresholds are also known as permissible number of unstable or stable power swings, respectively. nOOS,trp,a is set at P S B : P e r m . N o . O O S ( a ) . nOOS,trp,b is set at P S B : P e r m . N o . O O S ( b ) . nPSB,trp is set at P S B : P e r m . N o . s ta b . P S .
Counting based trip signals

The following individual tripping signals are issued: PSB: Trip signal OOS (a) PSB: Trip signal OOS (b) PSB: Trip signal stab. PS These binary signals remain active (value Yes) for a pulse duration of 100 ms. All out-of-step and power swing trip signals are available in the selection list of the general trip commands of the relay.
3-210
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
X
BS
nOOS,trp(b) posX (OOS)
nOOS,trp(a) nPSB,trp negX (OOS) nOOS,trp(b)

AS
47Z1355A_EN
3-138
Out-of-step tripping conditions. Areas a and b are defined by the settings: PSB: posX (OOS) [006 186] PSB: negX (OOS) [006 187] Counter comparators:
nOOS,trp,a : P S B : P e r m . N o . O O S ( a ) [006 028] nOOS,trp,b : P S B : P e r m . N o . O O S ( b ) [006 189] nPSB,trp : P S B : P e r m . N o . s t a b . P S [006 027]
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-211
3 Operation
(continued)
3.23 Measuring-circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON) The P437 monitors the phase currents and voltages for balance during healthy system operation. If either unbalance or the lack of measuring voltage is detected, action is taken to prevent the unit from malfunctioning.
3-139
Monitoring signals
Measuring-circuit monitoring can be deactivated by the appropriate setting. In the event of a fault, measuring-circuit monitoring is blocked. Monitoring the starting conditions If ground starting SG is present for more than 10 s without phase starting, the following monitoring signal is issued: MCM O N : Z e r o - s e q u . s t a r t i n g (see Figure 3-139).
3-212
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the currentmeasuring circuits The current-measuring circuit monitoring function is enabled when the current exceeds the value 0.125 Inom in at least one phase. Once monitoring is enabled, the absolute value of the negative-sequence component of the current system is determined in accordance with the definition of the symmetrical components. The result depends on the phase sequence setting. Phase sequence A-B-C: 1 2 I neg = I A + a I B + a I C 3
Phase sequence A-C-B: 1 2 I neg = I A + a I B + a I C 3
a = e j 120
0 0
a 2 = e j 240
This value is divided by the maximum phase current Imax and compared with the set threshold operate value. If the set operate value is exceeded, a monitoring signal is issued once the operate delay +300 ms have elapsed. Current unbalance monitoring can, for instance, also be used for open-circuit monitoring. For this the monitoring signal can be configured in the general trip command.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-213
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ]
47Z0122B_EN
3-140
Monitoring the current-measuring circuits
3-214
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the voltagemeasuring circuits The voltages used by distance protection as measured variables are monitored for plausibility by the voltage-measuring-circuit monitoring function. Monitoring of voltage-measuring circuits is based on the following criteria:
Phase-to-phase voltages are monitored for voltages that fall below the default threshold of 0.4 Vnom . This monitoring function is enabled when the current exceeds 0.05 Inom in one phase. The negative-sequence component of phase-to-ground voltages is monitored in accordance with the definition of symmetrical components. Monitoring is enabled when a phase-to-ground voltage exceeds the default threshold of 0.7 Vnom / 3 . In addition to this criterion, either a minimum current having the default threshold setting of I > 0.05 I nom or the closed position of the circuit breaker (M AIN : C B c l o s e d 3 p )can be used as enabling criteria. If there is an enable, the absolute value of the negative-sequence component of the voltage system is determined in accordance with the definition of symmetrical components. The result depends on the phase sequence setting. Phase sequence A-B-C:
V neg =
1 2 1 V A G + a 1 V B G + a 1 V C G 3
( (
) )
Phase sequence A-C-B:
V neg =
1 2 1 V A G + a 1 V B G + a 1 V C G 3
0 0
a = e j 120
a 2 = e j 240
This value is compared with the default threshold operate value 0.2 Vnom / 3 . If the threshold operate value is exceeded, a monitoring signal is issued after the operate delay has elapsed. If one of the monitoring functions described above operates, then distance protection is blocked, and the device switches to backup overcurrent time protection provided the appropriate setting has been selected. In addition, the monitoring signal M C M O N : M e a s . Vo l t a g e O K is issued if all phase-to-phase voltages exceed the default threshold of 0.65 Vnom and negativesequence monitoring has not operated.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-215
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] MCMON: Enabled [ 040 094 ] MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled [ 038 046 ] VA-G VB-G VC-G Vneg 0.7*Vnom/
MCMON: Operate delay [ 017 011 ]
DIST: General starting [ 036 240 ] BUOC: Starting [ 036 013 ]
SFMON: Vneg> triggered [ 098 014 ] MCMON: Vneg> triggered [ 041 079 ] SFMON: Undervoltage [ 098 009 ] MCMON: Undervoltage [ 038 038 ]
MCMON: Op. mode volt. mon. [ 014 007 ]
MCMON: Phase sequ. V faulty [ 038 049 ] SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty [ 098 001 ]
1: Vneg 2: Vneg w. curr. enab 3: Vneg w. CB cont.enab. >0.05*Inom
IA IB IC <0.4*Vnom
>0.65*Vnom MCMON: Meas. voltage o.k. [ 038 048 ]

47Z1146A_EN
3-141
Monitoring the voltage-measuring circuit
3-216
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Fuse failure monitoring of phase-to-ground voltages In addition to monitoring the voltage-measuring circuits, as described above, the P437 also provides for fuse failure monitoring. This function is used in particular when there is no voltage transformer m.c.b. auxiliary contact. If fuse failure monitoring is not desired it can be disabled by setting parameters. The fuse failure monitoring function must distinguish between a short circuit in the threephase current system and a lack of measuring voltage due to a short circuit or open circuit (broken wire) in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer. A short circuit exists in the three-phase current system being monitored, if one of the following conditions is satisfied:
Distance protection has started. (This signal has a time delayed reset of 30 ms so as to avoid startings by transients that may occur at the end of a short circuit.) Major current variations occur: The current increases by more than +5% in at least one phase. The current decreases by more than -10% in at least two phases. The current increases by more than +5% in the positive-sequence current system.
The P437 uses different criteria to detect single- or two-phase faults or three-phase faults in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer.
A single- or two-phase fault is present in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
The phase currents exceed the distance protection's I> thresholds either in none or in all of the three phases (= symmetrical load condition). A current increase I/t > 10% occurs during 3 cycles (= 3 T) in not exactly one phase. The negative-sequence current does not exceed the set threshold I n e g > , F F . The negative-sequence voltage has exceeded the set threshold Vneg>, FF.
A three-phase fault is present in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:

At least one of the phase currents exceeds the distance protection's I> threshold. The positive-sequence voltage has fallen below the set threshold Vpos<, FF. The positive-sequence current may only vary less than -10% or +5% within 3 cycles after the positive-sequence voltage has fallen below the set threshold Vpos<, FF. Note: Fuse failure monitoring for 3-phase faults in the measuring circuit is only active within a 50 ms time window after a positive sequence undervoltage condition is detected.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-217
3 Operation
(continued)
If the above conditions are satisfied, a memory is set. The settable operate delay timer should remain at 0 s to ensure that fuse failure monitoring is able to prevent false pick up of distance protection. The memory is reset, if the positive-sequence voltage exceeds the fixed threshold 0.5 Vnom and the negative-sequence voltage falls below the set threshold Vneg<, FF. If the buffer memory has been set the P437 will decide that the secondary circuit of the voltage transformer (VT) is faulty when the following conditions are met:
At least one of the phase currents exceeds the I> threshold. or The set threshold of the negative-sequence voltage has been exceeded and three cycles previously at least one phase-to-ground voltage had been above 50% Vnom/3.
In these cases distance protection is blocked, and the device switches to backup overcurrent protection provided that the appropriate setting has been selected.
Extend fuse failure blocking condition Fuse failure determination is prohibited under the following conditions, to avoid false operation due to voltage transients during de-energized line conditions:

The dead time of the internal auto-reclosing control (ARC) is running. At least one CB pole is open i.e. M AIN : C B o p e n > = 1 p 031 039 is set to 'Yes'. This blocking prevents false operation based on discharge-transients of line reactors, or if the line is energized from the remote end while the fault is still present. The device at the open CB end then may determine a fuse failure condition due to a sudden asymmetric change of voltage with no current. This operation of fuse failure monitoring is basically non-critical (as the local CB is still open), but jeopardizes faster fault clearance at the remote end, aided by protection signaling, because PSIG/Echo logic is also blocked, if MCMON determines a voltage measuring circuit failure.
A fuse failure blocking input signal is activated (M C M O N : Bl o c k i n g F F _ V EXT ). This signal is implemented to establish further flexible blocking conditions, e.g. through the LOGIC function.
3-218
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: IA>(Ibl) trigg. 303 598 DIST: IB>(Ibl) trigg. 303 599 DIST: IC>(Ibl) trigg.
303 600
>1
>1 &
>1 &
MCMON: Operate delay FF, V [ 031 058 ]

30ms t 0
S R
1 1 1
MCMON: FF, V triggered [ 035 081 ] SFMON: FF, V triggered [ 098 021 ]
DIST: General starting [ 036 240 ] ARC: Dead time running [ 037 002 ] MAIN: CB open >=1p [ 031 039 ] MCMON: Blocking FF,V EXT [ 002 182 ]
>1
IA(t) < 0.9*IA(t-3*T) IB(t) < 0.9*IB(t-3*T) IC(t) < 0.9*IC(t-3*T) IA(t) > 1.05*IA(t-3*T) IB(t) > 1.05*IB(t-3*T) IC(t) > 1.05*IC(t-3*T)
>2 & >1
>1 & &
IA IB IC MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ]
IA(t) < 1.1*IA(t-3*T) IB(t) < 1.1*IB(t-3*T) IC(t) < 1.1*IC(t-3*T)
=1
Ipos(t)>0.9*Ipos(t-3*T)
& >1
Ipos
Ipos(t)< Ipos(t-3*T) Ipos(t)>1.05*Ipos(t-3*T)

&
MCMON: Ineg>, FF [ 031 057 ]
&
Ineg
50 ms
MCMON: Vneg>,FF [ 031 056 ] VA-G VB-G VC-G

&
Vneg
MCMON: Vneg<,FF [ 031 054 ]

&
VA-G(t-3*T)>0.5 Vnom/3 VB-G(t-3*T)>0.5 Vnom/3 VC-G(t-3*T)>0.5 Vnom/3
>1
MCMON: Vpos<,FF [ 031 053 ]
Vpos
Vpos > 0,5 Vnom
47Z1105A_EN
3-142
Fuse failure monitoring (after setting M C M O N : F F , V e n a b l e d U S E R to 'Yes)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-219
3 Operation
(continued)
"Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage The P437 includes "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage function, which is required by the 'Automatic Synchronism Check' (ASC). Fuse Failure monitoring of the reference voltage is only possible if the ASC function has been configured. This is specifically applied when no auxiliary contact is available on the voltage transformer m.c.b. If fuse failure monitoring is not desired it can be disabled by setting parameters. Fuse Failure monitoring must be able to discriminate between a short circuit in the threephase network being monitored and a reference voltage missing because of a short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage. A short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage is present when the following conditions are met:

The circuit breaker is closed. The difference in voltages on the line side and the busbar must exceed 0.1 Vnom.
3-143
"Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage
3-220
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.24 Backup overcurrent-time protection (Function Group BUOC) If there is a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection is blocked, since accurate impedance measurement is not possible. Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) is automatically activated if set accordingly. Backup overcurrent-time protection (or backup DTOC) is enabled if there is a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit. It monitors the phase currents for overcurrents exceeding the set values I>. If a phase current exceeds the set value, timer stage tI> is started. After the set time period has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. If inrush stabilization is triggered, BUOC protection is blocked. If the Low impedance-grounding setting has been selected for the neutral point treatment, ground current IN is also monitored by the settable trigger IN>, in addition to the phase currents. If the ground current exceeds the set value, timer stage tIN> is started. After the set time period has elapsed, a trip signal is issued. Inrush stabilization blocks the ground starting of BUOC protection. The setting for the operating mode controls whether the BUOC protection function will trigger an auto-reclosure (ARC). If auto-reclosure is desired, timer stages tI> and tIN> will be blocked when the ARC function is ready. With phase starting, the trip signal will then be issued instantaneously; with ground starting, it will be issued after an 80 ms delay. Timer stage tIN> is also blocked by phase starting or while the ARC hold time is elapsing. If auto-reclosure is not required or if auto-reclosure with three-pole HSR is required, then the trip signal is always three-pole.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-221
3 Operation
(continued)
MCMON: Meas. circ. V faulty [ 038 023 ]
BUOC: General enable USER [ 014 011 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes BUOC: Operating mode [ 014 000 ] 1 2 3 1: Without ARC 2: With ARC, 3p HSR 3: With ARC, 1/3p HSR
SFMON: BUOC not active [ 098 002 ] BUOC: Enabled [ 040 093 ]
SFMON: BUOC active w/o ARC [ 098 003 ] SFMON: BUOC active with ARC [ 098 004 ] BUOC: Active [ 037 021 ]
MAIN: Blocking 1p trip EXT [ 041 078 ] ARC: Ready [ 004 068 ] MAIN: Rush restr. A trig. [ 041 027 ] MAIN: Rush restr. B trig. [ 041 028 ] MAIN: Rush restr. C trig. [ 041 029 ] BUOC: tI> PSx [ *
BUOC: Trip A
304 754
BUOC: Trip B
304 755

306 001
BUOC: I> PSx [ *
BUOC: Trip C
304 756
IA IB IC ARC: Dead time running [ 037 002 ] MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx [ * ] 1: Low-imped. grounding BUOC: tIN> PSx [ * BUOC: IN> PSx [ * ] ]
BUOC: IA> triggered

304 750
BUOC: IB> triggered

304 751
BUOC: IC> triggered

304 752
BUOC: Trip signal [ 036 014 ]
BUOC: Starting [ 036 013 ] BUOC: SN

304 757
BUOC: IN> triggered

304 753
BUOC: I> PSx 010 058 010 078 010 098 011 018
BUOC: tI> PSx 010 059 010 079 010 099 011 019
BUOC: IN> PSx 010 064 010 084 011 004 011 024
BUOC: tIN> PSx 010 065 010 085 011 005 011 025
47Z1110A_EN
3-144
Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC)
3-222
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.25 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF) When the circuit breaker is closed manually, it is possible to switch on to an existing fault. This is especially critical if a maintenance ground clamp were inadvertently left connected at the remote end of the line, since the distance protection function would not clear the fault until zone 2 delay t2 had elapsed. In this situation, however, the fastest possible clearance is desired. To ensure rapid clearing with manual closing, the manual close signal must be applied not only to the circuit breaker but also to the P437. The manual close signal is converted to an internal pulse, of settable duration. The pulse time can be set. The user may specify whether the following shall occur during operation of this timer stage:
The occurrence of a general start shall cause a trip (SO T F : T r i p s i g n a l ) (See section 'Starting Signals and Tripping Logic' for a definition of general starting) A zone extension of impedance zone 1 shall occur (SO T F : Z 1 e x t e n d e d ) .
In addition a neutral overcurrent timer stage may now be enabled based either on the measured residual current (T 4 transformer input with sensitive setting range) or the residual current internally calculated from the three phase currents (SO T F : t I N > e l a p s e d or S O T F : T r i p s i g n a l ). Moreover, the overcurrent protection of SOTF features an additional phase overcurrent element. This allows full, current based SOTF protection even during a voltage measuring failure. The featured settings are S O T F : I > P S x for the current threshold and S O T F : t I > P S x for the timer stage. The signal S O T F : S t a r t i n g I > is set to Yes in case of an overcurrent situation. Switch on to fault protection can be blocked by external autoreclosing control (ARC) (provided that a binary signal input has been configured accordingly). Moreover, an external trigger SO T F : T r i g g e r E X T may now be applied as an alternative to the external trigger M AIN : M a n u a l c l o s e E X T . In some applications, SOTF triggering is required when line energizing is initiated from an external A/R device. This is how the P437 provides the feature "Zone extension during reclosure". Although this functionality can be achieved by using the existing binary input M A I N : M a n u a l c l o s e E X T , the use of this signal might be confusing. An additional option S O T F : A c t i v a t i o n m o d e P S x can be set to either Trigger (which is the situation described above) or to Line Dead State. With the latter setting, SOTF becomes permanently active during dead line condition, so that no external trigger is necessary.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-223
3 Operation
(continued)
Decision 'Line dead'
The setting S O T F : W i t h V < e n a b l e P S x allows the function SOTF to be enabled only when the phase voltage is low. If this is set to 'Yes', then a settable timer stage will have to elapse before an undervoltage condition will lead to the decision 'Line dead'. This will prevent timing problems between the line energizing control function and triggering of the SOTF function. On the other hand, in few cases CT failures occurred from picking up load current. For such cases it is not desirable to inhibit SOTF, even if the line is already energized. To take care for this condition, too, the dead line inhibit logic can be disabled by setting S O T F : W i t h V < e n a b l e P S x to 'No'. Moreover, the decision 'Line dead' is set only if also all 3 phase currents are below an undercurrent threshold. This threshold is fixed to 0.05Inom. A settable timer S O T F : O p e r a t e d e l a y P S x makes the SOTF function active (in permanent modes) or triggered (in trigger modes) only after the conditions for Line dead are present for a sufficiently long time. This time delay should be set longer than the slowest delayed auto-reclose dead time, but shorter than the time in which the system operator might re-energize a circuit once it had opened/tripped. 110 seconds is the default setting.
SOTF: With V< enable [ *
PSx ] 0 1
0: No 1: Yes
SOTF: Operate delay PSx [ * ] SOTF: Release delay PSx [ * ] t VA-G VB-G VC-G MCMON: Meas. circ. V faulty [ 038 023 ] I < 0.05 Inom IA Parameter IB IC & set set set set 1 2 3 4 SOTF: With V< enable 006 005 006 006 006 007 006 008 PSx SOTF: Operate delay PSx 006 138 006 139 006 140 006 141 SOTF: Release delay PSx 002 128 002 129 002 133 002 134 SOTF: Line dead [ 006 147 ] & & t & SOTF: Line dead trig. en.
310 006
V < 0.7 Vnom
47Z1304B_EN
3-145
Decision 'Line dead' in the 'Switch on to fault protection' function
3-224
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
SOTF: Active [ 006 146 ]
SOTF: Evaluation IN PSx [ * ]
SOTF: tIN> PSx [ *
1 2 1: Measured 2: Calculated C SOTF: IN>(meas.) PSx [ * ] & IN(measured)
0 SOTF: tIN> elapsed [ 001 188 ]
SOTF: Starting IN> [ 001 187 ]
SOTF: IN>(calc.) PSx [ * ]
SOTF: tI> PSx [ *
t IN(calculated)
0 SOTF: tI> elapsed [ 001 129 ]
SOTF: I> PSx [ * IA IB IC
&
SOTF: Starting I> [ 006 128 ]
* Parameter
set set set set
1 2 3 4
SOTF: Evaluation IN PSx 001 191 001 192 001 193 001 194
SOTF: IN>(meas.) PSx 001 189 001 195 001 196 001 197
SOTF: IN>(calc.) PSx 001 001 001 001 190 198 199 202
SOTF: I> PSx 006 130 006 131 006 132 006 133
SOTF: tIN> PSx 001 001 001 001 177 178 179 180
SOTF: tI> PSx 006 134 006 135 006 136 006 137 47Z1306A_EN
3-146
'Switch on to fault protection' function, overcurrent stage in the residual current system
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-225
3 Operation
(continued)
SOTF: General enable USER [ 011 068 ]
0 1 0: No 1: Yes
&
SOTF: Enabled [ 040 069 ]
SOTF: Enable PSx [ * ]
0 1 0: No 1: Yes ] SOTF: Trip signal [ 036 064 ]
PSS: PS y active [ **
SOTF: tI> elapsed [ 006 129 ] SOTF: tIN> elapsed [ 001 188 ] MAIN: General starting [ 036 000 ]
&
&
SOTF: Par. ARC running EXT [ 039 063 ] MAIN: Protection active
306 001
SOTF: Man. close PSx C timer [ * ]
&
SOTF: Z1 extended [ 035 076 ]
SOTF: Line dead trig. en.

310 006
&
SOTF: Active [ 006 146 ] SOTF: tManualclose runn. [ 036 063 ] SOTF: ARC blocked
MAIN: Manual close EXT [ 036 047 ] SOTF: Trigger EXT [ 002 127 ] ARC: Close command
303 021
&
305 650
SOTF: Activation mode PSx [ * ]
SOTF: Operating mode PSx [ * ]
1 2 1: Trigger 2: Line Dead State SOTF: Line dead [ 006 147 ]

&
4 5 4: Trip with starting 5: Trip with overreach
** y 1 2 3 4
PSS: PS y active 036 090 036 091 036 092 036 093
SOTF: Enable PSx 001 203 001 204 001 205 001 206
SOTF: Man. close SOTF: Operating timer PSx mode PSx 011 001 001 001 060 181 182 183 011 001 001 001 061 184 185 186
SOTF: Activation mode PSx 006 006 006 006 142 143 144 145
47Z1305C_EN
3-147
Switch on to fault protection
3-226
P437/EN M/Bd8 // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.26 Protective Signaling (Function group PSIG) The reach of the first impedance zone of the distance protection function is normally set for values less than 100%. Protective signaling is used to extend protection to 100% of the line section. This is achieved by logical linking of the signals that are transmitted by the remote stations protection device. Protective signaling enable In order for protective signaling (PSIG) to function, the following requirements must be satisfied:

It must be activated. There is no external block. There is no transmission fault.
Disabling or enabling protective signaling The function is enabled independently of parameter subsets via P S I G : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset via P S I G : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, PSIG can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The local control panel or operating program and the binary signal inputs have equal status in this regard. If only the PSIG : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned to a binary signal input, then PSIG will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the PSIG : D i s a b l e EXT function has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-227
3 Operation
(continued)
3-148
Protective signaling enable
3-228
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
If protective signaling is ready, distance protection tripping takes place

in Zone 1 (with reach set): after timer stage t1 of distance protection has elapsed in extended zone 1: after the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed.
PSIG: Operating mode PSx 2: PUTT

* ]
ARC: Zone extension RC SOTF: Z1 extended

[ [
303 002
>1 -
DIST: Zone extension EXT

036 046 ]
035 076
PSIG: Tripping time PSx

[ t * ] 0
& &
PSIG: Timer stage elapsed PSIG: Trip time elapsed

305 150 305 164
PSIG: Ready
[ 037 027 ]
&

036 240 ] *

015 024 024 025 011 003 063 023
PSIG: Operating mode PSx

015 024 024 025 000 000 060 020
47Z1140A_EN 47Z0279A_EN
3-149
Protective signaling tripping time
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-229
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the transmission section A transmission fault leads to a blocking of the protective signaling function. The fault signal of the signal transmission device should be connected to the P437. It will then lead to a blocking of protective signaling.
3-150
Transmission fault
3-230
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency monitoring Failure of frequency transmission using a high-voltage transmission line can be signaled to the P437 via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. If frequency monitoring is enabled, the P437 once an operate delay of approximately 20 ms has elapsed will generate a receive signal for a duration of 150 ms. This application is based on the presumption that failure of frequency transmission was caused by a short circuit on the high-voltage transmission line.
3-151
Frequency monitoring
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-231
3 Operation
(continued)
Transient blocking In the event of a directional change, protective signaling will generate a blocking signal for the set time PSIG : tBl o c k .
DIST: Fault forwd. / LS, A [ 038 010 ] DIST: Fault backwd / BS, A [ 038 011 ]
PSIG: tBlock PSx [ * ] PSIG: Ch. 1 transient bl.

305 172
PSIG: Ch. 2 transient bl.

305 173
DIST: Fault forwd. / LS, B [ 038 012 ] DIST: Fault backwd / BS, B [ 038 013 ]
PSIG: Ch. 3 transient bl.

305 174
PSIG: Transient blocking [ 037 255 ]
DIST: Fault forwd. / LS, C [ 038 014 ] DIST: Fault backwd / BS, C [ 038 015 ] DIST: General starting [ 036 240 ]
*
Parameter- PSIG: tBlock PSx satz 1 015 024 satz 2 024 010 satz 3 024 070 satz 4 025 030
47Z1141A_EN
3-152
Transient blocking.
The decisions by all distance zones are blocked for 2 cycles when a directional change, from backward (reverse) to forward, occurs.
3-232
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Protective signaling operating modes Protective signaling can be operated in five different modes.

Direct transfer trip PUTT (permissive underreaching transfer tripping) Zone Extension Signal comparison release scheme Signal comparison blocking scheme
3-153
Setting the protective signaling operating modes
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-233
3 Operation
(continued)
Checking the operating mode setting If the P437 is operating with protective signaling and ground fault protective signaling, then the user has the option of specifying whether ground fault protective signaling will use the same channel for signal transmission as protective signaling. If this is the case, the operating modes for protective signaling and ground fault protective signaling must be set identically. Otherwise a signal will be issued. This may be configured with the function assignment parameter SF M O N : F c t. a s s i g n . W a r n i n g .
47Z0137C
3-154
Checking the operating mode setting
3-234
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Operating mode Without If only the weak infeed logic or the echo function will be used and no other functions of protective signaling, then this can be implemented by setting the operating mode for Without. Direct transfer trip underreaching When there is a distance protection trip in zone 1, a signal is sent to the remote stations protection device. Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on the setting. Upon receipt of the signal by the remote station, the remote stations circuit breaker is tripped. The settings D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P G and D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P P are taken into account.
3-155
Protective signaling transmission with operating mode 'Direct transfer trip underreaching'
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-235
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] 2: A-C-B 1: A-B-C 47Z0189C_DE
3-156
Protective signaling trip with operating mode 'Direct transfer trip underreaching''
3-236
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
PUTT (permissive underreaching transfer tripping) When there is a distance protection trip in zone 1, a signal is sent to the remote stations protection device. Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on the setting. On receipt of the signal by the remote station, the remote stations circuit breaker is subject to permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT) once the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed. The settings D I S T : T r i p z o n e 1 P G (with starting in the zero-sequence system) and D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P P (without starting in the zero-sequence system) are taken into account. (Mode set at D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P G : '1-pole' or '3-pole'. Mode set at D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P P : '1-pole with leading phase' or '1-pole with trailing phase' or '3-pole'.)
3-157
Protective signaling transmission with operating mode 'PUTT' (permissive underreaching transfer tripping)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-237
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] 2: A-C-B 1: A-B-C 47Z0191C_EN
3-158
Protective signaling trip with operating mode 'PUTT' (permissive underreaching transfer tripping)
3-238
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Zone Extension When there is a distance protection trip in zone 1, a signal is sent to the remote stations protection device. Upon receipt of the transmitted signal the measuring range of zone 1 in the remote station is increased by the zone extension factor kze HSR (see Figure 3-168). Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on the setting. The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the setting at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e t r i p P S x . 'Direction-dependent' After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in the phase(s) in which there is a receive signal and distance protection has decided in favor of 'forward direction'. The settings D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P G and D I S T : T r i p z o n e 1 P P are taken into account. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal will be ignored.
'Distance-dependent' If the fault is located within the extended zone 1, then the protection device of the remote station also decides in favor of a trip after the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed. The receive signal is ignored during transient blocking.
3-159
Reaches with zone extension (broken line: measuring range extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-239
3 Operation
(continued)
3-160
Protective signaling transmission with operating mode 'Zone extension'
3-240
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
DIST: Trip zone 1 PG [ * ] 3: 3-pole 1: 1-pole
PSx PSIG: Trip channel 1 PSIG: Oper. mode trip PSx [ * ] 1 2 PSIG: Trip channel 2 PSIG: Trip channel 3
402 575
402 576
402 577
DIST: Trip zone 1 PP PSx [ * ] 1: 1-pole leading phase 2: 1-pole trailing phase 3: 3-pole MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] 1: A-B-C 2: A-C-B PSIG: Ready [ 037 027 ] PSIG: Operating mode PSx [ * ] 3: Zone extension PSIG: Timer stage elapsed 305 164 DIST: Fault forward / LS [ 036 018 ] PSIG: Receive EXT [ 036 048 ] PSIG: Frequ. monit.trigg. 305 152 PSIG: Transient blocking 305 154 DIST: Trip zone 1,ze
303 595
1: Direct.dependent 2: Dist. dependent
PSIG: Trip signal [ 038 007 ]
PSIG: Trip enable

305 157
DIST: [ 038 PSIG: [ 038 PSIG: PSIG: DIST: DIST: [ 038 PSIG: [ 038 PSIG: PSIG: DIST: DIST: [ 038 PSIG: [ 038 PSIG: PSIG: DIST:
Fault forwd. / LS, A 010 ] Chann. 1 receive EXT 091 ] Frequ. monit. ch. 1 305 169 Ch. 1 transient bl. 305 172 Trip zone 1,ze, A
303 658

305 166
Fault forwd. / LS, B 012 ] Chann. 2 receive EXT 092 ] Frequ. monit. ch. 2 305 170 Ch. 2 transient bl. 305 173 Trip zone 1,ze, B
303 659

305 167
Fault forwd. / LS, C 014 ] Chann. 3 receive EXT 093 ] Frequ. monit. ch. 3 305 171 Ch. 3 transient bl. 305 174 Trip zone 1,ze, C
303 660

305 168
PSIG: Receive (signal) [ 037 029 ] MAIN: General starting [ 036 000 ] PSIG: No. telecom. ch. PSx [ * ] 3 1 3: 3 channels 1: 1 channel
* *
Parameter set set set set set set set set 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
PSIG: Operating mode PSx 015 000 024 000 024 060 025 020
PSIG: No. telecom. ch. PSx 015 026 024 012 024 072 025 032 DIST: Trip zone 1 PP PSx 011 054 011 055 011 056 011 057
47Z0293C_EN
Parameter
PSIG: Oper. mode PSIG: Trip zone trip PSx 1 PG PSx 015 107 011 050 015 108 011 051 015 113 011 052 015 114 011 053
3-161
Protective signaling trip and trip enable in operating mode 'Zone extension'
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-241
3 Operation
(continued)
Signal comparison release scheme Zone extension in zone 1 of distance protection is a function of the setting at PSIG: Oper. mode send PSx.
'Direction-dependent' The measuring range of zone 1 of distance protection is not extended. 'Distance-dependent' In the idle state, the measuring range of zone 1 in both protection devices is extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR (see figure 3-168). The distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is blocked in both protection devices.
3-162
Zone reaches with signal comparison release scheme (broken line: measuring range extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR)
3-242
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
The setting at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e s e n d P S x defines when the P437 sends a signal to the remote station.
'Direction-dependent' If the distance protection function detects a fault in the forward direction, the P437 sends a signal to the remote station. 'Distance-dependent' If the distance protection function detects a fault within extended zone 1, the P437 sends a signal to the remote station.
Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on the setting. The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the setting at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e t r i p P S x .
'Direction-dependent' After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in the phase(s) in which there is a receive signal and distance protection has decided in favor of 'forward direction'. Detected fault type phase phase with ground will cause a 3-pole trip. Detected fault type phase phase without ground will cause a 1-pole or 3-pole trip, depending on the setting at D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P P . Detected fault type 1p phase ground will cause a 1-pole or 3-pole trip, depending on the setting at D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P G . The receive signal is ignored during transient blocking.
'Distance-dependent' If the fault is located within the extended zone 1, then the protection device of the remote station also decides in favor of a trip after the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed and a receive signal is present. The receive signal is ignored during transient blocking. The following change was introduced with version -611: If for a 2pG fault or for an inter-system fault on double circuit lines there are forward and backward (reverse) decisions present at the same time, then the send signal is based on the selective Z1 decision only (not on Z1e). As of version -613, however, this is not the case with the setting P S I G : 3 e n d e d l i n e p r o t P S x = Yes, because this functionality could result in an under functioning of the Protective Signaling in case of 3-ended line applications (different lengths of the line parts, different feed-in power).
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-243
3 Operation
(continued)
3-163
Protective signaling transmission with operating mode 'Signal comparison release scheme
3-244
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
402 575
402 576
402 577
DIST: Trip zone 1 PP PSx [ * ] 1: 1-pole leading phase 2: 1-pole trailing phase 3: 3-pole MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] 1: A-B-C 2: A-C-B PSIG: Ready [ 037 027 ] PSIG: Operating mode PSx [ * ] 4: Release scheme PSIG: Timer stage elapsed 305 164 DIST: Fault forward / LS [ 036 018 ] PSIG: Receive EXT [ 036 048 ] PSIG: Frequ. monit.trigg. 305 152 PSIG: Transient blocking 305 154 DIST: Trip zone 1,ze
303 595
PSIG: Trip enable

305 157
303 658

305 166
303 659

305 167
303 660

305 168
PSIG: Receive
305 165
* *
47Z0295C_EN
Parameter
3-164
Protective signaling trip and trip enable in operating mode 'Signal comparison release scheme' (See note for P S I G : O p e r . m o d e t r i p P S x on page preceding figure 3-155)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-245
3 Operation
(continued)
Signal comparison blocking scheme Zone extension in zone 1 of distance protection is a function of the setting at PSIG: Oper. mode send PSx.
'Direction-dependent' The measuring range of zone 1 of distance protection is not extended. 'Distance-dependent' In the idle state, the measuring range of zone 1 in both protection devices is extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR (see figure 3-168). The distance protection trip in extended zone 1 is enabled in both protection devices.
3-165
Zone reaches with signal comparison blocking scheme (broken line: measuring range extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR)
3-246
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
The setting at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e s e n d P S x defines when the P437 sends a signal to the remote station.
'Direction-dependent' If distance protection detects a fault in the backward direction or for a directional change for the duration of transient blocking (setting at PSIG : tBl o c k PSx ), a signal is sent to the remote station. 'Distance-dependent' If the distance protection function detects a fault within zone 6 and if the measured impedance lies in zone 6 (signal D IST : Im p e d a n c e i n z o n e 6 ), then the P437 sends a signal to the remote station. A signal is also sent to the remote station during transient blocking.
Signals are transmitted through one or three channels, depending on the setting. The response of the protection device in the remote station is determined by the setting at P S I G : O p e r . m o d e t r i p P S x .
'Direction-dependent' After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in the phase(s) in which there is no receive signal and distance protection has decided in favor of 'forward direction'. The receive signal is ignored during transient blocking. 'Distance-dependent' After the protective signaling tripping time has elapsed, tripping occurs in the phase(s) in which there is no receive signal and distance protection detects a fault within extended zone 1. The receive signal is ignored during transient blocking.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-247
3 Operation
(continued)
3-166
Protective signaling transmission with operating mode 'Signal comparison blocking scheme'
3-248
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
402 575
402 576
402 577
DIST: Trip zone 1 PP PSx [ * ] 1: 1-pole leading phase 2: 1-pole trailing phase 3: 3-pole MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] 1: A-B-C 2: A-C-B PSIG: Ready [ 037 027 ] PSIG: Operating mode PSx [ * ] 5: Blocking scheme PSIG: Timer stage elapsed 305 164 DIST: Fault forward / LS [ 036 018 ] PSIG: Receive EXT [ 036 048 ] PSIG: Frequ. monit.trigg. 305 152 PSIG: Transient blocking 305 154 DIST: Trip zone 1,ze
303 595
PSIG: Trip enable

305 157
303 658

305 166
303 659

305 167
303 660

305 168
* *
47Z0297C_EN
Parameter
3-167
Protective signaling trip and trip enable in operating mode 'Signal comparison blocking scheme'
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-249
3 Operation
(continued)
Measuring zone extension of zone 1 of distance protection
3-168
Zone extension by protective signaling
3-250
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Weak infeed logic The weak infeed logic can be triggered by a binary signal input configured to PSIG : W e a k i n f. tr i g g . EXT or binary signal inputs configured to either P S I G : R e c e i v e ( A ) E X T or P S I G : R e c e i v e ( B ) E X T . The weak infeed logic checks the phase-to-ground voltages to determine whether they fall below the set threshold P S I G : V < w e a k i n f e e d P S x . If the voltage falls below the set threshold in one phase, then a timer stage is started. If P S I G : S t a r t c o n d . t V < P S x is set to V< & WI start, then the timer stage is only started if both the undervoltage condition and the weak-infeed starting are present. Once the set time has elapsed provided that the appropriate setting has been selected a protective signaling trip is issued. The D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P G P S x setting is taken into account. If the device has not issued its own protective starting the receive signal (PSIG : R e c e i ve EXT ) is reset after the set time delay (PSIG : tV< + 100 ms). This will always ensure that weak-infeed logic trips independently of the reset time of the send signal. The weak-infeed logic function is blocked by a 3-pole open circuit breaker, when this status is either signaled by the CB auxiliary contacts or when the newly implemented monitoring function detects this state from a 3p undervoltage condition. The phase selective starting signals are stored in RS flip-flops, which are only reset after the received signal has ended. This excludes an over reaction during a reset of its own starting when the received signal from the other end is still present.
3-169
Enable for the weak-infeed logic, part 1
3-170
Enable for the weak-infeed logic, part 2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-251
3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: No. telecom. ch. PSx [ * ] 1 3 1: 1 channel PSIG: Weak inf. trigg. EXT [ 043 062 ] [ 043 062 ] is assigned to a binary input
>1 & >1 & >1 & >1 & >1 & >1 & >1 &
3: 3 channels
& &
PSIG: Ch. 1 receive weak inf.

310 011
PSIG: Receive [ 006 036 ] PSIG: Frequ. monit. trigg.

305 152

310 012
PSIG: Chann. 1 receive EXT [ 038 091 ] PSIG: Frequ. monit. ch. 1
305 169
>1

310 013
305 170
>1
305 171
>1
* Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4
PSIG: No. telecom. ch. PSx 015 026 024 012 024 072 025 032 47Z1011C_EN
3-171
Phase selective receive signals of the weak-infeed logic
3-252
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx [ * ] = 3-pole (only for 1p) ARC 3p trip for 1p fault
310 019
& >1

&
S 11 0 50ms R 1
PSIG: Inhibit Weak inf. A

310 016

310 011
MAIN: CB closed A [ 031 035 ]
>1
MAIN: Starting B [ 036 002 ] PSIG: Ch.2 receive weak inf.

310 012
S 11
&
PSIG: Inhibit Weak inf. B

310 017
R 1
50ms
MAIN: CB closed B [ 031 036 ]
>1
MAIN: Starting C [ 036 003 ] PSIG: Ch. 3 receive weak inf.

310 013
S 11 0 50ms
&
PSIG: Inhibit Weak inf. C

310 018
R 1
MAIN: CB closed C [ 031 037 ]

*
ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx 015 051 024 025 024 085 025 045
47Z1203B_EN
3-172
Phase selective blocking of the weak-infeed logic.
If the ARC operating mode (AR C : H SR o p e r . M o d e P S x ) is set to '3-pole (only for 1p)' and ARC issues a 3-pole trip for this reason, then the weak infeed logic is blocked. This refinement was necessary based on the following application: Assuming a weak infeed condition and the P437 receives a signal from the remote end device because of a ground fault short-circuit, it then issues a single-pole PSIG trip as soon as weak infeed timer tV< has elapsed. According to the operating mode being set to '3-pole (only for 1p)' the ARC now converts this single-pole trip into a 3-pole trip. As soon as the CBs are open on both sides, the undervoltage condition becomes true for the remaining 2 phases. Consequently the week-infeed trip condition becomes true for the 2 healthy phases, and PSIG raised a 3-pole trip. This in turn leads to aborting the HSR. Note: In this example it is assumed that blocking of the weak infeed logic by CB auxiliary contacts is not generally fast enough to prevent the 3-pole tripping.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-253
3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: Weak inf. ready

310 014
PSIG: V< weak C infeed PSx [ * ]
VA-G VB-G VC-G
>1
PSIG: V< triggered

310 020
PSIG: tV< PSx [ * PSIG: Start cond. tV< PSx [ * ]

& >1
1 2 1: V< 2: V< & WI start
&
PSIG: Trip signal V< PSx [ * ]
0 1 2 0: Always without 1: Always with 2: If no gen. starting

>1
&
&
&
>1
PSIG: Trip V<, A [ 006 152 ]

310 011
PSIG: Inhibit weak inf. A

310 016
&
&
>1
PSIG: Trip V<, B [ 006 153 ]

310 012
PSIG: Inhibit weak inf. B

310 017
&
&
>1
PSIG: Trip V<, C [ 006 154 ]

310 013
PSIG: Inhibit weak inf. C

310 018
>1
>1
&
>1
PSIG: Trip V<

305 158
DIST: Trip zone 1 PG PSx [ * ] 1: 1-pole
&
3p-trip in case of 2-/3-pole faults or 3p-transfer trip No 1p-trip PSIG: Weak infeed start. [ 043 064 ]
>1
Parameter set 1 set 2 set 3 set 4
PSIG: V< weak infeed PSx 015 020 024 006 024 066 025 026
PSIG: Start cond. tV< PSx 006 148 006 149 006 150 006 151
PSIG: PSx
tV<
PSIG: Trip signal V< PSx 015 021 024 007 024 067 025 027
DIST: Trip zone 1 PG PSx 011 050 011 051 011 052 011 053
015 019 024 005 024 065 025 025
47Z1313A_EN
3-173
Tripping logic of the weak-infeed logic
3-254
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Echo function If operation with the echo function is desired, then the user may specify whether the receive signal alone is to be employed in activating the echo pulse or whether the receive signal and the triggering signal of the weak infeed logic are to be used. The conditions for activation of the echo pulse must persist for a period in excess of the set operate delay, and distance protection starting must be absent for the echo pulse to be activated. This operate delay is ineffective with an open circuit breaker (i.e. when the signal MAIN : C B c l o s e d 3 p is not present). The echo pulse is then transmitted to the remote station for the set pulse duration. Thereafter, the transmission of the receive signal is blocked for the set pulse duration + 1 s. This prevents a permanent signal from being transmitted. The echo function may be disabled. If the P437 is operating with ground fault protective signaling and if directional measurement of ground fault protection has been enabled, the echo signal will be blocked if protective signaling and ground fault protective signaling are utilizing a common transmission channel.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-255
3 Operation
(continued)
GSCSG: Ready [ 043 057 ] GSCSG: Channel mode [ 023 078 ] 2: Common channel GFSC: Direct. determ.enabl. [ 043 061 ]
PSIG: Echo on receive PSx [ * ] 0 1 2 0: Without 1: On receive 2: On receive & V< PSIG: Op. delay echo PSx [ * ]
PSIG: No. telecom. ch. PSx [ * ] 1 3 1: 1 channel 3: 3 channels PSIG: V< triggered PSIG: Pulse dur. echo PSx [ * ] PSIG: Send [ 036 035 ]
305 162
PSIG: Receive (A) EXT [ 036 048 ] PSIG: Receive (B) EXT [ 006 037 ] PSIG: Frequ. monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Channel 1, send [ 038 081 ]
305 169
305 170
305 171
DIST: General startingg [ 036 240 ] MAIN: CB open 3p [ 031 040 ]
PSIG: Echo on receive PSx 015 003 024 002 024 062 025 022
PSIG: Op. delay echo PSx 015 022 024 008 024 068 025 028
PSIG: Pulse dur. PSIG: No. echo PSx telecom. ch. PSx 015 023 015 026 024 009 024 012 024 069 024 072 025 029 025 032
47Z1442A_EN
3-174
Echo function
3-256
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the communication channels The communication link can be tested. For this purpose a 500 ms send signal is issued through a binary signal input or from the integrated local control panel, if it has been set in the Operating Program. It is extended by the set release time of the send signal. The remote station receives this signal if the transmission link is OK.
3-175
Testing the communication channels
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-257
3 Operation
(continued)
3-ended line application In general, the PSIG : R e c e i ve ( A) EXT or PSIG : R e c e i ve ( B) EXT signals are simply used in an OR combination. For applying the permissive scheme to 3-ended lines, however, it is mandatory to receive the permissive signals from both remote end units, i.e. the signals must be used in an AND combination. To cope this scheme in the most common 1-channel transmission applications, the two receive signals can be directly used with setting PSIG : 3 e n d e d l i n e p r o t P S x to 'Yes'. These 2 signals are further processed as per figure 3-176 to create a new signal PSIG: Receive that is used in the various PSIG operating modes. (This signal replaces the PSIG: Receive EXT of previous versions.) If 3-ended line protection is set, then both receive signals are linked in an AND gate, otherwise in an OR gate. The latter allows to use on 2-ended lines either (A) or (B) signal, or even both in case of redundant signalling channels.
3-176
3-ended line operation
3-258
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27 Auto-Reclosure Control (Function Group ARC) After certain faults, the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) brings about automatic reclosing of the line section that was interrupted by a protection device. ARC operating modes The integral ARC function in the P437 offers the possibility of multiple reclosures. When the ARC operating mode has been set accordingly, multiple reclosures first begin with a high-speed reclosure (HSR). For a single-pole or three-pole trip, different dead times may be selected. If the fault is not cleared after reclosure by a HSR, then another attempt can be made to clear the fault with a time-delay reclosure (TDR). Multiple reclosures using only TDRs are also possible if the ARC operating mode is set accordingly.
3-177
Setting the operating mode of the ARC function.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-259
3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling and disabling the ARC function The activation of the function is enabled generally (independent of parameter subsets) via A R C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset via A R C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, the Autoreclose control function can be disabled or enabled by setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The local control panel or operating program and the binary signal inputs have equal status in this regard. If only the parameter A R C : E n a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then Auto-reclose will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the parameter AR C : D i s a b l e EXT has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
3-260
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-178
Disabling and enabling auto-reclosing control
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-261
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC ready ARC is ready when the following conditions are satisfied:

Protection is activated (on). ARC is not blocked. No ARC cycle is running. The circuit breaker must be capable of opening and closing again (CB opening & closing drive is ready). The circuit breaker is in closed position. (Position scanning is optional.) No automatic synchronism check cycle is running.
47Z1060A_EN
3-179
ARC readiness
3-262
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC blocked The ARC will be blocked if:

A manual close is carried out. A manual open command is issued. A switch to backup overcurrent time protection (BUOC) is made, but due to the setting no ARC is to be carried out. A trip signal is issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection. A ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling trip occurs, but no auto-reclosing is to occur. A trip signal is issued by circuit breaker failure protection. The binary signal input configured for AR C : Bl o c k i n g EXT is being triggered. The HSR mode selection is to be made by external control (setting at A R C : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R = No) but no binary signal inputs have been configured.
After all blocking conditions have dropped out, the relevant blocking time is started, and when this time has elapsed, the block is canceled.
ARC: Enabled [ 015 064 ] SOTF: Blocking ARC

305 650
ARC: Blocked [ 004 069 ]
MAIN: Manual trip signal [ 034 017 ] MAIN: [ 034 MAIN: [ 034 MAIN: [ 034 Manual trip signal A 047 ] Manual trip signal B 048 ] Manual trip signal C 049 ] ARC: Block. time int. PSx [ * ] ARC: Block. time running [ 037 004 ]
SFMON: BUOC active w/o ARC [ 098 003] CBF: Trip signal [ 040 026 ] GFSC: Trip signal [ 039 092 ] GSCSG: Blocking ARC
304 008
ARC: Block. time ext. PSx [ * ]
ARC: Blocking EXT [ 036 050 ]

*
ARC: Block. time int. PSx 015 043 024 021 024 081 025 041
ARC: Block. time ext. PSx 015 058 024 032 024 092 025 052
47Z11ADA_EN
3-180
ARC blocking
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-263
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC Tripping Times If protective signaling is not ready, the HSR or TDR tripping times of the ARC function are initiated by the general starting condition. If the HSR mode is set to '1-/3-pole', '3pole' and '3-pole (only for 1p)' then the tripping times replace the timer stage t1,ze of distance protection. If the 1-pole operating mode has been set, a single-pole trip is issued once the HSR tripping time has elapsed, or a multi-pole trip is issued after distance protection grading time (depending on the zone) has elapsed or after the BUOC timer stages have elapsed.
3-181
ARC Tripping Times
3-264
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Starting the ARC cycle When the ARC is ready, an ARC cycle is started by one of the following functions:
The general starting state formed internally or the general starting signal of a parallel protection device, provided that a binary signal input has been configured accordingly. A trip without general starting e.g. through the protective signaling direct transfer trip or through the function M AIN : T r a n s fe r tr i p . EXT . A backup overcurrent time protection trip (backup DTOC) trip, provided that the ARC is to be activated by the backup DTOC. The trip signal of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling, provided that the ARC is to be activated by ground fault protection signaling. The trip signal of an external protection device, provided that the parameters of this device have been set accordingly (AR C : Pa r a l l e l tr i p ). A test HSR.
The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time has elapsed.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-265
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.1 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) When the ARC cycle starts, operative times 1 and 2 are started. The starting conditions for the ARC cycle must drop out while the operative times are elapsing. This means that the circuit breaker must have opened so that the dead time is started. If both operative times are set at 25 ms, then ARC will not be ready in the event of starting; in the event of a trip, the reclaim time is started. After starting drops out without a subsequent trip, ARC is immediately ready again. Operative time 1 has priority over operative time 2. Selection of the HSR operating mode determines which dead time is started. The following settings are possible: HSR operating modes

1-pole 1-/3-pole 3-pole 3-pole (only for 1p)
With the operating mode 3-pole (only for 1p) only a three-pole HSR will result from single-pole ground faults. Selecting operating mode via binary signal inputs The operating mode can be selected via binary signal inputs, if this selection mode has been enabled (AR C : C o n tr o l vi a U SER = no) and the required binary signal inputs have been configured. When using binary signal inputs the operating mode is set according to the following terms: Input signals ARC: 1p-HSR enable EXT 0 1 HSR operating mode ARC: 3p-HSR enable EXT 0 0 ARC: 3p-HSR(1p) enab. EXT 0 0
0 1
1 1
0 0
0 or 1 0 or 1
0 1
1 1
ARC is blocked (RRC and TDR are also blocked) Only single-pole HSR permitted under 1p trip condition. Three-pole tripping is always final. Three-pole HSR for all types of fault. Trip-dependent HSR: single-pole HSR with single-pole trip decision, three-pole HSR with three-pole trip decision Three-pole HSR only with single-pole trip decision. Three-pole HSR for all types of fault.
Logic input signals may be fed from physical binary signal inputs, signal assignment within the LOGIC or through the InterMiCOM communication interface. If not all the available operating modes are required, it is not necessary to configure all 3 signals. Signals that are not configured are internally used with their default value '0'.
3-266
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
HSR operating mode 2 The setting at A R C : H S R o p e r . m o d e 2 P S x determines whether starting (of distance or backup overcurrent-time protection) or a trip will be used for a single- or three-pole HSR. If the setting is Trip-dependent, then trip decisions will be used as the criterion. If the setting is Start-dependent, then starting decisions will also be used.
4: 3-pole (only for 1p)
47Z1067A_EN
3-182
Setting the HSR operating mode and HSR operating mode 2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-267
3 Operation
(continued)
1-pole If HSR operating mode 2 is set for Start-dependent, then the single-pole HSR is only executed if there is a single-pole starting signal when the trip occurs. If there is a multipole starting signal when the trip occurs, then there is a three-pole final trip, and the reclaim time is started. If the setting is Trip-dependent, then the HSR is only executed if a single-pole trip decision is reached. In the event of a three-pole trip, no HSR is executed, and instead a final trip occurs. In addition, the HSR is started by a single-pole test HSR. A single-pole trip can occur as the result of the following protective functions:

Distance protection in impedance zone 1 or extended zone 1. Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) Protective signaling. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling The integrated phase selection logic (see function MAIN). A parallel protective device
If the HSR is started by a parallel protective device, protective signaling, ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling, or the phase selection logic and if the P437 has not started, then the trip is always used as the criterion for the HSR irrespective of whether the setting is 'Start-dependent' or 'Trip-dependent'. The single-pole dead time (AR C : D e a d t i m e 1 p P S x ) is started if the starting conditions drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time elapses, a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC), and a close command is issued immediately, without a check by the ASC. If the starting conditions for the ARC cycle drop out after operative time 1 has elapsed but during operative time 2, then the maximum dead time (AR C : D e a d t i m e m a x PSx) is started. When the dead time is started, a close request is sent to the ASC. The ASC checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time and while the dead time is elapsing, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued. If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur (depending on the setting or with ASC disabled or blocked), then the reclaim time is started and a three-pole trip occurs (final trip).
Plausibility check on single-pole HSR: If pole selective status signals have been configured (see Monitoring and processing of CB status signals, function group MAIN)) then the device will check that just this CB contact will be opened during a single-pole HSR. The single-pole HSR is terminated and a three-pole trip command is issued when at least one further CB contact is opened. This trip command is final when the discrimination time has elapsed (timer stage AR C : tD i s c r i m . PSx) or if this timer stage is set to 0 s. The same procedure is carried out should the multiple signal M AIN : C B c l o s e d 3 p EXT occur during the dead time of a single-pole HSR.
3-268
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
47Z1061A_EN
3-183
Signal flow for the '1-pole' operating mode
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-269
3 Operation
(continued)
1-/3-pole If HSR operating mode 2 is set for Start-dependent, then a single-pole HSR is executed if there is a single-pole starting signal when the trip occurs. If there is a multi-pole starting signal when the trip occurs, then a three-pole HSR is executed. With the Trip-dependent setting, the decision as to whether a single- or three-pole HSR will be executed is contingent upon the trip decisions. In addition, a single- or three-pole HSR is started by a corresponding test HSR. A single-pole trip can occur as the result of the following protective functions:

Distance protection in impedance zone 1 or extended zone 1. Backup overcurrent-time protection (backup DTOC). Protective signaling. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling. The integrated phase selection logic (see function MAIN). A parallel protective device.
If the HSR is started by a parallel protective device, protective signaling, ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling or the phase selection logic and if the P437 has not started, then the trip is always used as the criterion for the HSR irrespective of whether the setting is 'Start-dependent' or 'Trip-dependent'. If the conditions for a single-pole HSR are satisfied, then the single-pole dead time (AR C : D e a d t i m e 1 p P S x ) is started if the starting conditions for an ARC cycle drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time elapses, a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC), and a close command is issued immediately, without a check by the ASC. If the conditions for a three-pole HSR are satisfied, then the three-pole dead time (AR C : D e a d t i m e 3 p P S x ) is started if the starting conditions for an ARC cycle drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time has elapsed, a close request is sent to the ASC. If ARC is to be activated (AR C : Ac ti ve fo r H SR ) it first checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued. If ARC is disabled or blocked a close command may be issued immediately (A S C : C l o s . r e j . w . b l o c k P S x = 'No' i.e. close rejection when blocked). If the starting conditions for an ARC cycle drop out after operative time 1 has elapsed but during operative time 2, then the maximum dead time (AR C : D e a d t i m e m a x P S x ) is started. This occurs with both single-pole and three-pole trips. When the dead time is started, a close request is sent to the ASC. The ASC checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time and while the maximum dead time is elapsing, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued. If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur or if the ASC function is not ready, then the reclaim time is started after the dead time has elapsed, and three-pole tripping occurs (final trip).
3-270
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
1-/3-pole (continued) Plausibility check on single-pole HSR: If pole selective status signals have been configured (see Monitoring and processing of CB status signals, function group MAIN)) then the device will check that just this CB contact will be opened during a single-pole HSR. The single-pole HSR is terminated and a three-pole trip command is issued when at least one further CB contact is opened. This trip command is final when the discrimination time has elapsed (timer stage AR C : tD i s c r i m . PSx) or if this timer stage is set to 0 s. The dead time for the threepole HSR is triggered when the discrimination timer stage is still running. The same procedure is carried out should the multiple signal M AIN : C B c l o s e d 3 p EXT occur during the dead time of a single-pole HSR.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-271
3 Operation
(continued)
47Z1062A_EN
3-184
Signal flow with the 1-/3-pole operating mode, tripping during operative time 1
3-272
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: 1, 1p [ 037 MAIN: 1, 3p [ 037
Trip signal 252 ] Trip signal 253 ]
47Z1063A_EN
3-185
Signal flow with the 1-/3-pole operating mode, tripping during operative time 2, and close rejection
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-273
3 Operation
(continued)
3-pole The three-pole HSR is executed both with a single-pole trip and a three-pole trip irrespective of whether the setting is Starting-dependent or Trip-dependent. If the setting is Trip-dependent, then there is a three-pole trip transfer in the event of a single-pole trip. The three-pole dead time (AR C : D e a d t i m e 3 p P S x ) is started if the starting conditions for an ARC cycle drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing. After the dead time has elapsed, a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC). If ARC is to be activated (AR C : Ac ti ve fo r H SR ) it first checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued. If ARC is disabled or blocked a close command may be issued immediately (A S C : C l o s . r e j . w . b l o c k P S x = 'No' i.e. close rejection when blocked). If the starting conditions for an ARC cycle drop out after operative time 1 has elapsed but during operative time 2, then the maximum dead time (AR C : D e a d t i m e m a x P S x ) is started. When the dead time is started, a close request is sent to the ASC. The ASC checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time and while the maximum dead time is elapsing, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued. If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur, then the reclaim time is started and the 'final trip' signal is issued. 3-pole (only for 1p) With this operating mode no further trip command is issued when a HSR cycle is terminated (a 3-pole trip has already occurred); only the signal M AIN : F i n a l tr i p = Yes is generated.
3-274
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
47Z1064A_EN
3-186
Signal flow for the '3-pole' operating mode
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-275
3 Operation
(continued)
All HSR operating modes The following applies to all HSR operating modes: Should the circuit breaker fail to clear the fault within the operative times, the reclaim time will be started and a three-pole trip will occur (final trip). If the operative times elapse without a trip decision, then the ARC is immediately ready again as soon as the general starting condition has dropped out. Test HSR A single- or three-pole test HSR can be carried out from the integrated local control panel or via binary signal inputs. If a single-pole test HSR is triggered in the 3-pole operating mode, then a three-pole trip occurs.
3-276
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-187
Test HSR
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-277
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.2 Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR) A TDR may occur after a HSR if reclosure has occurred as the result of the HSR or if the operating mode set for the ARC allows only TDRs. This is only possible if the setting fo r AR C : N o . o f p e r m i t. T D R PSx (number of permitted TDRs) is not zero. The TDR is always a three-pole process. This means that three-pole transfer tripping will occur in the event of a single-pole trip. The TDR is started if either a new general starting condition or the trip of an external protection device (if configured accordingly) occurs while the reclaim time is elapsing. Operative times 1 and 2 are started. If the starting conditions for the TDR drop out while operative time 1 or 2 is elapsing, then the TDR dead time is started. After the dead time has elapsed, a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC). If ARC is to be activated (AR C : Ac ti ve fo r T D R ) it first checks to determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative time, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued. If ARC is disabled or blocked a close command may be issued immediately (A S C : C l o s . r e j . w . b l o c k P S x = 'No' i.e. close rejection when blocked). If the ASC function determines that reclosing may not occur, then a final trip occurs after the ASC operative time has elapsed, and the ARC reclaim time is started. If the fault is still present even after another reclosing, the TDR can be started again. This process can be repeated as often as allowed by the set number of TDRs permitted. If the fault is still present after that, then a final trip occurs.
3-278
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
47Z1065A_EN
3-188
Signal flow with time-delay reclosure (TDR)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-279
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.3 Rapid Reclosure (RRC) Rapid reclosure (RRC) operates along with HSR or TDR. If the P437 carries out appropriate measurements and concludes that the line is carrying voltage and that the line voltages are healthy, then reclosing is carried out by RRC which in turn reduces the dead times of HSR or TDR. For this, VTs must be connected on the line side. If the setting at M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t . is Low-impedance grounding, then both phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages are checked. If the setting is either Isolated neutral/resonant-grounding or Short-duration grounding, then only the phase-to-phase voltages are checked.
ARC: Enable RRC PSx

[ * ] 0 1
0: No 1: Yes VA-G VB-G VC-G

+ +
ARC: V> RRC PSx

[ * ] & & &
>1 -
VA-G* 3 VB-G* 3 VC-G* 3
ARC: V> for RRC triggered

303 014
&
MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx 1: Low-imped. grounding

* * ]
MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx

010 001 001 001 048 076 077 078
ARC: Enable RRC PSx

015 024 025 025 085 044 004 064
ARC: V> RRC PSx

015 024 025 025 087 046 006 066
47Z01AGA_EN 47Z11AGA_EN
3-189
Voltage monitoring for RRC
3-280
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
If the starting conditions for rapid reclosing drop out during operative time 1, the RRC timer stage tRRC is started. After the timer stage has elapsed, the P437checks to determine whether the voltages measured by distance protection were greater than or equal to the set threshold value (AR C : V> R R C P S x) during the last 100 ms. If this was the case, then a close request is sent to the automatic synchronism check function (ASC). The ASC response depends on whether the conditions for a single- or three-pole HSR are satisfied. If the conditions for a single-pole HSR are satisfied, then a close command is issued immediately. If the conditions for a three-pole HSR or TDR were satisfied, the ASC checks to determine whether reclosing can occur. If the ASC decision is positive, a close enable and then a close command are issued. If reclosing is not permitted, there is a final trip. If the ASC is disabled or deactivated or if its decisions are to be ignored, then the close request is immediately acknowledged and a close command is issued, even in the case of a three-pole trip. If it is determined after timer stage tRRC has elapsed that the voltages were not greater or equal to the set threshold (AR C : V> R R C P S x), then the ARC cycle is continued by the HSR or TDR.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-281
3 Operation
(continued)
47Z1066A_EN
3-190
Signal flow for rapid reclosure (RRC)
3-282
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.4 Secondary Fault Treatment If a repeat trip occurs in another phase during the dead time, then this is referred to as a secondary fault and results in three-pole tripping. This is carried out as a three-pole trip. The response of the ARC to a secondary fault is a function of whether the secondary fault occurs during a high-speed reclosure (HSR), a time-delay reclosure (TDR) or a rapid reclosure (RRC). Secondary fault treatment during HSR If a secondary fault occurs during an HSR, then the response is a function of the HSR operating mode that has been set.
ARC: HSR oper. mode 1-pole If a trip starts during the single-pole dead time in a different phase than at the beginning of the ARC cycle, then tripping is three-pole (final trip) and the reclaim time is started. Reclosing does not occur. If starting or a trip occurs again during the single-pole dead time in the same phase as at the beginning of the ARC cycle, the ARC cycle is continued. The ARC cycle is only terminated if the starting signal or the trip are still present immediately before the close command is issued. If a secondary fault occurs in the same phase while the maximum dead time is elapsing, the ARC cycle is terminated normally. If a secondary fault occurs in a different phase, there is a three-pole trip transfer and the reclaim time is started.
ARC: HSR oper. mode 1-/3-pole If a starting signal or a trip occurs during the course of the single-pole dead time in the same phase as at the beginning of the ARC cycle, the ARC cycle is continued. The ARC cycle is only terminated if a starting signal or trip is still present immediately before the close command is issued. If a secondary fault occurs during the single-pole dead time, then operative time 1 is started. The single-pole dead time continues. If the secondary fault's starting condition and trip drop out while operative time 1 is elapsing, the P437 checks to determine whether the fault change occurred during the course of the time set at A R C : t D i s c r i m . P S x . P S x , which is started with the single-pole dead time. If this is the case, a switch is made to the three-pole dead time, and the ARC cycle is terminated as in the case of a three-pole trip. If the fault change occurred after the tDiscrim. time had elapsed, then final tripping occurs and the reclaim time is started. A secondary fault during the course of the three-pole dead time is ignored. Termination of the ARC cycle only occurs if the starting signal or trip have not yet dropped out immediately before the close command is issued. If a secondary fault occurs while the maximum dead time is elapsing, then a threepole trip transfer occurs. The dead time and checking by the ASC function continue. If the ASC decision is that reclosing is permissible, a close command is issued.
ARC: HSR oper. mode 3-pole In this HSR operating mode, a secondary fault is ignored. The ARC cycle is only terminated if a starting signal or a trip is still present immediately before the close command is issued.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-283
3 Operation
(continued)
Secondary fault treatment during TDR A secondary fault is ignored. The ARC cycle is only terminated if a starting signal or trip is still present immediately before the close command is issued. Secondary fault treatment during RRC Rapid reclosing is blocked in the event of a secondary fault. 3.27.5 Parallel Blocking If a second protection device is operating in parallel with the P437, then the trip from this protection device can be integrated into the ARC functional sequence provided that the binary signal inputs have been configured appropriately. The effect exercised by the trip of the parallel protection device is a function of whether it intervenes in a high-speed reclosure (HSR), a time-delay reclosure (TDR), or a rapid reclosure (RRC). In addition, the A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x setting is a determining factor (see Figure 3-195). Parallel blocking with HSR The trip of an external protection device may intervene in the HSR functional sequence depending on the set HSR operating mode and the AR C : Pa r a l l e l tr i p PSx setting.
ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx 1-pole
ARC: P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Without function The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the functional sequence. A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking without initiation If the P437 has not started, the trip of the external protection device is ignored. If a trip decision has been reached in the P437, then while the operative times and the single-pole or maximum dead time are elapsing the P437 checks to determine whether the trip of the external protection device is in the same phase as the P437 trip. If this is the case, then the ARC cycle is continued. If a trip decision of the external protection device has been reached in another phase, then the ARC cycle is terminated and the reclaim time is started. A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking with initiation If the setting at A R C : H S R o p e r . m o d e 2 P S x is Start-dependent, and if the P437 has started, then the trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the HSR functional sequence. If the P437 has not started, then the trips of the external protection device are used as the criterion for a single-pole HSR, irrespective of the Start-dependent setting. If the setting is Trip-dependent, the ARC cycle is started by the trip of the external protection device and proceeds normally in the event that the P437 does not reach a trip decision or not in the same phase. However, if a trip decision has been reached by the P437 in a different phase from that of the external protection device, then the reclaim time is started and three-pole tripping occurs (final trip). Reclosing does not occur. If the trip of an external protection device occurs while the dead time is elapsing, the process is the same as was described for secondary fault treatment.
3-284
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx 1-/3-pole
ARC: P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Without function The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the functional sequence. A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking without initiation If the P437 has not started, the trip of the external protection device is ignored. If a single-pole trip decision has been reached in the P437, then while operative time 1 and the time set at AR C : tD i s c r i m . PSx are elapsing the P437 checks to determine whether the trip of the external protection device is in the same phase as the P437 trip. If this is the case, then the single-pole ARC cycle is continued. If a trip decision of the external protection device has been reached in another phase while operative time 1 was elapsing, then the three-pole dead time is started and the ARC cycle is terminated as is the case with a three-pole HSR. If the trip of the external protection device occurs while time tDiscrim. is elapsing, then a switch is made to the three-pole dead time, and the ARC cycle is continued as with a three-pole trip. If the trip of the external protection device occurs after the time set at AR C : tD i s c r i m . PSx has elapsed, then final three-pole tripping occurs, the ARC cycle is terminated, and the reclaim time is started. If a single-pole HSR with maximum dead time is carried out, then timer stage tDiscrim. is started at the same time as the maximum dead time. The P437 checks to determine whether, while operative time 2 or timer stage tDiscrim. was elapsing, a trip of the external protection device has occurred in the same phase as in the P437. If this is the case, then the ARC cycle is continued. If the external protection device reaches a trip decision in a different phase, then there is a threepole trip transfer and the ARC cycle is continued. If the trip of the external protection device occurs after time tDiscrim. has elapsed, then three-pole final tripping occurs and the reclaim time is started.
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking with initiation If the setting at A R C : H S R o p e r . m o d e 2 P S x is Start-dependent, and if the P437 has started, then the trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the HSR functional sequence. If the P437 has not started, then the trips of the external protection device are used as the criterion for a single- or three-pole HSR, irrespective of the Start-dependent setting. If the setting is Trip-dependent, the ARC cycle is started by the trip of the external protection device and proceeds normally if the P437 does not reach a trip decision or has reached a trip decision in the same phase. However, if the P437 has reached a trip decision in a different phase from that of the external protection device, then three-pole tripping occurs (3-pole transfer). The ARC cycle is terminated as with a three-pole HSR. If the trip of an external protection device occurs while the dead time is elapsing, the process is the same as was described for secondary fault treatment.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-285
3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx 3-pole
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Without function The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the functional sequence. A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking without initiation The trip of the parallel protection device does not intervene in the HSR functional sequence. A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking with initiation As a result of the trip of the external protection device, the ARC cycle is started and proceeds normally.
Parallel blocking for TDR or RRC The trip of the external protection device may intervene in the TDR or RRC functional sequence depending on the setting of the AR C : Pa r a l l e l tr i p PSx parameter.
A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Without function The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the functional sequence. A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking without initiation The trip of the parallel protection device does not intervene in the TDR or RRC functional sequence. A R C : P a r a l l e l t r i p P S x Parallel blocking with initiation The trip of the external protection device starts a TDR or RRC. The sequence is the same as with initiation by the P437.
3-286
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.6 Zone Extension Zone extension (ZE) of impedance zone 1 of the distance protection function is only initiated by the ARC if protective signaling is not ready. HSR and TDR activate different zone extension factors. Zone extension by kze HSR Zone extension by the zone extension factor kze HSR is affected by the following settings:
Setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . f . H S R P S x = Yes' The measuring range is extended when the ARC is ready and while operative times 1 and 2 are elapsing. Setting for A R C : Z o n e e x t . d u r . R C P S x
'Following HSR' The measuring range is extended while the close command time is elapsing if the close command is issued by a non-synchronism-checked HSR. There is no zone extension with a rapid reclosure (RRC). 'Always' The measuring range is extended while the close command time is elapsing.. How the close command is triggered is not important.
If the two parameters are set for No or Without, respectively, then there is no zone extension. Zone extension by kze TDR The measuring range of impedance zone 1 is extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR after a close command is issued by the TDR function, as long as another TDR is permitted and the setting for AR C : Z o n e e x t . f . T D R P S x is 'Yes'. Zone extension is canceled during the course of the TDR dead time. If the setting is No, there is no zone extension.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-287
3 Operation
(continued)
3-191
Zone extension by ARC
3-288
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.7 Control Using External Auto-Reclosing Control (ARC) If an external ARC is used in place of the ARC function implemented in the P437, the operating mode of the external ARC is defined for the P437 by selecting the appropriate setting at A R C : O p . m o d e e x t A R C P S x . Control of the zone extension factor kze HSR and enabling of the distance protection trip in zone 1 with extended reach is handled in the P437 in accordance with this setting. The measuring range is only extended if protective signaling is not ready, internal ARC is disabled, and the binary signal input configured for AR C : E n a b l e e x t . A R C E X T is triggered. If the setting at AR C : O p . m o d e e x t A R C P S x is 1-pole, trip-depend., there must also be a single-pole starting signal, or in the case of a two-pole starting signal the setting at D IST : T r i p z o n e 1 P P P S x must be 1-pole leading phase or 1-pole trailing phase, so that the zone extension factor kze HSR is activated. If the setting at A R C : O p . m o d e e x t A R C P S x is 1-pole, trip-depend., then the distance protection trip with extended reach is only enabled if the trip is single-pole.
ARC: Enable dist. trip Z1ze
3-192
Control with external ARC
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-289
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.8 General control functions Monitoring the receive signals of protective signaling The user can specify whether there will be intervention in the ARC sequence when a signal is received by protective signaling. If this is desired, then the ARC cycle is continued in different ways depending on the number of receive signals that are received by the P437 while operative time 1 or the single- or three-pole dead times are elapsing. At the end of the dead time, the P437 checks to determine whether protective signaling has received one signal while the above-mentioned times are elapsing. If this is the case, then the HSR is terminated normally. If protective signaling receives no signal or more than one signal, the HSR is terminated as if the fault had been cleared during operative time 2. This means that even with single-pole starting signals or trips reclosing is preceded by a synchronism check by ASC.
3-193
Monitoring the receive signals of protective signaling
3-290
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Signal AR C : Ex t. 1 p trip perm. If ARC is ready or if one of the operative times is elapsing, the P437 will generate the following signal: AR C : Ext. 1 p tr i p p e r m .
ARC: Ready [ 004 068 ] ARC: Oper. time 1 running [ 037 005 ] ARC: Oper. time 2 running [ 037 065 ] ARC: Dead time 1p running [ 037 066 ]
ARC: Ext. 1p trip perm. [ 039 086 ]
100ms
&
47Z13AKB_EN
3-194
Signal A R C : E x t . 1 p t r i p p e r m .
Switch to maximum dead time via binary signal input If the binary signal input configured for AR C : 3 p tr i p tr a n s fe r EXT is triggered while the single-pole or three-pole dead time is elapsing, the P437 switches to the maximum dead time. The ARC cycle will then be terminated as if starting or trip signals had dropped out during operative time 2.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-291
3 Operation
(continued)
3-195
ARC sequence control
3-292
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.9 Counters The following ARC signals are counted:

Number of single-pole high-speed reclosures, pole-selectively. Number of three-pole high-speed reclosures. Number of time-delay reclosures.
The counters can be reset as a group (except at the address at which they are displayed).
3-196
ARC counters
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-293
3 Operation
(continued)
3.28 Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC) The automatic synchronism check (ASC) function allows the device to verify that before a close or reclose command is issued synchronism exists between system sections that are to be synchronized (paralleled) or whether one of the system sections is de-energized. In order to check for synchronism, two voltages generally the voltages on the line and busbar sides are compared for differences in frequency, angle, and voltage. Connecting the reference voltage transformer will determine which of the system sections will provide the reference voltage (e.g. the line side or the busbar side). At the P437 the measurement loop must be set according to the connected reference voltage (setting ASC : M e a s u r e m e n t l o o p P S x ) so that the correct measurement loop voltage is selected for the comparison. In the connection example shown in the section entitled 'Conditioning the Measured Variables', the busbar voltage VA-B is the reference voltage. The reference voltage Vref and the voltage from the corresponding measuring loop are stored as event data.
ASC: Volt. sel. meas.loop [004 088]
Vref
ASC: Voltage Vref [004 087]
47Z1084A_EN 47z0125A
3-197
Selecting the measurement loop
3-294
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling and enabling the ASC function The activation of the function is enabled generally (independently of parameter subsets) via A S C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset via ASC: E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, ASC can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The local control panel or operating program and the binary signal inputs have equal status in this regard. If only the ASC : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned to a binary signal input, then ASC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the ASC : D i s a b l e EXT function has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect. If the ASC function is disabled an uncontrolled activation enable will always be issued.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-295
3 Operation
(continued)
3-198
Enable/disable the automatic synchronism check.
3-296
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC readiness and blocking The ASC function is ready if it is activated and enabled and if there is no blocking. Blocking can for example be caused by a voltage transformer m.c.b. trip, via an appropriately configured binary signal input. The user can specify whether closing or reclosing will always be enabled or not (reclosure with or without a check) when the ASC function is blocked. The user can also specify separately for high-speed reclosures (HSR) and time-delayed reclosures (TDR) whether reclosure will be carried out with or without a check. The single-pole high speed reclosure is always without a check
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-297
3 Operation
(continued)
3-199
ASC readiness and blocking
3-298
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Close request The ASC function can be triggered by ARC from the integrated local control panel, the operating program or an appropriately configured binary signal input (A S C : C l o s e r e q u e s t E X T ). Close requests from the local control panel or the binary signal input are only accepted if no ARC cycle is running.
3-200
Close request
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-299
3 Operation
(continued)
The ASC operative time is started with the close request. If the close enable is issued before the ASC operative time has elapsing, the close command is issued. Otherwise an A S C : C l o s e r e j e c t i o n signal is generated for 100 ms.
3-201
Signal flow for a close enable and a close rejection
3-300
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC operating modes The criteria for a close enable are determined by the ASC operating mode setting. The following operating mode settings are possible:

Voltage-checked Synchronism-checked Voltage/synchronism-checked
Continuous synchronism check Synchronism checks, e.g. monitoring of voltage and/or synchronism requirements, are carried out continuously during the duration of the set ASC operative time. The following signals are updated according to their current states: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: Extended settings for the close enable conditions The close enable conditions can be set for auto-reclose control and manual close command. This makes it possible to select different operating modes as well as different tolerance ranges. Auto-reclose control ASC: AR op. mode ASC: AR with tCB ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk. ASC: AR V> volt.check ASC: AR V< volt.check ASC: AR tmin v-check ASC: AR V> sync.check ASC: AR delta Vmax ASC: AR delta f max ASC: AR delta phi max ASC: AR tmin sync.chk Close enable conditions for Manual close command PSx ASC: MC op. mode PSx ASC: MC with tCB PSx ASC: MC op.mode v-chk. PSx ASC: MC V> volt.check PSx ASC: MC V< volt.check PSx ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx ASC: MC delta Vmax PSx ASC: MC delta f max PSx ASC: MC delta phi max PSx ASC: MC tmin sync.chk Close Close Close Close enable enable,volt.ch enable,sync.ch rejection
The ASC maximum operative time setting is 6000s (100 minutes).
PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
The automatic reclosure setting parameters become active when a close request is issued by the integrated ARC (for a RRC, HSR or TDR) or by a close request from an external ARC device sent to the binary signal input function ASC: AR close request EXT.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-301
3 Operation
(continued)
Considering the CB close time In slightly asynchronous power systems the new setting ASC : AR w i th tC B PSx = 'Yes' or A S C : M C w i t h t C B P S x = 'Yes' makes it possible to consider the circuit breaker close time with the issuing of a close command. The condition for "slightly asynchronous power systems" is given if the difference in frequencies lies within the range of 10 mHz < f < fmax. If this condition and the voltage condition (V < Vmax) are met then the next point in time is continuously calculated at which the phasors for Vref and the corresponding voltage of the threephase system are in phase (e.g. difference in voltage phase angles approaches 0). The close command, allowing for the set CB close time M AIN : tC B,c l o s e , is then issued sooner.
yes Close with tCB f < 10 mHz
yes
no
no
synchronous mode, close if: V < Vmax f < fmax < max for tmin,synchr within operative time
asynchronous mode, close if: V < Vmax f < fmax Raise close command so that closing takes place at = 0 (taking CB close time and internal delays into account) within operative time
synchronous mode, close if: V < Vmax < max for tmin,synchr within operative time
47Z1085B_EN
3-202
Functional sequence and close conditions for the Synchronism check
3-302
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage-checked The synchronism-checked close enable can be bypassed using the voltage-checked close enable without affecting the former. This allows closing if at least one side is voltage-free/de-energized. To detect whether voltage is present or not on either side, the three phase-to-ground voltages and the reference voltage Vref are monitored to determine whether they exceed or fall below the set threshold values: ASC: AR V> volt.check PSx ASC: AR V< volt.check PSx ASC: MC V> volt.check ASC: MC V< volt.check PSx PSx
Depending on the operating mode selected for the voltage check, all three phase-toground voltages need to exceed or fall below the set value in order to meet the condition for voltage-checked closing. If the conditions corresponding to the set operating mode for the voltage-checked synchronism check are met for the duration of the set minimum time (A S C : t m i n v o l t . c h e c k ) then the close enable is issued. ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx
The following operating modes for voltage checking can be selected separately for each parameter subset:

Vref but not V V but not Vref Not V and not Vref Not V or not Vref Not V and Vref and Z1 Not V and Vref or V and not Vref
The operating mode before last includes a further requirement, which specifies that the close request is issued during an ARC cycle and the cause of the fault for the previous protective trip lies inside the reach of impedance zone 1 or (since software version -611) a PSIG based Z1e trip occurs.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-303
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Enabled [ 018 024 ] ASC: Active

305 003
ASC: AR op. mode PSx [ * ] 1: Voltagechecked 3: Volt.&sync.checked VA-G VB-G VC-G VA-G*v3 VB-G*v3 VC-G*v3
ASC: AR V> C volt.check PSx [ * ] &
ASC: AR V< C volt.check PSx [ * ] VA-G*v3 VB-G*v3 VC-G*v3 &
ASC: Select. meas.loop PG

305 008
ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx [ * ] 1 2 ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx [ * ] & 1 2 1 ... 2 2 & 3 & 4 & 5 1 & t 0
Vref
VA-G*v3
6 & 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: DIST: Trip signal Z1,ze [ 035 074 ] DIST: Dist. decis.Z1 stored
303 565
& &
Vref but not V V but not Vref Not V and not Vref Not V or not Vref Vref & Z1 but not V N V&Vref or V& n Vref
& 1 100ms 1 100ms ASC: Close enable,volt.ch [ 037 085 ] ASC: Close enable [ 037 083 ]
ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ] ARC: HSR A

303 008
ARC: HSR B
303 009
ARC: HSR C
303 010
ASC: Close enable,sync.ch [ 037 084 ]
Parameter ASC: AR op. mode ASC: AR V> PSx volt.check PSx set 1 018 025 026 017 set 2 018 026 077 043 set 3 018 027 078 043 set 4 018 028 079 043
ASC: AR V< volt.check PSx 018 017 077 040 078 040 079 040
ASC: AR op.mode v-chk.PSx 018 029 018 030 018 031 018 032
ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx 018 018 077 041 078 041 079 041 47Z1380D_EN
3-203
Voltage-checked close enable for autoreclose control
3-304
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Enabled [ 018 024 ] ASC: Active

305 003
ASC: MC op. mode PSx [ * ] 1: Voltagechecked 3: Volt.&sync.checked VA-G VB-G VC-G VA-G*v3 VB-G*v3 VC-G*v3
ASC: MC V> C volt.check PSx [ * ] &
ASC: MC V< C volt.check PSx [ * ] VA-G*v3 VB-G*v3 VC-G*v3 &
ASC: Select. meas.loop PG

305 008
ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx [ * ] 1 2 ASC: MC Op.mode v-chk.PSx [ * ] & 1 2 1 ... 2 2 & 3 & 4 & 5 1 & t 0
Vref
VA-G*v3
6 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: DIST: Trip signal Z1,ze [ 035 074 ] DIST: Dist. decis.Z1 stored
303 565
& & &
Vref but not V V but not Vref Not V and not Vref Not V or not Vref Vref & Z1 but not V N V&Vref or V&n Vref
& 1 100ms 1 100ms ASC: Close enable,volt.ch [ 037 085 ] ASC: Close enable [ 037 083 ]
ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ] ARC: HSR A

303 008
ARC: HSR B
303 009
ARC: HSR C
303 010
ASC: Close enable,sync.ch [ 037 084 ]
Parameter ASC: MC op. mode ASC: MC V> PSx volt.check PSx set 1 000 056 000 064 set 2 000 057 000 065 set 3 000 058 000 066 set 4 000 059 000 067
ASC: MC V< volt.check PSx 000 068 000 069 000 070 000 071
ASC: MC op.mode v-chk.PSx 000 060 000 061 000 062 000 063
ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx 000 072 000 073 000 074 000 075 47Z1381D_EN
3-204
Voltage-checked close enable for manual close control
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-305
3 Operation
(continued)
Synchronism-checked Before a close enable is issued, the ASC checks the voltages for synchronism. Synchronism is recognized if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
The three phase voltages and the reference voltage must exceed the set threshold value: ASC: AR V> sync.check PSx ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx
When with a three-phase voltage the setting of M AIN : N e u tr a l - p o i n t tr e a t. is 'Low-imped. grounding' both the phase-to-ground and the phase-to-phase voltages are checked. If the setting is 'Isol./res.w.start. (or w/o st.)PG' only the phase-to-phase voltages are checked.
The difference in magnitude between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not exceed the set threshold value: ASC: AR delta Vmax PSx ASC: MC delta Vmax PSx
The frequency difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not exceed the set threshold value: ASC: AR delta f max PSx ASC: MC delta f max PSx
The angle difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not exceed the set threshold value: ASC: AR delta phi max PSx ASC: MC delta phi max PSx
In these comparisons the set offset angle ASC : Ph i o ffs e t is taken into account. If these conditions are met for the set time ASC : tm i n s yn c . c h e c k , then a close enable is issued. The ASC operating time for determination of differences in voltage, angle, and frequency is approximately 100 ms. The voltage magnitude difference, angle difference, and frequency difference are stored as measured synchronism data at the time the close enable is issued. In the event of another close request, they are automatically overwritten by the new data.
3-306
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Active
305 003
Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ASC: AR op. mode PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Voltagechecked 2: Sync.-checked 3: Volt./sync.checked

*
MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx 010 048 001 076 001 077 001 078 ASC: AR delta Vmax PSx 018 012 077 036 078 036 079 036
ASC: AR op. mode ASC: Phi offset PSx PSx 018 025 018 034 018 026 077 042 018 027 078 042 018 028 079 042 ASC: AR delta f max PSx 018 014 077 038 078 038 079 038 ASC: AR delta phi max PSx 018 013 077 037 078 037 079 037
ASC: AR V> sync.check PSx 018 011 077 035 078 035 079 035 ASC: AR tmin sync.chk PSx 018 015 077 039 078 039 079 039
Parameter set set set set
ASC: AR V> sync.check PSx [ * ] VA-G VB-G VC-G VA-G VB-G VC-G
ASC: Select meas.loop PG

305 008
Vref
Vref
ASC: AR tmin sync.chk PSx [ * ] ASC: Close enable,sync.ch [ 037 084 ]
ASC: Test
305 004
ASC: AR delta Vmax PSx [ * ] ASC: Volt. sel. meas.loop [ 004 088 ] Vmax
ASC: Volt. magn. diff. [ 004 091 ] ASC: Frequ. difference [ 004 090 ] ASC: Angle difference [ 004 089 ]
ASC: AR delta f max PSx [ * ]
ASC: Phi offset PSx [ * ] corr
ASC: AR delta phi max PSx [ * ]
47Z1112A_EN
3-205
Synchronism-checked close enable for autoreclose control
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-307
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Active
305 003
ASC: MC op. mode PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Voltagechecked 2: Sync.-checked 3: Volt./sync.checked

*
MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx 010 048 001 076 001 077 001 078 ASC: MC delta Vmax PSx 000 080 000 081 000 082 000 083
ASC: MC op. mode ASC: Phi offset PS PSx 000 056 018 034 000 057 077 042 000 058 078 042 000 059 079 042 ASC: MC delta f max PSx 000 084 000 086 000 087 000 088 ASC: MC delta phi max PSx 000 089 000 091 000 092 000 093
ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx 000 052 000 053 000 054 000 055 ASC: MC tmin sync.chk PSx 000 098 000 099 000 100 000 101
ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx [ * ] VA-G VB-G VC-G VA-G VB-G VC-G
ASC: Select meas.loop PG

305 008
Vref
Vref
ASC: MC tmin sync.chk PSx [ * ] ASC: Close enable,sync.ch [ 037 084 ]
ASC: Test
305 004
ASC: MC delta Vmax PSx [ * ] ASC: Volt. sel. meas.loop [ 004 088 ] Vmax
ASC: Volt. magn. diff. [ 004 091 ] ASC: Frequ. difference [ 004 090 ] ASC: Angle difference [ 004 089 ]
ASC: MC delta f max PSx [ * ]
ASC: Phi offset PSx [ * ] corr
ASC: MC delta phi max PSx [ * ]
47Z1113A_EN
3-206
Synchronism-checked close enable for manual close control
3-308
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage/synchronismchecked If this setting has been selected, then the close enable is issued if the conditions for voltage- or synchronism-checked closing are met.
3-207
ASC sequence control
Testing the ASC function For test purposes a close request can be issued from the integrated local control panel, the operating program or an appropriately configured binary signal input (see Figure 3-200). The sequence is similar to the manual close request from the integrated local control panel but there is no close command and it is not counted.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-309
3 Operation
(continued)
ASC counters The following ASC signals are counted:
Number of reclosures after a close request from the integrated local control panel, the operating program or a binary signal input. Number of close requests Number of close rejections
The counters can be reset individually (at the address at which they are displayed) or as a group.
ASC: Manual close request

305 000
>S 1 1 >R 1
&
+ R
ASC: No. RC aft. man.clos [ 004 009 ]
MAIN: Close command [ 037 009 ] ASC: Gen. close request

306 012
+ R
ASC: No. close requests [ 009 033 ] ASC: No. close rejections [ 009 034 ]
ASC: Close rejection [ 037 086 ] MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ] 1: execute MAIN: General reset EXT [ 005 255 ] ASC: Reset counters EXT [ 006 074 ] ASC: Reset counters USER [ 003 089 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute
+ R
47Z1377B_EN
3-208
ASC counters
3-310
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.29 Ground fault (short-circuit) protection (Function Group GFSC) In the event of single-phase high-resistance faults, the measured fault data are often insufficient for fault detection and selective clearing by the distance protection function. To cover for this situation, ground fault (short-circuit) protection is integrated into the protection device as a highly sensitive backup protection function. Consequently, ground fault (short-circuit) protection is operating in parallel with and independently of distance protection. Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection The activation of the function is enabled generally (independently of parameter subsets) via GFSC: G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset via G F S C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, the GFSC protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The local control panel or operating program and the binary signal inputs have equal status in this regard. If only the G F S C : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned to a binary signal input, then the GFSC protection is enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and it is disabled by a negative edge. If only the GFSC: D i s a b l e EXT function is assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-311
3 Operation
(continued)
GFSC: General enable USER [ 018 060 ] 0 1
0: No 1: Yes GFSC: Enable PSx [ * ]
0 1 0: No 1: Yes INP: Fct. assign. U xxx [ xxx xxx ] Ux1 Ux2 Ux3 Uxx Address Address GFSC: Enable EXT [ 039 095 ] GFSC: Enable USER [ 003 138 ] 0 1 GFSC: Disable EXT [ 039 096 ] 0: don't execute 1: execute GFSC: Ausschalten BED [ 003 137 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute GFSC: Protection active
306 001 310 002
GFSC: Enabled [ 038 094 ]
039 095 039 096
GFSC: Ext. enabled [ 039 097 ]
GFSC: Ready [ 039 093 ] GFSC: Not ready [ 039 094 ]
GFSC: Blocked Parameter set set set set

3-209
1 2 3 4
GFSC: Enable PSx 018 072 018 073 018 074 018 075
47Z1117A_EN
Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection (for description of blocks: see next figure)
3-312
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Measured variables for the GFSC function Depending on the setting the neutral-displacement voltage used is either the value calculated by the P437 or the measured value of the neutral-point displacement voltage. As a value for the calculated neutral-displacement voltage, ground fault (short-circuit) protection uses measurements of the same phase-to-ground voltages measured by distance protection. From these voltages the P437 calculates the neutral-displacement voltage VNG. With the second option (measured value), it is possible to establish ground fault (shortcircuit) protection (GFSC) and its associated ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling (GSCSG) irrespective of the installed system voltage transformers. As the measured value for the neutral-point displacement voltage, ground fault (shortcircuit) protection (GFSC) uses the neutral-displacement voltage formed externally via the fourth voltage measuring input, for example the neutral-displacement voltage from the open delta winding of the voltage transformers (see section "Conditioning of Measured Variables") The residual current IN is drawn from a separate transformer in the P437 that is looped into the phase current transformer neutral or connected to a Holmgreen group. The connection example shown in the section entitled "Conditioning of Measured Variables" shows the transformer looped into the current transformer neutral. Blocking ground fault (short-circuit) protection If the calculated value for the neutral-displacement voltage is used then ground fault (short-circuit) protection is blocked should the signal M C M O N : M e a s . c i r c . V fa u l ty = 'Yes' is present. With the second option (measured value) GFSC is not blocked by this signal as an other measuring circuit is used. The signal M AIN : M .c .b . tr i p VN G EXT is used instead.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-313
3 Operation
(continued)
GFSC: Blocking EXT [ 043 068 ] MCMON: Meas. circ. V faulty [ 038 023 ] GFSC: Evaluation VNG [ 002 136 ] 1 2 1: Calculated 2: Measured MAIN: M.c.b. trip VNG EXT [ 002 183 ] 300ms GFSC: Fct.a ssign. blocking [ 006 020 ] MAIN: CB open >=1p [ 031 039 ] MAIN: General starting [ 036 000 ] DIST: Aus Meldung [ 036 009 ] ARC: Dead time 1p running [ 037 066 ] LOGIC: Output 1 [ 042 032 ] m out of n 0
GFSC: Blocked
310 002
SFMON: M.c.b. trip VNG [ 098 132 ]
. . .
LOGIC: Output 32 [ 042 094 ] Any of the selected cond. occurs 47Z1307B_EN
3-210
Blocking ground fault (short-circuit) protection
VN-G
GFSC: Evaluation VNG [ 002 136 ] 2 1 1 ... 2 1: calculated 2: measured
VA-G VB-G VC-G
GFSC: VNG
310 001
0.7*Vnom/ GFSC: Voltage showing

303 953
47Z1115A_EN
3-211
Selecting the measured variable
3-314
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Starting The digitally filtered fundamental waves of current and voltage are measured. They are monitored to determine whether they exceed set thresholds (G F SC : IN > and G F S C : V N G > ). If both thresholds have been exceeded, a settable timer stage (G F S C : S t a r t . o p e r . d e l a y ) is started. Once the trigger has dropped out, the starting persists until the settable release delay ( G F SC : Sta r t. r e l e a s . d e l a y ) has elapsed. Directional measurement is enabled if the current reaches 70 % of the set threshold (G F SC : IN > ) and the voltage exceeds the trigger threshold (G F SC : VN G > ).
GFSC: Ready [ 039 093 ]
GFSC: IN> [ 018 063 ] GFSC: IN> triggered [ 039 088 ]
IN
IN / 0.7
GFSC: Direct. determ.enabl. [ 043 061 ]
GFSC: VNG> [ 018 062 ] GFSC: VNG

310 001
GFSC: Start. oper. delay [ 018 064 ] GFSC: Start. releas. delay [ 018 065 ]
GFSC: VNG> triggered [ 039 089 ]
GFSC: Starting [ 038 096 ] GFSC: IN filtered
303 951
GFSC: VNG filtered
303 950
47Z1114A_EN
3-212
Starting
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-315
3 Operation
(continued)
Directional tripping The P437 determines the angle between the residual current and the neutraldisplacement voltage for the direction determination. The measured angle is displayed. The position of the straight line separating forward and backward directions is determined with the setting G F SC : An g l e p h i G . A forward or backward-directional decision results if the following angle conditions are met: Forward direction:
(90 + G ) > (270 + G ) (90 + G ) < (270 + G )
Backward (reverse) direction: where:
: Measured angle between the residual current and the neutral-point displacement voltage G:
Setting G F S C : A n g l e p h i G
The directional decisions (G F SC : F a u l t fo r w a r d /L S and G F SC : F a u l t b a c k w a r d / B S ) are followed by timer stages G F SC : t1 ( fo r w a r d ) and G F SC : t2 ( b a c k w a r d ) . Once the timer stages have elapsed, a trip signal is issued.
3-213
Directional characteristic Angle phiG corresponds to the setting G F S C : A n g l e p h i G
3-316
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Improved directional measurement for series-compensated line applications
Ground fault protection is based on the assumption of inductive zero-sequence source impedances. In case of series compensated lines with a high compensation degree this condition may not be fulfilled. The following figures show the measuring conditions of GFSC for forward and backward (reverse) short-circuits. Problematic is the measurement of line side faults: Due to the line side VT, the measured voltage results from the voltage drop caused by the zerosequence current across the (inductive) equivalent source impedance ZS0(fwd) and the series-capacitance XC0. Depending on whether the source reactance is bigger or smaller than the series capacitance the voltage is inductive or capacitive versus the zero-sequence current. Problems will occur for a high compensation degree (big XC0) and for strong sources (small XS0(fwd)). The fault location or distance to the fault does not matter at all. For backward (reverse) faults, this problem needs not to be considered, as the source impedance then is always inductive. Adding a current-proportional voltage to the measured voltage ("cross-polarization") as follows solved this problem:
V ( GFSC ) = V meas + jX 0 I 0 = Z S 0( fwd ) jX C 0 + jX 0 I 0

X0 is settable at G F SC : C o mp . R e a c ta n c e X0 , the recommended setting is X0 = XC0, so that the same condition as on a normal inductive line is obtained:
V (GFSC ) = Z S 0( fwd ) I 0
The ground fault starting condition VNG> remains using the directly measured neutral displacement voltage. In order to secure that directional measurement is only done with a reliably high absolute value of the line-to-line voltage V(GFSC), this value must always exceed a minimum of 50 mV.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-317
3 Operation
(continued)
1pG faults forward (on the line)

-jXC0
To neg.-sequ. system neutral
ZL0
Imeas = IN = 1/3 I0
Z S0(fwd)
Vmeas = VNG = - V0 = ( ZS0(fwd) - jXC0) * I0
Via RF to pos.-sequ. system
Zero-sequence equivalent network and measurands
Backward Vmeas (capacitive, if Im{ZS0(fwd)} < XC0)
Vmeas (inductive, if Im{ZS0(fwd)} > XC0)
Forward
Typical directional characteristic (for inductive OHL application)
Imeas = IN = 1/3 I0
Phasor relations (resistances neglected)

47Z11X1A_EN
3-214
Zero-sequence fault measurands on series compensated lines faults in forward direction
3-318
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
1pG faults backward

To neg.-sequ. system neutral
-jXC0
ZL0
Imeas = - IN = - 1/3 I0
Vmeas = VNG = - V0 = ( ZL0 + ZS0(bwd) ) * I0
ZS0(bwd)
Via RF to pos.-sequ. system Zero-sequence equivalent network and measurands
Imeas Backward Vmeas (always inductive!)
Forward
Typical directional characteristic (for inductive OHL application)
IN = 1 /3 I0
Phasor relations (resistances neglected)

47Z11X2A_EN
3-215
Zero-sequence fault measurands on series compensated lines faults in backward (reverse) direction
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-319
3 Operation
(continued)
Improved phase selection
In cases with very high fault resistances the neutral displacement voltage is too small to get a starting of P437 ground fault protection. Also the faulty phase selection based on distance starting could not be secured in such cases, and so no 1pole trip of ground fault signalling could be obtained. To resolve these issues, the following is done:
Faulty phase selection
If neutral overcurrent starting (GFSC IN>) operates, then the relay checks whether the faulty phase could be determined based on a delta- current measurement (where the delta is calculated over a 5 cycle period). This delta measurement is only done at the IN> starting. Its valid result is memorised until the IN> trigger resets. The phase selection is further depending on the operation of the distance function:
If DIST has identified a multi-phase(-to-ground)fault, then the above phase-selection is disabled. If DIST has identified a single phase-to-ground fault, then this phase is used.
These signals are used to provide 1-pole tripping of ground fault signaling function (GSCSG) if no phase selection by distance starting is available (initiating 1p HSR cycle, as previously guided by distance starting) and to apply virtual current polarisation technique (see below).
If sufficient neutral displacement voltage is present (VNG> starting), then GFSC uses this voltage for directional measurement. Otherwise, virtual current polarisation is applied, i.e. based on the determination of the faulty phase the relay calculates the polarising voltage as sum of the 2 healthy phase voltages, e.g. for an AG fault:
Vpol = VBN + VCN
This Vpol is equal to the inverted faulty-phase voltage, so it is clearly high enough to secure reliable measurement. Ideally, for VNG = 0 this polarising voltage gets Vpol = VBN + VCN = -VAN where the - sign is automatically taken into consideration in the direction determination. To provide backwards compatible operation, this method needs to be enabled by user, setting G F S C : V i r t u a l c u r r e n t p o l . to Yes.
3-320
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-216
GFSC Phase selection and optional virtual current polarisation
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-321
3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage-dependent or current-dependent tripping
By setting operating mode tS, the user can choose between voltage-dependent or current-dependent tripping. After the voltage-dependent or current-dependent time has elapsed, a trip signal is issued either independently of the directional decision or when there is a directional decision for the forward direction depending on the setting at GFSC: Criteria tS active.
Voltage-dependent tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection enables determination of the voltagedependent tripping time. Tripping time tS is calculated as follows.
tA = 10 2s 1 V N G 0.6364 1.1 Vnom 3 0.2
s 45 40 35 30 Tripping time 25 20 15 10 5 0 0 1
Time-Voltage Characteristic (for Vnom = 100 V)
10 V
Voltage VN-G
47Z0129A
3-217
Voltage-time characteristic
3-322
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-218
Forming the voltage-dependent trip signal
Current-dependent tripping
Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection enables determination of the currentdependent tripping time. The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table below). If the current exceeds 1.05 times the set reference current, calculation of the tripping time begins. A trip signal is issued as a function of the set characteristic. The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in figures 3-219 to 3-222.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-323
3 Operation
(continued)
No Tripping . Characteristic
Formula for the Tripping Characteristic
Constants
k = 0.01...10.00 0 Definite Time Per IEC 255-3

t=k
t =k
A I I ref 1
0.14 13.50 80.00 120.00 0.02 1.00 2.00 1.00
B
1 Standard Inverse 2 Very Inverse 3 Extremely Inverse 4 Long Time Inverse Per IEEE C37.112
A t = k C + B I 1 I ref
5 Moderately Inverse 6 Very Inverse 7 Extremely Inverse Per ANSI

A t = k + C B I 1 I ref
0.0515 19.6100 28.2000
0.0200 2.0000 2.0000
0.1140 0.4910 0.1217
8 Normally Inverse 9 Short Time Inverse 10 Long Time Inverse 11 RI-Type Inverse
t =k 1 0.339 0.236 I Iref

8.9341 0.2663 5.6143
2.0938 0.17966 1.2969 0.03393 1.0000 2.18592
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse
I t = k 5.8 1.35 ln I ref
3-324
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse 1000 1000
IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
100 k=10 10
100
10 k=1
k=10
t/s
1
t/s
1 k=1
k=0.1 0.1 k=0.01 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 k=0.01 0.1 k=0.1
I/Iref
D5Z50K1A
I/Iref
D5Z50K2A
Characteristic No. 1
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse 1000 1000
IEC 255-3, Long-Time Inverse
100
100
k=10
10
10 k=10
t/s
1
t/s
1
k=1
k=0.1
k=1 0.1 k=0.1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0.1 k=0.01
0.01
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
k=0.01
D5Z50K3A
I/Iref
D5Z50K4A
Characteristic No. 3 3-219 Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-325
3 Operation
(continued)
1000
IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse
IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse 1000
100
100
10
k=10
10
t/s
1 k=1
t/s
1
k=10
k=1
0,1
k=0,1
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.01
0,01
k=0,01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
I/Iref
D5Z50K5B
D5Z50K6B
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse 1000
100
10
t/s
1
k=10
k=1 0.1 k=0.1 k=0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.01
I/Iref
D5Z50K7B
Characteristic No. 7 3-220 Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112
3-326
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI, Normally Inverse 1000 1000
ANSI, Short-Time Inverse
100
100
10
10 k=10
t/s
1
t/s
1 k=10
k=1 0.1 k=0.1 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 k=0.01 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0.1 k=1 k=0.1
I/Iref
D5Z50K8B
I/Iref
D5Z50K9B
ANSI, Long-Time Inverse 1000
100 k=10 10
t/s
1
k=1
k=0.1 0.1 k=0.01 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50KAB
Characteristic No. 10 3-221 Tripping characteristics as per ANSI
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-327
3 Operation
(continued)
RI-Type Inverse 1000 1000
RXIDG-Type Inverse
100 k=10 10
100 k=10 10 k=1
t/s
1
t/s
1
k=1
k=0.1 0.1 k=0.01 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.01
I/Iref
D5Z50KBA
I/Iref
D5Z50KCA
Characteristic No. 11 3-222 RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics
3-328
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-223
Forming the current-dependent trip signal
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-329
3 Operation
(continued)
Non-directional tripping Starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection starts settable timer stage t3. Once t3 and tS have elapsed, a trip signal is issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection.
3-224
Forming the trip signal Note: After timer stage t1 or t2 has elapsed, a trip signal is issued and remains present until the starting drops off even if the direction decision changes or is reset. This latching is not shown in the diagram.
3-330
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Counters The trip signals issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection are counted. The counter can be reset either at the counter address or by a general reset action.
3-225
Counting the trip signals
Monitoring the measured variables If only one of the two triggers has responded (IN> or VNG>), and if at least one of the phase-to-ground voltages exceeds 0.7 Vnom/3, a signal will be issued after 10 s.
3-226
Monitoring the measured variables
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-331
3 Operation
(continued)
3.30 Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling (Function Group GSCSG) Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is equipped with a ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling function so that selective instantaneous tripping will be possible. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling operates in parallel with and independently of the protective signaling function of distance protection. Only when a common communication channel is used is it necessary to block the protective signaling echo. Furthermore, measures for blocking the weak infeed logic of distance protection protective signaling are implemented in the Signal comp. release operating mode. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is coordinated with distance protection protective signaling through appropriate time delays. Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling The activation of the function is enabled generally (independently of parameter subsets) via G S C S G : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset via G S C S G : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The local control panel or operating program and the binary signal inputs have equal status in this regard. If only the function G S C S G : E n a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and it is disabled by a negative edge. If only the function GSCSG: D i s a b l e EXT is assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
3-332
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-227
Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-333
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling, enabling, and readiness of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is ready if the following conditions are satisfied:

Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is enabled. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is ready. There is no external blocking. No fault has been detected in the communication channel. The GFSC function is not inhibited by either M C M O N : M e a s . c i r c . V fa u l ty (in case G F S C : E v a l u a t i o n V N G = Calculated) or by M A I N : M . c .b . t r i p V N G EXT (in case G F S C : E v a l u a t i o n V N G = Measured). None of the conditions selected with G SC SG : F c t.a s s i g n . b l o c k i n g has been detected.
External blocking is carried out either via a binary signal input configured for G SC SG : Bl o c k i n g EXT or via a binary signal input configured for PSIG : Bl o c k i n g EXT , depending on the operating mode setting for the communication channel. The fault signal of the external signal transmission device can be either connected to a binary signal input, configured for G SC SG : T e l e c o m . fa u l ty EXT or to a binary signal input, configured for PSIG : T e l e c .fa u l ty ( A) EXT or PSIG : T e l e c .fa u l ty ( B) EXT depending on the operating mode setting for the communication channel. The condition for blocking the ground fault protection scheme logic is user settable at G SC SG : F c t.a s s i g n . b l o c k i n g because of sometimes conflicting application restraints. Some considerations about the various blocking conditions are given below: Blocking with CB auxiliary contacts: If distance starting resets, but the trip signal is still present (e.g. because of the presence of parallel or transfer trip signals), then the start of the 1-pole dead time of internal autoreclosing is delayed. In order to prevent a 3-pole trip decision from GSCSG now (as phase selection is no longer possible), GSCSG needs to be blocked by using the CBs auxiliary contacts. No instant blocking with 1-pole distance trip: If one (strong infeed) end issues a fast zone 1 distance 1-pole trip, then previously GSCSG was blocked almost immediately. At the remote (weak infeed) end only GFSC senses the fault. In order to allow a fast tripping of GSCSG at the remote end under this condition, the function must remain active at the strong infeed end as long as possible, i.e. until a "CB open" condition is signaled. Comm. link fault signal The status signal G SC SG : T e l e c o m . fa u l ty is available in conjunction with the implementation of the protective interface. This signal is set by the logic binary function G SC SG : T e l e c o m . fa u l ty EXT as well as by C O M M 3 : C o m m u n i c a ti o n s fa u l t if the parameter C O M M 3 : Si g .a s g . c o m m .fa u l t has been set accordingly.
3-334
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)

306 001
GSCSG: Not ready [ 043 058 ]
GSCSG: Enabled [ 023 070 ] GFSC: Not ready [ 039 094 ] GSCSG: Channel mode [ 023 078 ] 1 2 1: independent channel 2: common channel GSCSG: Blocking EXT [ 043 052 ] PSIG: Blocking EXT [ 036 049 ] GSCSG: Telecom faulty EXT [ 043 053 ] PSIG: Telec. faulty (A) EXT [ 004 064 ] PSIG: Telec. faulty (B) EXT [ 008 094 ] COMM3: Communications fault [ 120 043 ] SFMON: Telecom faulty/GFSIG [ 098 027 ] GSCSG: Ready [ 043 057 ]
PSIG: Telecom. faulty [ 036 060 ] COMM3: Sig.asg. comm.fault [ 120 034 ] 0 1 2 3 0: None 1: Telecom. faulty/PSIG 2: Telecom. faulty/GSCSG 3: Both signals
DIST: Trip signal [ 036 009 ] GSCSG: Fct. assign. blocking [ 002 180 ] 031 039 036 000 036 009 037 066 042 032 ....... 042 094 ARC: Dead time 1p running [ 037 066 ] 47Z1418A_EN
Address
Description
031 039 MAIN: CB open >=1p 036 000 MAIN: General starting 036 009 DIST: Trip signal 037 066 ARC: PDead time 1p running 042 032 LOGIC: Output 1 ....... .......... 042 094 LOGIC: Output 32
3-228
Readiness of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-335
3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping time If ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is ready, then the tripping time is started by ground fault (short-circuit) with forward direction. If virtual current polarisation is active, the tripping time is started by triggering IN>.
GSCSG: Tripping time [023 075]
GSCSG: Ready [ 043 057 ] GFSC: Fault forward / LS [ 039 090 ]
&
GSCSG: Tripping time elaps. [043 063]
&
GFSC: Virtual current pol. [ 006 009 ] GFSC: IN> triggered [ 039 088 ] 47Z1325A_EN
3-229
Tripping time of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
3-336
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency monitoring Failure of frequency transmission can be signaled to the P437 via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Which inputs are activated is determined by the channel operating mode setting (G SC SG : C h a n n e l m o d e ). If ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling uses a different communication channel than protective signaling, then the following occurs, as long as frequency monitoring has been enabled: When the binary signal input configured for G SC SG . F r e q u . m o n . t r i g d . E X T is triggered, the P437 allows an operate delay of approximately 20 ms to elapse and then generates a receive signal for 150 ms.
3-230
Frequency monitoring
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-337
3 Operation
(continued)
Transient blocking If the fault backward / BS decision of the ground fault (short-circuit) protection drops out, ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling will generate a blocking signal for the set time period (GSCSG: tBl o c k ). The device will issue the signal G SC SG : T r a n s i e n t b l o c k i n g .
GSCSG: tBlock [ 023 077 ] GFSC: Fault backward / BS [ 039 091 ] GSCSG: Transient blocking [ 037 254 ]
GFSC: Direct. determ.enabl. [ 043 061 ]
47Z1072C_EN
3-231
Transient blocking
Operating modes of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling and the communication channel Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling can be operated in two different modes: Signal comparison release or Signal comparison blocking. For the communication channel, the user can specify whether ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling will use a different communication channel than distance protection protective signaling or whether the same channel will be used. If the same communication channel is being used, then the operating mode settings for protective signaling and ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling must be identical. Otherwise there will be a fault signal (see section entitled 'Protective Signaling').
3-338
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Signal comparison release scheme If ground fault (short-circuit) protection detects a fault in the forward direction, a signal is sent to the remote station without time delay. In the event of a directional change from backward (reverse) to forward, the send signal is sent after the transient blocking has elapsed. The circuit breaker in the remote station is tripped if the following conditions are satisfied:

There is a receive signal. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection has detected a fault in the forward direction. The tripping time of the ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling function has elapsed. No transient blocking has been set.
If ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling and distance protection protective signaling use a common communication channel, then blocking of the weak infeed logic of distance protection protective signaling will be implemented if the following conditions are satisfied:
The tripping time of the ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling function has elapsed. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection has detected a fault in the backward (reverse) direction.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-339
3 Operation
(continued)
GSCSG: Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG: Operating mode

[ 023 079 ] 1 2 &
1: Signal comp. release 2: Signal comp. block. GSCSG: Channel mode

[ 023 078 ] 1 2
1: Independent channel 2: Common channel
GSCSG: Release time send [ 023 076 ]

0 t
&
&
GSCSG: Send signal

043 059
GFSC: Fault forward / LS [ 039 090 ]

[
&
GSCSG: Send internal signal

304 002
GSCSG: Tripping time elaps.

043 063 ]
GSCSG: Transient blocking

037 254 ]
&
GSCSG: Trip signal

043 060
& [
GSCSG: Receive EXT PSIG: Receive GSCSG: Frequ.mon. triggered

304 000 305 165
>1 -
043 055
&
&
GSCSG: Bl. PSIG weak infeed

304 003
GFSC: Fault backward / BS

039 091 ]
47Z0138A_EN 47Z1038A_EN
3-232
GSCSG send signal and trip signal in the 'Signal comp. release' mode and blocking of the weak infeed logic of distance protection protective signaling
3-340
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Signal comparison blocking scheme If ground fault (short-circuit) protection detects a fault in the backward direction, a signal is sent to the remote station. In the event of a directional change from backward to forward, the send signal is extended for the set duration of transient blocking. Depending on the setting at G SC SG : Bl o c k . s i g . n o n d i r ., a send signal is already generated if directional measurement of ground fault (short-circuit) protection has been enabled and ground fault (short-circuit) protection has not decided in favor of the forward direction. The circuit breaker in the remote station is tripped if the following conditions are satisfied:

There is no receive signal. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection has detected a fault in the forward direction. The tripping time of the ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling function has elapsed. No transient blocking has been set.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-341
3 Operation
(continued)
GSCSG: Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG: Operating mode

[ 023 079 ]
1 2 1: Signal comp. release 2: Signal comp. block. GSCSG: Channel mode

[ 023 078 ] &
1 2 1: Independent channel 2: Common channel GSCSG: Release time send

[ 023 076 ]
GFSC: Fault backward / BS

039 091 ]
>1 -
&
&
[ &
GSCSG: Send signal

043 059
GSCSG: Transient blocking

037 254 ]
GSCSG: Send internal signal

304 002
GSCSG: Block. sig. nondir.

[ 023 089 ] 0 1 &
0: No 1: Yes GFSC: Direct. determ.enabl. [ 043 061 ] GFSC: Fault forward / LS [ 039 090 ] GSCSG: Tripping time elaps. [ 043 063 ] GSCSG: Receive EXT [ 043 055 ] PSIG: Receive
305 165
&
GSCSG: Trip signal

[ 043 060
& &
>1 -
GSCSG: Frequ.mon. triggered

304 000
160
47Z1039A_EN 47Z0139A_EN
3-233
GSCSG send signal and trip signal in the 'Signal comp. blocking' mode'
3-342
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Weak infeed logic Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling P437 has a weak infeed logic function that makes tripping possible if ground fault (short-circuit) protection does not start. The user has the option of choosing whether in this case the trip signal will be issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling when there is a directional decision by ground fault (short-circuit) protection in the forward direction or when the G F S C : V N G > trigger value is exceeded.
3-234
Weak infeed logic
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-343
3 Operation
(continued)
Trip mode Depending on the G SC SG : T r i p m o d e setting, ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling can trigger a single-pole or three-pole trip that can activate the ARC function. If the trip mode setting is 1/3-pole trip w. HSR, then when there is single-pole starting of the distance protection function there will be a trip in the phase in which the starting condition is present. When there is multi-pole starting of the distance protection function, ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling will reach a three-pole trip decision. If one of the other two operating modes has been set, then ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling always generates a three-pole trip. If the operating mode is 3p-pole trip w/o. HSR, then the ARC will be blocked by a trip generated by ground fault (shortcircuit) protection signaling.
GSCSG: Trip mode [ 023 088 ] 1 2 3 1: 1/3-pole trip w.HSR 2: 3p-pole trip w.HSR 2: 3p-pole trip w/o.HSR GSCSG: Trip signal [ 043 060 ] DIST: Starting A
303 529
GSCSG: Trip A
304 004
GSCSG: Trip B
304 005
DIST: Starting B
303 530
GSCSG: Trip C
304 006
DIST: Starting C
303 531
MAIN: Short circuit AG [ 006 011 ] MAIN: Short circuit BG [ 006 012 ] MAIN: Short circuit CG [ 006 013 ]
GSCSG: Blocking ARC

304 008
47Z1323B_EN
3-235
Trip mode
3-344
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Echo function When a signal is received, an echo pulse can be formed depending on the setting if ground fault (short-circuit) protection has not detected a fault in the backward direction. The receive signal must be present for a period longer than the set operate delay in order for the echo pulse to be activated. If the circuit breaker is in the open position, then the operate delay is not active. The echo pulse is transmitted to the remote station for the set pulse duration. When the echo pulse is activated, a set blocking time is also started, during the course of which a new echo pulse is prevented. This prevents a permanent signal from being transmitted.
GSCSG: Echo on receive [ 023 080 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes GSCSG: Channel mode [ 023 078 ] 1 2 1: independent channel 2: common channel GSCSG: Operate delay echo [ 023 081 ] GSCSG: Pulse duration echo [ 023 082 ] GSCSG: Send signal [ 043 059 ] GFSC: IN> triggered [ 039 088 ] S1 1 R1 GSCSG: Send internal signal
304 002
GSCSG: Receive EXT [ 043 055 ] PSIG: Receive

305 165
GSCSG: Frequ.mon. triggered

304 000
MAIN: CB closed 3p [ 031 042 ] GSCSG: tBlock echo [ 023 083 ]
47Z1324C_EN
3-236
Echo function
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-345
3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the communication channel The communication link can be tested. For this purpose a 500 ms send signal is issued through a binary signal input or from the local control panel. It is extended by the set release time of the send signal. The remote station receives this signal if the transmission link is OK.
3-237
Testing the communication channel
3-346
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.31 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group DTOC) A four-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC) can be activated concurrently with the distance protection. Three separate measuring systems are available for this purpose for:

Maximum phase current Negative-sequence current Residual current
When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the first stage of DTOC protection is blocked. Enabling or disabling DTOC protection DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-238
Disabling or enabling DTOC protection
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-347
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the maximum phase current The three phase currents are monitored to determine whether they exceed the set thresholds. After the set operate delay periods have elapsed, a signal is issued. The elapsing of the operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
DTOC: Blocking tI> EXT

041 060 ]
MAIN: Inrush stabil. trigg

306 014
&

306 001
&
DTOC: Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
DTOC: I> PSx

[ * ]
>1 -
DTOC: tI> PSx

[ * ]
IA IB IC DTOC: Blocking tI>> EXT

041 061 ] c
DTOC: tI> elapsed

[ 040 010 ]
DTOC: Starting I>

[ 035 020 ]
DTOC: tI>> PSx

[ * ]
DTOC: I>> PSx

[ * ]
>1 -
DTOC: tI>> elapsed

040 011
[ [
DTOC: Starting I>>

035 021 ]
DTOC: Blocking tI>>>EXT

041 062 ] c
DTOC: I>>> PSx

[ * ]
>1 -
DTOC: tI>>> PSx

[ * ]
DTOC: tI>>> elapsed

040 012
[ [
DTOC: Starting I>>>

035 022 ]
DTOC: Blocking tI>>>> EXT

041 100 ] c
DTOC: I>>>> PSx

[ * ]
> -1
DTOC: tI>>>> PSx

[ * ]
DTOC: tI>>>> elapsed

035 032
[ *
DTOC: Starting I>>>>

035 023 ]
DTOC: I> PSx

072 073 074 075 007 007 007 007
DTOC: I>> PSx

072 073 074 075 008 008 008 008
DTOC: I>>> PSx

072 073 074 075 009 009 009 009
DTOC: I>>>> PSx

072 073 074 075 010 010 010 010
DTOC: tI> PSx

072 073 074 075 019 019 019 019
DTOC: tI>> PSx

072 073 074 075 020 020 020 020
DTOC: tI>>> PSx

072 073 074 075 021 021 021 021
DTOC: tI>>>> PSx

072 073 074 075 022 022 022 022
180
D5Z52ALA_EN
3-239
Monitoring the phase currents
3-348
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the negativesequence system From the three phase currents, the P437 calculates the negative-sequence current based on one of the following formulae, depending on the setting at M AIN : Ph a s e sequence: Phase sequence A-B-C: 1 2 I neg = I A + a I B + a I C 3
Phase sequence A-C-B: 1 I neg = I A + a I B + a 2 I C 3
a = e j120 a 2 = e j240
The negative-sequence current is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set thresholds. After the set operate delay periods have elapsed, a signal is issued. The operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-349
3 Operation
(continued)
D5Z52AMB_EN
3-240
Monitoring the negative-sequence current for the settings D T O C : t I n e g > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x (002 160) to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x = 'Normal'. (For setting 'Blocked' see figure 3-246)
3-350
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the residual current Depending on the setting, the P437 monitors the fundamental wave of the residual current, derived from the three phase currents or measured at the T4 transformer.
3-241
The residual current is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set thresholds. After the set operate delay periods have elapsed, a signal is issued. The operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-351
3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: Blocking tIN> EXT [ 041 063 ] MAIN: Inrush stabil. trigg
306 014

306 001
DTOC: Enabled [ 040 120 ] DTOC: IN

402 625
DTOC: IN> PSx [ *
DTOC: tIN> PSx [ *
] DTOC: tIN> elapsed [ 035 037 ] DTOC: Starting IN> [ 035 028 ] ] DTOC: tIN>> elapsed [ 035 038 ] DTOC: Starting IN>> [ 035 029 ]
DTOC: Blocking tIN>> EXT [ 041 064 ]
DTOC: IN>> PSx [ *
DTOC: tIN>> PSx [ *
DTOC: Block. tIN>>> EXT [ 041 065 ]
DTOC: IN>>> PSx [ *
DTOC: tIN>>> PSx [ * ] DTOC: tIN>>> elapsed [ 035 039 ] DTOC: Starting IN>>> [ 035 030 ]
DTOC: Block. tIN>>>> EXT [ 041 101 ] DTOC: IN>>>> PSx [ * ] DTOC: tIN>>>> PSx [ * ]
DTOC: tIN>>>> elapsed [ 035 040 ] DTOC: Starting IN>>>> [ 035 031 ]
*
DTOC: IN> PSx 072 015 073 015 074 015 075 015 DTOC: tIN> PSx 072 027 073 027 074 027 075 027
DTOC: IN>> PSx 072 016 073 016 074 016 075 016 DTOC: tIN>> PSx 072 028 073 028 074 028 075 028
DTOC: IN>>> PSx 072 017 073 017 074 017 075 017 DTOC: tIN>>> PSx 072 029 073 029 074 029 075 029
DTOC: IN>>>> PSx 072 018 073 018 074 018 075 018 DTOC: tIN>>>> PSx 072 030 073 030 074 030 075 030
47Z1170A_EN
3-242
Monitoring the residual current with the setting D T O C : t I N t i m e r s t a r t P S x (002 138) = 'With starting' and D T O C : tIN> (1pHSR) PSx (002 144) to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x = 'Normal'. For other settings the expanded logic is valid as shown in figures 3-247 and 3-248.
3-352
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Direction-dependent trip of the residual current stages The P432 determines the angle between the residual current and the neutraldisplacement voltage for the direction determination. The direction determination is enabled when a current stage is started and the neutral-displacement voltage exceeds the set threshold DTOC: VN G > PSx. The measured angle is displayed. The position of the straight line separating forward and backward (reverse) directions is determined with the setting D T O C : An g l e p h i G . A forward or backward-directional decision results if the following angle conditions are met: Forward direction: Backward (reverse) direction: where: : G: Measured angle between the residual current and the neutral-point displacement voltage Setting D T O C : A n g l e p h i G
(90 + G ) > (270 + G ) (90 + G ) < (270 + G )
3-243
Directional characteristic of the definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC). Angle phiG corresponds to the setting D T O C : A n g l e p h i G (004 092)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-353
3 Operation
(continued)
3-244
Direction measurement of the definite-time overcurrent protection (DTOC)
After the operate delay has elapsed, a trip signal of the respective residual current stage is issued if the set direction matches the measured direction.
3-354
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-245
Trip signals of the DTOC residual current stages
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-355
3 Operation
(continued)
Settable timer start condition of the residual current system The triggering of the timers for the residual current system can be set as directiondependent by setting the following parameter: D T O C : t I N t i m e r s ta r t P S x = With direction The timers only start if the relevant OC threshold is exceeded and the direction measured corresponds to the set direction of the respective stage: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: D i r e c ti o n D i r e c ti o n D i r e c ti o n D i r e c ti o n tIN> PSx tIN>> PSx tIN > > > PSx tIN > > > > PSx
The relevant settings are: Forward directional Backward directional Non-directional This expanded logic is displayed in figure 3-248.
3-356
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Settable operation mode during 1-pole dead time of HSR As of version P437 -610 the operation mode of each residual current system timer stage and negative-sequence overcurrent timer stage during the 1-pole dead time of the highspeed reclosure (HSR) of an ARC cycle may now be set individually. The following setting parameters are available for the neutral OC elements: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: tIN> (1pHSR) PSx tIN>> (1pHSR) PSx tIN > > > ( 1 p H SR ) PSx tIN > > > > ( 1 p H SR ) PSx
The relevant settings are: Normal: No change for the DTOC timer stage during a 1-pole dead time. Non-directional: The directional decision is ignored during the 1-pole dead time; the DTOC timer stage operates as if it where set to 'Non-directional'. Blocked: During a 1-pole dead time the DTOC timer stage is automatically blocked. If a starting was present it will be reset. The time delay stage is also reset. The same is valid for the negative-sequence elements, but here there are only two setting options available: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: tIneg> (1pHSR) tIneg>> (1pHSR) tIneg>> (1pHSR) tIneg>> (1pHSR) PSx PSx PSx PSx
The relevant settings are: Normal Blocked
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-357
3 Operation
(continued)
Neutralizing directional operation by binary signal inputs For each residual current system timer stage, a binary signal input is provided to disable directional operation. While this binary input signal is TRUE, the stage operates nondirectional. If the stage is set to 'non-directional', then this input has no influence. DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: Block. dir. tIN> EXT Blck. dir. tIN>> EXT Bl k . d i r . tIN > > > EXT Bl . d i r . tIN > > > > EXT
Note: This input function may also be applied to block the directional operation should a measuring circuit failure occur (by using the signal from the associated m.c.b.).
DTOC: tIneg> (1pHSR) PSx [ * ] 0 1 ARC: Dead time 1p running [ 037 066 ] DTOC: Blocking tIneg> EXT [ 041 102 ] DTOC: Starting Ineg> [ 035 024 ]
*
0: normal 1: blocked
& >1
DTOC: tIneg> PSx [ * ] t 0 DTOC: tIneg> elapsed [ 035 033 ]
DTOC: tIneg> (1pHSR) PSx 002 160 002 161 002 162 002 163
DTOC: tIneg> PSx 072 023 073 023 074 023 075 023
47Z1119A_EN
3-246
DTOC operation of negative-sequence elements show for the stage Ineg> with the setting D T O C : tIneg> (1pHSR) PSx (002 160) to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x = 'Blocked'.
3-358
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: tIN> (1pHSR) PSx [ *
] 0 1 2
& >1
DTOC: tIN> DTOC: Direction (1pHSR) PSx tIN> PSx 002 144 072 032 002 145 072 042 002 146 072 082 002 147 072 091
DTOC: tIN> PSx 072 027 073 027 074 027 075 027
0: Normal 1: Non-directional 2: Blocked ARC: Dead time 1p running [ 037 066 ] DTOC: Blocking tIN> EXT [ 041 063 ]
& >1 &
DTOC: Trip signal tIN> [ 035 043 ]
DTOC: Fault N forward [ 035 047 ] DTOC: Fault N backward [ 035 048 ] DTOC: Block. dir. tIN> EXT [ 002 176 ] DTOC: Direction tIN> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Non-directional
&
&
DTOC: tIN> PSx [ * t
] 0 DTOC: tIN> elapsed [ 035 037 ]

47Z1108A_EN
DTOC: Starting IN> [ 035 028 ]
3-247
DTOC operation of neutral OC elements show for the stage IN> with the setting D T O C : t I N t i m e r s t a r t P S x (002 138) = 'With starting' and D T O C : tIN> (1pHSR) PSx (002 144) to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x set to 'Non-directional or 'Blocked'.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-359
3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: tIN> (1pHSR) PSx [ *
] 0 1 2
& >1
DTOC: tIN> DTOC: Direction (1pHSR) PSx tIN> PSx 002 144 072 032 002 145 072 042 002 146 072 082 002 147 072 091
DTOC: tIN> PSx 072 027 073 027 074 027 075 027
0: Normal 1: Non-directional 2: Blocked ARC: Dead time 1p running [ 037 066 ] DTOC: Blocking tIN> EXT [ 041 063 ]
& >1
DTOC: Fault N forward [ 035 047 ] DTOC: Fault N backward [ 035 048 ] DTOC: Block. dir. tIN> EXT [ 002 176 ]
c
&
&
DTOC: Direction tIN> PSx [ * ] 1 2 3

c
DTOC: Starting IN> [ 035 028 ]

3-248
1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Non-directional
DTOC: tIN> PSx [ * t
] 0
DTOC: Trip signal tIN> [ 035 043 ] DTOC: tIN> elapsed [ 035 037 ]
47Z1107A_EN
&
DTOC operation of neutral OC elements show for the stage IN> with the setting D T O C : t I N t i m e r s t a r t P S x (002 138) = 'With direction' and D T O C : tIN> (1pHSR) PSx (002 144) to D T O C : t I N > > > > ( 1 p H S R ) P S x set to 'Non-directional or 'Blocked'.
3-360
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.32 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT) The single-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection function operates with three separate measuring systems:

Maximum phase current Negative-sequence current Residual current.
When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the IDMT function is blocked.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-361
3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling or enabling IDMT protection IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-249
Disabling or enabling IDMT protection
3-362
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Time-dependent characteristics All three measuring systems operate independently of each other and can be set separately. The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table below). The IDMT protection function can be operated in a directional or a nondirectional mode. The user may use either the directional decision from the distance measuring system or the directional decision formed from negative-sequence current and voltage. The measured variable is the maximum phase current, the negativesequence current, or the residual current, depending on the measuring system. The P437 calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current values according to this formula. The result depends on the phase sequence setting. Phase sequence A-B-C: 1 2 I neg = I A + a I B + a I C 3
Phase sequence A-C-B: 1 I neg = I A + a I B + a 2 I C 3
a = e j120 a 2 = e j240
Depending on the setting, the residual current to be monitored is either derived by the P437 from the three phase currents or measured at current transformer T 4. The protection function is triggered if 1.05 times the reference current is exceeded and the set directional condition is satisfied. A trip signal is issued as a function of the characteristic curve, although this trip signal can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input. The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in figures 3-251 to 3-254.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-363
3 Operation
(continued)
47Z1004A_EN
3-250
Forming the measured variables
Measured variable for the residual current measuring system The user can select by setting ID M T : Eva l u a ti o n IN PSx whether the value for the residual current is derived from the three phase current values or if it is measured by the fourth CT. Reference quantity for the residual current measuring system There is a reference quantity available for the measured residual current ID M T : Ir e f,N ( m e a s .) PSx with a setting range extended to small values. The reference quantity ID M T : Ir e f,N ( c a l c .) PSx with the former setting range is available for the calculated residual current value.
3-364
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
No Tripping . Characteristic
k = 0,01 ... 10,00
Formula for the Tripping Characteristic
Constants
Formula for the Reset Characteristic B C R
A
t=k
t =k a I I ref 1
b
0 Definite Time Per IEC 255-3
1 Standard Inverse 2 Very Inverse 3 Extremely Inverse 4 Long Time Inverse Per IEEE C37.112
0.14 13.50 80.00 120.00
0.02 1.00 2.00 1.00

tr = k R I I ref 1
2
a t = k + c I b 1 I ref 0.0515 19.6100 28.2000 a t = k + c I b 1 I ref 8.9341 0.2663 5.6143

t =k 1 0.339 0.236 I I ref

5 Moderately Inverse 6 Very Inverse 7 Extremely Inverse Per ANSI
0.0200 2.0000 2.0000
0.1140 0.4910 0.1217

tr = k R I I ref 1
2
4.85 21.60 29.10
8 Normally Inverse 9 Short Time Inverse 10 Long Time Inverse 11 RI-Type Inverse
2.0938 0.17966 1.2969 0.03393 1.0000 2.18592
9.00 0.50 15.75
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse
I t = k 5.8 1.35 ln I ref
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-365
3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse 1000 1000
IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
100 k=10 10
100
10 k=1
k=10
t/s
1
t/s
1 k=1
k=0.1 0.1 k=0.01 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 k=0.01 0.1 k=0.1
I/Iref
D5Z50K1A
I/Iref
D5Z50K2A
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse 1000 1000
IEC 255-3, Long-Time Inverse
100
100
k=10
10
10 k=10
t/s
1
t/s
1
k=1
k=0.1
k=1 0.1 k=0.1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0.1 k=0.01
0.01
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
k=0.01
D5Z50K3A
I/Iref
D5Z50K4A
Characteristic No. 3 3-251 Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3
3-366
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
1000
IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse
IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse 1000
100
100
10
k=10
10
t/s
1 k=1
t/s
1
k=10
k=1
0,1
k=0,1
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.01
0,01
k=0,01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
I/Iref
D5Z50K5B
D5Z50K6B
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse 1000
100
10
t/s
1
k=10
k=1 0.1 k=0.1 k=0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.01
I/Iref
D5Z50K7B
Characteristic No. 7 3-252 Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-367
3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI, Normally Inverse 1000 1000
ANSI, Short-Time Inverse
100
100
10
10 k=10
t/s
1
t/s
1 k=10
k=1 0.1 k=0.1 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 k=0.01 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0.1 k=1 k=0.1
I/Iref
D5Z50K8B
I/Iref
D5Z50K9B
ANSI, Long-Time Inverse 1000
100 k=10 10
t/s
1
k=1
k=0.1 0.1 k=0.01 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50KAB
Characteristic No. 10 3-253 Tripping characteristics as per ANSI
3-368
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
RI-Type Inverse 1000 1000
RXIDG-Type Inverse
100 k=10 10
100 k=10 10 k=1
t/s
1
t/s
1
k=1
k=0.1 0.1 k=0.01 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.01
I/Iref
D5Z50KBA
I/Iref
D5Z50KCA
Characteristic No. 11 3-254 RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-369
3 Operation
(continued)
Minimum operate value for the current in the residual current measuring system A minimum operate value (threshold) may be defined for the current in the residual current measuring system. The set factor I D M T : F a c t o r I r e f , N is multiplied by the reference quantity Iref,N in order to form the minimum operate value for the residual current measuring system. The timer stage is triggered only when the residual current exceeds this threshold. Minimum trip time for the residual current measuring system A minimum trip time ID MT : Mi n . tr i p ti me N may be defined for the current in the residual current measuring system. This timer stage is started as soon as the minimum operate value is exceeded. After the timer has elapsed, the trip signal is issued, regardless of the value of the current.
3-255
Influence of the minimum operate value and the minimum trip time on the IDMT characteristics
3-370
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
IDMT: Iref,y PSx [ * ] blocked
(calc.) IDMT: Iref,N (calc.) PSx
IDMT: Evaluation IN PSx = calculated
47Z1000A_EN
3-256
Trip signal for I D M T : E v a l u a t i o n I N P S x with setting 'Calculated' The parameter I D M T : I r e f , N ( m e a s . ) P S x (001 169 / 001 170 / 001 171 / 001 172) is used instead of I D M T : I r e f , N ( c a l c . ) P S x if setting is 'Measured' instead of 'Calculated'. The 'Measured' parameter allows lower setting values.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-371
3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the trip signal When ANSI/IEEE characteristics with reset behavior according to characteristic are selected, the trip signal now resets as soon as the internal memory value has been reduced to 97% of the tripping value.
Current (rms value)
Iref
IFault
ILoad
IFault
ILoad
Internally cumulated relative trip time
100 %
97 %
0%
tTrip= f(IFault/Iref)
tReset = f(ILoad/Iref)
Trip signal t
47Z1002A_EN
3-257
Reset behavior of the IDMT trip signal when the ANSI/IEEE characteristics with reset behavior according to characteristic is selected
3-372
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Directional measurement The IDMT protection function determines the fault direction from the negative-sequence voltage and current. The negative-sequence voltage and current are calculated by the P437 based on the following formulae, depending on the phase sequence setting: Phase sequence A-B-C: 1 2 V neg = V A G + a V B G + a V C G 3
I neg =
1 2 I + a I B + a IC 3 A
) )
Phase sequence A-C-B: 1 2 V neg = V A G + a V B G + a V C G 3
I neg =
1 2 I + a I B + a IC 3 A
a = e j120 a 2 = e j240
The voltage used for directional measurement is corrected for the voltage drop at the fault impedance. The set impedance of the phase-to-ground loops of zone 1 of the polygon characteristic is used for correction. For directional measurement to be enabled, the corrected negative-sequence voltage needs to exceed a minimum threshold of 0.05 Vnom/3, and the negative-sequence current needs to exceed a threshold of 0.03 Inom + 0.02 Imax. The devices decision is Forward direction if the angle lies in the range of 105 0 . Improved directional measurement for seriescompensated lines As for the GFSC function group, an improved directional measurement for seriescompensated lines is now available for the IDMT function. (It is described in the eponymous section of the GFSC function group.) The following settable parameter is used to correct the measuring voltage for IDMT: IDMT: Comp.react. Xneg PSx.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-373
3 Operation
(continued)
VBG Backward direction
-Vneg,corr
-1050
(VAG)
Ineg Forward direction VCG

47Z1001A_EN
3-258 Directional characteristic (includes example values for fault in A-N with voltage VAN completely short-circuited)
3-374
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049 ] VA-G VB-G VC-G Vneg
>0.05 Vnom/ Vneg,corr
DIST: X1,PG (polygon) PSx [ * ] DIST: R1,PG (polygon) PSx [ * ] Z1*Ineg
>0.03 Inom+0.02 Imax IA IB IC
Ineg
IDMT: syst. [ 035 IDMT: syst. [ 035

*
Neg.seq. forw. 041 ] Neg.seq. backw. 042 ]
DIST: X1,PG (polygon) PSx 012 001 012 051 013 001 013 051
DIST: R1,PG (polygon) PSx 012 005 012 055 013 005 013 055
47Z11ATA_EN
3-259
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-375
3 Operation
(continued)
Directional setting Each IDMT measuring system may be operated in directional or non-directional mode. In directional mode, the directional decision that is used is either the one reached by distance protection or the one formed by the IDMT function from the negative-sequence current and voltage depending on the setting. If the measuring voltage is faulty, the measuring systems operate in non-directional mode or they are blocked depending on the setting.
3-376
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
2: Use Dist flt.direct.
D5Z50ARB_EN
3-260
Directional setting and directional decision
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-377
3 Operation
(continued)
3.33 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM) This function makes it possible to build up thermal overload protection for lines and transformers. Disabling or enabling Thermal Overload Protection Thermal overload protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting.
3-261
Disabling or enabling Thermal Overload Protection
3-378
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping characteristics The maximum value of the three phase currents is used to track a first-order thermal image according to IEC 255-8. The tripping time is determined by the set thermal time constant T H E R M : T i m e c o n s t . 1 ( > I m i n ) of the protected object and by the set tripping limit T H E R M : R e l . O / T t r i p (trip) and is a function of the accumulated thermal load P:
I I P ref t = ln 2 I I trip ref
2
3-262
Tripping characteristics of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to P = 0 %)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-379
3 Operation
(continued)
Warning A warning signal can be set in accordance with the set operate value T H E R M : R e l . O / T w a r n i n g P S x If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged with the set time constant T H E R M : T i m e c o n s t . 2 ( < I m i n ) . The thermal replica may be reset either via a setting parameter or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when Thermal Overload Protection is disabled. Thermal Overload Protection can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-380
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
THERM: Start. factor OL_RC
THERM: Rel. O/T warning THERM: Rel. O/T trip THERM: Hysteresis trip
47Z0149B_EN
3-263
Thermal overload protection
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-381
3 Operation
(continued)
3.34 Under and overvoltage protection (Function group V<>) The time-voltage protection function evaluates the fundamental wave of the phase voltages and of the neutral displacement voltage as well as the positive-sequence voltage and negative-sequence voltage obtained from the fundamental waves of the three phase-to-ground voltages. Disabling or enabling V<> protection V<> protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset. V<> protection readiness V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the voltagemeasuring circuit by measuring-circuit monitoring.
3-264
Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection
3-382
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the phase voltages The P437 checks the voltages to determine whether they exceed or fall below set thresholds. Depending on the set operating mode of V<> protection, either the phase-toground voltages (star operating mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages (delta operating mode) are monitored. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and thus it would not be possible to close the circuit breaker again. Minimum current monitoring There is an optional enabling threshold available with the V<> element: It is based on minimum current monitoring for the undervoltage stages (V<, V<<, Vpos<, Vpos<<). The operating mode for minimum current monitoring is activated by the following setting: V < > : O p . m o d e V < m o n . P S x = With This setting parameter is used to set the enabling threshold: V<>: I enable V< PSx
The undervoltage stages are blocked if during active monitoring the set threshold of at least one phase is not exceeded by the phase currents.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-383
3 Operation
(continued)
3-265
Selection of Measured Variables
3-384
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-266
Overvoltage monitoring
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-385
3 Operation
(continued)
3-267
Undervoltage monitoring. Stages V< and V<< are blocked if the minimum current monitoring function is activated (V < > : O p . m o d e V < m o n . P S x = With) and if the set current threshold V < > : I e n a b l e V < P S x of at least one phase is not exceeded by the phase currents.
3-386
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the positiveand negative-sequence voltages The P437 determines the positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages from the fundamental components of the phase-to-ground voltages according to the formulas given below, based on the M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e setting. Phase sequence A-B-C: 1 2 V pos = V AG + a V B G + a V C G Positive-sequence voltage: 3
Negative-sequence voltage:
V neg =
1 2 V AG + a V B G + a V C G 3 1 2 V AG + a V B G + a V C G 3 1 2 V AG + a V B G + a V C G 3
) ) )
Phase sequence A-C-B: Positive-sequence voltage: V pos = V neg =
Negative-sequence voltage:
a = e j120 a 2 = e j240
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-387
3 Operation
(continued)
D5Z50AYB_EN
3-268
Determining positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages
The positive-sequence voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds, and the negative-sequence voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds set thresholds. If the voltage exceeds or falls below the set thresholds, then a signal is issued once the set operate delays have elapsed. The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs. If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and thus it would not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.
3-388
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-269
Monitoring the positive-sequence voltage. The stages Vpos< and Vpos<< are blocked if the minimum current monitoring is activated (V < > : O p . m o d e V < m o n . P S x = With) and if the set current threshold V < > : I e n a b l e V < P S x of at least one phase is not exceeded by the phase currents.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-389
3 Operation
(continued)
3-270
Monitoring the negative-sequence voltage
3-390
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the neutral displacement voltage Depending on the setting, the V<> function monitors either the neutral-displacement voltage calculated by the P437 from the three phase-to-ground voltages or the neutraldisplacement voltage formed externally via the fourth voltage measuring input (the neutral-displacement voltage from the open delta winding of the voltage transformers, for example see section entitled 'Conditioning of Measured Variables'). The neutral displacement voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds set thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
3-271
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-391
3 Operation
(continued)
3-272
Monitoring the neutral displacement voltage
3-392
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.35 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) The P437 monitors the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set frequencies. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between the zero crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The over-/underfrequency protection function has four stages. The operation of over-/underfrequency protection will be explained below using the first stage as an example. Disabling or enabling over-/underfrequency protection Over-/underfrequency protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-273
Enabling, disabling and readiness of f<> protection
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-393
3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting the measuring voltage By selecting a measuring voltage setting, the user defines the voltage that is used by the over-/underfrequency protection function for measurement purposes. This can be either a phase-to-ground voltage or a phase-to-phase voltage.
3-274
Selecting the measuring voltage
3-394
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time Over-/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of sufficient magnitude. Over-/underfrequency protection will be blocked instantaneously if the measuring voltage falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage. In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations or interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate conditions must be satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be issued.
3-275
Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-395
3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes of over-/ underfrequency protection For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can choose between the following operating modes:

Frequency monitoring Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt) Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (f/t)
Frequency monitoring Depending on the setting, the P437 monitors the frequency to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess of the set nominal frequency is set, the P437 checks to determine whether the frequency exceeds the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set nominal frequency is set, the P437 checks to determine whether the frequency falls below the operate threshold. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt) In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the frequency is also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is reached (in addition to being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set threshold). Monitoring for overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency increase; monitoring for underfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency decrease. If both operate conditions are satisfied, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-396
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (f/t) The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes sense to take the mean value of the frequency gradient into account for load-shedding systems. In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring must be set for 'underfrequency monitoring'. Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting of frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value f within the set time t, then the t/f monitoring function operates instantaneously and generates a trip signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring function, then the t/f monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency monitoring function drops out. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-276
Operation of frequency monitoring combined with f/t monitoring
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-397
3 Operation
(continued)
3-277
First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function
3-398
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
fmin/fmax measurement
For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition and for the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition, the two following measured event values are available: f<>: Max. frequ. for f> f<>: Min. frequ. for f< Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new overfrequency or underfrequency situation. A reset is also possible via parameter f< > : R e s e t m e a s .va l . U SER or binary signal f< > : R e s e t m e a s .va l . EXT .
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-399
3 Operation
(continued)
3.36 Directional Power Protection (Function Group P<>) The directional power protection function determines the active and reactive power from the fundamental waves of current and voltage. The sign of the active or the reactive power, respectively, is evaluated for direction determination Disabling or enabling P<> protection The directional power protection function can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-278
Enabling or disabling directional power protection
Power determination The device determines the active and reactive power from the fundamental waves of the three phase currents and the phase-to-ground voltages. If the measuring-circuit monitoring function detects malfunctioning in the voltage measuring circuit, power determination will be blocked. Power monitoring The device checks the determined power values to detect whether they exceed or fall below set thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Dynamic range dependent setting parameters The logic diagrams following below display signal processing with the dynamic range for the phase current measurement set to MAIN: Dynamic range I = 'maximum range', (addr. 031.082). When the sensitive range is selected, alternative parameters with a setting range that will permit lower operate values will become effective (e.g. 3-400
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: P> sens. range PS1, addr. 017.120 instead of P<>: P> high range PS1, addr. 017.203). Transient signals If the decisions of power monitoring are to be included in the trip commands when values have fallen below set thresholds, then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and thus it would not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.
3-279
Power determination
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-401
3 Operation
(continued)
Active power monitoring when set thresholds are exceeded The device monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set. When the active power exceeds the set thresholds a starting results. The starting signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P<>: Operate delay P> PSx [ * ] P<>: Blocking P> EXT [ 035 082 ] P<>: Release delay P> PSx [ * ]
P<>: P> high range [ *
PSx ]
P<>: Signal P> delayed [ 035 087 ]
P<>: Diseng. ratio P> PSx [ * ]
P<>: P
402 631
P<>: Starting P> [ 035 086 ]
P<>: Operate delay P>>PSx [ * ] P<>: Blocking P>> EXT [ 035 083 ]
P<>: Release delay P>>PSx [ * ]
P<>: P>> high range [ *
PSx ]
P<>: Signal P>> delayed [ 035 090 ]
P<>: Diseng. ratio P>>PSx [ * ]
P<>: Starting P>> [ 035 089 ]
P<>: P> high range 017 203 017 204 017 205 017 213 P<>: P>> high range 017 214 017 215 017 216 017 217
PSx
P<>: Diseng. ratio P> PSx 017 124 017 125 017 126 017 127 P<>: Diseng. ratio P>>PSx 017 144 017 145 017 146 017 147
P<>: Operate delay P> PSx 017 128 017 129 017 130 017 131 P<>: Operate delay P>>PSx 017 148 017 149 017 150 017 151
P<>: Release delay P> PSx 017 132 017 133 017 134 017 135 P<>: Release delay P>>PSx 017 152 017 153 017 154 017 155
PSx
40Z5271C_EN
3-280
Active power monitoring when set thresholds are exceeded
3-402
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Active power direction when set thresholds are exceeded If the sign for the active power is positive, a forward-directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward-directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward-directional or a non-directional decision.
3-281
The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when set thresholds are exceeded
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-403
3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power monitoring when set thresholds are exceeded The device monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set. When the reactive power exceeds the set thresholds a starting results. The starting signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P<>: Operate delay Q> PSx [ * ] P<>: Blocking Q> EXT [ 035 084 ] P<>: Release delay Q> PSx [ * ]
P<>: Q> high range [ *
PSx ]
P<>: Signal Q> delayed [ 035 093 ]
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q> PSx [ * ]
P<>: Q
402 632
P<>: Starting Q> [ 035 092 ]
P<>: Operate delay Q>>PSx [ * ] P<>: Blocking Q>> EXT [ 035 085 ]
P<>: Release delay Q>>PSx [ * ]
P<>: Q>> high range [ *
PSx ]
P<>: Signal Q>> delayed [ 035 096 ]
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx [ * ]
P<>: Starting Q>> [ 035 095 ]
P<>: Q> high range 017 218 017 219 017 220 017 221 P<>: Q>> high range 017 222 017 223 017 224 017 225
PSx
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q> PSx 017 164 017 165 017 166 017 167 P<>: Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx 017 184 017 185 017 186 017 187
P<>: Operate delay Q> PSx 017 168 017 169 017 170 017 171 P<>: Operate delay Q>>PSx 017 188 017 189 017 190 017 191
P<>: Release delay Q> PSx 017 172 017 173 017 174 017 175 P<>: Release delay Q>>PSx 017 192 017 193 017 194 017 195
PSx
40Z5270C_EN
3-282
Reactive power monitoring when set thresholds are exceeded

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-404
3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power direction when set thresholds are exceeded If the sign for the reactive power is positive, a forward-directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward-directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward-directional or a non-directional decision.
3-283
The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when set thresholds are exceeded
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-405
3 Operation
(continued)
Active power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds The device monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set. When the active power falls below the set thresholds a starting results. The starting signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P<>: Blocking tP< EXT [ 035 050 ] P<>: P< high range [ *
PSx ]
P<>: Operate delay P< PSx [ * ] P<>: Release delay P< PSx [ * ]
P<>: Diseng. ratio P< PSx [ * ]
P<>: P
402 631
P<>: Signal P< delayed [ 035 055 ] Settings block.
P<>: Starting P< [ 035 054 ] P<>: Fault P< [ 035 057 ]
P<>: Blocking tP<< EXT [ 035 051 ] P<>: P<< high range [ *
PSx ]
P<>: Operate delay P<< PSx [ * ] P<>: Release delay P<< PSx [ * ]
P<>: Diseng. ratio P<< PSx [ * ]
P<>: Signal P<< delayed [ 035 061 ] Settings block.
P<>: Starting P<< [ 035 060 ]
P<>: Fault P<< [ 035 063 ] P<>: tTransient pulse PSx [ * ] P<>: tTransient pulse PSx [ * ] P<>: tP< elapsed trans. [ 035 056 ] P<>: tP<< elapsed trans. [ 035 062 ] P<>: tP</tP<< elaps.trans [ 035 178 ]
P<>: P< high range 017 013 017 014 017 016 017 020 P<>: P<< high range 017 068 017 021 017 025 017 026
PSx
P<>: Diseng. ratio P< PSx 017 034 017 035 017 036 017 037 P<>: Diseng. ratio P<< PSx 017 238 017 239 017 240 017 241
P<>: Operate delay P< PSx 017 060 017 061 017 062 017 063 P<>: Operate delay P<<PSx 017 242 017 243 017 244 017 245
P<>: Release delay P< PSx 017 226 017 227 017 228 017 229 P<>: Release delay P<<PSx 017 246 017 247 017 248 017 249 P<>: tTransient pulse PSx 018 246 018 247 018 248 018 249
PSx
40Z5272B_EN
3-284
Active power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-406
3 Operation
(continued)
Active power direction when values fall below set thresholds If the sign for the active power is positive, a forward-directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward-directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward-directional or a non-directional decision.
P<>: Starting P< [ 035 054 ] Apparent power S P<>: Direction P< PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Nondirectional P<>: Signal P< delayed [ 035 055 ] > 0.010 Snom
&
&
P<>: Trip signal P< [ 035 058 ]
&
&
P<>: tP< elapsed trans. [ 035 056 ] P<>: P+

402 633 402 634
&
&
P<>: Trip signal P< trans [ 035 059 ]
&
P<>: P-
&
P<>: Starting P<< [ 035 060 ] P<>: Direction P<< PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Nondirectional P<>: Signal P<< delayed [ 035 061 ]
&
&
P<>: Trip signal P<< [ 035 064 ]
& &
P<>: tP<< elapsed trans. [ 035 062 ]
&
&
P<>: Trip sig. P<< trans. [ 035 065 ]
& Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 P<>: Direction P< P<>: Direction PSx P<< PSx 017 230 017 250 017 231 017 251 017 232 017 252 017 233 017 253 &
40Z5273C_EN
3-285
The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when values fall below set thresholds
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-407
3 Operation
(continued)
1
P<>: Starting P< [ 035 054 ] P<>: Operate delay P< PSx [ * ] P<>: Release delay P< PSx [ * ] P<>: Signal P< delayed [ 035 055 ] P<>: tP< elapsed trans. [ 035 056 ] P<>: Fault P< [ 035 057 ]
1 2 3
P<>: Operate delay P< PSx P<>: Release delay P< PSx P<>: tTransient pulse PSx
* * *
P<>: Operate delay P< PSx 017 060 017 061 017 062 017 063
P<>: Release delay P< PSx 017 226 017 227 017 228 017 229
P<>: tTransient pulse PSx 018 246 018 247 018 248 018 249 19Z5278B_EN
3-286
Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the active power monitoring
3-408
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds The device monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set. When the reactive power falls below the set thresholds a starting results. The starting signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P<>: Blocking tQ< EXT [ 035 052 ] P<>: Q< high range [ *
PSx ]
P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx [ * ] P<>: Release delay Q< PSx [ * ]
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q< PSx [ * ]
P<>: Q
402 632
P<>: Signal Q< delayed [ 035 067 ] Settings block.
P<>: Starting Q< [ 035 066 ] P<>: Fault Q< [ 035 069 ]
P<>: Blocking tQ<< EXT [ 035 053 ] P<>: Q<< high range [ *
PSx ]
P<>: Operate delay Q<< PSx [ * ] P<>: Release delay Q<< PSx [ * ]
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q<< PSx [ * ]
P<>: Signal Q<< delayed [ 035 011 ] Settings block. P<>: Starting Q<< [ 035 010 ]
P<>: Fault Q<< [ 035 049 ] P<>: tTransient pulse PSx [ * ] P<>: tTransient pulse PSx [ * ] P<>: tQ< elapsed trans. [ 035 068 ] P<>: tQ<< elapsed trans. [ 035 016 ] P<>: tQ</tQ<< elaps.trans [ 035 179 ]
P<>: Q< high range 017 069 017 038 017 039 017 045 P<>: Q<< high range 017 079 017 046 017 049 017 051
PSx
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q< PSx 018 044 018 045 018 046 018 047 P<>: Diseng. ratio Q<< PSx 018 095 018 096 018 097 018 098
P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx 018 052 018 053 018 054 018 055 P<>: Operate delay Q<<PSx 018 213 018 214 018 215 018 216
P<>: Release delay Q< PSx 018 056 018 057 018 058 018 059 P<>: Release delay Q<<PSx 018 236 018 237 018 238 018 239 P<>: tTransient pulse PSx 018 246 018 247 018 248 018 249
PSx
40Z5276B_EN
3-287
Reactive power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-409
3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power direction when values fall below set thresholds If the sign for the reactive power is positive, a forward-directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward-directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward-directional or a non-directional decision.
P<>: Starting Q< [ 035 066 ] Apparent power S P<>: Direction Q< PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Nondirectional > 0.010 Snom
P<>: Signal Q< delayed [ 035 067 ]
&
&
P<>: Trip signal Q< [ 035 155 ]
&
&
P<>: tQ< elapsed trans. [ 035 068 ] P<>: Q+

402 635 402 636
&
&
P<>: Trip sig. Q< trans. [ 035 156 ]
&
P<>: Q-
&
P<>: Starting Q<< [ 035 010 ] P<>: Direction Q<< PSx [ * ] 1 2 3 1: Forward directional 2: Backward directional 3: Nondirectional
P<>: Signal Q<< delayed [ 035 011 ]
&
&
P<>: Trip signal Q<< [ 035 176 ]
& &
P<>: tQ<< elapsed trans. [ 035 016 ]
&
&
P<>: Trip sig. Q<< trans. [ 035 177 ]
& Parameter set set set set 1 2 3 4 P<>: Direction Q< P<>: Direction PSx Q<< PSx 018 081 018 242 018 082 018 243 018 083 018 244 018 084 018 245 &
40Z5277C_EN
3-288
The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when values fall below set thresholds
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-410
3 Operation
(continued)
1
P<>: Starting Q< [ 035 066 ]
P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx [ * ] P<>: Release delay Q< PSx [ * ] P<>: Signal Q< delayed [ 035 067 ] P<>: tQ< elapsed trans. [ 035 068 ] P<>: Fault Q< [ 035 069 ]
1 2 3
P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx P<>: Release delay Q< PSx P<>: tTransient pulse PSx
* * *
P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx 018 052 018 053 018 054 018 055
P<>: Release delay Q< PSx 018 056 018 057 018 058 018 059
P<>: tTransient pulse PSx 018 246 018 247 018 248 018 249 19Z5279B_EN
3-289
Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the reactive power monitoring
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-411
3 Operation
(continued)
Directional power signaling The active or reactive power direction is signaled when one of the starting signals has been issued.
Apparent power S
> 0.010 Snom
P<>: Starting P> [ 035 086 ] P<>: Starting P>> [ 035 089 ] P<>: Starting P< [ 035 054 ] P<>: Starting P<< [ 035 060 ]
&
P<>: Direction P forw. [ 035 181 ]
&
P<>: Direction P backw. [ 035 191 ]
P<>: P+
402 633
P<>: P-
402 634
19Z5274B_EN
3-290
Directional starting signal issued by the active power monitoring
P<>: Q+
402 635
&
P<>: Direction Q forw. [ 035 193 ]
P<>: Q-
402 636
P<>: Starting Q> [ 035 092 ] P<>: Starting Q>> [ 035 095 ] P<>: Starting Q< [ 035 066 ] P<>: Starting Q<< [ 035 010 ]
&
P<>: Direction Q backw. [ 035 194 ]
Apparent power S
> 0.010 Snom
19Z5275B_EN
3-291
Directional starting signal issued by the reactive power monitoring
3-412
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.37 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF) The P437 features the CB failure protection function. After a trip command has been issued the CBF function monitors that the circuit breaker has actually been triggered. Disabling or enabling the CBF function The activation of the function is enabled at C BF : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . If this enabling function has been activated, CBF can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The local control panel and the binary signal inputs have equal status in this regard. If only the function C B F : E n a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then CBF will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the function C BF : D i s a b l e EXT has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
CBF: General enable USER [ 022 080 ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx [ xxx xxx ] U U U U x1 x2 x3 xx CBF: Enabled. [ 040 055 ]
Address 038 041 Address 038 042 CBF: Ext./user enabled [ 038 040 ] CBF: Enable USER [ 003 016 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute CBF: Disable EXT [ 038 042 ] CBF: Disable USER [ 003 015 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute
47Z1138A_EN
CBF: Enable EXT [ 038 041 ]
3-292
Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-413
3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of circuit breaker protection Circuit breaker failure protection will not be available under the following conditions:

The CBF function is not activated. Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal input. All CBF timer stages have been set to "blocked".
CBF: enabled [ 040 055 ]

&
>1
CBF: Not ready [ 040 025 ]
CBF: Blocking EXT [ 038 058 ] CBF: t1 1p [ 022 164 ] Blocked CBF: t1 3p [ 022 165 ] Blocked CBF: t2 [ 022 166 ] Blocked CBF: Delay/ starting trig. [ 022 155 ] Blocked CBF: Delay/ fault beh. CB [ 022 171 ] Blocked CBF: Delay/ CB sync.superv [ 022 172 ] Blocked
&
>1
47Z1130A_EN
3-293
Signal C B F : N o t r e a d y
3-414
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Detecting a CB triggering A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB triggering. Protection functions, that have triggering criteria not directly dependent on current flow (e.g. V<>), may additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts for evaluation. Current flow monitoring This function is used to detect a break in current flow, i.e. safely, immediately and pole selectively. The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values with the set threshold value C BF : I> . As long as current flow criteria are met the phase-selective signals C BF : C u r r e n t fl o w A, C BF : C u r r e n t fl o w B, C BF : C u r r e n t fl o w C and the multiple signal C BF : C u r r e n t fl o w Ph x will be continuously issued.
CBF: I> [ 022 160 ] IA IB IC

>1
CBF: Current flow A [ 038 230 ] LSV: Current flow B [ 038 231 ] CBF: Current flow C [ 038 232 ] CBF: Current flow Phx [ 038 233 ]
47Z1139A_EN
3-294
Current flow monitoring
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-415
3 Operation
(continued)
Evaluation of CB status signals Trip signals included in the G e n . tr i p c o m m a n d 1 , which use CB status signals in addition to current flow monitoring, can be selected with the parameter CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux. Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available. The P437 is capable of checking 3-pole or 1-pole CB status signals for plausibility and to evaluate them. The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked if the configuration of the respective binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. This will result in theP437 issuing of the signal C BF : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b l e . Evaluation of current criteria are not affected by this blocking. CBF 1-pole operating mode Circuit breaker failure protection allows 1-pole monitoring and re-tripping of the CB. For this purpose, setting C BF : T r i p 1 p must be 'Yes'. Then a 1-pole general trip triggers the 1-pole startup of CBF. Any 3-pole general trip will always trigger the 3-pole startup of CBF. This happens also, if for instance an initial 1-pole trip is converted to a 3-pole trip because of an evolving fault situation. If C BF : T r i p 1 p is set to 'No', then any general trip 1 (1- or 3-pole) immediately triggers the 3pole startup of the CBF.
3-416
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Startup criteria The startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is recognized as closed during a start criterion. The following startup criteria are evaluated:
Internal startup criterion: The issuing of M A I N : G e n . T r i p s i g n a l 1 is considered as a criterion for a phase-selective startup of CBF. The startup is either 1-pole or 3-pole, depending on the trip decision and setting of C BF : T r i p 1 p . In addition it may be selected, by setting the parameter C B F : S t a r t w i t h m a n . t r i p , that a manual trip signal will be used as a start criterion. External startup criterion: The trip signal from an external protection device, operating in parallel with the P437, can be used as a phase-selective ( C BF : Sta r t A EXT , C BF : Sta r t B EXT , C B F : S t a r t C E X T ) or a 3-pole (C B F : S t a r t 3 p E X T ) startup criterion. The startup is either 1-pole or 3-pole, depending on the trip decision and setting CBF: Trip 1p. To be on the safe side an additional two pole triggering may be implemented by applying the signal C BF : Sta r t e n a b l e E X T .
In any case, current flow monitoring is the preferred (primary) monitoring criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts are evaluated when no current flow is registered and the respective trip signal, included in the G e n . tr i p c o m m a n d 1 , has been selected from the protection function in parameter C B F : F c t.a s s i g n m . C BAu x for the evaluation of the CB auxiliary contacts. Timers and tripping logic Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.
The signals C BF : T r i p s i g n a l t 1 , X (X = A, B or C) will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time period, set at timer stage C BF : t1 1 p , has elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil. The signal C BF : T r i p s i g n a l t 1 will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time period, set at timer stage C BF : t1 3p, has elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil. The signal C BF : T r i p s i g n a l t 2 will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time period, set at timer stage C BF : t2, has elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit breaker or protection system.
These trip signals will be issued as long as the startup criteria are met. Should a loss of gas pressure occur in the explosion chambers of installed type SF-6 circuit breakers then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately tripped without waiting for a reaction from the damaged switch. In case of an external CB fault the elapse of timer stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal to the binary signal input appropriately configured at C BF : C B fa u l ty EXT .
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-417
3 Operation
(continued)
CBF:Fct. assignm. CBAux. [ 022 159 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal n LSV: CB pos. implausible [ 038 210 ] CBF: I> [ 022 160 ] IA
>1 & &
S 1 R 1 1
&
MAIN: CB closed >= 1p [ 031 038 ] CBF: Start with man. trip [ 022 154 ] 0 1 MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked [ 021 013 ] MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1, A [ 036 006 ] MAIN: Manual trip signal A [ 034 047 ] 0: No 1: Yes
& & >1
>1
& >1
&
CBF: Startup A [ 038 212 ]
>1 &
INP: Fct.assignm. U xxx [ xxx yyy ] U U U U x01 x02 x03 xnn
&
& >1
CBF: Start enable EXT [ 038 209 ] CBF: Start A EXT [ 038 206 ] CBF: Startup 3p [ 038 211 ]
Address 038 209
&
>1 >2
CBF: Start A
310 007
CBF: Start >1p

310 010
CBF: Start B
310 008 310 009
CBF: Start C
47Z1131A_EN
3-295
CBF 1-pole startup
3-418
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
CBF: Fct. assignm. CBAux. [ 022 159 ] Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal n CBF: CB pos. implausible [ 038 210 ] CBF: I> [ 022 160 ] IA IB IC MAIN: CB closed >= 1p [ 031 038 ] CBF: Start with man. trip [ 022 154 ] 0 1 MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked [ 021 013 ] MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1, 3p [ 037 253 ] MAIN: Manual trip signal [ 034 017 ] 0: No 1: Yes
& & >1 >1 >1 & &
S 1 R 1 1
&
>1
& >1
CBF: Startup 3p [ 038 211 ]
>1
&
INP: Fct.assignm. U xxx [ xxx yyy ] U U U U x01 x02 x03 xnn
&
& >1
CBF: Start enable EXT [ 038 209 ] CBF: Start 3p EXT [ 038 205 ] CBF: Start >1p
310 010
Address 038 209
&
47Z1132A_EN
3-296
CBF 3-pole startup
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-419
3 Operation
(continued)
CBF: Trip 1p [ 022 163 ] 0 1
0: No 1: Yes CBF: Not ready [ 040 025 ] CBF: Startup A [ 038 212 ] CBF: Startup B [ 038 213 ] CBF: Startup C [ 038 214 ]
>1 c t
CBF: t1 1p [ 022 164 ]

0
& & &
>1 c
>1
CBF: t1 3p [ 022 165 ]

0 >1
CBF: Trip signal t1, A [ 038 216 ] CBF: Trip signal t1, B [ 038 217 ] CBF: Trip signal t1, C [ 038 218 ] CBF: Trip signal t1 [ 038 215 ]
CBF: Startup 3p [ 038 211 ]
CBF: CB failure [ 036 017 ]
c t t >1
CBF: t2 [ 022 166 ]

0 0 >1
CBF: Trip signal t2 [ 038 219 ]
CBF: CB faulty EXT [ 038 234 ]

3-297 CBF timer stages
& 47Z1133A_EN
3-420
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Trip commands While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages available the user can set minimum time delay periods for trip commands. By appropriate setting it can be selected that trip commands, issued by the CB failure protection, will operate in latching mode. The respective trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
CBF: Latching trip cmd. t1 [ 022 169 ] 0 1 MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked [ 021 013 ] CBF: Trip signal t1, A [ 038 216 ] 0: No 1: Yes
& >1 &
S R 1 1 1
CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd. t1 [ 022 167 ] t t t t 0 0 0 0

>1
CBF: Trip command t1, A [ 038 221 ]
>1 & >1
CBF: Trip command t1, B [ 038 222 ]
CBF: Trip signal t1, B [ 038 217 ]
&
S R
1 1 1
>1 &
CBF: Trip command t1, C [ 038 223 ]
CBF: Trip signal t1, C [ 038 218 ]
>1 &
S R 1 1 1
>1 & >1
CBF: Trip command t1 [ 038 220 ]
CBF: Trip signal t1 [ 038 215 ] CBF: Latching trip cmd. t2 [ 022 170 ] 0 1 CBF: Trip signal t2 [ 038 219 ] 0: No 1: Yes
&
S R
1 1 1
CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd. t2 [ 022 168 ] t

& >1
0
>1
CBF: Trip command t2 [ 038 224 ]
&
S R
1 1 1
MAIN: Rset.latch. trip USER [ 021 005 ] 0 1 0: don't execute 1: execute MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT [ 040 138 ]
3-298 CBF trip commands
1
>1
MAIN: Latch. trip c. reset [ 040 139 ]
47Z1134A_EN
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-421
3 Operation
(continued)
Starting trigger
The signal C BF : Sta r ti n g will be issued when the signal C BF : Sta r ti n g tr i g . EXT is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a general starting is present. The signal C BF : T r i p s i g n a l will be issued after timer stage C B F : D e l a y / s t a r t i n g t r i g . has elapsed.
MAIN: General starting [ 036 000 ] CBF: Starting trig. EXT [ 038 016 ]
CBF: Delay/ starting trig. [ 022 155 ]

&
CBF: Trip signal [ 040 026 ] CBF: Starting [ 038 021 ]

47Z1135A_EN
3-299
Starting trigger
3-422
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Fault behind CB protection A fault behind a CB (downstream) is a fault that may occur between a circuit breaker already open and a CT which is fed from the remote end. Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion, if the circuit breaker does not provide a signal from its auxiliary contacts that it is closed after the time delay set at C B F : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B has elapsed. When such a fault behind CB is recognized the signal C BF : F a u l t b e h . C B is issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an InterMiCOM protective interface. This may also prevent an unwanted triggering of the circuit breaker failure function.
CBF: I> [ 022 160 ] IA IB IC MAIN: CB open 3p EXT [ 031 028 ] MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ] MAIN: CB closed A EXT [ 031 029 ] MAIN: CB closed B EXT [ 031 030 ] MAIN: CB closed C EXT [ 031 031 ] CBF: CB pos. implausible [ 038 210 ]
3-300 Fault behind CB protection
>1 &
CBF: Delay/ fault beh. CB [ 022 171 ]

t 0
CBF: Fault behind CB [ 038 225 ]
>1
47Z1136A_EN
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-423
3 Operation
(continued)
CB synchronization supervision CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker contacts are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and evaluation of CB status signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge CB operate times the time delay C B F : D e l a y / C B s y n c h . s u p e r v can be used. When this time period has elapsed the signal C BF : T r i p Si g C B s yn c h .s u p e r is issued. Poles that are recognized as being "open" will still be signaled.
CBF: CB pos. implausible [ 038 210 ] MAIN: CB closed A EXT [ 031 029 ] MAIN: CB closed B EXT [ 031 030 ] MAIN: CB closed C EXT [ 031 031 ]
CBF: Delay/ CB sync.superv [ 022 172 ]

& >1 >1 t 0
CBF: TripSig CBsync.super [ 038 226 ]
>1
MAIN: CB open 3p EXT [ 031 028 ] MAIN: CB closed 3p EXT [ 036 051 ]
& >1
& <3 &
CBF: I> [ 022 160 ] IA IB IC

>1
&
CBF: CBsync. superv A open [ 038 227 ] CBF: CBsync. superv B open [ 038 228 ] CBF: CBsync. superv C open [ 038 229 ]
47Z1137A_EN
3-301
CB synchronization supervision
3-424
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.38 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) Enable/disable the Limit Value Monitoring function Limit value monitoring can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter. Monitoring phase currents and phase voltages With the P437 monitoring of the following measured values is possible in order to determine if they exceed set upper limit values or fall below set lower limit values:

Maximum phase current Minimum phase current Maximum phase-to-phase voltage Minimum phase-to-phase voltage Maximum phase-to-ground voltage Minimum phase-to-ground voltage
If any of the measured values exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower limit values, then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-425
3 Operation
(continued)
3-302
Limit Value Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current
3-426
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-303
Limit Value Monitoring of maximum and minimum phase-to-phase voltage and maximum and minimum phase-to-ground voltage
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-427
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the neutral displacement voltage The neutral displacement voltage, calculated from the three phase-to-ground voltages, is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds set thresholds. If any of the thresholds are exceeded, then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
3-304
Monitoring the neutral displacement voltage
3-428
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the linearized measured DC values The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the measured values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
3-305
Monitoring the linearized measured DC values
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-429
3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the measured temperature value The temperature that is measured by the P437 using a resistance thermometer is monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the measured values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
3-306
Monitoring the measured temperature value
3-430
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3.39
Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC)
Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within a framework of Boolean equations. Binary signals in the P437 may be linked by logical 'OR' or 'AND' operations with the option of additional NOT operations by setting L O G IC : F c t. As s i g n m . O u tp . n , where n = 1 to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: NOT before AND before OR. A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to the signals generated by the P437, initial conditions for governing the equations can be set via setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or through the serial interfaces. Logical operations can be controlled through the binary signal inputs in different ways. The binary input signals L O G IC : I n p u t n E X T (n = 1 to 16) have an updating function, whereas the input signals L O G IC : Se t n EXT (n = 1 to 8) are latched. The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured for L O G IC : Se t n EXT if the corresponding reset input L O G IC : R e s e t n EXT ) has been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two functions is configured, then this is interpreted as Logic externally set. If the input signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they both have a logic value of 1), then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
!
When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional type test to conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device startup, during operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-431
3 Operation
(continued)
3-307
Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals
The L O G I C : T r i g g e r n signal is a triggering function that causes a 100 ms pulse to be issued.
3-432
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
LOGIC: General enable USER [ 031 099 ]
LOGIC: Enabled [ 034 046 ]
0: No 1: Yes MAIN: Protection active

306 001
LOGIC: Fct. assignm. outp. 1 [ 030 000 ]
Signal 1 Signal 2 Signal 3
Signal n
LOGIC: Input 1 EXT [ 034 000 ]
LOGIC: Betr.art t Ausgang 1 [ 030 001 ]
LOGIC: Input 40 EXT [ 034 109 ]
LOGIC: 1 has been set [ 034 067 ]
LOGIC: 8 has been set [ 034 074 ]
0: Without timer stage 1: Oper./releas. delay 2: Oper.del./ puls.dur. 3: Op./rel.delay, retrig 4: Op.del./puls. dur.,rt 5: Minimum time
LOGIC: Time t1 output 1 [ 030 002 ] LOGIC: Time t2 output 1 [ 030 003 ]
LOGIC: 1 set externally [ 034 75 ]
LOGIC: 8 set externally [ 034 082 ]
LOGIC: Output 1 (t) [ 042 033 ]
LOGIC: Set 1 USER [ 034 030 ]
LOGIC: Set 8 USER [ 034 037 ]
LOGIC: Trigger 1 [ 034 038 ]
LOGIC: Output 1 0: don't execute 1: execute [ 042 032 ]
LOGIC: Trigger 8 [ 034 045 ]
0: don't execute 1: execute 64Z60CDB_EN
3-308
Setting options for programmable logic (shown here for output 1)
P437/EN M/Cd8 // AFSV.12.10332 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-433
3 Operation
(continued)
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher ordinal number equation as an input signal thus leading to a set of interlinked Boolean equations. The equations are processed according to the sequence of their ordinal numbers. It should be noted that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is provided by the equation with the highest ordinal number. The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of assigning a freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In the Minimum Dwell operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. Figures 3-309 to 3-313 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating modes. Note: If the device is switched to "offline" the equations are not processed and all outputs are set to the '0' logic level.
3-309
Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay
3-434
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-310
Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup
3-311
Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-435
3 Operation
(continued)
3-312
Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable
3-313
Operating mode 5: Minimum Dwell
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary input signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were triggered.
3-436
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Operation
(continued)
3-314
Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-437
3 Operation
(continued)
3-438
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
4 Design
Design
The P437 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations of modules. The P437 like all other device types in the MiCOM Px30 system is equipped with the standard local control panel (LOC). The local control panel is covered with a tough film so that the specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the essential control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of a total of 17 LED indicators is also incorporated. The meaning of the various LED indications is shown in plain text on a label strip. The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged cover at the bottom of the local control panel.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
4-1
4 Design
(continued)
4.1
Design
The P437 is available in either a surface-mounted or a flush-mounted case in 84 TE width. Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The threaded terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the front of the device after unscrewing the crosshead screws on the sides (see Figure 4-1, c) and removing the local control panel. The local control panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs in the slots in the left side wall (see Figure 4-1, d). The flush-mounted case is connected at the back of the case.
!
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the local control panel by inserting it in the slots provided on the left.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation. The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
4-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
4 Design
(continued)
4-1
Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel (example for a 40 T device)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
4-3
4 Design
(continued)
4-2
Dimensional drawing of P437 in 84 TE surface-mounted case
4-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
4 Design
(continued)
49Y6204A
4-3
Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted case 84 T, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm). The unit has enhanced mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame, see next figure) is used for the flush-mounted case.
49Y6205A
Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted case 84 T, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm). The unit has enhanced mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame, as shown in this figure) is used for the flush-mounted case.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
4-5
4 Design
(continued)
Angle brackets
M6
B6 6.4 M6 x 15 Height 204 mm
Frame
80 mm Width 2 40 T for case
12Y6183A_EN
Dimensional drawing for the frame of flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 2 (illustrated here for a 40 T case as an example). Frame width for case 84 T: 502 mm Frame height for all cases: 204 mm
4-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
4 Design
(continued)
4.2
Modules
The P437 is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table gives an overview of the modules relevant for the P437 (*: modules that are not shown in the location diagrams, {: optional, z: standard equipment, : depending on order).
Type Item Index Description number J ff A ff G ff A ff A ff A ff A ff E ff E ff B ff B ff B ff B ff Communication module 1 (For RS 485wire connection) Communication module 1 (For glass fibre, ST connector) Communication module 1 (For plastic fibre) Communication module 2 (For RS 485wire connection) Communication module 2 (For glass fiber, ST connector) Communication module 2 (For plastic fiber) Communication module (IRIG-B only) Ethernet module (For 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber, ST connector and RJ45 wire) Ethernet module (For 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber, SC connector and RJ45 wire) InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 485) InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (For glass fiber) InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (For plastic fiber) InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 232) Width 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T { { { { { { { { { { { { { z z z 4T 4T 8T 8T 8T 8T 8T 8T 8T 8T 4T { z
A 0336 426 A 9650 107 A 0336 428 A 9650 356 A 9650 354 A 9650 355 A 9650 353 A 9651 471 A 9651 427 A 9650 827 A 9650 828 A 9650 829 A 9650 830 B 0336 188 B 0336 421 L 9651 473 L 9651 474 P 9650 135 P 9651 428 T 9650 307 T 9650 308 T 9650 321 T 9650 322 T 9650 313 T 9650 139 T 9650 327 T 9650 330 V 0337 437
C ff * Bus module (digital) B ff * Bus module (analog) C ff * Local control module (Western European) B ff * Local control module (Cyrillic) C ff B ff A ff A ff A ff A ff A ff E ff A ff A ff E ff Processor module, 33 MHz Processor module, DSP Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (pin connection) Transformer module 4 x I, 5 x V (pin connection) Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (ring connection) Transformer module 5 x I, 4 x V (ring connection) Transformer module 1 x I (pin connection) Transformer module 1 x 0.1A AC (pin connection) Transformer module 1 x I (ring connection) Transformer module 1 x 0.1A AC (ring connection) Power supply module 24 V DC Standard variant (Switching threshold 18 V)
1 Required for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol 2 Required for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS, or DNP 3.0 and Courier protocols
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
4-7
4 Design
(continued)
Type
Item Index Description number A ff A ff A ff A ff M ff Power supply module 24 V DC, Switching threshold 73 V Power supply module 24 V DC, Switching threshold 90 V Power supply module 24 V DC, Switching threshold 146 V Power supply module 24 V DC, Switching threshold 155 V Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC, Standard variant (Switching threshold 18 V) Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC, Switching threshold 73 V Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC, Switching threshold 90 V Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC, Switching threshold 146 V Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC, Switching threshold 155 V Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays), Standard variant (Switching threshold 18 V) Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays), Switching threshold 73 V Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays), Switching threshold 90 V Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays), Switching threshold 146 V Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays), Switching threshold 155 V Binary module (6 output relays) Binary module (6 output relays, 4 of these with Triac) Analog I/O module, Standard variant (Switching threshold 18 V) Analog I/O module, Switching threshold 73 V Analog I/O module, Switching threshold 90 V Analog I/O module, Switching threshold 146 V Analog I/O module, Switching threshold 155 V
Width 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T
V 9651 300 V 9651 328 V 9651 439 V 9651 356 V 0337 191
V 9651 301
A ff
4T
V 9651 329
A ff
4T
V 9651 437
A ff
4T
V 9651 357
A ff
4T
X 0336 971 X 9651 306 X 9651 334 X 9651 445 X 9651 362 X 0336 973 X 9650 341 Y 0337 406 Y 9651 307 Y 9651 335 Y 9651 446 Y 9651 363
D ff A ff A ff A ff A ff B ff B ff D ff A ff A ff A ff A ff
4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T 4T
{ { { { { { { { { { { {
The space available for the modules measures 4 H in height by 84 T in width (H = 44.45 mm, T = 5.08 mm). The location of the individual modules and the position of the threaded terminal blocks in the P437 are shown at the end of Chapter 5.
4-8
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5 Installation and connection
Installation and Connection
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this manual, may work on or operate this device.
The instructions given in the Protective and Operational Grounding section should be noted. In particular, check that the protective ground connection is secured with a tooth lock washer, as per the diagram Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal. If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the protective grounding should be checked again.
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module must not be connected at the same time. (The selection for IEC : Eth e r n e t M e d i a should be noted.) 5.1 Unpacking and Packing
All P437 units are packaged separately in their own cartons and shipped inside outer packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking devices, and do not use force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting documents and the type identification label supplied with each individual device from the inside carton. The design revision level of each module included in the device when shipped can be determined from the list of components (assembly list). This list of components should be filed carefully. After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in proper mechanical condition. If the P437 needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If the original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms to DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height 0.8 m.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5-1

(continued)
5.2
Checking Nominal Data and Design Type
The nominal data and design type of the P437 can be determined by checking the type identification label (see figure 5-1). One type identification label is located under the upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found on the inside of the device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed to the outside of the P437 packaging.
P437 P437-XXXXXXX-3XX-4XX/4XX-61X Inom = 1 / 5 A IE,nom = 1 / 5 A UE,nom = 24 Specification EN 60255-6 / IEC 255-6 5-1 P437 type identification label Diagram P437.4XX fnom = 50/60 Hz xx.yy
Unom / NE,nom = 50 ... 130 V UH,nom =
... 250 V DC
F 6.xxxxxx.y
CE
The P437 design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the order number is given in Chapter 14 of this manual and in the supporting documents supplied with the unit. 5.3 Location Requirements
The P437 has been designed to conform to DIN 57 435 part 303. Therefore it is important when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several of these important operating conditions are listed below. Environmental Conditions Ambient temperature: -5 C to +55 C [+23 F to +131 F] Air pressure: Relative humidity: Ambient air: Solar Radiation: Mechanical conditions Vibration stress: Earthquake resistance: Electrical conditions for auxiliary voltage of the power supply Operating range: Electromagnetic conditions Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices, especially with respect to grounding and EMC. 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g 5 ... 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 ... 35 Hz, 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle 800 to 1100 hPa The relative humidity must not result in the formation of either condensed water or ice in the P437. The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust, smoke, gases or vapors, or salt. Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided to ensure that the LC-Display remains readable.
5-2
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
5.4
Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in Chapter 4. When the P437 is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring to the P437 is normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the wiring is to be at the back, an opening can be provided above or below the surface-mounted case. Figure 5-2 shows such an opening below the surface-mounted case.
5-2
Opening for running the wiring to the 84 T surface-mounted case
(dimensions in mm)
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and mounting dimensions are given in Chapter 4. When the P437 is mounted on a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51). Figures 5-3 to 5-4 show the required panel cutouts for both mounting methods. Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method: As of May 2005, the P437 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surfacemounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) is used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity class 2 of the shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of the shock resistance test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5-3

(continued)
5-3
Panel cutout for the 84 T flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame)
(dimensions in mm)
The P437 has increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on the next page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
5-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
5-4
Panel cutout for the 84 T flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm) The P437 has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used for the flush-mounted cases.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5-5

(continued)
For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as follows: Before the P437 can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel must be removed. The local control panel is removed as described below:
Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower both hinged flaps 180up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them slightly. The side mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.). Remove the M3 screws (see figure 5-5). Then remove the local control panel.
!
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Then remove the lower M4 screws and loosen the upper M4 screws (see figure 5-5). Now insert the P437 into the panel opening from the rear so that the upper M4 screws fit into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the M4 screws. After this, replace the local control panel. Note: If the control panel thickness 2 mm, the longer M3 and M4 bolts must be used. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
5-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
5-5
Installation of a case 84 T into a control panel, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame). The P437 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, see figure 5-7) is used. Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5-7

(continued)
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as follows:
Remove the screws as shown in Figure 5-6, c and mount the enclosed angle brackets using these same screws. Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front. Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws (see figure 5-7). Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
5-6
Mounting the angle brackets
5-8
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
5-7
Installation of a case 84 T into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame). Example for a device in a 40 T case. The P437 has an increased mechanical robustness, if either the surface-mounted case or - for the flush-mounted case if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used. Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5-9

(continued)
The flush-mounted cases are also suitable for installation in enclosures or cubicles equipped with a 19" mounting rack. Figure 5-8 shows this type of installation.
5-8
Installation of the P437 in a cabinet with a 19" mounting rack Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5
5-10
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
5.5
Protective and Operational Grounding
The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required. In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm2 is required. The grounding connection at both locations must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept as short as possible.
19Y5220A_EN
5-9
Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal the bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol:
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5-11

(continued)
5.6
Connection
The P437 must be connected in accordance with the terminal connection diagram indicated on the type identification label. The terminal connection diagram is included in the supporting documents supplied with the device. The terminal connection diagrams that apply to the P437 are also to be found in the Appendix to this operating manual. In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm are sufficient to connect a system current transformer to a current input on the P437. To reduce CT knee-point voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install shorter copper conductors with a greater cross section between the system current transformers and the current inputs on the P437. Copper conductors having a cross section of 1.5 mm2 are adequate to connect the binary signal inputs, the signaling and tripping circuits and the power supply input. All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. 5.6.1 Power supply Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P437 power supply, it must be ensured that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with the nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage. Current-measuring inputs When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the secondary nominal currents of the system and the device correspond. Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation. The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
Connecting the measuring circuits The system current transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard schematic diagram shown in Figure 5-10 . It is essential that the grounding configuration shown in the diagram be followed. If the CT or VT connection is reversed, this can be taken into account when making settings (see Chapter 7).
5-12
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
--
5-10
Standard schematic connection diagram for the P437
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5-13

(continued)
Connecting a resistance thermometer A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog module Y. This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire method (see figure 5-11). No supply conductor compensation is required in this case.
5-11
Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method
Connecting binary inputs and output relays The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable. The polarity for connected binary inputs is to be found in the terminal connection diagrams (see supporting documents supplied with the device or in the Appendix). This is to be understood as a recommendation only. Connection to binary inputs can be made as desired.
5-14
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
5.6.2
Connecting the IRIG-B interface.
An IRIG-B interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional feature. It is connected by a BNC connector. A coaxial cable having a characteristic impedance of 50 must be used as the connecting cable. 5.6.3 PC interface The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a personal computer (PC). Connecting the Serial Interfaces
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently, the female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106 Part 101.
Communication interface The communication interface is provided as a permanent connection of the device to a control system for substations or to a central substation unit. Depending on the type, communication interface 1 on the device is connected either by a special fiber-optic connector or a RS 485 interface with twisted pair copper wires. Communication interface 2 is only available as a RS 485 interface. The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage for the device is shut off.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5-15

(continued)
An RS485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices can be established by using the optional communication interface. The communication master could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices linked to the communication master, e.g. P437, are set-up as slave devices. The RS 485 interface available on the P437 was designed so that data transfer in a full duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between devices. Data transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only for a half duplex transmission mode. To connect the RS485 communication interface the following must be observed:
Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in telecommunication installations. At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary. Strip cable cores and cable shield right at the connection point and connect properly in accordance with specifications. All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at both ends. Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.
A 4-wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also possible. A cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire data link. A 2-wire data link is shown in Figure 5-12, and a 4-wire data link is shown in Figure 5-13 as an example for channel 2 on the communication module. The same is valid if channel 1 on the communication module is available as a RS 485 interface. 2-wire data link: The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped electrically with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P437. The two devices situated at either far end must have a 200 to 220 resistor installed to terminate the data transmission conductor. In most MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in the P437, a 220 resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary. 4-wire data link: Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end of the data transmission conductor. The receivers of slave devices, that have an electrically full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system, e.g. the P437, are connected to the transmitter of the communication master device, and the transmitters of slave devices are connected to the receiver of the master device. Devices equipped electrically with only a half duplex RS485 communication interface are connected to the transmitter of the communication master device. The last device in line (master or slave device) on the data transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver terminated with a 200 to 220 resistor each. In most MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in the P437, a 220 resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary. The second resistor must be connected externally to the device (resistor order number see Chapter 13).
5-16
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
5-12
2-wire data link
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5-17

(continued)
XXXX First participant connect. to the line (e.g. the master)
Px3x Last participant connect. to the line
Px3x
XXXX Device with halfduplex interface 47Z1351A_EN
5-13
4-wire data link
5-18
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
5.7
Location Diagrams
P437 in case 84 TE for pin-terminal connection, diagram P437-408

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A
CH1 CH2
T
4J 4/5V
T
1J
Y
4I
X
6I 8O
X
6I 8O
X
6I 8O
X
6I 8O
X
6O
V
4I 8O
alt.
alt.
A
ETH CH2
A
CH3
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P437 in case 84 TE for ring-terminal connection, diagram P437-409

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A
CH1 CH2
T
4J 4/5V
T
1J
Y
4I
X
6I 8O
X
6I 8O
X
6I 8O
X
6I 8O alt.
X
6O
V
4I 8O
alt.
A
ETH CH2
A
CH3
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5-19

(continued)
5.8
Terminal Connection Diagrams
Transformer module
Ring Pin
Type T
4J / 4/5V
Transformer module
Ring Pin
Type T
1J
X031 X031 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6
Voltage measuring inputs

VA VB VC VNG
X051 X052 1 2 1 2
Current measuring input

IN,par
T5 T6 T7 T90
T24
Option:
11 12 7 8 VRef
T15
X032 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Current measuring inputs IA T1

IB IC IN
T2 T3 T4
5-20
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Notes:

_ is used as a wildcard for the location. Binary module X (6O) optional with 4 static outputs, in parallel with NO contact K_02.2, K_03.1, K_04, K_05. See also section 5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding.
1)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5-21

(continued)
5-22
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
6 Local Control Panel
6 Local control panel
Local Control Panel
All data required for operation of the protection device is entered from the local control panel, and the data important for system management is read out there as well. The following tasks can be handled from the local control panel:

Readout and modification of settings Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status signals Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short circuits in the power system Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing and commissioning
Control through the PC interface is also possible. This requires a suitable PC and operating program (MiCOM S1).
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
6-1

(continued)
6.1 Control and display elements
Display and Keypad
The local control panel consists of an LCD display containing 4 x 20 alphanumeric characters. Then there are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the LCD and there are six additional freely configurable function keys on the right side of the LCD. Furthermore the local control panel is provided with 23 LED indicators: 17 LED indicators are mounted vertically and situated on the left side of the LCD, and there are six additional LED indicators situated on the right side of the six freely configurable function keys.
6-1
View of the local control panel
6-2
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Display levels All data relevant for operation and all device settings is displayed on two levels. At the Panel level, data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level below the panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals, measured variables, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a selected event recording from either the . panel level or from any other point in the menu tree, press the READ key
6-2
Display panels and menu tree
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
6-3

(continued)
Display panels The P437 can display 'Measured Value Panels' which are selected automatically by the device according to system conditions. Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The system condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the Operation Panel and the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available. The Operation Panel is always provided. Menu tree and data points All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a menu tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LC-Display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user. The data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch and they are displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically encoded form, as selected by the user. The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning, and its unit of measurement are displayed in the line below. List data points List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points generally have more than one associated value element. This category includes tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list data point is selected, the symbol is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD, indicating that a sublevel is situated below this displayed level. The individual value elements of a list data point are found at this sub-level. In the case of a list parameter, the individual value elements are linked by operators such as OR.
6-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Short description of keys
Up and Down Keys / Panel Level: The up/down keys switch between the pages of the Measured Value Panel. Menu Tree Level: Press the up and down keys to navigate up and down through the menu tree in a vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the up and down keys have a different function. Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the up and down keys in this mode to change the setting value. (Up key: the next higher value is selected. Down key: the next lower value is selected.) With list settings, press the up and down key to change the logic operator of the value element.
/ Left and Right Keys Menu Tree Level: Press the left and right keys to navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal direction. If the unit is in input mode, the left and right keys have a different function. Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the left and right keys are pressed, the cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves one digit to the right or left. (Left key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left. Right key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.) In the case of a list setting, press the left and right keys to navigate through the list of items available for selection.
ENTER Key Panel Level: Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree. Menu Tree Level: Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the ENTER key a second time to accept the changes as entered and exit the input mode. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active. CLEAR Key C Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data. The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action. Input mode: When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected and the input mode is exited.
G
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
6-5

(continued)
READ Key Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level or from any other point in the menu tree.
The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays can be changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right of the enter key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is illuminated. The examples used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described in this manual; they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved. 6.2 Changing between Display Levels
After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed. Control Step / Description Jumping from Menu Tree Level to Panel Level Control Action Display
0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can

jump to the Panel Level from any position within the menu tree.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Device on-line No (=off)
while pressing the CLEAR key. Note: It is important to press the up key first and release it last in order to avoid unintentional resetting of stored data. Jumping from Panel Level to Menu Tree Level
0 Example of a Measured Value Panel. 1 Press the ENTER key to go from the Panel
Level to the Menu Tree Level.
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: 'Par/Conf/LOC'), the display will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has been configured.
6-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
G
C
1 First press the up key and hold it down
Voltage C-A prim. 20.8 kV Current A prim. 415 A
Voltage C-A prim. 20.8 kV Current A prim. 415 A XX YYY

(continued)
6.3
Display Illumination
If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set "hold" time has elapsed (Backlight time setting in the menu tree at Par/Conf/LOC). Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on again. In this case the control action that is normally triggered by that key will not be executed. Reactivation of the display illumination is also possible by using a binary input. If continuous display illumination is required, the function return time illumination is set to blocked. 6.4 Control at Panel Level
The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select different sets of measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel, and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available. The selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see the section entitled Setting a List Parameter for instructions regarding selection. If the M A I N : W i t h o u t f u n c t i o n setting has been selected for a given panel, then that panel is disabled. The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation exists. If the device detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains active until the measured fault values are reset, by pressing the CLEAR key, for example. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
Voltage A-B prim. 20.7 kV Voltage B-C prim. 20.6 kV
G
0 Up to six selected measured values can be

displayed simultaneously on the Panel.
1 If more than two measured values have

been selected, they can be viewed one page at a time by pressing the up or down keys. The device will also show the next page of the Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-time for Panels (setting in menu tree: "Par/Conf/LOC") has elapsed.
or
Voltage C-A prim. 20.8 kV Current A prim. 415 A
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
6-7

(continued)
6.5 6.5.1 Folders and function groups
Control at the Menu Tree Level Navigation in the Menu Tree
All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control requirements. At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three main folders Parameters, Operation, and Events, which form the first folder level. Up to two further folder levels follow so that the entire folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three folder levels. At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the individual data points (settings) are combined.
Unit type
PX yyy
Folder plane 1
PX yyy Parameters
PX yyy Operation
PX yyy Events
Folder plane 2
Oper/ Cyclic measurements
Folder plane 3
Oper/Cycl/ Meas. operating data
Function groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/ MAIN
Data points
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN Date 01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
6-3
Basic menu tree structure
6-8
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
6.5.2
Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode and plain text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals, and measured values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the settings, signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions. In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the menu tree is displayed in plain text in both modes. In the following examples, the display is shown in plain text mode only. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 In this example, the user switches from plain

text mode to address mode.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Device on-line No (=off)
1 To switch from address mode to plain text
mode or vice versa, press the CLEAR key and or either the left key or the right key simultaneously. This can be done at any point C + in the menu tree.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN 003.030 0
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
6-9 9

(continued)
6.5.3
Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings. There are two ways to enter the input mode. Global change-enabling function
To activate the global change-enabling function, set the Param. change enabl. parameter to Yes (menu tree: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC). The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all further changes with the exception of specially protected control actions (see the section entitled Password-Protected Control Actions) are enabled without entering the password.
Selective change-enabling function
Password input prior to any setting change.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global change-enabling function has been activated. The following example is based on the factory-set password. If the password has been changed by the user (see the section entitled 'Changing the Password'), the following description will apply accordingly. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/LOC, select

the Param. change enabl. parameter.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No
Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line of the display.
1 Press the ENTER key.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No ********
left
6-10
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
down The display will change as shown in the column on the right.
up
Right
2 Press the following keys in sequence:
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No * Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No *
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No *

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No *

(continued)
Control Step / Description Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting can now be changed by pressing the up or down keys. If an invalid password has been entered, the display shown in Step 1 appears.
Control Action
Display
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. No
The LED indicator will go out. The unit is enabled for further setting changes.
4 Press the ENTER key again.
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-enabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single setting change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling function has been activated.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Change the setting to Yes.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC Param. change enabl. Yes
6-11 11

(continued)
Automatic return The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time (menu tree Par/Conf/LOC) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically deactivated, and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is pressed. Forced return The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first pressing the up key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key. Note: It is important to press the up key first and release it last in order to avoid unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be changed. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (menu tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN, 'Protection enabled'). Such settings include the configuration settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system. The following entries in the "Change" column of the address list (see appendix) indicate whether values can be changed or not:

"on": The value can be changed even when the protective function is enabled. "off": The value can only be changed when the protective function is disabled. "-": The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
6-12
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
6.5.4
Changing Parameters
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can be entered. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 Example of a display.
In this example, the change-enabling function is activated and the protective function is disabled, if necessary.
G
keys.
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The last digit of the value is highlighted by a cursor (underlined).
G
1 Select the desired setting by pressing the
Par/Conf/LOC Autom. return time 50000 s
cursor to the left or right.
by pressing the up and down keys. In the meantime the device will continue to operate with the old value. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device will now operate with the new value. Press the keys to select another setting for a value change.
6 If you wish to reject the new setting while

you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out and the device will continue to operate with the old value. A further setting can be selected for a value change by pressing the keys.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor
3 Press the left or right keys to move the
6-13 13

(continued)
6.5.5
Setting a List Parameter
Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements that will be displayed on Measured Value Panels. The maximum possible number m that can be selected out of the total number n of the set is given in the address list in the Remarks column. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an OR operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals and binary input signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user requirements. For the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the user defines the class of a setting instead of assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an illustration. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 Select a list setting (in this example, the

parameter 'Fct.assign.trip cmd.' at Par/Func/Glob/ MAIN in the menu tree). The down arrow () indicates that a list setting has been selected. The first function and the first selected signal will appear in the third and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol #01 in the display indicates the first item of the selection. If 'MAIN: Without function appears for the first item, then this means that no function assignment has been made yet.
G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd.
Once the end of the list is reached, the display shown on the right will appear.
3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the

list. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up.
G
pressing the right and left keys in the input mode.
up and down keys. In this particular case, only the OR operator can be selected. There is no limitation on the selection of classes.
6-14
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
5 Select the operator or the class using the
4 Scroll through the assignable functions by
2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions by pressing the right and left keys.
1 Press the down key.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. #01 DIST Trip zone 1
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 2 Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. #05 MAIN ?????
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. #02 DIST Trip zone 2
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. #02 DIST Trip zone 4 Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 4

(continued)
Control Step / Description
Control Action
G
Display
The LED indicator will go out. The assignment has been made. The unit will now operate with the new settings. If no operator has been selected, the OR operator is always assigned automatically when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no automatic assignment of classes.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 4
in the list.
8 If you wish to reject the new setting while

you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. Deleting a list setting
If MAIN: Without function is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted. 6.5.6 Memory Readout
Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does not necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the protective functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible. The following memories are available:

In the menu tree Oper/Rec/OP_RC: Operating data memory In the menu tree Oper/Rec/MT_RC: Monitoring signal memory Event memories

In the menu tree Events/Rec/FT_RC: Fault memories 1 to 8 In the menu tree Events/Rec/OL_RC: Overload memories 1 to 8 In the menu tree Events/Rec/GF_RC: Ground fault memories 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Press the up key to exit the list at any point
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.assign.trip cmd. OR #02 DIST Trip zone 2
6-15 15

(continued)
Readout of the operating data memory The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of 100 entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 Select the entry point for the operating data

memory.
Oper/Rec/OP_RC Operat. data record.
data memory. The latest entry is displayed.
entries one after the other in chronological order. Once the end of the operating data memory has been reached, pressing the left key again will have no effect.
entry.
operating data memory to return to the entry point.
6-16
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
4 Press the up key at any point within the
3 Press the right key to display the previous
2 Press the left key repeatedly to display the
1 Press the down key to enter the operating
Oper/Rec/OP_RC 01.01.97 11:33 ARC Enabled USER No Oper/Rec/OP_RC 01.01.97 10:01 PSIG Enabled USER Yes
Oper/Rec/OP_RC 01.01.97 11:33 ARC Enabled USER No Oper/Rec/OP_RC Operat. data record.

(continued)
Readout of the monitoring signal memory If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible. After that an overflow signal is issued. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 Select the entry point for the monitoring

signal memory.
G
Oper/Rec/MT_RC Mon. signal record.
signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed.
the entries one after the other in chronological order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have been entered since the last reset, the overflow signal is displayed as the last entry.
entry.
4 If the down key is held down while a

monitoring signal is being displayed, the following additional information will be displayed:
G G
First: Time when the signal first occurred Currently: The fault is still being detected (Yes) or is no longer detected (No) by the selfmonitoring function. Reset: The fault was no longer detected by the self-monitoring function and has been reset (Yes). Number: The signal occurred x times.
monitoring signal memory to return to the entry point.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Press the left key to display the previous
2 Press the right key repeatedly to display
1 Press the down key to enter the monitoring
Mon. signal record. 01.01.97 13:33 SFMON Checksum error param
Mon. signal record. 01.01.97 10:01 SFMON Exception oper. syst.
First: 13:33:59.744 Active: Yes Reset: No Number: 5
Oper/Rec/MT_RC Mon. signal record.
6-17 17

(continued)
Readout of the event memories (records) There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth. Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 Select the entry point for the first fault

memory, for example. If the memory contains entries, the third line of the display will show the date and time the fault began. If the third line is blank, then there are no entries in the fault memory.
G
Events/Rec/FT_RC Fault recording 1 01.01.99 10:00:33
memory. First, the fault number is shown. In this example it is the 22nd fault since the last reset.
measured value or the previous signal.
fault memory to return to the entry point.
6-18
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3 Press the left key to see the previous
the measured fault data and then the binary signals in chronological order. The time shown in the second line is the time, measured from the onset of the fault, at which the value was measured or the binary signal started or ended. Once the end of the fault has been reached (after the right key has been pressed repeatedly), pressing the right key again will have no effect.
2 Press the right key repeatedly to see first
1 Press the down key to enter the fault
Fault recording 1 FT_RC Event 22
Fault recording 1 200 ms FT_DA Running time 0.17 s
Fault recording 1 0 ms FT_RC Record. in progress Start
Fault recording 1 241 ms FT_RC Record. in progress End

Fault recording 1 0 ms FT_RC Record. in progress Start
Events/Rec/FT_RC Fault recording 1 01.01.99 10:00:33

(continued)
6.5.7
Reset
All information memories including the event memories and the monitoring signal memory as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault provided that the appropriate operating mode has been selected so that they always indicate the latest fault. The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably prevented. Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in principle. If the event memories need to be cleared completely, however, as would be the case after injection testing, this can be done after selecting the appropriate setting. The resetting procedure will now be illustrated using the fault memory as an example. In this example the global change-enabling function has already been activated. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
Line 3 of the display shows the number of faults since the last reset, 10 in this example. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up.
0 Select the reset setting. 1 Press the ENTER key.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10 Don't execute

G G
2 Press the up or down keys to change the

setting to Execute.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC Reset recording 10 Execute
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The value in line 3 is reset to 0.
4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault

recordings after leaving the standard control mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out, and the fault recordings remain stored in the device unchanged. Any setting can be selected again for a value change by pressing the keys.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
6-19 19

(continued)
6.5.8
Password-Protected Control Actions
Certain actions from the local control panel (such as a manual trip command for testing purposes) can only be carried out by entering a password. This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If the password has been changed by the user (see the section entitled 'Changing the Password'), the following description will apply accordingly. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN,

select the parameter Man. trip cmd. USER.
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Don't execute
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Don't execute ********
left
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting can now be changed by pressing the up or down keys.
G
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The unit will execute the command.
3 Change the setting to Execute.
6-20
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
down. The display will change as shown in the column on the right.
up
Right
2 Press the following keys in sequence:
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Don't execute * Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Don't execute * Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Don't execute *
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd USER Don't execute *
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN Man. trip cmd. USER Execute

(continued)
Control Action
C
Display
5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT

MODE is on, the control action can be terminated by pressing the CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.
6.5.9
Changing the Password
The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within a specific time interval. The left, right, up and down keys may be used to define the password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:
3
G
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
6-21 21

(continued)
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is described below. The starting point is the factory-set password. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 In the menu tree Par/Conf/LOC, select the

Password setting.
Par/Conf/LOC Password ********
Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** ********
to enter the valid password. The display will change as shown in the column on the right.
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The third line shows an underscore character ( _ ) as the prompt for entering a new password.
G
3 Now press the ENTER key.
example is done by pressing the UP key followed by the DOWN key.
4 Enter the new password, which in this
Asterisks appear in the third line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user to enter the new password again.
6-22
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2 Press the left, right, up and down keys
Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** * Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** *

Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** *
G G G G
Par/Conf/LOC Password ******** * Par/Conf/LOC Password _
Par/Conf/LOC Password *
Par/Conf/LOC Password **
Par/Conf/LOC Password ** _

(continued)
Control Action
G
Display
6 Re-enter the password.
Par/Conf/LOC Password ** *
Par/Conf/LOC Password ** **
If the password has been re-entered correctly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out and the display appears as shown on the right. The new password is now valid.
7a Press the ENTER key again.
7b If the password has been re-entered

incorrectly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE remains on and the display shown on the right appears. The password needs to be re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the change in password by pressing the CLEAR key (see Step 8).
8 The change in password can be canceled at

any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is done, the original password continues to be valid.
Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also possible. To select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6 without entering anything else. This will configure the local control panel without password protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the global change-enabling function has been activated (see the section entitled ChangeEnabling Function).
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
Par/Conf/LOC Password ** _
6-23 23

(continued)
If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again. Control Step / Description Control Action Display
0 Turn off the device. 1 Turn the device on again. At the very beginning of device startup, press the four directional keys (left, right, up and down) at the same time and hold them down. 2 When this condition is detected during startup, the password is displayed. 3 After the four keys are released, startup will continue.
6-24
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
TEST
Password 1234
TEST
7 Settings
7 7.1
Settings Parameters
The P437 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by appropriate settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings, which are located in the folder titled Parameters in the menu tree. The sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree. All settings are reset to their default values after a cold restart. The P437 is blocked in that case. All settings must be re-entered after a cold restart. Note: In the following tables (except for function group DVICE) an indication for the localization of the corresponding function description is shown in the right hand side column. "Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a figure subtitle or figure report sheet, "Page: 3-xxx" to a page.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-1
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.1 Device
Device Identification
000 000
DVICE: Device type The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: Software version Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: SW date Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: SW version communic. Software version for the device's communication software. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: DM IEC 61850 version Software version of the communication software based on the device's protocol per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: Language version
002 120
002 122
002 103
002 059
002 123
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: Text vers.data model
002 121
Using the text replacement tool provided by the operating program, the user can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and load them into the device. These customized data models contain an identifier defined by the user while preparing the data model. This identifier is displayed at this point in the menu tree. Standard data models have the identifier 0 (factory-set default). DVICE: F number
002 124
The F number is the serial number of the device. This display cannot be altered. DVICE: AFS Order No. Order numbers (Cortec) per AFS standard. DVICE: PCS Order No. Order numbers (Cortec) per PCS standard. DVICE: Order ext. No. 1 DVICE: Order ext. No. 2 DVICE: Order ext. No. 3 DVICE: Order ext. No. 4 DVICE: Order ext. No. 5 DVICE: Order ext. No. 6 DVICE: Order ext. No. 7 DVICE: Order ext. No. 8 DVICE: Order ext. No. 9 DVICE: Order ext. No. 10 DVICE: Order ext. No. 11 DVICE: Order ext. No. 12 DVICE: Order ext. No. 13 DVICE: Order ext. No. 14 DVICE: Order ext. No. 15 DVICE: Order ext. No. 16 DVICE: Order ext. No. 17 7-2
000 003 000 004 000 005 000 006 000 007 000 008 000 009 000 010 000 011 000 012 000 013 000 014 000 015 000 016 000 017 000 018 000 019 001 200 001 000
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Order ext. No. 18 DVICE: Order ext. No. 19 DVICE: Order ext. No. 20 DVICE: Order ext. No. 21 DVICE: Order ext. No. 22 DVICE: Order ext. No. 23 DVICE: Order ext. No. 24 DVICE: Order ext. No. 25 DVICE: Order ext. No. 26 DVICE: Order ext. No. 27 Order extension numbers for the device. DVICE: Module var. slot 1 DVICE: Module var. slot 2 DVICE: Module var. slot 3 DVICE: Module var. slot 4 DVICE: Module var. slot 5 DVICE: Module var. slot 6 DVICE: Module var. slot 7 DVICE: Module var. slot 8 DVICE: Module var. slot 9 DVICE: Module var. slot 10 DVICE: Module var. slot 11 DVICE: Module var. slot 12 DVICE: Module var. slot 13 DVICE: Module var. slot 14 DVICE: Module var. slot 15 DVICE: Module var. slot 16 DVICE: Module var. slot 17 DVICE: Module var. slot 18 DVICE: Module var. slot 19 DVICE: Module var. slot 20 DVICE: Module var. slot 21
000 020 000 021 000 022 000 023 000 024 000 025 000 026 000 027 000 028 000 029
086 050 086 051 086 052 086 053 086 054 086 055 086 056 086 057 086 058 086 059 086 060 086 061 086 062 086 063 086 064 086 065 086 066 086 067 086 068 086 069 086 070
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 21. The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given time.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-3
7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 1 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 2 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 3 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 4 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 5 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 6 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 7 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 8 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 9 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 10 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 11 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 12 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 13 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 14 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 15 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 16 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 17 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 18 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 19 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 20 DVICE: Module vers. Slot 21 DVICE: Variant of module A Item number of module A in this design version. DVICE: Version of module A Index letter specifying the version of module A. DVICE: MAC address module A MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This address is introduced during manufacture and can only be read. DVICE: Variant of module L Item number of module L in this design version. DVICE: Version of module L Index letter specifying the version of module L. DVICE: Variant of module B Item number of module B in this design version. DVICE: Version of module B Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B. DVICE: Variant module B (a) Item number of analog bus module B. DVICE: Version module B (a) Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
086 193 086 194 086 195 086 196 086 197 086 198 086 199 086 200 086 201 086 202 086 203 086 204 086 205 086 206 086 207 086 208 086 209 086 210 086 211 086 212 086 213
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
086 047
086 190
104 061
086 048
086 191
086 049
086 192
086 046
086 189
7-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Customer ID data 1 DVICE: Customer ID data 2 DVICE: Customer ID data 3 DVICE: Customer ID data 4 DVICE: Customer ID data 5 DVICE: Customer ID data 6 DVICE: Customer ID data 7 DVICE: Customer ID data 8 Set your numerically coded user data here for your records. DVICE: Location Reference input for the devices location as selected by user. DVICE: Device ID
000 040 000 041 000 042 000 043 000 044 000 045 000 046 000 047
001 201
000 035
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting instructions. DVICE: Substation ID
000 036
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting instructions. DVICE: Feeder ID
000 037
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting instructions. DVICE: Device password 1 DVICE: Device password 2
000 048 000 049
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting instructions. DVICE: SW version DHMI DVICE: SW version DHMI DM Internal software version numbers. Local control panel LOC: Local HMI exists This is set to Yes, if the device is fitted with a local control panel.
221 099 002 131 002 132
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-5
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.2 Local control panel
Configuration Parameters
003 020
LOC: Language Language in which texts will be displayed on the local control panel. LOC: Decimal delimiter Character to be used as decimal separator on the local control panel. LOC: Password
003 021
003 035
Chapter 6.5.3
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel can be defined here. Further information on changing the password is given in Chapter 6. LOC: Fct. reset key
005 251
Fig.: 3-69
Selection of the reset functions that will be invoked when the CLEAR key is pressed. LOC: Fct. read key Selection of the event log that will be displayed when the READ key is pressed. LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 1 LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 2
030 238 030 239 080 110
Chapter 6.1
Selection of the functions that will be accessible in sequence by repeatedly triggering the menu jump list. LOC: Fct. Operation Panel
053 007
Fig.: 3-2
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also referred to as the Operation Panel. LOC: Fct. Overload Panel Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel. LOC: Fct. Fault Panel Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel. LOC: Hold-time for Panels
031 075 053 003 053 005
Fig.: 3-4
Fig.: 3-3
Fig.: 3-2
Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before the unit switches to the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are selected than can be shown on the LC-Display. LOC: Autom. return time If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time period, the change-enabling function is deactivated. LOC: Return time illumin. If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.
003 023 003 014
Fig.: 3-2
Chapter 6.3
7-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
PC link
PC: Note: PC: PC:
Name of manufacturer This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility. Bay address Device address
003 183
Fig.: 3-5
Setting the name of the manufacturer.

003 068 003 069
Fig.: 3-5 Fig.: 3-5
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. PC: PC: Baud rate Parity bit
003 081
Fig.: 3-5
Baud rate of the PC interface.

003 181
Fig.: 3-5
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P437. PC: PC: PC: PC: Spontan. sig. enable Select. spontan.sig. Transm.enab.cycl.dat Cycl. data ILS tel.
003 187
Fig.: 3-5
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.

003 189
Fig.: 3-5
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.

003 084
Fig.: 3-5
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
003 185
Fig.: 3-5
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the PC interface. PC: Delta V
003 055
Fig.: 3-5
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. PC: Delta I
003 056
Fig.: 3-5
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. PC: Delta P
003 059
Fig.: 3-5
The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. PC: Delta f
003 057
Fig.: 3-5
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted. PC: Delta meas.v.ILS tel
003 155
Fig.: 3-5
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. PC: Delta t
003 058
Fig.: 3-5
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this time period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions. PC: Time-out
003 188
Fig.: 3-5
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC interface before activating the second communication channel of communication module B.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-7
7 Settings
(continued)
Communication interface 1
COMM1: Function group COMM1
056 026
Canceling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. COMM1: General enable USER Disabling or enabling communication interface 1. COMM1: Basic IEC870-5 enabl Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx. COMM1: Addit. -101 enable Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on IEC 870-5-101. COMM1: Addit. ILS enable Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol. COMM1: MODBUS enable Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol. COMM1: DNP3 enable Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol. COMM1: COURIER enable Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol. COMM1: Communicat. protocol
003 167 103 040 003 231 003 220 003 217 003 216 003 215 003 170
Fig.: 3-12
Fig.: 3-6
Fig.: 3-6
Fig.: 3-6
Fig.: 3-6
Fig.: 3-6
Fig.: 3-6
Fig.: 3-6
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication interface. COMM1: MODBUS prot. variant The user may select between two variants of the MODBUS protocol. Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
003 165 003 214
Fig.: 3-10
COMM1: Line idle state
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12 Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12 Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12
Setting for the line idle state indication. COMM1: Baud rate
003 071
Baud rate of the communication interface. COMM1: Parity bit

003 171
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected to the P437.
7-8
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Dead time monitoring
003 176
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12
The P437 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not required. Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
003 202
COMM1: Mon. time polling
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less than the time set here. COMM1: Octet comm. address
003 072
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. Note: The former label for CO MM1 : Oc te t co mm. addr ess was: IL SA: Ba y a ddr ess "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit COMM1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3
003 240
Fig.: 3-11
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices. The address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address set at C OMM1 : Oc te t co mm. addr ess is th e lowe r-or der oc te t o f t he D N P a ddr ess . Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
003 166
COMM1: Test monitor on
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12 Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities. COMM1: Name of manufacturer Setting the name of the manufacturer. Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
003 073 003 161
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. COMM1: Octet address ASDU
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled. The former designation for COMM1: Octe t addr ess ASDU : ILSA: D e vice address . "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-9
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable
003 177
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication interface. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 179
COMM1: Select. spontan.sig. Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication interface 1. COMM1: Transm.enab.cycl.dat Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication interface. Note:
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
003 074
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.

003 175
COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel. Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the communication interface. Note:
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9

003 050
COMM1: Delta V
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 051
COMM1: Delta I
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 054
COMM1: Delta P
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 052
COMM1: Delta f
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 150
COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. Note:
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
7-10
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Delta t
003 053
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after this time period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 151
COMM1: Delta t (energy)
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
The measured values for active energy and reactive energy are transmitted via the communication interface after this time has elapsed. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 077
COMM1: Contin. general scan
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9
A continuous or background general scan means that the P437 transmits all settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication interface during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will be data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be set defines the minimum time difference between two telegrams. Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
003 201
COMM1: Comm. address length Setting the communication address length. Note: enabled. This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
Fig.: 3-8
COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr. Setting the length of the higher-order communication address. Note: enabled. This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
003 200
Fig.: 3-8
COMM1: Cause transm. length Setting the length of the cause of transmission. Note: enabled. This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
003 192
Fig.: 3-8
COMM1: Address length ASDU Setting the length of the common address for identification of telegram structures. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit COMM1: Octet 2 addr. ASDU
003 193
Fig.: 3-8
003 194
Fig.: 3-8
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of telegram structures. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-11
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Addr.length inf.obj. Setting the length of the address for information objects. Note: enabled. This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
003 196
Fig.: 3-8
COMM1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj. Setting the length of the higher-order address for information objects. Note: enabled. This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
003 197
Fig.: 3-8
COMM1: Inf.No.<->funct.type
003 195
Fig.: 3-8
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be reversed in the object address. Note: enabled. This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
003 198
COMM1: Time tag length Setting the time tag length. Note: enabled. This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
Fig.: 3-8
COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv.
003 190
Fig.: 3-8
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as a single signal or double signal. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit COMM1: ASDU2 conversion Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a single signal or double signal. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit COMM1: Initializ. signal Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued. Note: enabled. This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
003 226 003 199 003 191
Fig.: 3-8
Fig.: 3-8
COMM1: Balanced operation
Fig.: 3-8
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced basis (full duplex operation). Note: enabled. This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
003 227
COMM1: Direction bit
Fig.: 3-8
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at the control center and to '0' at the substation. Note: enabled. This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
7-12
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Time-out interval Setting the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the acknowledgment command is issued. Note: enabled. This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
003 228
Fig.: 3-8
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. cmds
003 210
Fig.: 3-10
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first command is given to the register no. 00301, the second to the register no. 00302, etc. Note: This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
003 211
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. sig.
Fig.: 3-10
MODBUS registers in the range 10301 to 10400 are assigned to the selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first signal is given to the register no. 10301, the second to the register no. 10302, etc. Note: This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
003 212
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. m.val.
Fig.: 3-10
MODBUS registers in the range 30301 to 30400 are assigned to the selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first measured value is given to the register no. 30301, the second to the register no. 30302, etc. Note: This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
003 213
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. param.
Fig.: 3-10
MODBUS registers in the range 40301 to 40400 are assigned to the selected parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first parameter is given to the register no. 40301, the second to the register no. 40302, etc. Note: This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
003 152
COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS) All MODBUS registers are transmitted again via the communication interface after this time has elapsed. Note:
Fig.: 3-10
This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.

003 249
COMM1: Autom.event confirm.
Fig.: 3-10
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master, in order for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'. Note: This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
003 241
COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay
Fig.: 3-11
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the start of sending the 'response'. Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
003 242
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is terminated. Note:
Fig.: 3-11
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled. 7-13
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode Setting the acknowledgment mode of the link layer. Note:
003 243
Fig.: 3-11
This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.

003 244
COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout
Fig.: 3-11
Setting the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the link layer. Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
003 245
COMM1: Link Max. Retries Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge). Note:
Fig.: 3-11

003 246
COMM1: Appl.Confirm.Timeout
Fig.: 3-11
Setting the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the application layer. Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
003 247
COMM1: Appl. Need Time Del.
Fig.: 3-11
Time interval within which the slave cyclically requests time synchronization from the master. Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
003 232
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. inputs
Fig.: 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 binary inputs. Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0. Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
003 233
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin.outputs
Fig.: 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 binary outputs. Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0. Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
003 234
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. count.
Fig.: 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 20 binary counters. Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0. Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
003 235
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog inp.
Fig.: 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 analog inputs. Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0. Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
003 236
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog outp
Fig.: 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 analog outputs. Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0. Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
7-14
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Delta meas.v. (DNP3)
003 250
Fig.: 3-11
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values in object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master for each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting deadband'. Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
003 248
COMM1: Delta t (DNP3) Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs). Note:
Fig.: 3-11

103 042
COMM1: Command selection Selection of commands to be issued via the Courier protocol. Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled. COMM1: Signal selection Selection of signals to be transmitted via the Courier protocol. Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled. COMM1: Meas. val. selection Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol. Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled. COMM1: Parameter selection Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol. Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled. COMM1: Delta t (COURIER) Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are again transmitted. Note: Communication interface 2 This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
Fig.: 3-12
103 043
Fig.: 3-12
103 044
Fig.: 3-12
103 045
Fig.: 3-12
103 046
Fig.: 3-12
COMM2: Function group COMM2
056 057
Canceling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. COMM2: General enable USER Disabling or enabling communication interface 2. COMM2: Line idle state Setting for the line idle state indication. COMM2: Baud rate Baud rate of the communication interface. COMM2: Parity bit Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected to the P437. COMM2: Dead time monitoring
103 176 103 171 103 071 103 165 103 170
Fig.: 3-14
Fig.: 3-14
Fig.: 3-14
Fig.: 3-14
Fig.: 3-14
The P437 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not required. Note:
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
This setting is only necessary for modem transmission. 7-15
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Mon. time polling
103 202
Fig.: 3-14
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less than the time set here. COMM2: Positive ackn. fault
103 203
Fig.: 3-14
As of software version 608 of the P437, it is possible to set here whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively after transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the COMM2/PC interface). COMM2: Octet comm. address
103 072
Fig.: 3-14
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit COMM2: Name of manufacturer Setting the name of the manufacturer. Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
103 073 103 161
Fig.: 3-14
COMM2: Octet address ASDU
Fig.: 3-14
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. "ASDU": Application Service Data Unit COMM2: Spontan. sig. enable
103 177
Fig.: 3-14
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication interface. COMM2: Select. spontan.sig. Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication interface 2. COMM2: Transm.enab.cycl.dat Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication interface. COMM2: Cycl. data ILS tel. Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the communication interface. COMM2: Delta V
103 050 103 175 103 074 103 179
Fig.: 3-14
Fig.: 3-14
Fig.: 3-14
Fig.: 3-14
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. COMM2: Delta I
103 051
Fig.: 3-14
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. COMM2: Delta P
103 054
Fig.: 3-14
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. COMM2: Delta f
103 052
Fig.: 3-14
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
7-16
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Delta meas.v.ILS tel The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. COMM2: Delta t
103 150
Fig.: 3-14
103 053
Fig.: 3-14
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after this time period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions. Communication interface 3 COMM3: Function group COMM3 Canceling function group COMM3 or including it in the configuration. This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication module is fitted. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. COMM3: General enable USER Disabling or enabling communication interface 3. COMM3: Baud rate
120 038 120 030 056 058
Page: 3-21
Page: 3-21
Adjustment of the baud rate for telegram transmission via the teleprotection interface (InterMiCOM interface) so as to meet the requirements of the transmission carrier. COMM3: Source address Address for send signals. COMM3: Receiving address Address for receive signals. COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 1 COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 2 COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 3 COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 4 COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 5 COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 6 COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 7 COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 8 Assignment of functions for the 8 send signals. COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 1 COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 2 COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 3 COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 4 COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 5 COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 6 COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 7 COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 8 Configuration (assignment of functions) for the 8 receive signals COMM3: Oper. mode receive 1 COMM3: Oper. mode receive 2 COMM3: Oper. mode receive 3 COMM3: Oper. mode receive 4
120 002 120 005 120 008 120 011 120 001 120 004 120 007 120 010 120 013 120 016 120 019 120 022 121 001 121 003 121 005 121 007 121 009 121 011 121 013 121 015 120 032 120 031
Page: 3-21
Page: 3-21
Page: 3-21
Page: 3-21
Page: 3-22
Selection of Blocking or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive signals 1 to 4 (single-bit transmission).
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-17
7 Settings
(continued)
COMM3: Oper. mode receive 5 COMM3: Oper. mode receive 6 COMM3: Oper. mode receive 7 COMM3: Oper. mode receive 8
120 014 120 017 120 020 120 023
Page: 3-22
Selection of Permissive or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive signals 5 to 8 (bit-pair transmission). COMM3: Default value rec. 1 COMM3: Default value rec. 2 COMM3: Default value rec. 3 COMM3: Default value rec. 4 COMM3: Default value rec. 5 COMM3: Default value rec. 6 COMM3: Default value rec. 7 COMM3: Default value rec. 8 Definition of the default value for the 8 receive signals. COMM3: Time-out comm.fault
120 033 120 060 120 061 120 062 120 063 120 064 120 065 120 066 120 067
Page: 3-23
Fig.: 3-17
This timer triggers the alarm signals CO MM 3 : Com mu nic a ti ons fau l t and SFM ON : Co mm un ic .fa ul t CO MM 3 and sets the received signals to their user-defined default values. Time-out occurs when the set time has elapsed since the most recent 100% valid telegram was received. COMM3: Sig.asg. comm.fault Using this setting, the alarm signal can be configured (assigned) to the corresponding PSIG input signal. COMM3: Time-out link fail.
120 035 120 034
Fig.: 3-150, 3-228
Fig.: 3-17
Time indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. After this timer stage has elapsed, alarm signals CO MM 3 : Co mm . l ink fa i lur e and SFM ON : Co mm .l ink fai l .COM M3 are raised. These can be mapped to give the operator a warning LED or contact to indicate that maintenance attention is required. COMM3: Limit telegr. errors
120 036
Page: 3-25
Percentage of corrupted messages compared to total messages transmitted before an alarm is raised (COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. and SFMON: L i m .e xc e e d . , t e l .e r r .) . When this threshold is exceeded, the receive signals are set to their user-defined default values. IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Function group IEC Canceling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. IEC: General enable USER Enabling and disabling function group IEC. IEC: Enable configuration
104 058 104 000 056 059
This parameter can only be sent individually. In order to maintain consistency among all the parameters in function groups IEC, GSSE and GOOSE, they are only enabled mutually by this parameter. After this command is sent to the device, the actual status of the previously changed parameter setting of the three function groups is enabled in the communication data model of the connected device. This function is carried out automatically with the off-line/on-line switching of the device. 7-18
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Ethernet media
104 056
Selecting the physical communication channel from either wired (RJ45) or optical fiber (ST/SC connector depending on ordering option) IEC: IED name
104 057
Name of the device (IED has server function). This device name serves as device identification in the IEC 61850 system, it is included in the Logical Device Name in the IEC data model and must therefore be unambiguous. All devices logged-on to the network should have non-recurring IED names. IEC: TCP keep-alive timer This defines a "heart-beat" time interval used to actively monitor a communication link to a logged-on client. IEC: IEC: IEC: IEC: IP address IP address 1 IP address 2 IP address 3
104 001 104 002 104 003 104 004 104 062
IP address for the device (IED has server function). Note: In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at IEC : IP add ress . The devices front panel display only displays the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses. IEC: IEC: IEC: IEC: Subnet mask Subnet mask 1 Subnet mask 2 Subnet mask 3
104 005 104 006 104 007 104 008
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network. Note: In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at IEC : Sub net m ask . The devices front panel display only displays the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses. IEC: IEC: IEC: IEC: Gateway address Gateway address 1 Gateway address 2 Gateway address 3
104 011 104 012 104 013 104 014
This parameter defines the IPv4 address of the network gateway of a communication link to a client outside of the local network. Note: In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at IEC : Ga tewa y add ress. The devices front panel display only displays the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses. IEC: SNTP operating mode
104 200
Operating mode for the time synchronization telegram. When set to Broadcast synchronization occurs cyclically with the clock server transmitting a broadcast signal and, when set to Request from Server each device (IED has client function) individually requests a synchronization signal after its own cycle time. IEC: SNTP poll cycle time
104 201
Device (IED) poll cycle time for time synchronization when operating mode is set to Request from Server.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-19
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: IEC: IEC: IEC:
SNTP server 1 IP SNTP server 1 IP 1 SNTP server 1 IP 2 SNTP server 1 IP 3
104 202 104 203 104 204 104 205
IP address of synchronizing clock server 1. Note: In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at IEC : SNT P ser ver 1 IP. The devices front panel display only displays the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses. IEC: IEC: IEC: IEC: SNTP server 2 IP SNTP server 2 IP 1 SNTP server 2 IP 2 SNTP server 2 IP 3
104 210 104 211 104 212 104 213
IP address of synchronizing clock server 2. Note: In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at IEC : SNT P ser ver 2 IP. The devices front panel display only displays the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses. IEC: Diff. local time Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation (IED). IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time Time difference when changing to daylight saving time. IEC: Switch.dayl.sav.time
104 219 104 207 104 206
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time is wanted. IEC: Dayl.sav.time start IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. d IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. m
104 220 104 221 104 222
These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t a r t are the values "first", "second", "third", "fourth", and "last"; for I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . d the seven weekdays are available so that for example a setting like "on the last Sunday in March" may be used. IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 +
104 223
This defines the time difference and the time of day (on the specific changeover day) when the clock is to be switched to daylight saving time. The time is given in the number of minutes after midnight, e.g. when the clock changeover to 3:00 AM always occurs at 2:00 AM, then the value to be entered at I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + is 120 [minutes] and at I E C : D i f f . d a y l . s a v . t i m e it is 60 [minutes]. IEC: IEC: IEC: IEC: Dayl.sav.time end Dayl.sav.time end d Dayl.sav.time end m Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+
104 225 104 226 104 227 104 228
This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover from daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for the clock changeover to daylight saving time. 7-20
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Deadband value
104 051
Setting to calculate the filter value for all measured value Report Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy. Should a change occur in one of the measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to this formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d va lue IEC: Update Measurements
104 229
Time to send all measured value Report Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy. IEC: Dead band IP
104 230
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured IP Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured IP values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d IP IEC: Dead band IN
104 231
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured IN Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured IN values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d IN IEC: Dead band VPP
104 232
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured VPP Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured VPP values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d VPP IEC: Dead band VPG
104 233
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured VPG Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured VPG values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d VPG IEC: Dead band f
104 234
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured f Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured f values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d f IEC: Dead band P
104 235
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured P Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured P values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d P
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-21
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Dead band phi
104 236
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured phi Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured phi values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d ph i IEC: Dead band Z
104 237
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured Z Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured Z values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d Z IEC: Dead band min/max
104 238
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured min/max Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured min/max values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d m in /max IEC: Dead band ASC
104 239
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured ASC Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured ASC values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d ASC IEC: Dead band temp.
104 240
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured temp Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured temp values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d tem p IEC: Dead band 20mA
104 241
Setting to calculate the filter value for the measured 20mA Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in the measured 20mA values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to the following formula: Step size measured value setting IEC : De adb an d 20 m A IEC: Update cycle energy Cycle time to send energy value by Report Control Block (RCB). No RCB transmission with setting to blocked! IEC: DEV control model
221 081 104 060
This parameter defines which control model shall be used for the external devices. For switching with highest security it is recommended to select "SBO enh. security" (SBO = "select before operate").
7-22
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
IEC Generic Substation Status Events
GSSE: Function group GSSE
056 060
Canceling function group GSSC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are only then active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if the parameters of this function group have been activated through the parameter IEC : Ena bl e co n fi gur a tio n or by switching the device offline/on-line. GSSE: General enable USER Enabling and disabling function group GSSE. GSSE: Min. cycle
104 052 104 049
Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition cycle time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with this formula: Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))N-1 [ms] The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state change of a GSSE bit pair. GSSE: Max. cycle
104 053
Maximum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in s. For the formula to calculate the repetition cycle time see Min. cycle. Should the calculated value for the repetition cycle time be equal to or greater than the set max. value then the GSSE message will be sent repeatedly at the set max. value time. GSSE: Increment
104 054
Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the repetition cycle time see Min. cycle. GSSE: Operating mode
104 055
In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independent of their MAC address (network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed. In the operating mode Promiscuous and after all GSSE sending devices have logged-on, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have logged-on successfully, are read and processed.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-23
7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE:
Output 1 bit pair Output 2 bit pair Output 3 bit pair Output 4 bit pair Output 5 bit pair Output 6 bit pair Output 7 bit pair Output 8 bit pair Output 9 bit pair Output 10 bit pair Output 11 bit pair Output 12 bit pair Output 13 bit pair Output 14 bit pair Output 15 bit pair Output 16 bit pair Output 17 bit pair Output 18 bit pair Output 19 bit pair Output 20 bit pair Output 21 bit pair Output 22 bit pair Output 23 bit pair Output 24 bit pair Output 25 bit pair Output 26 bit pair Output 27 bit pair Output 28 bit pair Output 29 bit pair Output 30 bit pair Output 31 bit pair Output 32 bit pair
104 101 104 104 104 107 104 110 104 113 104 116 104 119 104 122 104 125 104 128 104 131 104 134 104 137 104 140 104 143 104 146 104 149 104 152 104 155 104 158 104 161 104 164 104 167 104 170 104 173 104 176 104 179 104 182 104 185 104 188 104 191 104 194
Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual GSSE outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are used by this device (IED) during a send operation.
7-24
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
Output 1 fct.assig. Output 2 fct.assig. Output 3 fct.assig. Output 4 fct.assig. Output 5 fct.assig. Output 6 fct.assig. Output 7 fct.assig. Output 8 fct.assig. Output 9 fct.assig. Output 10 fct.assig. Output 11 fct.assig. Output 12 fct.assig. Output 13 fct.assig. Output 14 fct.assig. Output 15 fct.assig. Output 16 fct.assig. Output 17 fct.assig. Output 18 fct.assig. Output 19 fct.assig. Output 20 fct.assig. Output 21 fct.assig. Output 22 fct.assig. Output 23 fct.assig. Output 24 fct.assig. Output 25 fct.assig. Output 26 fct.assig. Output 27 fct.assig. Output 28 fct.assig. Output 29 fct.assig. Output 30 fct.assig. Output 31 fct.assig. Output 32 fct.assig.
104 102 104 105 104 108 104 111 104 114 104 117 104 120 104 123 104 126 104 129 104 132 104 135 104 138 104 141 104 144 104 147 104 150 104 153 104 156 104 159 104 162 104 165 104 168 104 171 104 174 104 177 104 180 104 183 104 186 104 189 104 192 104 195
Function assignment of a binary logical status signal to the virtual GSSE outputs. The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as configured above.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-25
7 Settings
(continued)
Input 1 bit pair Input 2 bit pair Input 3 bit pair Input 4 bit pair Input 5 bit pair Input 6 bit pair Input 7 bit pair Input 8 bit pair Input 9 bit pair Input 10 bit pair Input 11 bit pair Input 12 bit pair Input 13 bit pair Input 14 bit pair Input 15 bit pair Input 16 bit pair Input 17 bit pair Input 18 bit pair Input 19 bit pair Input 20 bit pair Input 21 bit pair Input 22 bit pair Input 23 bit pair Input 24 bit pair Input 25 bit pair Input 26 bit pair Input 27 bit pair Input 28 bit pair Input 29 bit pair Input 30 bit pair Input 31 bit pair Input 32 bit pair
105 001 105 006 105 011 105 016 105 021 105 026 105 031 105 036 105 041 105 046 105 051 105 056 105 061 105 066 105 071 105 076 105 081 105 086 105 091 105 096 105 101 105 106 105 111 105 116 105 121 105 126 105 131 105 136 105 141 105 146 105 151 105 156
Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input. A GSSE is always received consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).
7-26
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
Input 1 IED name Input 2 IED name Input 3 IED name Input 4 IED name Input 5 IED name Input 6 IED name Input 7 IED name Input 8 IED name Input 9 IED name Input 10 IED name Input 11 IED name Input 12 IED name Input 13 IED name Input 14 IED name Input 15 IED name Input 16 IED name Input 17 IED name Input 18 IED name Input 19 IED name Input 20 IED name Input 21 IED name Input 22 IED name Input 23 IED name Input 24 IED name Input 25 IED name Input 26 IED name Input 27 IED name Input 28 IED name Input 29 IED name Input 30 IED name Input 31 IED name Input 32 IED name
105 002 105 007 105 012 105 017 105 022 105 027 105 032 105 037 105 042 105 047 105 052 105 057 105 062 105 067 105 072 105 077 105 082 105 087 105 092 105 097 105 102 105 107 105 112 105 117 105 122 105 127 105 132 105 137 105 142 105 147 105 152 105 157
IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-27
7 Settings
(continued)
Input 1 default Input 2 default Input 3 default Input 4 default Input 5 default Input 6 default Input 7 default Input 8 default Input 9 default Input 10 default Input 11 default Input 12 default Input 13 default Input 14 default Input 15 default Input 16 default Input 17 default Input 18 default Input 19 default Input 20 default Input 21 default Input 22 default Input 23 default Input 24 default Input 25 default Input 26 default Input 27 default Input 28 default Input 29 default Input 30 default Input 31 default Input 32 default
105 003 105 008 105 013 105 018 105 023 105 028 105 033 105 038 105 043 105 048 105 053 105 058 105 063 105 068 105 073 105 078 105 083 105 088 105 093 105 098 105 103 105 108 105 113 105 118 105 123 105 128 105 133 105 138 105 143 105 148 105 153 105 158
Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole GSSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
7-28
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
Input 1 fct.assig. Input 2 fct.assig. Input 3 fct.assig. Input 4 fct.assig. Input 5 fct.assig. Input 6 fct.assig. Input 7 fct.assig. Input 8 fct.assig. Input 9 fct.assig. Input 10 fct.assig. Input 11 fct.assig. Input 12 fct.assig. Input 13 fct.assig. Input 14 fct.assig. Input 15 fct.assig. Input 16 fct.assig. Input 17 fct.assig. Input 18 fct.assig. Input 19 fct.assig. Input 20 fct.assig. Input 21 fct.assig. Input 22 fct.assig. Input 23 fct.assig. Input 24 fct.assig. Input 25 fct.assig. Input 26 fct.assig. Input 27 fct.assig. Input 28 fct.assig. Input 29 fct.assig. Input 30 fct.assig. Input 31 fct.assig. Input 32 fct.assig.
105 004 105 009 105 014 105 019 105 024 105 029 105 034 105 039 105 044 105 049 105 054 105 059 105 064 105 069 105 074 105 079 105 084 105 089 105 094 105 099 105 104 105 109 105 114 105 119 105 124 105 129 105 134 105 139 105 144 105 149 105 154 105 159
Function assignment of the virtual GSSE input to a binary logical state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the state of the bit pair, as configured above, and which was received with GSSE
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-29
7 Settings
(continued)
Generic Object Orientated Substation Events
GOOSE: Function group GOOSE
056 068
Canceling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are only then active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if the parameters of this function group have been activated through the parameter IEC : Ena bl e co n fi gur a tio n or by switching the device offline/on-line. GOOSE: General enable USER Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE. GOOSE: Multic. MAC address
106 003 106 001
Fig.: 3-18
Multicast MAC address to provide identification of GOOSE to the receiving clients (IED). The default MAC address entered is suggested as a standard according to IEC 61850. The multicast MAC address entered in GOOSE may be modified so as to increase transmission security or to reduce the number of "GOOSE Messages" to be read by receiving clients (IED). GOOSE: Application ID Application ID of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE: Goose ID
106 002 106 004
Fig.: 3-18
Fig.: 3-18
Goose ID being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE includes a Dataset with 32 binary and configurable virtual outputs and 10 two-pole states to the maximum of 10 monitored external devices GOOSE: VLAN Identifier
106 006
Fig.: 3-18
VLAN identifier of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN identifier makes it possible to have switches in the network filter messages, if the switches support such a function. Because so-called multicast MAC addresses are applied, switches are unable to filter messages in the network if they do not include a VLAN identifier. GOOSE: VLAN Priority VLAN priority of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE: DataSet Reference DataSet Reference of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE: DataSet Cfg.Revision
106 009 106 008 106 007
Fig.: 3-18
Fig.: 3-18
Fig.: 3-18
Display of the 'Dataset Configuration Revision' value of GOOSE, which is sent from this device (IED).
7-30
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 3 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 4 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 5 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 6 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 7 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 8 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 9 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 10 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 11 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 12 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 13 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 14 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 15 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 16 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 17 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 18 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 19 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 20 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 21 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 22 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 23 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 24 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 25 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 26 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 27 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 28 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 29 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 30 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 31 fct.assig. GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig.
106 011 106 013 106 015 106 017 106 019 106 021 106 023 106 025 106 027 106 029 106 031 106 033 106 035 106 037 106 039 106 041 106 043 106 045 106 047 106 049 106 051 106 053 106 055 106 057 106 059 106 061 106 063 106 065 106 067 106 069 106 071 106 073
Fig.: 3-18 Fig.: 3-18 Fig.: 3-18
Fig.: 3-18
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE outputs. The signal configured here is sent with the permanently configured Dataset of GOOSE.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-31
7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 2 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 3 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 4 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 5 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 6 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 7 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 8 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 9 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 10 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 11 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 12 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 13 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 14 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 15 Applic. ID GOOSE: Input 16 Applic. ID
107 000 107 010 107 020 107 030 107 040 107 050 107 060 107 070 107 080 107 090 107 100 107 110 107 120 107 130 107 140 107 150
Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. GOOSE: Input 1 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 2 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 3 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 4 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 5 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 6 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 7 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 8 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 9 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 10 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 11 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 12 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 13 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 14 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 15 Goose ID GOOSE: Input 16 Goose ID
107 001 107 011 107 021 107 031 107 041 107 051 107 061 107 071 107 081 107 091 107 101 107 111 107 121 107 131 107 141 107 151
Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input.
7-32
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 2 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 3 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 4 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 5 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 6 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 7 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 8 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 9 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 10 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 11 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 12 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 13 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 14 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 15 DataSet Ref GOOSE: Input 16 DataSet Ref
107 002 107 012 107 022 107 032 107 042 107 052 107 062 107 072 107 082 107 092 107 102 107 112 107 122 107 132 107 142 107 152
'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device (IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then only the first 20 characters are to be entered. GOOSE: Input 1 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 2 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 3 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 4 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 5 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 6 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 7 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 8 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 9 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 10 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 11 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 12 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 13 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 14 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 15 DataObj Ind GOOSE: Input 16 DataObj Ind
107 003 107 013 107 023 107 033 107 043 107 053 107 063 107 073 107 083 107 093 107 103 107 113 107 123 107 133 107 143 107 153
Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data object index indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-33
7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 2 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 3 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 4 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 5 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 6 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 7 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 8 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 9 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 10 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 11 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 12 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 13 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 14 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 15 DatAttr Ind GOOSE: Input 16 DatAttr Ind
107 004 107 014 107 024 107 034 107 044 107 054 107 064 107 074 107 084 107 094 107 104 107 114 107 124 107 134 107 144 107 154
Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data attribute index indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated. GOOSE: Input 1 default GOOSE: Input 2 default GOOSE: Input 3 default GOOSE: Input 4 default GOOSE: Input 5 default GOOSE: Input 6 default GOOSE: Input 7 default GOOSE: Input 8 default GOOSE: Input 9 default GOOSE: Input 10 default GOOSE: Input 11 default GOOSE: Input 12 default GOOSE: Input 13 default GOOSE: Input 14 default GOOSE: Input 15 default GOOSE: Input 16 default
107 005 107 015 107 025 107 035 107 045 107 055 107 065 107 075 107 085 107 095 107 105 107 115 107 125 107 135 107 145 107 155
Default for the virtual binary GOOSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
7-34
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 2 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 3 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 4 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 5 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 6 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 7 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 8 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 9 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 10 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 11 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 12 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 13 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 14 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 15 fct.assig. GOOSE: Input 16 fct.assig.
107 006 107 016 107 026 107 036 107 046 107 056 107 066 107 076 107 086 107 096 107 106 107 116 107 126 107 136 107 146 107 156
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection, control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was received with the Dataset of GOOSE IRIG-B IRIGB: Function group IRIGB
056 072
Canceling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. 023 200 Fig.: 3-19 IRIGB: General enable USER Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-35
7 Settings
(continued)
Function keys
F_KEY: Password funct.key 1 F_KEY: Password funct.key 2 F_KEY: Password funct.key 3 F_KEY: Password funct.key 4 F_KEY: Password funct.key 5 F_KEY: Password funct.key 6 These passwords enable the corresponding function keys. Further information on changing the passwords is given in Chapter 6. F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F1 F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F2 F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F3 F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F4 F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F5 F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F6
003 036 030 242 030 243 030 244 030 245 030 246
080 112 080 113 080 114 080 115 080 116 080 117
Fig.: 3-20
Assignment of functions to the function keys. Either a single function or a menu jump list may be selected. The two menu jump lists are composed via L OC : Fct. m enu j mp l is t x (x: 1 or 2). F_KEY: Operating mode F1 F_KEY: Operating mode F2 F_KEY: Operating mode F3 F_KEY: Operating mode F4 F_KEY: Operating mode F5 F_KEY: Operating mode F6 Choice between operation of the function key as a key or switch. F_KEY: Return time fct.keys
080 132 080 133 080 134 080 135 080 136 080 137
Fig.: 3-20
003 037
Once the password has been entered, the function keys remain active for no longer than this time. Thereafter, the function keys are disabled until the password is entered again.
7-36
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
Binary input The P437 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the system. The number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. The P437 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in the menu tree. When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several control points having different signal voltages. In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals must persist for at least 30 ms. The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify whether the presence (active high mode) or absence (active low mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic 1 signal.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-37
7 Settings
(continued)
INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP: INP:
Fct. assignm. U 801 Fct. assignm. U 802 Fct. assignm. U 803 Fct. assignm. U 804 Fct. assignm. U 805 Fct. assignm. U 806 Fct. assignm. U 1001 Fct. assignm. U 1002 Fct. assignm. U 1003 Fct. assignm. U 1004 Fct. assignm. U 1005 Fct. assignm. U 1006 Fct. assignm. U 1201 Fct. assignm. U 1202 Fct. assignm. U 1203 Fct. assignm. U 1204 Fct. assignm. U 1205 Fct. assignm. U 1206 Fct. assignm. U 1401 Fct. assignm. U 1402 Fct. assignm. U 1403 Fct. assignm. U 1404 Fct. assignm. U 1405 Fct. assignm. U 1406 Fct. assignm. U 1601 Fct. assignm. U 1602 Fct. assignm. U 1603 Fct. assignm. U 1604 Fct. assignm. U 1605 Fct. assignm. U 1606 Fct. assignm. U 2001 Fct. assignm. U 2002 Fct. assignm. U 2003 Fct. assignm. U 2004
152 127 152 130 152 133 152 136 152 139 152 142 152 163 152 166 152 169 152 172 152 175 152 178 152 199 152 202 152 205 152 208 152 211 152 214 190 002 190 006 190 010 190 014 190 018 190 022 192 002 192 006 192 010 192 014 192 018 192 022 153 087 153 090 153 093 153 096
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
7-38
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
Oper. mode U 801 Oper. mode U 802 Oper. mode U 803 Oper. mode U 804 Oper. mode U 805 Oper. mode U 806 Oper. mode U 1001 Oper. mode U 1002 Oper. mode U 1003 Oper. mode U 1004 Oper. mode U 1005 Oper. mode U 1006 Oper. mode U 1201 Oper. mode U 1202 Oper. mode U 1203 Oper. mode U 1204 Oper. mode U 1205 Oper. mode U 1206 Oper. mode U 1401 Oper. mode U 1402 Oper. mode U 1403 Oper. mode U 1404 Oper. mode U 1405 Oper. mode U 1406 Oper. mode U 1601 Oper. mode U 1602 Oper. mode U 1603 Oper. mode U 1604 Oper. mode U 1605 Oper. mode U 1606 Oper. mode U 2001 Oper. mode U 2002 Oper. mode U 2003 Oper. mode U 2004
152 128 152 131 152 134 152 137 152 140 152 143 152 164 152 167 152 170 152 173 152 176 152 179 152 200 152 203 152 206 152 209 152 212 152 215 190 003 190 007 190 011 190 015 190 019 190 023 192 003 192 007 192 011 192 015 192 019 192 023 153 088 153 091 153 094 153 097
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-39
7 Settings
(continued)
Measured data input
MEASI: Function group MEASI
056 030
Canceling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. MEASI: General enable USER Disabling or enabling analog measured data input. MEASI: Enable IDC p.u.
037 190 011 100
Fig.: 3-22
Fig.: 3-25
Setting the minimum current that must flow in order for the P437 to display a measured value > 0 (zero suppression). MEASI: IDC< open circuit
037 191
Fig.: 3-25
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P437 will issue an open circuit signal. MEASI: IDC 1 MEASI: IDC 2 MEASI: IDC 3 MEASI: IDC 4 MEASI: IDC 5 MEASI: IDC 6 MEASI: IDC 7 MEASI: IDC 8 MEASI: IDC 9 MEASI: IDC 10 MEASI: IDC 11 MEASI: IDC 12 MEASI: IDC 13 MEASI: IDC 14 MEASI: IDC 15 MEASI: IDC 16 MEASI: IDC 17 MEASI: IDC 18 MEASI: IDC 19 MEASI: IDC 20
037 150 037 152 037 154 037 156 037 158 037 160 037 162 037 164 037 166 037 168 037 170 037 172 037 174 037 176 037 178 037 180 037 182 037 184 037 186 037 188
Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that has been set accordingly.
7-40
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
MEASI: IDC,lin 1 MEASI: IDC,lin 2 MEASI: IDC,lin 3 MEASI: IDC,lin 4 MEASI: IDC,lin 5 MEASI: IDC,lin 6 MEASI: IDC,lin 7 MEASI: IDC,lin 8 MEASI: IDC,lin 9 MEASI: IDC,lin 10 MEASI: IDC,lin 11 MEASI: IDC,lin 12 MEASI: IDC,lin 13 MEASI: IDC,lin 14 MEASI: IDC,lin 15 MEASI: IDC,lin 16 MEASI: IDC,lin 17 MEASI: IDC,lin 18 MEASI: IDC,lin 19 MEASI: IDC,lin 20
037 151 037 153 037 155 037 157 037 159 037 161 037 163 037 165 037 167 037 169 037 171 037 173 037 175 037 177 037 179 037 181 037 183 037 185 037 187 037 189
Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that has been set accordingly. MEASI: Scaled val. IDC,lin1 Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1. MEASI: Scaled val.IDC,lin20 Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
037 193 037 192
Fig.: 3-26
Fig.: 3-26
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-41
7 Settings
(continued)
Binary outputs The P437 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and connection schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. The P437 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at that slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden in the menu tree. The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as command relays or as signal relays. One signal can also be assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of contact multiplication. An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the selected operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-signal (ES) mode or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or non-latching mode. For output relays operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be canceled.
OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: 7-42
Fct. assignm. K 801 Fct. assignm. K 802 Fct. assignm. K 803 Fct. assignm. K 804 Fct. assignm. K 805 Fct. assignm. K 806 Fct. assignm. K 807 Fct. assignm. K 808 Fct. assignm. K 1001 Fct. assignm. K 1002 Fct. assignm. K 1003 Fct. assignm. K 1004 Fct. assignm. K 1005 Fct. assignm. K 1006 Fct. assignm. K 1007 Fct. assignm. K 1008 Fct. assignm. K 1201 Fct. assignm. K 1202 Fct. assignm. K 1203 Fct. assignm. K 1204 Fct. assignm. K 1205 Fct. assignm. K 1206 Fct. assignm. K 1207 Fct. assignm. K 1208 Fct. assignm. K 1401 Fct. assignm. K 1402 Fct. assignm. K 1403 Fct. assignm. K 1404 Fct. assignm. K 1405 Fct. assignm. K 1406 Fct. assignm. K 1407 Fct. assignm. K 1408 Fct. assignm. K 1601
150 169 150 172 150 175 150 178 150 181 150 184 150 187 150 190 150 217 150 220 150 223 150 226 150 229 150 232 150 235 150 238 151 009 151 012 151 015 151 018 151 021 151 024 151 027 151 030 169 002 169 006 169 010 169 014 169 018 169 022 169 026 169 030 171 002
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP:
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
Fct. assignm. K 1602 Fct. assignm. K 1603 Fct. assignm. K 1604 Fct. assignm. K 1605 Fct. assignm. K 1606 Fct. assignm. K 1607 Fct. assignm. K 1608 Fct. assignm. K 1801 Fct. assignm. K 1802 Fct. assignm. K 1803 Fct. assignm. K 1804 Fct. assignm. K 1805 Fct. assignm. K 1806 Fct. assignm. K 2001 Fct. assignm. K 2002 Fct. assignm. K 2003 Fct. assignm. K 2004 Fct. assignm. K 2005 Fct. assignm. K 2006 Fct. assignm. K 2007 Fct. assignm. K 2008 Oper. mode K 801 Oper. mode K 802 Oper. mode K 803 Oper. mode K 804 Oper. mode K 805 Oper. mode K 806 Oper. mode K 807 Oper. mode K 808 Oper. mode K 1001 Oper. mode K 1002 Oper. mode K 1003 Oper. mode K 1004 Oper. mode K 1005 Oper. mode K 1006 Oper. mode K 1007 Oper. mode K 1008 Oper. mode K 1201 Oper. mode K 1202 Oper. mode K 1203 Oper. mode K 1204 Oper. mode K 1205 Oper. mode K 1206 Oper. mode K 1207 Oper. mode K 1208 Oper. mode K 1401 Oper. mode K 1402 Oper. mode K 1403 Oper. mode K 1404 Oper. mode K 1405 Oper. mode K 1406
171 006 171 010 171 014 171 018 171 022 171 026 171 030 173 002 173 006 173 010 173 014 173 018 173 022 151 201 151 204 151 207 151 210 151 213 151 216 151 219 151 222
Assignment of functions to output relays.

150 170 150 173 150 176 150 179 150 182 150 185 150 188 150 191 150 218 150 221 150 224 150 227 150 230 150 233 150 236 150 239 151 010 151 013 151 016 151 019 151 022 151 025 151 028 151 031 169 003 169 007 169 011 169 015 169 019 169 023
7-43
7 Settings
(continued)
OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP:
Oper. mode K 1407 Oper. mode K 1408 Oper. mode K 1601 Oper. mode K 1602 Oper. mode K 1603 Oper. mode K 1604 Oper. mode K 1605 Oper. mode K 1606 Oper. mode K 1607 Oper. mode K 1608 Oper. mode K 1801 Oper. mode K 1802 Oper. mode K 1803 Oper. mode K 1804 Oper. mode K 1805 Oper. mode K 1806 Oper. mode K 2001 Oper. mode K 2002 Oper. mode K 2003 Oper. mode K 2004 Oper. mode K 2005 Oper. mode K 2006 Oper. mode K 2007 Oper. mode K 2008
169 027 169 031 171 003 171 007 171 011 171 015 171 019 171 023 171 027 171 031 173 003 173 007 173 011 173 015 173 019 173 023 151 202 151 205 151 208 151 211 151 214 151 217 151 220 151 223
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
7-44
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
Measured data input
MEASO: Function group MEASO
056 020
Canceling function group MEASO or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. MEASO: General enable USER Disabling or enabling the measured data output function. MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form. MEASO: Hold time output BCD
010 010 053 002 031 074
Fig.: 3-30
Fig.: 3-34
Fig.: 3-34
Setting the time period for transmission of the selected measured value in BCD form. MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD MEASO: BCD-Out min. value MEASO: BCD-Out max. value
The variable Mx is to be issued in BCD form. For measured values in the range "measured values to be issued" the output value should change linearly with the measured value. Measurands Measurands of the variable Mx Associated scaled measurands Range Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2 0 ... 1
037 140 037 141 037 142 037 143
Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34
Measurands to be output Measurands to be output Scaled measurands to be output Designation of the set values in the data model
with:
Range Mx,min. ... Mx,max. Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max "Scaled min. val. BCD" ... ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1 Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Display values BCD display values for measured values in the range "measured values to be issued" BCD display values for measured values = Mx,min. BCD display values for measured values = Mx,max.
Range "BCD-Out min. value" ... ... "BCD-Out max. value" "BCD-Out min. value" ... "BCD-Out max. value" ...
MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-2 Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
053 000 053 001
Fig.: 3-36
7-45
7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: Hold time output A-1 MEASO: Hold time output A-2 Setting the time period for output of the selected measured value. MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-2 MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-2 MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-2
010 114 010 115
Fig.: 3-36
037 104 037 110 037 105 037 111 037 106 037 112
Fig.: 3-36 Fig.: 3-36 Fig.: 3-36
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax (x=1, 2) is to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range "measured values to be issued" is defined. In this range the characteristic has two linear sections, which are separated by a knee point. Measurands Measurands of the variable Mx Associated scaled measurands Range Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2 0 ... 1
Measurands to be output Measurands to be output Scaled measurands to be output Designation of the set values in the data model
with:
Range Mx,min. ... Mx,max. Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max "Scal. min. value Ax" ... ... "Scal. max. value Ax"
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1 Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Knee point for characteristic Value for knee point Scaled knee point value Designation of this set value in the data model
with:
Description Mx,knee Mx,scaled,knee "Scaled knee val. Ax" ...
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
7-46
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2 MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1 MEASO: AnOut knee point A-2 MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-2 Output values Output current range for measured values in the range "measured values to be issued" Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,min. Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,max. Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,knee
with: Mx,min ... Mx,max : measured values to be issued
037 107 037 113 037 108 037 114 037 109 037 115
Fig.: 3-36 Fig.: 3-36 Fig.: 3-36
Designation in the data model "AnOut min. val. Ax" ... ... "AnOut max. val. Ax" "AnOut min. val. Ax" "AnOut max. val. Ax" "AnOut knee point Ax"
MEASO: Output value 1 MEASO: Output value 2 MEASO: Output value 3
037 120 037 121 037 122
Fig.: 3-36 Fig.: 3-36 Fig.: 3-36
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%, can be issued.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-47
7 Settings
(continued)
LED indicators The P437 has a total of 23 LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. The MiCOM IED support software MiCOM S1 gives an overview of configuration options for all LED indicators. LED indicator H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled "HEALTHY" and signals the operational readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). LED indicators H 2 and H 3 are not configurable either. H 2 is labeled "OUT OF SERVICE" and signals a blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled "ALARM" and signals a warning alarm. LED indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the "EDIT MODE". The factory setting for LED indicator H 4 is shown in the terminal connection drawings included in the documentation or the appendix. The layout of the LED indicators is shown in the dimensional drawing in section 4.1. At this point it is specifically emphasized that there is no permanent connection given between the freely configurable function keys and the LED indicators H 18 to H 23 situated directly next to these function keys. An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES) mode ('open-circuit principle') or normally-energized (NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle') and in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be canceled. With the multi-color LED indicators (H 4 H 16, H 18 H 23) the colors red and green can be independently assigned with functions. The third color amber results as a mixture of red and green, i.e. when both functions assigned to the LED indicator are simultaneously present.
LED: Fct.assig. H 1 green Signal of the operational readiness of the protection unit. The function M A I N : H e a l t h y is permanently assigned. LED: Fct.assig. H 2 yell. Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2. The function M AIN : Blocke d /fau l ty is permanently assigned. LED: Fct.assig. H 3 yell. Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 3. The function S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) is permanently assigned. LED: Fct.assig. H17 red Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 17. The function L O C : E d i t m o d e is permanently assigned.
085 184
085 001
085 004
085 185
7-48
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED:
Fct.assig. H 4 red Fct.assig. H 4 green Fct.assig. H 5 red Fct.assig. H 5 green Fct.assig. H 6 red Fct.assig. H 6 green Fct.assig. H 7 red Fct.assig. H 7 green Fct.assig. H 8 red Fct.assig. H 8 green Fct.assig. H 9 red Fct.assig. H 9 green Fct.assig. H10 red Fct.assig. H10 green Fct.assig. H11 red Fct.assig. H11 green Fct.assig. H12 rot Fct.assig. H12 green Fct.assig. H13 red Fct.assig. H13 green Fct.assig. H14 red Fct.assig. H14 green Fct.assig. H15 red Fct.assig. H15 green Fct.assig. H16 red Fct.assig. H16 green Fct.assig. H18 red Fct.assig. H18 green Fct.assig. H19 red Fct.assig. H19 green Fct.assig. H20 red Fct.assig. H20 green Fct.assig. H21 red Fct.assig. H21 green Fct.assig. H22 red Fct.assig. H22 green Fct.assig. H23 red Fct.assig. H23 green
085 007 085 057 085 010 085 060 085 013 085 063 085 016 085 066 085 019 085 069 085 022 085 072 085 025 085 075 085 028 085 078 085 031 085 081 085 034 085 084 085 037 085 087 085 040 085 090 085 043 085 093 085 131 085 161 085 134 085 164 085 137 085 167 085 140 085 170 085 143 085 173 085 146 085 177
Assignment of functions to LED indicators. LED: Operating mode H 1 The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned. LED: Operating mode H 2 The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned. LED: Operating mode H 3 The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned. LED: Operating mode H 17 The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned.
085 183 085 005 085 002 085 182
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-49
7 Settings
(continued)
LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED:
Operating mode H 4 Operating mode H 5 Operating mode H 6 Operating mode H 7 Operating mode H 8 Operating mode H 9 Operating mode H 10 Operating mode H 11 Operating mode H 12 Operating mode H 13 Operating mode H 14 Operating mode H 15 Operating mode H 16 Operating mode H 18 Operating mode H 19 Operating mode H 20 Operating mode H 21 Operating mode H 22 Operating mode H 23
085 008 085 011 085 014 085 017 085 020 085 023 085 026 085 029 085 032 085 035 085 038 085 041 085 044 085 132 085 135 085 138 085 141 085 144 085 147
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
Main function
MAIN: Chann.assign.COMM1/2 Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels. MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync
003 169
Fig.: 3-70
103 210
Page 3-106
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available are COMM1/IEC, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync
103 211
Page 3-106
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available are COMM1/IEC, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. The backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by the primary source after M AIN : Ti me s ync . ti me -ou t has elapsed. MAIN: Time sync. time-out Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary source.
103 212
Page 3-106
7-50
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
Fault recording
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 2 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 3 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 4 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 5 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 6 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 7 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 8 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 9 FT_RC: Rec. analog chann.10
035 160 035 161 035 162 035 163 035 164 035 165 035 166 035 167 035 168 035 169
Fig: 3-88
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded. The figure shown illustrates an overview of the assignment.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-51
7 Settings
(continued)
Canceling protection functions By means of a configuration procedure, the user can adapt the device functions flexibly to the scope of protection functions required in each particular h.v. system. The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be canceled:

The protection function in question must be disabled. None of the elements of the protection function being cancelled may be assigned to a binary input. None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or an LED indicator. None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals. No functions of the device function to be canceled may be selected in a list parameter setting.
The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: LIMIT:). Distance protection DIST: Function group DIST Canceling function group DIST or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Power swing blocking PSB: Function group PSB Canceling function group PSB or including it in the configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Measuring-circuit monitoring MCMON: Function group MCMON
056 015 056 001 056 014
Canceling function group MCMON or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Backup overcurrent-time protection (Backup DTOC) BUOC: Function group BUOC
056 002
Canceling function group BUOC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Switch on to fault protection SOTF: Function group SOTF
056 003
Canceling function group SOTF or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Protective signaling PSIG: Function group PSIG Canceling function group PSIG or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
056 004
7-52
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
Auto-reclosing control
ARC: Function group ARC Canceling function group ARC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
056 005
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Function group ASC Canceling function group ASC or including it in the configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection GFSC: Function group GFSC
056 006
056 011
Canceling function group GFSC or including it in the configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling GSCSG: Function group GSCSG
056 028
Canceling function group GSCSG or including it in the configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Definite-time overcurrent protection DTOC: Function group DTOC
056 008
Canceling function group DTOC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Inverse-time overcurrent protection IDMT: Function group IDMT
056 009
Canceling function group IDMTx or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Power directional protection P<>: Function group P<> Canceling function group P<> or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Thermal overload protection THERM: Function group THERM
056 023 056 045
Canceling function group THERM or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Time-voltage protection V<>: Function group V<> Canceling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
056 010
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-53
7 Settings
(continued)
Over-/underfrequency protection
f<>: Function group f<> Canceling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
056 033
Circuit breaker failure protection
CBF: Function group CBF Canceling function group CBF or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
056 007
Limit value monitoring
LIMIT: Function group LIMIT Canceling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
056 025
Logic
LOGIC: Function group LOGIC
056 017
Canceling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
7-54
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3 7.1.3.1 PC link PC:
Function Parameters Global Command blocking

003 182
Fig.: 3-5
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected from the PC interface. PC: Sig./meas.val.block.
003 086
Fig.: 3-5
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured data are transmitted through the PC interface. Communication interface 1 COMM1: Command block. USER
003 172
Fig.: 3-6
When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from communication interface 1. COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER
003 076
Fig.: 3-7, 3-8,3-9
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1. Communication interface 2 COMM2: Command block. USER
103 172
Fig.: 3-14
When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from communication interface 2. COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER
103 076
Fig.: 3-14
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2. Binary outputs OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked. Main function MAIN: Protection enabled Switching the device off-line or on-line. Some parameters can only be changed when protection is disabled. MAIN: Test mode USER
003 012 003 030 021 014
Fig.: 3-28
Fig.: 3-53
Fig.: 3-71
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'. MAIN: Nominal frequ. fnom Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system. MAIN: Phase sequence
010 049 010 030
Fig.: 3-277
Fig.: 3-43
Setting the phase sequence A-B-C or A-C-B. (Alternative terminology: Setting the rotary field direction, either clockwise or anticlockwise.) MAIN: Inom C.T. prim.
010 001
Fig.: 3-39
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformers for measurement of phase currents. MAIN: IN,nom C.T. prim.
010 018
Fig.: 3-40
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for measurement of residual current.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-55
7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: IN,nom,par C.T. prim
010 152
Fig.: 3-41
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for measurement of the residual current of the parallel line. MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim. Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages. MAIN: VNG,nom V.T. prim. Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage. MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. prim. Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check. MAIN: Inom device Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for measurement of phase currents. This also corresponds to the nominal device current. MAIN: IN,nom device Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for measurement of residual current. This also corresponds to the nominal device current. MAIN: IN,nom,par device Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for measurement of the residual current of the parallel line. This also corresponds to the nominal device current. MAIN: Dynamic range I
031 082 010 023 010 026 010 003 010 100 010 027 010 002
Fig.: 3-44
Fig.: 3-45
Fig.: 3-46
Fig.: 3-38
Fig.: 3-38
Fig.: 3-38
Fig.: 3-47, 3-49, 3-91
Setting for the dynamic range of the phase current transformers as used by the P437. 'Highest range' dynamic range: IP = 100 Inom 'Sensitive range' dynamic range: IP = 25 Inom Note: The lower the setting for dynamic range, the more accurately the device will operate. However, make sure that the dynamic range is set no lower than the maximum possible short-circuit current. MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec. Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages. MAIN: VNG,nom V.T. sec. Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage. MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. sec. Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
031 052 010 028 010 009
Fig.: 3-38
Fig.: 3-38
Fig.: 3-38
7-56
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IP
010 004
Fig.: 3-38
Short-circuit direction determination depends on the connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be 'Standard', if the P437s 'Forward' decision is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or given a connection scheme according to Chapter 5 if the forward decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be Opposite. MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IN
010 019
Fig.: 3-38
Direction determination of the ground fault measuring systems depends on the connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be 'Standard', if the P437s 'Forward' decision is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or given a connection scheme according to Chapter 5 if the forward decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be Opposite. MAIN: Conn.meas.crc.IN,par
010 020
Fig.: 3-38
The directional measurement of the ground fault (short-circuit) measuring systems depends on the connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be 'Standard', if the P437s 'Forward' decision is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or given a connection scheme according to Chapter 5 if the forward decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be Opposite. MAIN: Meas. value rel. IP
011 030
Fig.: 3-39
Setting the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents are displayed. MAIN: Meas. value rel. IN
011 031
Fig.: 3-40
Setting the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the measured operating value of the residual current is displayed. MAIN: Meas.val.rel. IN,par
011 043
Fig.: 3-41
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating value of the residual current of the parallel line to be displayed. MAIN: Meas. value rel. V
011 032
Fig.: 3-44
Setting the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages, and, if applicable, derived voltages are displayed. MAIN: Meas. val. rel. VNG
011 033
Fig.: 3-45
Setting the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured operating value of the neutral-point displacement voltage is displayed. MAIN: Meas. val. rel. Vref
011 034
Fig.: 3-46
Setting the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured operating value of the reference voltage for the automatic synchronism check is displayed. MAIN: Settl. t. IP,max,del
010 113
Fig.: 3-39
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-57
7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 1 Assignment of memories that will be reset simultaneously when M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t 1 U S E R is activated. MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 2 Assignment of memories that will be reset simultaneously when M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t 2 U S E R is activated. MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 1
005 248
Fig.: 3-69
005 249
Fig.: 3-69
021 021
Fig.: 3-55
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking input 1 (M AIN : Bl ock ing 1 EXT) is activated. MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 2
021 022
Fig.: 3-55
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking input 2 (M AIN : Bl ock ing 2 EXT) is activated. MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel. MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1 Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 1. MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.2 Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 2. MAIN: Fct.ass.1p trip cmd1 Selecting signals for the phase-selective trip logic. Available are these signals:

002 060 021 002 021 001 021 012
Fig.: 3-65
Fig.: 3-62
Fig.: 3-62
Fig.: 3-60
All trip signals issued by functions DTOC, IDMT and GFSC All output signals issued by function group LOGIC M A I N: Pa r . T r i p ( 1 p ) E XT
021 003
MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 1 Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1. MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 2 Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 2. MAIN: Close cmd.pulse time Setting for the duration of the close command. MAIN: tCB,close
Fig.: 3-62
021 004
Fig.: 3-62
015 067
Fig.: 3-58
000 032
This setting determines the CB close time. In slightly asynchronous power systems, the CB close time is taken into account by the automatic synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close command. This is only possible if setting ASC : AR w i th tC B PSx = 'yes or A S C : M C w i th t CB PSx = 'yes. MAIN: RC inhib.by CB close
015 042
Fig.: 3-58
This setting determines whether the reclose command will be inhibited as soon as the "Circuit breaker closed" signal starts. MAIN: Fct. assign. fault
021 031
Selection of the signals to be signaled as Blocked/Faulty in addition to the messages that always result in the message Blocked/Faulty. The device is blocked in both cases.
7-58
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
Parameter subset selection
PSS: Control via USER
003 100
Fig.: 3-72
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local control panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting 'Yes'. PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel. PSS: Keep time
003 063 003 060
Fig.: 3-72
Fig.: 3-72
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection is carried out via binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no binary signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected from the local control panel shall apply. Self-monitoring SFMON: Fct. assign. warning
021 030
Fig.: 3-73
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals 'Warning (LED)' and 'Warning (relay)' and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled 'ALARM'. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading to a blocking of the device are not configurable. They always result in the above signals and indication. SFMON: Mon.sig. retention This setting determines how long monitoring signals remain in the monitoring signal memory before a reset occurs. Fault recording FT_RC: Fct. assig. trigger
003 085 021 018
Fig.: 3-86
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording and fault data acquisition. FT_RC: Pre-fault time
003 078
Fig.: 3-88
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before a fault occurs (pre-fault recording time). FT_RC: Post-fault time Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault (post-fault recording time). FT_RC: Max. recording time
003 075 003 079
Fig.: 3-88
Fig.: 3-88
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and post-fault recording times.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-59
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.2 Distance protection
General Functions
031 073
DIST: General enable USER Enable/disable the distance protection function. DIST: CVT stabilization
Fig.: 3-89
010 031
Fig.: 3-103
This setting defines whether distance protection will operate with or without stabilization against transient transformation errors of capacitive voltage transformers. DIST: Zone extens. for 1pG
011 049
Fig.: 3-109
This setting enables zone extension in the case of single-phase-to-ground fault detection. DIST: Zone timer start
001 236
Fig.: 3-120
If the mode 'with zone starting' has been selected, then only the timer stage of the specific distance protection zone Zn is triggered for which the measured loop impedance is inside the zone. Power swing blocking PSB: General enable USER Disabling or enabling power swing blocking. PSB: PSB: PSB: PSB: R posX negX
014 060 014 061 006 185 014 062 014 050
Fig.: 3-129 Fig.: 3-129 Fig.: 3-129 Fig.: 3-129
Settings for the power swing polygon. PSB: Operating mode

014 091
This setting defines that power swing detection can be based on impedance variation (Mode Delta Z) as an alternative to apparent power change (Mode Delta S). PSB: Oper. value Delta S The threshold operate value setting for the blocking function is a percentage. It reflects the change in apparent power over a sampling interval as referred to the apparent power at the end of the sampling interval. PSB: Oper. value Delta T
014 090 014 054
Fig.: 3-131
Setting of the timer stage for operating mode P S B : O p e r a t i n g m o d e = Mode Delta Z. PSB: Operate delay Setting for the operate delay. PSB: Release delay Setting for the release delay. PSB: Oper. value dS, trip The setting for the tripping threshold for the power swing blocking is a percentage. It reflects the change in apparent power over a sampling interval as referred to the apparent power at the end of the sampling interval. PSB: Oper. delay dS, trip Setting for the operate delay.
014 063 014 059 014 053 014 052
Fig.: 3-131
Fig.: 3-131
Fig.: 3-138
Fig.: 3-138
7-60
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
PSB: R (OOS) PSB: posX (OOS) PSB: negX (OOS) Settings for the power swing polygon that is used for the enhanced counting-based tripping. PSB: Perm. No. OOS (a) Counter threshold (a) for Out-of-Step Tripping. PSB: Perm. No. OOS (b) Counter threshold (b) for Out-of-Step Tripping. PSB: Perm. No. stab. PS Counter threshold for stable power swing trajectories. PSB: Fct. assign. block. Selection of the zones to be blocked if the blocking criterion is present. PSB: Max. blocking time Time limit of the blocking effect. PSB: IP>
006 184 006 186 006 187
Fig: *3-135 Fig: *3-137 Fig: *3-137
006 028
Fig: *3-137
006 189
Fig: *3-137
006 027
Fig: *3-137
012 017
Fig.: 3-131
014 055
Fig.: 3-131
014 058
Fig.: 3-131
If the phase current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is canceled without time delay. PSB: Ineg> If the negative-sequence current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is canceled without time delay. PSB: IN> If the residual current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is canceled without time delay. Measuring-circuit monitoring MCMON: General enable USER Enable/disable the measuring-circuit monitoring function. MCMON: Current monitoring This setting defines whether the current-measuring circuits shall be monitored. MCMON: Ineg>
014 002 014 006 014 001 014 056 014 057
Fig.: 3-131
Fig.: 3-131
Fig.: 3-140
Fig.: 3-140
Fig.: 3-140
Setting for the operate value Ineg> (permissible unbalance threshold in the current-measuring circuit). MCMON: Op. mode volt. mon. Selection of the monitoring mode in the voltage-measuring circuit. MCMON: Operate delay
017 011 014 007
Fig.: 3-141
Fig.: 3-141
Setting for the operate delay after which the Meas. circ. (V/I) faulty signals will be issued. MCMON: FF, V enabled USER Enable/disable the "Fuse Failure" monitoring function. MCMON: Vpos<, FF Setting for the Vpos< operate value of fuse failure monitoring. MCMON: Vneg>, FF Setting for the Vneg> operate value of fuse failure monitoring.
031 056 031 053 014 009
Fig.: 3-142
Fig.: 3-142
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-61
7 Settings
(continued)
MCMON: Vneg<, FF Setting for the Vneg< operate value of fuse failure monitoring. MCMON: Ineg>, FF Setting for the Ineg> operate value of fuse failure monitoring. MCMON: Operate delay FF, V Setting for the operate delay of fuse failure monitoring. MCMON: FF,Vref enabled USER Enable/disable the "Fuse Failure" monitoring function of the reference voltage Vref. MCMON: Oper. delay FF, Vref Setting for the time delay for "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage Vref. Backup overcurrent-time protection (Backup DTOC) BUOC: General enable USER Enabling or disabling BUOC protection BUOC: Operating mode Setting for the BUOC protection operating mode. Switch on to fault protection SOTF: General enable USER Enable/disable the switch on to fault (short circuit) protection. Protective signaling PSIG: General enable USER Enable/disable the protective signaling. Auto-reclosing control ARC: General enable USER Enable/disable the auto-reclosing control. ARC: Control via USER
031 054
Fig.: 3-142
031 057
Fig.: 3-142
031 058
Fig.: 3-142
014 013
Fig.: 3-143
014 012
Fig.: 3-143
014 011
Fig.: 3-144
014 000
Fig.: 3-144
011 068
Fig.: 3-147
015 004
Fig.: 3-148
015 060
Fig.: 3-178
000 107
Page: 3-266
Setting this parameter to no enables selection of ARC operating mode via binary signal inputs. This is possible only if the required binary signal inputs have been configured. Automatic synchronism check ASC: General enable USER Enable/disable the automatic synchronism check. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection GFSC: General enable USER Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection. GFSC: Virtual current pol.
006 009 018 060 018 000
Fig.: 3-198
Fig.: 3-209
Fig.: 3-217
Set to Yes if you want the device to apply virtual current polarisation, i.e. calculate the polarising voltage as sum of the 2 healthy phase voltages. The default is No to provide backwards compatibility. GFSC: Fct.assign. blocking Select those binary signals that will if present block the GFSC protection.
006 020
Fig.: 3-210
7-62
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
GFSC: Evaluation VNG
002 136
Fig.: 3-211
Setting that ground fault (short-circuit) protection will use either the neutralpoint displacement voltage value, internally calculated by the P437 or the value of the neutral-point displacement voltage as measured by the P437 (see section "Measured variables for GFSC function"). GFSC: IN> Setting for the operate value of the residual current. GFSC: VNG> Setting for the operate value of the neutral-point displacement voltage. Note: If an electronic zero-power directional protection relay (SUR) is replaced by the ground fault (short-circuit) protection function, the operate value VNG> is obtained by multiplying the V0 setting of the device by a factor of 0.07. GFSC: Angle phiG
018 061 018 062 018 063
Fig.: 3-212
Fig.: 3-212
Fig.: 3-224
Setting for the position of the straight line separating forward and backward (reverse) directions. GFSC: Start. oper. delay Setting for the operate delay of starting. Note: This setting corresponds to setting t1 of the electronic zeropower directional protection relay (SUR). GFSC: Start. releas. delay Setting for the release delay of the starting. GFSC: Comp. reactance X0
002 135 018 065 018 064
Fig.: 3-212
Fig.: 3-212
Setting of "cross-polarization" parameter X0 (see section GFSC, "Improved directional measurement for series compensated line applications"). GFSC: t1 (forward) Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal in the event of a 'forward' decision. GFSC: t2 (backward)
018 067 018 066
Fig.: 3-224
Fig.: 3-224
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal in the event of a 'backward' (reverse) decision. GFSC: t3 (non-directional) Setting for the operate delay of the non-directional trip signal. Note: This setting corresponds to setting t2-t1 of the electronic zeropower directional protection relay (SUR). GFSC: Criteria tS active This setting defines the direction of time-voltage protection tripping. GFSC: Operating mode tS
018 080 018 071 018 068
Fig.: 3-224
Fig.: 3-224
Fig.: 3-218
This setting specifies whether the voltage-dependent or current-dependent tripping time characteristic shall apply. GFSC: Iref,N Setting for the reference current.
018 076
Fig.: 3-223
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-63
7 Settings
(continued)
GFSC: Characteristic N Setting for the tripping characteristic. GFSC: Factor kt,N Setting for the starting characteristic factor kP. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling GSCSG: General enable USER Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling. GSCSG: Fct.assign. blocking Select those binary signals that will if present block the GFSC protection. GSCSG: Operating mode Setting for the operating mode of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling. GSCSG: Channel mode
018 078
Fig.: 3-223
018 077
Fig.: 3-223
023 069
Fig.: 3-227
002 180
Fig.: 3-228
023 079
Fig.: 3-232
023 078
Fig.: 3-228, 3-230,3-232, 3-234, 3-236
This setting specifies whether GSCSG and PSIG operate with independent communication channels or with a common communication channel. Note: Operation with a common communication channel is only possible, if the same operating mode is set for both PSIG and GSCSG. The correct assignment of signals to the functions must be done by setting the time delays appropriately. GSCSG: Trip mode
023 088
Fig.: 3-235
This setting specifies whether there shall be a single-pole or three-pole trip and whether an HSR shall be triggered. GSCSG: Tripping time
023 075
Fig.: 3-229
Setting for the delay of the send signal (of the signal comparison release scheme) and the trip signal. This delay shall be used for coordinating GSCSG with the other protection functions. GSCSG: Release time send
023 076
Fig.: 3-232, 3-233,3-237
This setting specifies extension of the send signal after starting of ground fault (short-circuit) protection has dropped out. GSCSG: tBlock Setting for the transient blocking time of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling in the event of a change in fault direction. GSCSG: Block. sig. nondir.
023 089 023 077
Fig.: 3-231
Fig.: 3-233
This setting specifies whether the blocking signal will be transmitted only in the event of a backward (reverse) decision by ground fault (short-circuit) protection or whether it will be transmitted as long as there is no forward decision. GSCSG: Echo on receive This setting determines whether ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling operates with or without echo. Note: Use of the echo only makes sense if the signal comparison release scheme has been selected as the operating mode. 7-64
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613 023 080
Fig.: 3-236
7 Settings
(continued)
GSCSG: Operate delay echo Setting for the operate delay of the echo pulse. GSCSG: Pulse duration echo Setting for echo pulse duration. GSCSG: tBlock echo
023 081
Fig.: 3-236
023 082
Fig.: 3-236
023 083
Fig.: 3-236
Setting for the transient blocking time of the echo signal in the event of a change in fault direction. GSCSG: Weak infeed trip
023 084
Fig.: 3-234
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weakinfeed logic is triggered. Note: Use of the weak-infeed logic only makes sense if the signal comparison release scheme has been selected as the operating mode. GSCSG: Op.delay weak infeed Setting for the operate delay of weak-infeed logic. GSCSG: Frequency monitoring This setting defines whether failure of frequency transmission will be monitored. Definite-time overcurrent protection DTOC: General enable USER Enable/disable the definite-time overcurrent protection function. Inverse-time overcurrent protection IDMT: General enable USER Enable/disable the inverse-time overcurrent protection function. Power directional protection P<>: General enable USER Disabling or enabling the power directional protection function. Thermal overload protection THERM: General enable USER Enable/disable the thermal overload protection function. THERM: Iref Setting for the reference current. THERM: Start. factor OL_RC Setting for the starting characteristic factor kP. THERM: Time const. 1 (>Ibl)
022 051 017 099 022 052 022 050 014 220 017 096 031 068 023 085 023 087
Fig.: 3-234
Fig.: 3-230
Fig.: 3-238
Fig.: 3-249
Fig.: 3-278
Fig.: 3-261
Fig.: 3-263
Fig.: 3-263
Fig.: 3-263
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow (Ibl: base line current). THERM: Time const. 2 (<Ibl)
022 085
Fig.: 3-263
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current flow (Ibl: base line current). Note: This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1. THERM: Rel. O/T warning Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613 022 078
Fig.: 3-263
7-65
7 Settings
(continued)
THERM: Rel. O/T trip Setting for the operate value of the trip stage. THERM: Hysteresis trip Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage. Time-voltage protection V<>: General enable USER Enable/disable the time-voltage protection function. Over-/underfrequency protection f<>: General enable USER Enable/disable the over-/underfrequency protection function. f<>: Selection meas. volt Setting for the voltage that is used for frequency measurement. f<>: Evaluation time Setting the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the duration of the set evaluation time so that a signal is issued. f<>: Undervolt. block. V<
022 079
Fig.: 3-263
022 068
Fig.: 3-263
023 030
Fig.: 3-264
023 031
Fig.: 3-273
018 202
Fig.: 3-274
018 201
Fig.: 3-275
018 200
Fig.: 3-275
Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked. Circuit Breaker Failure Protection CBF: General enable USER Enable/disable the circuit breaker failure protection function. CBF: Start with man. trip Setting that a manual trip signal will also be used as a start criterion. CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux.
022 159 022 154 022 080
Fig.: 3-292
Fig.: 3-295, 3-296 Fig.: 3-295, 3-296
Selection of trip signals - assigned to Gen. trip command 1 - for which, in addition to current flow monitoring, status signals from CB auxiliary contacts are evaluated. CBF: tCBF
011 067
Setting for the operate delay at the conclusion of which the Circuit breaker failure signal is issued. CBF: I> Setting the threshold to detect a break in current flow. CBF: Trip 1p
022 163 022 160
Fig.: 3-294, 3-295,3-296 Fig.: 3-297
Setting to 'Yes' allows 1-pole monitoring and re-tripping of the CB. Then a 1-pole general trip triggers the 1-pole startup of CBF (see section "CBF 1pole operating mode"). CBF: t1 1p Setting 1st CBF timer stage to 1-pole operating mode. CBF: t1 3p Setting 1st CBF timer stage to 3-pole operating mode.
022 165 022 164
Fig.: 3-293, 3-297 Fig.: 3-293, 3-297
7-66
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
CBF: t2 Setting 2nd CBF timer stage. CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t1 Setting 1st timer stage for minimum duration of trip command. CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t2 Setting 2nd timer stage for minimum duration of trip command. CBF: Latching trip cmd.t1
022 166
Fig.: 3-293, 3-297 Fig.: 3-298
022 167
022 168
Fig.: 3-298
022 169
Fig.: 3-298
The 1st timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input. CBF: Latching trip cmd.t2
022 170
Fig.: 3-298
The 2nd timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input. CBF: Delay/starting trig. The signal CBF : Tr ip s ig na l is issued when this timer stages time duration has elapsed. CBF: Delay/fault beh. CB
022 171 022 155
Fig.: 3-293
Fig.: 3-293, 3-300
If during this delay time period the circuit breaker does not provide a signal from its auxiliary contacts that it is closed, then faults behind the CB are recognized through the current criterion (see section "Fault behind CB protection"). CBF: Delay/CB sync.superv
022 172
Fig.: 3-293, 3-301
Setting the delay time period to bridge circuit breaker operate times during CB synchronization supervision. Limit value monitoring LIMIT: General enable USER Enable/disable the limit value monitoring function. LIMIT: I> Setting for the operate value of the first overcurrent stage for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: I>>
014 020 014 004 014 010
Fig.: 3-302
Fig.: 3-302
Fig.: 3-302
Setting for the operate value of the second overcurrent stage for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tI> Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tI>>
014 032 014 031
Fig.: 3-302
Fig.: 3-302
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: I<
014 021
Fig.: 3-302
Setting for the operate value of the first undercurrent stage for limit value monitoring.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-67
7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: I<<
014 022
Fig.: 3-302
Setting for the operate value of the second undercurrent stage for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tI<
014 033
Fig.: 3-302
Setting for the operate delay of the first undercurrent stage for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tI<<
014 034
Fig.: 3-302
Setting for the operate delay of the second undercurrent stage for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: VPG> Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG> for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: VPG>> Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG>> for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tVPG> Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG> for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tVPG>> Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG>> for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: VPG< Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG< for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: VPG<<
014 026 014 025 014 036 014 035 014 024 014 023
Fig.: 3-303
Fig.: 3-303
Fig.: 3-303
Fig.: 3-303
Fig.: 3-303
Fig.: 3-303
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG<< for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tVPG< Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG< for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tVPG<<
014 038 014 037
Fig.: 3-303
Fig.: 3-303
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG<< for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: VPP> Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP> for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: VPP>> Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP>> for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tVPP> Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP> for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tVPP>> Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP>> for limit value monitoring.
014 040 014 039 014 028 014 027
Fig.: 3-303
Fig.: 3-303
Fig.: 3-303
Fig.: 3-303
7-68
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: VPP< Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP< for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: VPP<<
014 029
Fig.: 3-303
014 030
Fig.: 3-303
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP<< for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tVPP< Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP< for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tVPP<<
014 042 014 041
Fig.: 3-303
Fig.: 3-303
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP<< for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: VNG> Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG> for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: VNG>> Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG>> for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tVNG> Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG> for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: tVNG>> Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>> for limit value monitoring. LIMIT: IDC,lin> Setting for the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: IDC,lin>>
014 111 014 110 014 046 014 045 014 044 014 043
Fig.: 3-304
Fig.: 3-304
Fig.: 3-304
Fig.: 3-304
Fig.: 3-305
Fig.: 3-305
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: tIDC,lin> Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>. LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>. LIMIT: IDC,lin< Setting for the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: IDC,lin<<
014 115 014 114 014 113 014 112
Fig.: 3-305
Fig.: 3-305
Fig.: 3-305
Fig.: 3-305
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: tIDC,lin< Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<. LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.
014 117 014 116
Fig.: 3-305
Fig.: 3-305
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-69
7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: T> Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>. LIMIT: T>> Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>. LIMIT: tT> Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>. LIMIT: tT>> Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>. LIMIT: T< Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<. LIMIT: T<< Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<. LIMIT: tT< Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<. LIMIT: tT<< Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<. Logic LOGIC: General enable USER Enable/disable the logic function. LOGIC: Set 1 USER LOGIC: Set 2 USER LOGIC: Set 3 USER LOGIC: Set 4 USER LOGIC: Set 5 USER LOGIC: Set 6 USER LOGIC: Set 7 USER LOGIC: Set 8 USER These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
014 100
Fig.: 3-306
014 101
Fig.: 3-306
014 103
Fig.: 3-306
014 104
Fig.: 3-306
014 105
Fig.: 3-306
014 106
Fig.: 3-306
014 107
Fig.: 3-306
014 108
Fig.: 3-306
031 099
Fig.: 3-308
034 030 034 031 034 032 034 033 034 034 034 035 034 036 034 037
Fig.: 3-307, 3-308
Fig.: 3-308
7-70
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 3 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 4 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 5 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 6 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 7 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 8 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 9 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.10 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.11 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.12 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.13 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.14 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.15 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.16 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.17 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.18 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.19 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.20 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.21 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.22 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.23 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.24 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.25 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.26 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.27 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.28 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.29 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.30 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.31 LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.32 These settings assign functions to the outputs.
030 000 030 004 030 008 030 012 030 016 030 020 030 024 030 028 030 032 030 036 030 040 030 044 030 048 030 052 030 056 030 060 030 064 030 068 030 072 030 076 030 080 030 084 030 088 030 092 030 096 031 000 031 004 031 008 031 012 031 016 031 020 031 024
Fig.: 3-308
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-71
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 1 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 2 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 3 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 4 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 5 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 6 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 7 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 8 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 9 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 10 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 11 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 12 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 13 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 14 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 15 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 16 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 17 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 18 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 19 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 20 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 21 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 22 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 23 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 24 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 25 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 26 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 27 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 28 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 29 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 30 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 31 LOGIC: Op. mode t output 32 These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
030 001 030 005 030 009 030 013 030 017 030 021 030 025 030 029 030 033 030 037 030 041 030 045 030 049 030 053 030 057 030 061 030 065 030 069 030 073 030 077 030 081 030 085 030 089 030 093 030 097 031 001 031 005 031 009 031 013 031 017 031 021 031 025
Fig.: 3-308
7-72
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t1 output 1 LOGIC: Time t1 output 2 LOGIC: Time t1 output 3 LOGIC: Time t1 output 4 LOGIC: Time t1 output 5 LOGIC: Time t1 output 6 LOGIC: Time t1 output 7 LOGIC: Time t1 output 8 LOGIC: Time t1 output 9 LOGIC: Time t1 output 10 LOGIC: Time t1 output 11 LOGIC: Time t1 output 12 LOGIC: Time t1 output 13 LOGIC: Time t1 output 14 LOGIC: Time t1 output 15 LOGIC: Time t1 output 16 LOGIC: Time t1 output 17 LOGIC: Time t1 output 18 LOGIC: Time t1 output 19 LOGIC: Time t1 output 20 LOGIC: Time t1 output 21 LOGIC: Time t1 output 22 LOGIC: Time t1 output 23 LOGIC: Time t1 output 24 LOGIC: Time t1 output 25 LOGIC: Time t1 output 26 LOGIC: Time t1 output 27 LOGIC: Time t1 output 28 LOGIC: Time t1 output 29 LOGIC: Time t1 output 30 LOGIC: Time t1 output 31 LOGIC: Time t1 output 32 Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
030 002
Fig.: 3-308
030 006 030 010 030 014 030 018 030 022 030 026 030 030 030 034 030 038 030 042 030 046 030 050 030 054 030 058 030 062 030 066 030 070 030 074 030 078 030 082 030 086 030 090 030 094 030 098 031 002 031 006 031 010 031 014 031 018 031 022 031 026
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-73
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t2 output 1 LOGIC: Time t2 output 2 LOGIC: Time t2 output 3 LOGIC: Time t2 output 4 LOGIC: Time t2 output 5 LOGIC: Time t2 output 6 LOGIC: Time t2 output 7 LOGIC: Time t2 output 8 LOGIC: Time t2 output 9 LOGIC: Time t2 output 10 LOGIC: Time t2 output 11 LOGIC: Time t2 output 12 LOGIC: Time t2 output 13 LOGIC: Time t2 output 14 LOGIC: Time t2 output 15 LOGIC: Time t2 output 16 LOGIC: Time t2 output 17 LOGIC: Time t2 output 18 LOGIC: Time t2 output 19 LOGIC: Time t2 output 20 LOGIC: Time t2 output 21 LOGIC: Time t2 output 22 LOGIC: Time t2 output 23 LOGIC: Time t2 output 24 LOGIC: Time t2 output 25 LOGIC: Time t2 output 26 LOGIC: Time t2 output 27 LOGIC: Time t2 output 28 LOGIC: Time t2 output 29 LOGIC: Time t2 output 30 LOGIC: Time t2 output 31 LOGIC: Time t2 output 32 Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs. Note:
030 003 030 007 030 011 030 015 030 019 030 023 030 027 030 031 030 035 030 039 030 043 030 047 030 051 030 055 030 059 030 063 030 067 030 071 030 075 030 079 030 083 030 087 030 091 030 095 030 099 031 003 031 007 031 011 031 015 031 019 031 023 031 027
Fig.: 3-308
This setting has no effect in the minimum time operating mode.
7-74
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 1 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 2 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 3 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 4 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 5 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 6 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 7 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 8 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 9 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 10 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 11 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 12 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 13 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 14 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 15 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 16 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 17 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 18 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 19 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 20 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 21 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 22 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 23 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 24 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 25 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 26 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 27 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 28 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 29 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 30 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 31 LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 32
044 000 044 002 044 004 044 006 044 008 044 010 044 012 044 014 044 016 044 018 044 020 044 022 044 024 044 026 044 028 044 030 044 032 044 034 044 036 044 038 044 040 044 042 044 044 044 046 044 048 044 050 044 052 044 054 044 056 044 058 044 060 044 062
Fig.: 3-314
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the logic equation.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-75
7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 1(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 2(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 3(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 4(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 5(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 6(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 7(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 8(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 9(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.10(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.11(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.12(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.13(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.14(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.15(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.16(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.17(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.18(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.19(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.20(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.21(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.22(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.23(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.24(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.25(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.26(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.27(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.28(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.29(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.30(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.31(t) LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.32(t)
044 001 044 003 044 005 044 007 044 009 044 011 044 013 044 015 044 017 044 019 044 021 044 023 044 025 044 027 044 029 044 031 044 033 044 035 044 037 044 039 044 041 044 043 044 045 044 047 044 049 044 051 044 053 044 055 044 057 044 059 044 061 044 063
Fig.: 3-314
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the logic equation.
7-76
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.3 Main function
Parameter Subsets
010 048 001 076 001 077 001 078
MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
Fig.: 3-90, 3-91, 3-92, 3-93,3-144, 3-189, 3-205 Fig.: 3-99
The neutral-point treatment of the system must be set here. MAIN: Transfer for 1p PSx
010 040 001 079 001 080 001 081
For single-phase overcurrent starting without ground starting, either ground starting or another phase starting needs to be transfer-tripped. The user may choose to always trip the ground starting function or - as a function of current magnitude - to trip ground or phase starting. See the section entitled Starting Logic in Chapter 3 for more information. MAIN: Ground starting PSx
001 249 001 250 001 251 002 001
Setting whether a ground fault is determined by an 'OR'-linked or an 'AND'linked condition of the IN> and VNG> thresholds.
002 184 002 185 002 186 002 187 MAIN: 3p transf 1p trp PSx Setting the time delay period for the 3-pole transfer trip feature. This is issued if no phase starting takes place and therefore no phase-selection is possible. 025 097 024 017 024 077 025 037 MAIN: kPar PSx
Fig.: 3-60
Fig.: 3-102
Setting for a correction factor by which the different grounding conditions for line and parallel line shall be equalized. MAIN: Op. mode rush r. PSx MAIN: I> lift rush r. PSx MAIN: Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx Setting for the operate value of inrush stabilization. MAIN: 3p tr.if HSR off PSx
015 065 024 034 024 094 025 054 017 097 001 088 001 089 001 090
Fig.: 3-54
Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function.

017 095 001 085 001 086 001 087
Fig.: 3-54
Setting for the current threshold for deactivation of inrush stabilization.

017 098 001 091 001 092 001 093
Fig.: 3-54
Fig.: 3-61
This setting defines whether single-pole trip commands shall be converted to a three-pole trip command when ARC is disabled. MAIN: Enable 1p trip PSx Enabling the phase-selective trip logic.
002 061 002 062 002 063 002 064
Fig.: 3-60
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-77
7 Settings
(continued)
Fault data acquisition
FT_DA: Line length
PSx
010 005 010 006 010 007 010 008
Fig.: 3-84
This setting defines the distance in km that the fault locator interprets as 100 % when calculating the line distance to a fault. FT_DA: Line reactance PSx
010 012 010 013 010 014 010 015
Fig.: 3-84
This setting defines the reactance X that the fault locator interprets as 100 % when calculating the line distance to a fault. FT_DA: Start data acqu. PSx
010 011 010 042 010 043 010 044
Fig.: 3-80
This setting determines at what point during a fault the acquisition of fault data should take place. FT_DA: Outp. flt.locat. PSx FT_DA: Mutual comp. PSx
010 032 010 033 010 034 010 035
Fig.: 3-80
Setting for the conditions under which a fault location output occurs.
025 096 024 016 024 076 025 036
Fig.: 3-81
Setting for the conditions under which the residual current of the parallel line is used to calculate the fault location. Distance protection DIST: I>> PSx
010 054 010 074 010 094 011 014
Fig.: 3-90
Setting for the operate value of overcurrent starting. DIST: I> (Ibl) high r. PSx
010 068 010 088 011 008 011 028
Fig.: 3-93
Base current setting above which undervoltage and underimpedance starting is enabled. Note: This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for Dynamic range I. DIST: I> (Ibl) sens. r.PSx
010 119 010 120 010 121 010 122
Fig.: 3-93
Base current setting above which undervoltage and underimpedance starting is enabled. Note: This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for Dynamic range I. DIST: Operat. mode V< PSx Operating mode setting for undervoltage starting. DIST: V< PSx
010 069 010 089 011 009 011 029 010 067 010 087 011 007 011 027
Fig.: 3-94
Fig.: 3-94
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage starting. DIST: Operat. mode Z< PSx DIST: Xfw DIST: Rfw,PG PSx PSx
010 066 010 086 011 006 011 026
Fig.: 3-95
Operating mode setting for underimpedance starting.

010 050 010 070 010 090 011 010
Fig.: 3-98
Setting for the reactance limit of underimpedance starting.

010 051 010 071 010 091 011 011
Fig.: 3-98
Setting for the resistance limit of underimpedance starting for phase-toground loops. DIST: Rfw,PP PSx
010 052 010 072 010 092 011 012
Fig.: 3-98
Setting for the resistance limit of underimpedance starting for phase-tophase loops. DIST: PSx
010 063 010 083 011 003 011 023
Fig.: 3-98
Angle setting for load blinding during underimpedance starting.
7-78
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: Zfw,PG
PSx
010 101 010 102 010 103 010 104
Fig.: 3-98
Setting for the load-angle-independent limit of underimpedance starting for phase-to-ground loops. DIST: Zfw,PP PSx
010 105 010 106 010 107 010 108
Fig.: 3-98
Setting for the load-angle-independent limit of underimpedance starting for phase-to-phase loops. DIST: Zbw/Zfw PSx
010 053 010 073 010 093 011 013
Fig.: 3-98
Setting for the limit of underimpedance starting in the backward (reverse) direction. DIST: Z evaluation PSx
025 093 024 013 024 073 025 033
Fig.: 3-98
This setting determines whether the P437 will carry out the impedance calculation of the phase-to-ground loops using the phase current corrected by the set ground factor or using twice the phase current. Note: Calculation with twice the phase current may be necessary in low-impedance-grounded networks in order to avoid inadvertent starting in healthy lines as the result of the high ground fault current. Impedance is calculated by the distance measuring system using solely the phase current corrected by the set ground factor. DIST: IN> high range PSx
010 055 010 075 010 095 011 015
Fig.: 3-91
Operate value setting for the residual current stage of ground starting. Note: This setting is only effective when Highest range is set for Dynamic range I. DIST: IN> sens. range PSx
010 123 010 124 010 125 010 126
Fig.: 3-91
Operate value setting for the residual current stage of ground starting. Note: This setting is only effective when Sensitive range is set for Dynamic range I. DIST: tIN> PSx
010 057 010 077 010 097 011 017
Fig.: 3-91
In isolated-neutral or resonant-grounded systems, the operate delay tIN> should be set so as to avoid erroneous ground starting resulting from residual current flow due to switching phenomena related to phase-toground capacitances. Note: For single-pole ungrounded faults, starting proceeds does not occur until tIN> has elapsed. tIN> should be set to at least 20 ms so that transferred starting does not anticipate starting in another phase. DIST: VNG> DIST: VNG>> DIST: tVNG>> PSx PSx PSx
010 056 010 076 010 096 011 016
Fig.: 3-91
Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG> of ground starting.
010 062 010 082 011 002 011 022
Fig.: 3-91
Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG>> of ground starting.
010 061 010 081 011 001 011 021
Fig.: 3-91
Setting for the operate delay of the VNG>> trigger. DIST: Meas. start. 1pG PSx
012 172 012 173 012 174 012 175
Fig.: 3-101
This setting defines whether the distance measuring system shall process single-pole phase-to-ground faults.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-79
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: Meas. start. 2pG PSx
012 176 012 177 012 178 012 179
Fig.: 3-101
This setting defines whether, in the event of two-phase-to-ground faults, the distance measuring system shall process either the phase-to-phase loops or the phase-to-ground loops. DIST: Meas. start. 3pG PSx
012 180 012 181 012 182 012 183
Fig.: 3-101
This setting defines whether, in the event of three-phase-to-ground faults, the distance measuring system shall process either the phase-to-phase loops or the phase-to-ground loops. DIST: Block.Z1 (1pHSR) PSx
002 068 002 069 002 070 002 071
Fig.: 3-123
This setting may be used to selectively block zone 1 during the 1-pole HSR dead time of an internal ARC. DIST: Block.Z2 (1pHSR) PSx
002 072 002 073 002 074 002 075
Fig.: 3-124
This setting may be used to selectively block zone 2 during the 1-pole HSR dead time of an internal ARC. DIST: Characteristic PSx DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: X1,PG (polygon) X2,PG (polygon) X3,PG (polygon) X4,PG (polygon) X5,PG (polygon) X6,PG (polygon) PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
012 040 073 097 074 097 075 097
Fig.: 3-108
Selection of the characteristic used in distance measurement.

012 001 012 051 013 001 013 051 012 002 012 052 013 002 013 052 012 003 012 053 013 003 013 053 012 004 012 054 013 004 013 054 012 100 012 101 012 102 012 103 012 104 012 105 012 106 012 107
Fig.: 3-117 Fig.: 3-116 Fig.: 3-116 Fig.: 3-116 Fig.: 3-116 Fig.: 3-116
Setting for the reactance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon characteristic for the phase-to-ground loops (in secondary values). DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: X1,PP (polygon) X2,PP (polygon) X3,PP (polygon) X4,PP (polygon) X5,PP (polygon) X6,PP (polygon) PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
002 076 002 077 002 078 002 079 002 080 002 081 002 082 002 083 002 084 002 085 002 086 002 087 002 089 002 090 002 091 002 092 002 093 002 094 002 095 002 096 002 097 002 098 002 099 002 126
Fig.: 3-117
Setting for the reactance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon characteristic for the phase-to-phase loops (in secondary values). DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: R1,PG (polygon) R2,PG (polygon) R3,PG (polygon) R4,PG (polygon) R5,PG (polygon) R6,PG (polygon) PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
012 005 012 055 013 005 013 055 012 007 012 057 013 007 013 057 012 009 012 059 013 009 013 059 012 011 012 061 013 011 013 061 012 108 012 109 012 110 012 111 012 116 012 117 012 118 012 119
Setting for the resistance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon characteristic for the phase-to-ground loops (in secondary values). DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: R1,PP (polygon) R2,PP (polygon) R3,PP (polygon) R4,PP (polygon) R5,PP (polygon) R6,PP (polygon) PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
012 006 012 056 013 006 013 056 012 008 012 058 013 008 013 058 012 010 012 060 013 010 013 060 012 012 012 062 013 012 013 062 012 112 012 113 012 114 012 115 012 120 012 121 012 122 012 123
Setting for the resistance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon characteristic for the phase-to-phase loops (in secondary values).
7-80
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST:
1 (polygon) 2 (polygon) 3 (polygon) 4 (polygon) 5 (polygon) 6 (polygon)
PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
012 013 012 063 013 013 013 063 012 014 012 064 013 014 013 064 012 015 012 065 013 015 013 065 012 016 012 066 013 016 013 066 012 124 012 125 012 126 012 127 012 128 012 129 012 130 012 131
This setting defines the inclination of the limiting line of the tripping polygon of impedance zones 1 to 6 in the R direction (resistance line). DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: 1 (polygon) 2 (polygon) 3 (polygon) 4 (polygon) 5 (polygon) 6 (polygon) PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
072 086 073 086 074 086 075 086 072 087 073 087 074 087 075 087 072 088 073 088 074 088 075 088 072 089 073 089 074 089 075 089 012 156 012 157 012 158 012 159 012 160 012 161 012 162 012 163
This setting defines the inclination of the limiting line of the tripping polygon of impedance zones 1 to 4 in the X direction (reactance line). DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: Z1 (circle) Z2 (circle) Z3 (circle) Z4 (circle) Z5 (circle) Z6 (circle) PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
012 042 073 091 074 091 075 091 012 043 073 092 074 092 075 092 012 044 073 093 074 093 075 093 012 045 073 094 074 094 075 094 012 148 012 149 012 150 012 151 012 152 012 153 012 154 012 155
Setting for the impedance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the circular characteristic (in secondary values). DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: 1 (circle) 2 (circle) 3 (circle) 4 (circle) 5 (circle) 6 (circle) PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
072 090 073 090 074 090 075 090 072 095 073 095 074 095 075 095 072 096 073 096 074 096 075 096 072 099 073 099 074 099 075 099 012 164 012 165 012 166 012 167 012 168 012 169 012 170 012 171
This setting is only important if the setting With arc compensation is active. In this case, the setting at this address determines the angle where arc compensation becomes active in zones 1 to 6. DIST: Arc comp. circle PSx
012 038 012 090 012 091 012 092
Fig.: 3-110
Disabling or enabling arc compensation when the circular characteristic is selected. DIST: Directional char PSx
002 234 002 235 002 236 002 237
Fig: 3-118
Selection of the characteristic used in distance measurement. 012 023 012 073 013 023 013 073 DIST: Direction N1 PSx 012 024 012 074 013 024 013 074 DIST: Direction N2 PSx 012 025 012 075 013 025 013 075 DIST: Direction N3 PSx 012 026 012 076 013 026 013 076 DIST: Direction N4 PSx 012 027 012 077 013 027 013 077 DIST: Direction N5 PSx 012 132 012 133 012 134 012 135 DIST: Direction N6 PSx 012 136 012 137 012 138 012 139 DIST: Direction N7 PSx This directional setting defines the direction in which impedance stages 1 to 6 or final timer stage 7 measure relative to the basic measuring direction determined by the connection of the measuring circuits and the setting at MAIN : Conn. meas . c irc . IP.
Fig.: 3-121 Fig.: 3-121 Fig.: 3-121 Fig.: 3-121 Fig.: 3-121 Fig.: 3-121 Fig.: 3-121
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-81
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx
010 109 010 116 010 117 010 118
Fig.: 3-106
Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded so that the measured fault angle is used for the direction determination and the impedance calculation. DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
012 028 012 078 013 028 013 078 012 029 012 079 013 029 013 079 012 030 012 080 013 030 013 080 012 031 012 081 013 031 013 081 012 032 012 082 013 032 013 082 012 033 012 083 013 033 013 083 012 140 012 141 012 142 012 143 012 144 012 145 012 146 012 147
Fig.: 3-119 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120
Setting for the timer stages of impedance zones 1 to 6 and of directional and non-directional backup timer stages 7 and 8. DIST: Enable ZE f. 1pG PSx
012 039 012 089 013 039 013 089
Fig.: 3-109
This setting defines the conditions under which the zone extension occurs in zone 1 in the event of single-phase-to-ground fault detection. DIST: kze,PG HSR PSx
012 034 012 084 013 034 013 084
Fig.: 3-117
Setting for the HSR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1 reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following applies to the measurement: X1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR) X1
R1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR) R1

X1,ze HSR : reactance modified by the zone extension factor
R1,ze HSR : resistance modified by the zone extension factor The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic: Z1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR) Z1 The zone extension HSR is controlled by Protective signaling Auto-reclosing control (ARC) before an HSR when protective signaling is not ready A reclose command, whether or not protective signaling is ready Switch on to fault protection
An appropriately configured binary signal input.
7-82
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: kze,PP HSR
PSx
012 035 012 085 013 035 013 085
Fig.: 3-117
Setting for the HSR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground or phase-tophase loops. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1 reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following applies to the measurement: X1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR) X1
R1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR) R1
X1,ze HSR : reactance modified by the zone extension factor

R1,ze HSR : resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic: Z1,ze HSR = (k ze HSR) Z1 Zone extension is controlled by Protective signaling Auto-reclosing control (ARC) before an HSR when protective signaling is not ready A reclose command, whether or not protective signaling is ready Switch on to fault protection
An appropriately configured binary signal input.

PSx
012 046 012 096 013 046 013 096
DIST: kze,PG TDR
Fig.: 3-117
Setting for the TDR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1 reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following applies to the measurement:
X1,ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) X1 R1,ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) R1 X1,ze TDR : reactance modified by the zone extension factor R1,ze TDR : resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic: Z1,ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) Z1
Z1,ze TDR : impedance modified by the zone extension factor
Zone extension takes place before a TDR (time-delay reclosure), as long as another TDR is permitted.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-83
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: kze,PP TDR
PSx
012 047 012 097 013 047 013 097
Fig.: 3-117
Setting for the TDR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground or phase-tophase loops. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the zone 1 reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The following applies to the measurement:
X1, ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) X1 R1, ze TDR = (k ze TDR) R1 X1, ze TDR : reactance modified by the zone extension factor R1, ze TDR : resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic: Z1, ze TDR = (k ze TDR ) Z1 Z1, ze TDR : impedance modified by the zone extension factor Zone extension takes place before a TDR (time-delay reclosure), as long as another TDR is permitted.
026 025 027 025 028 025 029 025 DIST: t1,ze PSx Setting for the timer stage of impedance zone 1 with extended reach. 012 037 012 087 013 037 013 087 DIST: Abs. value kG PSx 012 036 012 086 013 036 013 086 DIST: Angle kG PSx Setting for the absolute value and the angle of the complex ground factor, kG.
Fig.: 3-119
Fig.: 3-97 Fig.: 3-97
kG =
Z 0 ZL 3 ZL
Z 0 : zero-sequence impedance ZL : positive-sequence impedance

kG =
(X 0 XL )2 + (R 0 RL )2
3 R L + XL
2 2
Angle k G = arctan
X 0 XL X arctan L R 0 RL RL
R 0 : resistance component of zero-sequence impedance RL : resistance component of positive-sequence impedance X 0 : reactance component of zero-sequence impedance XL : reactance component of positive-sequence impedance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value should be set.
7-84
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: kG,par abs.value PSx DIST: kG,par angle PSx
012 049 012 099 013 049 013 099 012 048 012 098 013 048 013 098
Fig.: 3-102 Fig.: 3-102
Setting the absolute value and the angle of the complex ground factor kG,par Z k G,par = 00 3 ZL Z 00 :
ZL :
coupling impedance in the zero-sequence system of the parallel line positive-sequence impedance
X 00 + R 00
2 2 2 2
k G,par =
3 R L + XL
k G Angle par = arctan R 00 : RL : X 00 : XL :
X 00 X arctan L R 00 RL
resistance component of coupling impedance in the zerosequence system of the double-circuit line resistance component of positive-sequence impedance reactance component of coupling impedance in the zerosequence system of the double-circuit line reactance component of positive-sequence impedance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value should be set. 025 095 024 015 024 075 025 035 DIST: Mutual comp. PSx This setting determines whether distance protection operates with or without zero current compensation.
DIST: IN,par> PSx
012 184 012 185 012 186 012 187
Fig.: 3-102
Fig.: 3-102
The residual current of the parallel line is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set threshold. This monitoring function is only used for signaling purposes and has no functional effects on distance measurement.
DIST: Trip zone 1 PG PSx
011 050 011 051 011 052 011 053
Fig.: 3-127
For zone 1 the user can specify whether the distance trip in the event of phase-to-ground faults shall be single-pole or three-pole.
Note: When the P437 is being operated with ARC, which will carry out a reclosure in the event of a single-pole or three-pole trip, then the setting here should be 1-pole. DIST: Trip zone 1 PP PSx
011 054 011 055 011 056 011 057
Fig.: 3-127
For zone 1 the user can specify whether the distance trip in the event of phase-to-phase faults shall be single-pole or three-pole. Where a singlepole trip has been selected, there is a choice as to whether the trip in the event of a two-pole starting should be for the leading or the trailing phase.
Note: When the P437 is being operated with ARC, which will carry out a reclosure in the event of a single-pole or three-pole trip, then the setting here should be 1-pole.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-85
7 Settings
(continued)
Power swing blocking
PSB: Enable
PSx
015 090 015 091 015 092 015 093
Fig.: 3-128
This setting defines the setting group in which the power swing blocking function is enabled. (Available as of software version -607)
Backup overcurrent-time protection (Backup DTOC) BUOC: I> PSx
010 058 010 078 010 098 011 018
Fig.: 3-144
Operate value setting for the phase currents of the backup overcurrent-time protection function.
BUOC: tI> BUOC: IN> PSx PSx
010 059 010 079 010 099 011 019
Fig.: 3-144
Operate delay for the backup overcurrent-time protection.

010 064 010 084 011 004 011 024
Fig.: 3-144
Operate value setting for the residual current of the backup overcurrent-time protection function.
Note: This setting is only active if the setting at MAIN : Neutra lpoint treatm. is low-impedance grounding. BUOC: tIN> PSx
010 065 010 085 011 005 011 025
Fig.: 3-144
Operate delay for the backup overcurrent-time protection.

Switch on to fault protection SOTF: Enable PSx
001 203 001 204 001 205 001 206
Fig.: 3-147
This setting defines the parameter subset in which function group SOTF is enabled.
SOTF: Operating mode PSx
011 061 001 184 001 185 001 186
Fig.: 3-147
The setting of the operating mode defines whether a general start shall cause a trip while a timer stage is running ("trip with starting") or if the measuring range of the impedance zone 1 is extended by the set zone extension factor D IST: kze H SR PSx ("trip with extension").
SOTF: Man. close timer PSx SOTF: Activation mode PSx
011 060 001 181 001 182 001 183
Fig.: 3-147
Setting for the timer stage that will be started by a manual close.
006 142 006 143 006 144 006 145
Fig.: 3-147
Select the SOTF activation mode (either Trigger or Line Dead State). 006 005 006 006 006 007 006 008 SOTF: With V< enable PSx 006 138 006 139 006 140 006 141 SOTF: Operate delay PSx 002 128 002 129 002 133 002 134 SOTF: Release delay PSx If With V< enable is set to Yes, then a settable timer stage (defined as Operate Delay and Release Delay) will have to elapse before an undervoltage condition will lead to the decision 'Line dead'. 001 191 001 192 001 193 001 194 SOTF: Evaluation IN PSx This setting defines which residual current will be monitored: the residual current derived from the three phase currents or the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
SOTF: IN> (meas.) SOTF: IN> (calc.) SOTF: tIN> PSx PSx PSx
001 189 001 195 001 196 001 197 001 190 001 198 001 199 001 202
Fig.: 3-145 Fig.: 3-145 Fig.: 3-145
Fig.: 3-146
Fig.: 3-146 Fig.: 3-146
Settings for operate values IN> (meas.) and IN> (calc.).

001 177 001 178 001 179 001 180
Fig.: 3-146
Setting for the operate delay of stages IN> (meas.) or IN> (calc.).
7-86
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
SOTF: I>
PSx
006 130 006 131 006 132 006 133
Fig.: 3-146
Setting for operate value I>. SOTF: tI> PSx Setting for the operate delay of stages I>.
Protective signaling PSIG: Enable PSx
006 134 006 135 006 136 006 137
Fig.: 3-146
015 014 015 015 015 016 015 017
Fig.: 3-148
This setting defines the parameter subset in which protective signaling is enabled.
PSIG: No. telecom. ch. PSx
015 026 024 012 024 072 025 032
Fig.: 3-151, 3-155, 3-156, 3-157, 3-158, 3-160, 3-161, 3-163, 3-164, 3-166, 3-167, 3-171, 3-174, 3-175, 3-193 Fig.: 3-153
Setting for the number of communication channels for protective signaling.

PSIG: Operating mode PSx PSIG: Oper. mode send PSx
015 000 024 000 024 060 025 020
Setting for the operating mode of protective signaling.

015 036 015 037 015 040 015 041
Fig.: 3-163, 3-166, 3-168
This setting defines whether protective signaling generates the send signal as a function of direction or distance.
PSIG: Oper. mode trip PSx
015 107 015 108 015 113 015 114
Fig.: 3-161, 3-164, 3-167, 3-168
This setting defines whether a trip triggered by protective signaling will be a function of direction or distance.
015 011 024 003 024 063 025 023
Fig.: 3-149
The tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection when protective signaling is ready.
PSIG: Release t. send PSx
015 002 024 001 024 061 025 021
Fig.: 3-155, 3-157, 3-160, 3-163, 3-166, 3-175 Fig.: 3-174
This setting determines the duration of the send signal.

PSIG: Echo on receive PSx
015 003 024 002 024 062 025 022
This setting determines whether protective signaling operates with or without echo.
PSIG: Op. delay echo PSx
015 022 024 008 024 068 025 028
Fig.: 3-174
Setting for the operate delay of the echo pulse.

PSIG: Pulse dur. echo PSx
015 023 024 009 024 069 025 029
Fig.: 3-174
Setting for echo pulse duration.

PSIG: Trip signal V< PSx
015 021 024 007 024 067 025 027
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weakinfeed logic is triggered.
PSIG: V< weak infeed PSx
015 020 024 006 024 066 025 026
Setting for the threshold of the weak infeed logic.

PSIG: tV< PSx
015 019 024 005 024 065 025 025
Setting for the operate delay of weak-infeed logic.

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-87
7 Settings
(continued)
PSIG: Start cond. tV< PSx
006 148 006 149 006 150 006 151
Fig.: 3-173
Select whether the undervoltage timer stage is started if the undervoltage condition is present (V<), or if both the undervoltage condition and the weak-infeed starting are present (V< & W1 start). 015 024 024 010 024 070 025 030 PSIG: tBlock PSx Setting for the transient blocking time of protective signaling.
PSIG: 3ended line prot PSx
006 039 006 046 006 047 006 048
Fig.: 3-152
Fig.: 3-176
Select whether the PSIG: Rec eive (A) EXT or PSIG : Rece i ve (B) EXT signals shall be used in an OR combination (setting: No) or in an AND combination (setting: Yes). 015 025 024 011 024 071 025 031 PSIG: Frequency monit. PSx This setting defines whether failure of frequency transmission will be monitored.
Auto-reclosing control ARC: Enable PSx
015 046 015 047 015 048 015 049
Fig.: 3-151
Fig.: 3-178
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ARC is enabled.

ARC: CB clos.pos.sig. PSx
015 050 024 024 024 084 025 044
Fig.: 3-179
This setting defines whether the CB closed position will be scanned or not. If the setting is 'With', a binary signal input must be configured accordingly.
ARC: Operating mode PSx
015 100 015 101 015 102 015 103
Fig.: 3-177
This setting defines whether the ARC will carry out HSR and TDR, only TDR, or only a test HSR.
ARC: Operative time 1 PSx
015 066 024 035 024 095 025 055
Fig.: 3-195
Setting for the operative time 1.

ARC: Operative time 2 PSx
015 083 024 042 025 002 025 062
Fig.: 3-195
Setting for operative time 2.

ARC: HSR oper. mode PSx
015 051 024 025 024 085 025 045
Fig.: 3-182
The operating mode setting defines which of the following reclosure types is permitted. TDR only HSR or TDR Test HSR only
Note: If a single-pole HSR is to be carried out, then the user must select the 1-pole setting at either D IST: Tr ip zo ne 1 PG o r DIST: Tr ip z one 1 PP. ARC: Trip time HSR PSx
015 072 024 040 025 000 025 060
Fig.: 3-181
The HSR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or the operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection provided that the BUOC operating mode is set accordingly if a HSR is permitted and protective signaling is not ready.
ARC: HSR oper. mode 2 PSx
015 044 024 022 024 082 025 042
Fig.: 3-182
This setting defines whether ARC will be controlled by the starting decisions (Start-dependent) or the trip decisions (Trip-dependent).
ARC: Dead time 1p ARC: Dead time 3p PSx PSx
015 055 024 029 024 089 025 049
Fig.: 3-195
Dead time setting for a single-pole HSR.

015 056 024 030 024 090 025 050
Fig.: 3-195
Dead time setting for a three-pole HSR. 7-88

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
ARC: Dead time max ARC: tDiscrim.
PSx
015 084 024 043 025 003 025 063
Fig.: 3-195
Setting for the maximum dead time.

PSx
018 051 024 049 025 009 025 069
Fig.: 3-195
Setting for the discrimination time during which there will be a switch from a single-pole HSR to a three-pole HSR when a secondary fault occurs.
ARC: Mon. PSIG recv. PSx
015 082 024 050 025 010 025 070
Fig.: 3-193
This setting determines whether the number of PSIG receive signals is monitored during the dead time.
ARC: Zone ext. f. HSR PSx
015 059 024 033 024 093 025 053
Fig.: 3-191
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended by the zone extension factor kze HSR during normal system operation and while the operative times are elapsing.
Note:
This setting is only active if protective signaling is not ready.

015 068 024 037 024 097 025 057
ARC: No. permit. TDR PSx
Fig.: 3-195
Setting for the number of time-delayed reclosures permitted. With the 0 setting, only one HSR is carried out.
ARC: Trip time TDR PSx
015 073 024 041 025 001 025 061
Fig.: 3-181
The TDR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or the operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection provided that the BUOC operating mode is set accordingly if a TDR is permitted and protective signaling is not ready.
ARC: TDR dead time PSx
015 057 024 031 024 091 025 051
Fig.: 3-195
Setting for the TDR dead time.

ARC: Zone ext. f. TDR PSx
015 071 024 039 024 099 025 059
Fig.: 3-191
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended prior to a TDR.
ARC: Enable RRC ARC: tRRC ARC: V> RRC PSx PSx PSx
015 085 024 044 025 004 025 064
Fig.: 3-189
Enabling the rapid reclosure (RRC) function.

015 086 024 045 025 005 025 065
Fig.: 3-195
Setting for the timer stage of rapid reclosure (RRC).

015 087 024 046 025 006 025 066
Fig.: 3-189
Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded in order for an RRC to be carried out.
ARC: Reclaim time PSx
015 054 024 028 024 088 025 048
Fig.: 3-195
Setting for the reclaim time.

ARC: Block. time int. PSx
015 043 024 021 024 081 025 041
Fig.: 3-180
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after cancellation of the blocks set by the P437.
ARC: Block. time ext. PSx
015 058 024 032 024 092 025 052
Fig.: 3-180
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after blocking by a binary signal input.
ARC: Op. mode ext ARC PSx
015 045 024 023 024 083 025 043
Fig.: 3-192
This setting defines the operating mode for an external ARC working together with the P437.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-89
7 Settings
(continued)
ARC: Zone ext.dur. RC PSx
015 088 024 047 025 007 025 067
Fig.: 3-191
This setting defines whether the following takes place: A zone extension will be carried out during a close command by a HSR that is not synchronism-checked. Zone extension will occur with each reclosure command.
ARC: Parallel trip PSx
015 053 024 027 024 087 025 047
Fig.: 3-195
This setting defines whether the trip commands of a protection device operating together with the P437 will affect operation of the ARC function. For further details see the section entitled Parallel Blocking in Chapter 3.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Enable PSx
018 020 018 021 018 022 018 023
Fig.: 3-198
This setting defines the parameter subset in which automatic synchronism check (ASC) is enabled.
ASC: Active for HSR PSx
018 001 077 030 078 030 079 030
Fig.: 3-199
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole HSR will occur only after being enabled by ASC.
ASC: Active for TDR PSx
018 002 077 031 078 031 079 031
Fig.: 3-199
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole TDR will occur only after being enabled by ASC.
ASC: Active for RRC PSx
018 006 077 033 078 033 079 033
Fig.: 3-199
This setting specifies whether enabling by the ASC function is required before reclosing after a rapid reclosure can occur.
ASC: Clos.rej.w.block PSx
018 003 077 032 078 032 079 032
Fig.: 3-199
This setting defines whether reclosing is rejected after being blocked by ASC.
ASC: Operative time PSx
018 010 077 034 078 034 079 034
Fig.: 3-207
Setting for the operative time for ASC.

ASC: Measurement loop PSx
031 060 077 044 078 044 079 044
Fig.: 3-197
The voltage measurement loop, corresponding to the reference voltage, must be selected so that determination of differential values is correct.
Example: Connect transformer T 15 to measure the reference voltage to phases A & B The measurement loop should be set to 'Loop A-B'. ASC: Phi offset PSx
018 034 077 042 078 042 079 042
Fig.: 3-205
Setting a Phi offset that may be necessary so that determination of the differential angle is correct.
ASC: AR op. mode PSx
018 025 018 026 018 027 018 028
Fig.: 3-205
Auto-reclosing control: Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the operating mode.
ASC: AR with tCB PSx
000 038 000 039 000 050 000 051
Auto-reclosing control: In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting this parameter to yes ensures that the circuit breaker closing time is taken into account by the automatic synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close command.
ASC: AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx
018 029 018 030 018 031 018 032
Fig.: 3-203
Auto-reclosing control: This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions for a voltage controlled close enable. 7-90
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
ASC: AR V> volt.check PSx
026 017 077 043 078 043 079 043
Fig.: 3-203
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as "Voltage showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC : A R Op . mo de v-c hk . PSx. ASC: AR V< volt.check PSx
018 017 077 040 078 040 079 040
Fig.: 3-203
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized as "Voltage showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC : A R Op . mo de v-c hk . PSx. ASC: AR tmin v-check PSx
018 018 077 041 078 041 079 041
Fig.: 3-203
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during which voltage conditions must be met so that the close enable of the ASC is effected.
ASC: AR V> sync.check PSx
018 011 077 035 078 035 079 035
Fig.: 3-205
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: AR delta Vmax PSx
018 012 077 036 078 036 079 036
Fig.: 3-205
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the maximum differential voltage between measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: AR delta f max PSx
018 014 077 038 078 038 079 038
Fig.: 3-205
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the maximum differential frequency between measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: AR delta phi max PSx
018 013 077 037 078 037 079 037
Fig.: 3-205
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the maximum differential angle between measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: AR tmin sync.chk PSx
018 015 077 039 078 039 079 039
Fig.: 3-205
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during which synchronism conditions must be met so that the close enable of the ASC is effected.
ASC: MC op. mode PSx
000 056 000 057 000 058 000 059
Fig.: 3-206
Manual close command: Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the operating mode.
ASC: MC with tCB PSx
000 102 000 103 000 104 000 105
Manual close command: In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting this parameter to yes ensures that the circuit breaker closing time is taken into account by the automatic synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close command. 7-91
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
ASC: MC op.mode v-chk.PSx
000 060 000 061 000 062 000 063
Fig.: 3-204
Manual close command: This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions for a voltage controlled close enable.
ASC: MC V> volt.check PSx
000 064 000 065 000 066 000 067
Fig.: 3-204
Manual close command: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as "Voltage showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC : MC Op.mode v-chk.PSx. ASC: MC V< volt.check PSx
000 068 000 069 000 070 000 071
Fig.: 3-204
Manual close command: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized as "Voltage showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC : MC Op.mode v-chk.PSx. ASC: MC tmin v-check PSx
000 072 000 073 000 074 000 075
Fig.: 3-204
Manual close command: Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during which voltage conditions must be met so that the close enable of the ASC is effected.
ASC: MC V> sync.check PSx
000 052 000 053 000 054 000 055
Fig.: 3-206
Manual close command: Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: MC delta Vmax PSx
000 080 000 081 000 082 000 083
Fig.: 3-206
Manual close command: Setting the maximum differential voltage between measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: MC delta f max PSx
000 084 000 086 000 087 000 088
Fig.: 3-206
Manual close command: Setting the maximum differential frequency between measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: MC delta phi max PSx
000 089 000 091 000 092 000 093
Fig.: 3-206
Manual close command: Setting the maximum differential angle between measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: MC tmin sync.chk PSx
000 098 000 099 000 100 000 101
Fig.: 3-206
Manual close command: Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during which synchronism conditions must be met so that the close enable of the ASC is effected.
7-92
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection
GFSC: Enable
PSx
018 072 018 073 018 074 018 075
Fig.: 3-209
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground fault (shortcircuit) protection is enabled.
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling GSCSG: Enable PSx
023 071 023 072 023 073 023 074
Fig.: 3-227
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground fault (shortcircuit) protection signaling is enabled.
Definite-time overcurrent protection DTOC: Enable PSx
072 098 073 098 074 098 075 098
Fig.: 3-238
This setting defines the parameter subset in which definite-time overcurrent protection is enabled.
DTOC: I> DTOC: I>> DTOC: I>>> DTOC: I>>>> DTOC: tI> DTOC: tI>> DTOC: tI>>> DTOC: tI>>>> DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
072 007 073 007 074 007 075 007
Setting for operate value I>.

072 008 073 008 074 008 075 008
Setting for operate value I>>.

072 009 073 009 074 009 075 009
Setting for operate value I>>>.

072 010 073 010 074 010 075 010
Setting for operate value I>>>>.

072 019 073 019 074 019 075 019
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>.

072 020 073 020 074 020 075 020
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>.

072 021 073 021 074 021 075 021
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>>.

072 022 073 022 074 022 075 022
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>>>.

Direction tIN> PSx Direction tIN>> PSx Direction tIN>>> PSx Direction tIN>>>>PSx
072 032 072 042 072 082 072 091 072 033 072 043 072 083 072 092 072 034 072 044 072 084 072 093 072 035 072 045 072 085 072 094
Fig.: 3-245 Fig.: 3-245 Fig.: 3-245 Fig.: 3-245
The setting for the measurement direction determines the measurement direction of the residual current stages.
DTOC: Ineg> DTOC: Ineg>> DTOC: Ineg>>> DTOC: Ineg>>>> PSx PSx PSx PSx
072 011 073 011 074 011 075 011
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate value Ineg> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

072 012 073 012 074 012 075 012
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate value Ineg>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

072 013 073 013 074 013 075 013
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate value Ineg>>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

072 014 073 014 074 014 075 014
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for operate value Ineg>>>>. (Ineg = negative-sequence current). 7-93
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC: tIneg>
PSx
072 023 073 023 074 023 075 023
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg> (Ineg = negativesequence current).
DTOC: tIneg>> PSx
072 024 073 024 074 024 075 024
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC: tIneg>>> PSx
072 025 073 025 074 025 075 025
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC: tIneg>>>> PSx
072 026 073 026 074 026 075 026
Fig.: 3-240
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).
DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: tIneg> (1pHSR) PSx tIneg>> (1pHSR) PSx tIneg>>> (1pHSR) PSx tIneg>>>>(1pHSR) PSx
002 160 002 161 002 162 002 163 002 164 002 165 002 166 002 167 002 168 002 169 002 170 002 171 002 172 002 173 002 174 002 175
Fig.: 3-246
Setting for the operating mode of the DTOC timer stages for the negativesequence system during the 1-pole dead time of the high-speed reclosure (HSR) of an ARC cycle. (See: "Settable operation mode during 1-pole dead time of HSR".) 073 189 073 190 073 202 073 219 DTOC: Evaluation IN PSx This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
DTOC: IN> DTOC: IN>> DTOC: IN>>> DTOC: IN>>>> PSx PSx PSx PSx
072 015 073 015 074 015 075 015
Fig.: 3-241
Setting for operate value IN> (IN = residual current).

072 016 073 016 074 016 075 016
Setting for operate value IN>> (IN = residual current).

072 017 073 017 074 017 075 017
Setting for operate value IN>>> (IN = residual current).

072 018 073 018 074 018 075 018
Setting the operate value of the fourth overcurrent stage (residual current stage).
Caution! The range of setting values includes operate values that are not permitted as continuous current values (see Technical Data). DTOC: tIN timer start PSx
002 138 002 139 002 142 002 143
With this setting the triggering of the timers for the residual current system can now be set as direction-dependent.
DTOC: tIN> DTOC: tIN>> DTOC: tIN>>> PSx PSx PSx
072 027 073 027 074 027 075 027
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>.

072 028 073 028 074 028 075 028
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>.

072 029 073 029 074 029 075 029
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>>.
7-94
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC: tIN>>>> DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC:
PSx
072 030 073 030 074 030 075 030
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>>>.

tIN> (1pHSR) PSx tIN>> (1pHSR) PSx tIN>>> (1pHSR) PSx tIN>>>> (1pHSR) PSx
002 144 002 145 002 146 002 147 002 148 002 149 002 150 002 151 002 152 002 153 002 154 002 155 002 156 002 157 002 158 002 159
Fig.: 3-247
Setting for the operating mode of the DTOC timer stages for the residual current system during the 1-pole dead time of the high-speed reclosure (HSR) of an ARC cycle. (See: "Settable operation mode during 1-pole dead time of HSR".)
DTOC: VNG> PSx
010 045 010 060 010 080 010 139
Fig.: 3-244
This setting defines the threshold value that the neutral-point displacement voltage must exceed so that the direction determination is enabled.
DTOC: Angle phiG PSx
004 092 004 247 004 248 004 249
Fig.: 3-244
Setting for the position of the straight line separating forward and backward (reverse) directions.
Inverse-time overcurrent protection IDMT: Enable PSx
072 000 073 000 074 000 075 000
Fig.: 3-249
This setting defines the parameter subset in which inverse-time overcurrent protection is enabled (phase current system).
IDMT: Iref,P PSx
072 050 073 050 074 050 075 050
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the reference current (phase current system).

IDMT: Characterist. P PSx IDMT: Ch. factor kt,P PSx
072 056 073 056 074 056 075 056
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system).

072 053 073 053 074 053 075 053
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current system).
IDMT: Release P IDMT: Direction P PSx PSx
072 059 073 059 074 059 075 059
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (phase current system).

072 062 073 062 074 062 075 062
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the IDMT protection function (phase current system).
IDMT: Direct. meas. P PSx
072 065 073 065 074 065 075 065
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines whether the directional decision of the distance protection function will be used or the directional decision formed from the negative-sequence current and voltage (phase current system).
IDMT: Op. w/o volt. P PSx
072 068 073 068 074 068 075 068
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines the operating mode of IDMT protection in the event of measuring voltage failure (phase current system).
IDMT: Iref,neg PSx
072 051 073 051 074 051 075 051
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).

IDMT: Character. neg. PSx IDMT: Factor kt,neg PSx
072 057 073 057 074 057 075 057
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).

072 054 073 054 074 054 075 054
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the factor kt,neg of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-95
7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT: Release neg.
PSx
072 060 073 060 074 060 075 060
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (negative-sequence current system).

IDMT: Direction neg. PSx
072 063 073 063 074 063 075 063
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the IDMT protection function (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT: Dir. meas. neg PSx
072 066 073 066 074 066 075 066
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines whether the directional decision of the distance protection function will be used or the directional decision formed from the negative-sequence current and voltage (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT: Op. w/o volt.neg PSx
072 069 073 069 074 069 075 069
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines the operating mode of IDMT protection in the event of measuring voltage failure (negative-sequence current system).
IDMT: Evaluation IN PSx
073 222 073 239 073 245 073 255
Fig.: 3-250
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
IDMT: Iref,N (meas.) PSx IDMT: Iref,N (calc.) PSx
001 169 001 170 001 171 001 172 072 052 073 052 074 052 075 052
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the reference current (residual current system). Depending on the setting at ID MT: Eva lu a ti on IN PSx, either IDMT: Iref,N (calc.) PSx or IDMT: Iref,N (meas.) PSx is used. The measured base current allows lower settings.
IDMT: Factor KI,N PSx
001 173 001 174 001 175 001 176
Fig.: 3-255
The set factor ID MT: Factor Ire f,IN is multiplied by the reference quantity Iref,N in order to constitute the minimum operate value for the current in the residual current measuring system. (Available as of software version -609)
IDMT: Characterist. N PSx IDMT: Min. trip time N PSx
072 058 073 058 074 058 075 058
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system).

072 079 073 079 074 079 075 079
Setting for the minimum trip time for the residual current measuring system (as of software version 609 of the P437). This timer stage is started as soon as the minimum operate value is exceeded. After the timer has elapsed, the trip signal is issued, regardless of the value of the current.
IDMT: Factor kt,N PSx
072 055 073 055 074 055 075 055
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the factor kt,N of the starting characteristic (residual current system).
IDMT: Release N IDMT: Direction N PSx PSx
072 061 073 061 074 061 075 061
Fig.: 3-256
Setting for the release characteristic (residual current system).

072 064 073 064 074 064 075 064
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines the direction of measurement for the IDMT protection function (residual current system).
IDMT: Direct. meas. N PSx
072 067 073 067 074 067 075 067
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines whether the directional decision of the distance protection function will be used or the direction decision formed from the negative-sequence current and voltage (residual current system). 7-96
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT: Op. w/o volt. N PSx
072 076 073 076 074 076 075 076
Fig.: 3-260
This setting determines the operating mode of IDMT protection in the event of measuring voltage failure (residual current system).
IDMT: Comp.react. Xneg PSx
002 193 002 194 002 195 002 196
Setting of parameter Xneg to correct the measuring voltage (see sections IDMT, GFSC, "Improved directional measurement for series compensated line applications").
Power directional protection P<>: Enabled PSx
014 252 014 253 014 254 014 255
Fig.: 3-278
This setting defines the parameter subset in which power directional protection is enabled. 017 203 017 204 017 205 017 213 P<>: P> high range PSx Setting for operate value P> of active power. This setting is only active if Highest range is set for Dynamic range I. 017 120 017 200 017 201 017 202 P<>: P> sens. range PSx
Note:
Setting for operate value P> of active power. This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for Dynamic range I. 017 128 017 129 017 130 017 131 P<>: Operate delay P> PSx
Note:
Setting for the operate delay of stage P>. P<>: Release delay P> PSx Setting for the release delay of stage P>. P<>: Direction P> PSx
017 132 017 133 017 134 017 135
017 136 017 137 017 138 017 139
Fig.: 3-281
The direction setting defines the direction decision forward, backward, or non-directional for which a P> trip signal occurs. 017 124 017 125 017 126 017 127 P<>: Diseng. ratio P> PSx Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P> of active power. 017 214 017 215 017 216 017 217 P<>: P>> high range PSx Setting for operate value P>> of active power. This setting is only active if Highest range is set for Dynamic range I. 017 140 017 141 017 142 017 143 P<>: P>> sens. range PSx
Note:
Setting for operate value P>> of active power. This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for Dynamic range I. 017 148 017 149 017 150 017 151 P<>: Operate delay P>>PSx
Note:
Setting for the operate delay of stage P>>. P<>: Release delay P>>PSx Setting for the release delay of stage P>>. P<>: Direction P>> PSx
017 152 017 153 017 154 017 155
017 156 017 157 017 158 017 159
Fig.: 3-281
The direction setting defines the direction decision forward, backward, or non-directional for which a P>> trip signal occurs. 017 144 017 145 017 146 017 147 P<>: Diseng. ratio P>>PSx
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-97
7 Settings
(continued)
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P>> of active power. 017 218 017 219 017 220 017 221 P<>: Q> high range PSx Setting for operate value Q> of reactive power. This setting is only active if Highest range is set for Dynamic range I. 017 160 017 161 017 162 017 163 P<>: Q> sens. range PSx Setting for operate value Q> of reactive power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for Dynamic range I. 017 168 017 169 017 170 017 171 P<>: Operate delay Q> PSx
Note:
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q>. P<>: Release delay Q> PSx Setting for the release delay of stage Q>. P<>: Direction Q> PSx
017 172 017 173 017 174 017 175
017 176 017 177 017 178 017 179
Fig.: 3-283
The direction setting defines the direction decision forward, backward, or non-directional for which a Q> trip signal occurs. 017 164 017 165 017 166 017 167 P<>: Diseng. ratio Q> PSx Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q> of reactive power. 017 222 017 223 017 224 017 225 P<>: Q>> high range PSx Setting for operate value Q>> of reactive power.
Note: This setting is only active if Highest range is set for Dynamic range I. P<>: Q>> sens. range PSx
017 180 017 181 017 182 017 183
Setting for operate value Q>> of reactive power. This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for Dynamic range I. 017 188 017 189 017 190 017 191 P<>: Operate delay Q>>PSx
Note:
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q>>. P<>: Release delay Q>>PSx Setting for the release delay of stage Q>>. P<>: Direction Q>> PSx
017 192 017 193 017 194 017 195
017 196 017 197 017 198 017 199
Fig.: 3-283
The direction setting defines the direction decision forward, backward, or non-directional for which a Q>> trip signal occurs. 017 184 017 185 017 186 017 187 P<>: Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q>> of reactive power. 017 013 017 014 017 016 017 020 P<>: P< high range PSx Setting the operate value P< for the active power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Highest range is set for Dynamic range I.
7-98
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
P<>: P< sens. range PSx
017 030 017 031 017 032 017 033
Setting the operate value P< for the active power. This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for Dynamic range I. 017 060 017 061 017 062 017 063 P<>: Operate delay P< PSx
Note:
Setting the operate delay of stage P<. P<>: Release delay P< PSx Setting the release delay of stage P<. P<>: Direction P< PSx
017 226 017 227 017 228 017 229
017 230 017 231 017 232 017 233
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P< trip signal will be issued for forward, backward or non-directional fault decisions. 017 034 017 035 017 036 017 037 P<>: Diseng. ratio P< PSx Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value P< for the active power. 017 068 017 021 017 025 017 026 P<>: P<< high range PSx Setting the operate value P<< for the active power. This setting is only active if Highest range is set for Dynamic range I. 017 234 017 235 017 236 017 237 P<>: P<< sens. range PSx Setting the operate value P<< for the active power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for Dynamic range I. 017 242 017 243 017 244 017 245 P<>: Operate delay P<<PSx
Note:
Setting the operate delay of stage P<<. P<>: Release delay P<<PSx Setting the release delay of stage P<<. P<>: Direction P<< PSx
017 246 017 247 017 248 017 249
017 250 017 251 017 252 017 253
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P<< trip signal will be issued for forward, backward or non-directional fault decisions. 017 238 017 239 017 240 017 241 P<>: Diseng.ratio P<< PSx Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value P<< for the active power. 017 069 017 038 017 039 017 045 P<>: Q< high range PSx Setting the operate value Q< of the reactive power. This setting is only active if Highest range is set for Dynamic range I. 017 079 017 046 017 049 017 051 P<>: Q<< high range PSx Setting the operate value Q<< of the reactive power.
Note:
This setting is only active if Highest range is set for Dynamic range I. 018 035 018 036 018 037 018 038 P<>: Q< sens. range PSx
Note:
Setting the operate value Q< of the reactive power.

Note:
This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for Dynamic range I.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-99
7 Settings
(continued)
P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx
018 052 018 053 018 054 018 055
Setting the operate delay of stage Q<. P<>: Release delay Q< PSx Setting the release delay of stage Q<. P<>: Direction Q< PSx
018 056 018 057 018 058 018 059
018 081 018 082 018 083 018 084
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q< trip signal will be issued for forward, backward or non-directional fault decisions. 018 044 018 045 018 046 018 047 P<>: Diseng. ratio Q< PSx Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value Q< of the reactive power. 018 085 018 086 018 087 018 088 P<>: Q<< sens. range PSx Setting the operate value Q<< of the reactive power. This setting is only active if Sensitive range is set for Dynamic range I. 018 213 018 214 018 215 018 216 P<>: Operate delay Q<<PSx
Note:
Setting the operate delay of stage Q<<. P<>: Release delay Q<<PSx Setting the release delay of stage Q<<. P<>: Direction Q<< PSx
018 236 018 237 018 238 018 239
018 242 018 243 018 244 018 245
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q<< trip signal will be issued for forward, backward or non-directional fault decisions. 018 095 018 096 018 097 018 098 P<>: Diseng.ratio Q<< PSx Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value Q<< of the reactive power. 018 246 018 247 018 248 018 249 P<>: tTransient pulse PSx Setting the time limit of the signals generated by the stages P<, P<<, Q< and Q<< after the respective operate delay has elapsed.
7-100
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
Time-voltage protection
V<>: Enable
PSx
076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000
Fig.: 3-264
This setting defines the parameter subset in which V<> protection is enabled.
V<>: Operating mode PSx
076 001 077 001 078 001 079 001
Fig.: 3-265
This setting specifies whether the phase-to-ground voltages (Star operating mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages (Delta operating mode) will be monitored.
Note:
In the settings for the operate values of the time-voltage protection function, the reference quantity is Vnom in the Delta operating mode, but Vnom/3 in the Star operating mode. To work out the settings for the over/undervoltage stages, consider the following example for Vnom = 100 V: Setting in the Delta operating mode for an operate value of 80 V (phase-to-phase):
Setting value = Operate value 80V = = 0.80 Vnom 100V
Setting in the Star operating mode for an operate value of 46.2 V (phase-to-phase): Operate value 46.2V 46.2V 3 Setting value = = = = 0,80 Vnom 100V 100V 3 3
V<>: I enable V< PSx
001 155 001 159 001 160 001 161
Setting the enable threshold for the minimum current monitor.

V<>: Op. mode V< mon. PSx V<>: Evaluation VNG PSx
001 162 001 163 001 164 001 165
Activating the minimum current monitoring operating mode.

076 002 077 002 078 002 079 002
Fig.: 3-271
This setting determines which neutral-point displacement voltage will be monitored: The displacement voltage calculated by the P437 or the displacement voltage measured at the T 90 voltage transformer.
V<>: V> V<>: V>> V<>: tV> V<>: tV> 3-pole PSx PSx PSx PSx
076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003
Fig.: 3-266
Setting for the operate value V>.

076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004
Fig.: 3-266
Setting for the operate value V>>.

076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005
Fig.: 3-266
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.

076 027 077 027 078 027 079 027
Fig.: 3-266
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V> when all three trigger stages are activated.
V<>: tV>> V<>: V< PSx PSx
076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006
Fig.: 3-266
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.

076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007
Fig.: 3-267
Setting for the operate value V<.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-101
7 Settings
(continued)
V<>: V<< V<>: tV< V<>: tV< 3-pole
PSx PSx PSx
076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008
Fig.: 3-267
Setting for the operate value V<<.

076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009
Fig.: 3-267
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.

076 028 077 028 078 028 079 028
Fig.: 3-267
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V< when all three trigger stages are activated.
V<>: tV<< V<>: Vpos> V<>: Vpos>> V<>: tVpos> V<>: tVpos>> V<>: Vpos< V<>: Vpos<< V<>: tVpos< V<>: tVpos<< V<>: Vneg> V<>: Vneg>> V<>: tVneg> V<>: tVneg>> V<>: VNG> V<>: VNG>> V<>: tVNG> V<>: tVNG>> PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010
Fig.: 3-267
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.

076 015 077 015 078 015 079 015
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the operate value Vpos>.

076 016 077 016 078 016 079 016
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the operate value Vpos>>.

076 017 077 017 078 017 079 017
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>.

076 018 077 018 078 018 079 018
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>>.

076 019 077 019 078 019 079 019
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the operate value Vpos<.

076 020 077 020 078 020 079 020
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the operate value Vpos<<.

076 021 077 021 078 021 079 021
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<.

076 022 077 022 078 022 079 022
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<<.

076 023 077 023 078 023 079 023
Fig.: 3-270
Setting for the operate value Vneg>.

076 024 077 024 078 024 079 024
Fig.: 3-270
Setting for the operate value Vneg>>.

076 025 077 025 078 025 079 025
Fig.: 3-270
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>.

076 026 077 026 078 026 079 026
Fig.: 3-270
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>>.

076 011 077 011 078 011 079 011
Fig.: 3-272
Setting for the operate value VNG>.

076 012 077 012 078 012 079 012
Fig.: 3-272
Setting for the operate value VNG>>.

076 013 077 013 078 013 079 013
Fig.: 3-272
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>.

076 014 077 014 078 014 079 014
Fig.: 3-272
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>>.
7-102
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
V<>: tTransient
PSx
076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029
Fig.: 3-267
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage stages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048
Fig.: 3-266
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured voltages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
076 049 077 049 078 049 079 049
Fig.: 3-269
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring derived voltages such as Vneg and VNG.
Over-/underfrequency protection f<>: Enable PSx
018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199
Fig.: 3-273
This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency protection is enabled.
f<>: Oper. mode f1 PSx
018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123
Fig.: 3-277
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency protection. 018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103 f<>: f1 PSx Setting the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered.
f<>: tf1 PSx
018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107
Fig.: 3-277
Fig.: 3-277
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection. 018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111 f<>: df1/dt PSx Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode "f with df/dt" has been selected. 018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115 f<>: Delta f1 PSx
Fig.: 3-277
Fig.: 3-277
Setting for Delta f.

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode "f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected. f<>: Delta t1 PSx
018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119
Fig.: 3-277
Setting for Delta t.

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode "f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected. f<>: Oper. mode f2 PSx
018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency protection.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-103
7 Settings
(continued)
f<>: f2
PSx
018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127
Setting the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered. 018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131 f<>: tf2 PSx Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection. 018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135 f<>: df2/dt PSx Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode "f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected. 018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143 f<>: Delta t2 PSx

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode "f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected. f<>: Oper. mode f3 PSx
018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency protection. 018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151 f<>: f3 PSx Setting the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered. 018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155 f<>: tf3 PSx Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection. 018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159 f<>: df3/dt PSx Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode "f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected. 018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167 f<>: Delta t3 PSx

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode "f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
7-104
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7 Settings
(continued)
f<>: Oper. mode f4
PSx
018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency protection.
f<>: f4 PSx
018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175
Setting the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered.
f<>: tf4 f<>: df4/dt PSx PSx
018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.

018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode "f with df/dt" has been selected. f<>: Delta f4 PSx
018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode "f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected. f<>: Delta t4 PSx
018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode "f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
7-105
7 Settings
(continued)
7-106
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8 Information and Control Functions
Information and Control Functions
The P437 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals, and acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object as well as fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical purposes. This information can be read out from the integrated local control panel. All this information can be found in the Operation and Events folders in the menu tree. Note: In the following tables the localization of the corresponding function description is indicated in the right hand side column. "Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a figure subtitle or figure report sheet, "Page: 3xxx" to a page. 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.1.1 Device Operation Cyclic Values Measured Operating Data
104 099
DVICE: Processor frequency Display of the clock frequency of the processor on processor module P.
COMM3: No. tel. errors p.u. Display of the updated measured operating value for the number of corrupted messages within the last 1000 received messages. COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored Display of the maximum value for the proportion of corrupted messages within the last 1000 received messages. COMM3: Loop back result COMM3: Loop back receive
120 040
120 041
120 057 120 056
While the hold time is running, the loop back test results can be checked by reading out these values. Measured data input MEASI: Current IDC Display of the input current. MEASI: Current IDC p.u. Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom. MEASI: Curr. IDC,lin p.u. Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom. MEASI: Scaled value IDC,lin Display of the scaled linearized value. MEASI: Temperature Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer.
004 133 004 180 004 136 004 135 004 134
Fig.: 3-25
Fig.: 3-25
Fig.: 3-25
Fig.: 3-26
Fig.: 3-27
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-1

(continued)
Measured data output
MEASO: Current A-1 MEASO: Current A-2 Display of the current on the analog measured data output (A1: channel 1; A2: channel 2)
005 100 005 099
Fig.: 3-36
Main function
MAIN: Date Date display. Note: The date can also be set here. MAIN: Time of day Display of the time of day. Note: The time can also be set here. MAIN: Time switching Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.
003 090
Fig.: 3-67
003 091
Fig.: 3-67
003 095
Fig.: 3-67
This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or communication interfaces. Note: The time can be set here for standard time or daylight saving time. In the case of clock synchronization via the clock synchronization telegram from a central control system or a central device, this setting will be overwritten each time a new clock synchronization telegram is received. With a free-running clock or synchronization by minute pulse through a binary input, the time of day setting and the time switching setting in the device must be plausible. The two settings do not affect each other. MAIN: Frequency f Display of system frequency. MAIN: Curr. IP,max prim. Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity. MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay Display of the delayed maximum phase current as a primary quantity. MAIN: IP,max prim.,stored MAIN: Curr. IP,min prim. Display of the minimum phase current as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current A prim. Display of phase current A as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current B prim. Display of phase current B as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current C prim. Display of phase current C as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current (IP) prim. Display of the calculated resultant current as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current IN prim.
004 043 005 010 007 040 006 040 005 040 005 034 005 036 005 050 004 040
Fig.: 3-50
Fig.: 3-39
Fig.: 3-39
Fig.: 3-39
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current as a primary quantity.

005 055
Fig.: 3-39
Fig.: 3-39
Fig.: 3-39
Fig.: 3-39
Fig.: 3-39
Fig.: 3-40
Display of the updated value for the residual current as a primary quantity.
8-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
MAIN: Current IN,par prim. Display of the measured residual current of the parallel line as a primary quantity. MAIN: Volt. VPG,max prim. Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity. MAIN: Volt. VPG,min prim. Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity. MAIN: Voltage A-G prim.
008 000
Fig.: 3-41
008 042
Fig.: 3-44
009 042
Fig.: 3-44
005 042
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G as a primary quantity. MAIN: Voltage B-G prim.
006 042
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G as a primary quantity. MAIN: Voltage C-G prim.
007 042
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G as a primary quantity. MAIN: Volt. (VPG)/3 prim.
005 012
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage as a primary quantity. MAIN: Voltage VNG prim.
004 041
Fig.: 3-45
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer T 90 as a primary quantity. MAIN: Voltage Vref prim.
005 046
Fig.: 3-46
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 as a primary quantity. MAIN: Volt. VPP,max prim. Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity. MAIN: Volt. VPP,min prim. Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity. MAIN: Voltage A-B prim.
005 044 009 044 008 044
Fig.: 3-44
Fig.: 3-44
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B as a primary quantity. MAIN: Voltage B-C prim.
006 044
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C as a primary quantity. MAIN: Voltage C-A prim.
007 044
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A as a primary quantity. MAIN: Active power P prim. Display of the updated active power value as a primary quantity. MAIN: Reac. power Q prim. Display of the updated reactive power value as a primary quantity. MAIN: Act.energy outp.prim Display of the updated active energy output as a primary quantity.
005 061 004 052 004 050
Fig.: 3-47
Fig.: 3-47
Fig.: 3-51
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-3

(continued)
MAIN: Act.energy inp. prim Display of the updated active energy input as a primary quantity. MAIN: React.en. outp. prim Display of the updated reactive energy output as a primary quantity. MAIN: React. en. inp. prim Display of the updated reactive energy input as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current IP,max p.u. Display of the maximum phase current referred to Inom. MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay Display of the delayed maximum phase current referred to Inom. MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IP,min p.u. Display of the minimum phase current referred to Inom. MAIN: Current A p.u. Display of phase current A referred to Inom. MAIN: Current B p.u. Display of phase current B referred to Inom. MAIN: Current C p.u. Display of phase current C referred to Inom. MAIN: Current Ipos p.u. Display of the positive sequence current referred to Inom. MAIN: Current Ineg p.u. Display of the negative-sequence current referred to Inom. MAIN: Current (IP) p.u. Display of the calculated residual current referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IN p.u. Display of the updated residual current value referred to Inom. MAIN: Current IN par p.u. MAIN: Voltage VPG,max p.u. Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom. MAIN: Voltage VPG,min p.u. Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom. MAIN: Voltage A-G p.u.
005 062
Fig.: 3-51
005 063
Fig.: 3-51
005 064
Fig.: 3-51
005 051
Fig.: 3-39
005 037
Fig.: 3-39
005 035
Fig.: 3-39
005 056
Fig.: 3-39
005 041
Fig.: 3-39
006 041
Fig.: 3-39
007 041
Fig.: 3-39
009 016
Fig.: 3-39
009 015
Fig.: 3-39
005 011
Fig.: 3-39
004 044
Fig.: 3-40
008 001
Fig.: 3-41
Display of the measured residual current of the parallel line referred to Inom.
008 043
Fig.: 3-44
009 043
Fig.: 3-44
005 043
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G referred to Vnom. MAIN: Voltage B-G p.u.
006 043
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G referred to Vnom. 8-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
MAIN: Voltage C-G p.u.
007 043
Fig.: 3-44
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G referred to Vnom. MAIN: Voltage Vpos p.u. Display of the positive-sequence voltage referred to Vnom. MAIN: Voltage Vneg p.u. Display of the negative-sequence voltage referred to Vnom. MAIN: Volt. (VPG)/3 p.u. Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to Vnom . MAIN: Voltage VNG p.u.
004 042 005 013 009 017 009 018
Fig.: 3-44
Fig.: 3-44
Fig.: 3-44
Fig.: 3-45
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer T 90 referred to Vnom . MAIN: Voltage Vref p.u.
005 047
Fig.: 3-46
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 referred to Vnom . MAIN: Voltage VPP,max p.u. Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom. MAIN: Voltage VPP,min p.u. Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom. MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u. Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B referred to Vnom. MAIN: Voltage B-C p.u. Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C referred to Vnom. MAIN: Voltage C-A p.u. Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A referred to Vnom. MAIN: Active power P p.u. Display of the updated active power value referred to nominal apparent power Snom. MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u. Display of the updated value for reactive power referred to nominal apparent power Snom. MAIN: Active power factor Display of the updated active power factor. MAIN: Load angle phi A Display of the updated load angle value in phase A. MAIN: Load angle phi B Display of the updated load angle value in phase B.
004 056 004 055 004 054 004 053 004 051 007 045 006 045 005 045 009 045 008 045
Fig.: 3-44
Fig.: 3-44
Fig.: 3-44
Fig.: 3-44
Fig.: 3-44
Fig.: 3-47
Fig.: 3-47
Fig.: 3-47
Fig.: 3-47
Fig.: 3-47
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-5

(continued)
MAIN: Load angle phi C Display of the updated load angle value in phase C. MAIN: Angle phi N Display of the angle between the measured residual current system quantities IN and VNG. MAIN: Phase rel. IN vs IP The phase relations of measured and calculated residual current are compared. MAIN: Angle VAG, IN MAIN: Angle VAG, IN,par
004 057
Fig.: 3-47
004 072
Fig.: 3-47
004 073
Fig.: 3-48
008 004 008 003
Fig.: 3-49 Fig.: 3-49
Display of the angle between VAG and the two residual currents for the purpose of checking correct connection of the transformer for measuring IN,par. MAIN: Current I unfilt. Display of calculated unfiltered resultant current. Thermal overload protection THERM: Status THERM replica Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
004 016 004 074
Fig.: 3-263
8.1.1.2 Communication interface 3
Physical State Signals

120 000 120 003 120 006 120 009 120 012 120 015 120 018 120 021
COMM3: State receive 1 COMM3: State receive 2 COMM3: State receive 3 COMM3: State receive 4 COMM3: State receive 5 COMM3: State receive 6 COMM3: State receive 7 COMM3: State receive 8 Display of the relevant receive signal. COMM3: State send 1 COMM3: State send 2 COMM3: State send 3 COMM3: State send 4 COMM3: State send 5 COMM3: State send 6 COMM3: State send 7 COMM3: State send 8 Display of the updated value for the relevant send signal.
121 000 121 002 121 004 121 006 121 008 121 010 121 012 121 014
8-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
GSSE: Output 1 state GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: GSSE: Output 2 state Output 3 state Output 4 state Output 5 state Output 6 state Output 7 state Output 8 state Output 9 state Output 10 state Output 11 state Output 12 state Output 13 state Output 14 state Output 15 state Output 16 state Output 17 state Output 18 state Output 19 state Output 20 state Output 21 state Output 22 state Output 23 state Output 24 state Output 25 state Output 26 state Output 27 state Output 28 state Output 29 state Output 30 state Output 31 state Output 32 state
104 100
104 103 104 106 104 109 104 112 104 115 104 118 104 121 104 124 104 127 104 130 104 133 104 136 104 139 104 142 104 145 104 148 104 151 104 154 104 157 104 160 104 163 104 166 104 169 104 172 104 175 104 178 104 181 104 184 104 187 104 190 104 193
Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-7

(continued)
Input 1 state Input 2 state Input 3 state Input 4 state Input 5 state Input 6 state Input 7 state Input 8 state Input 9 state Input 10 state Input 11 state Input 12 state Input 13 state Input 14 state Input 15 state Input 16 state Input 17 state Input 18 state Input 19 state Input 20 state Input 21 state Input 22 state Input 23 state Input 24 state Input 25 state Input 26 state Input 27 state Input 28 state Input 29 state Input 30 state Input 31 state Input 32 state
105 000 105 005 105 010 105 015 105 020 105 025 105 030 105 035 105 040 105 045 105 050 105 055 105 060 105 065 105 070 105 075 105 080 105 085 105 090 105 095 105 100 105 105 105 110 105 115 105 120 105 125 105 130 105 135 105 140 105 145 105 150 105 155
Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.
8-8
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Generic Object Orientated Substation Events
GOOSE: Output 1 state GOOSE: Output 2 state GOOSE: Output 3 state GOOSE: Output 4 state GOOSE: Output 5 state GOOSE: Output 6 state GOOSE: Output 7 state GOOSE: Output 8 state GOOSE: Output 9 state GOOSE: Output 10 state GOOSE: Output 11 state GOOSE: Output 12 state GOOSE: Output 13 state GOOSE: Output 14 state GOOSE: Output 15 state GOOSE: Output 16 state GOOSE: Output 17 state GOOSE: Output 18 state GOOSE: Output 19 state GOOSE: Output 20 state GOOSE: Output 21 state GOOSE: Output 22 state GOOSE: Output 23 state GOOSE: Output 24 state GOOSE: Output 25 state GOOSE: Output 26 state GOOSE: Output 27 state GOOSE: Output 28 state GOOSE: Output 29 state GOOSE: Output 30 state GOOSE: Output 31 state GOOSE: Output 32 state Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state. GOOSE: Input 1 state GOOSE: Input 2 state GOOSE: Input 3 state GOOSE: Input 4 state GOOSE: Input 5 state GOOSE: Input 6 state GOOSE: Input 7 state GOOSE: Input 8 state GOOSE: Input 9 state GOOSE: Input 10 state GOOSE: Input 11 state GOOSE: Input 12 state GOOSE: Input 13 state GOOSE: Input 14 state GOOSE: Input 15 state GOOSE: Input 16 state Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
106 010
106 012 106 014 106 016 106 018 106 020 106 022 106 024 106 026 106 028 106 030 106 032 106 034 106 036 106 038 106 040 106 042 106 044 106 046 106 048 106 050 106 052 106 054 106 056 106 058 106 060 106 062 106 064 106 066 106 068 106 070 106 072
106 200 106 201 106 202 106 203 106 204 106 205 106 206 106 207 106 208 106 209 106 210 106 211 106 212 106 213 106 214 106 215
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-9

(continued)
Function keys
F_KEY: State F1 F_KEY: State F2 F_KEY: State F3 F_KEY: State F4 F_KEY: State F5 F_KEY: State F6 The state of the function keys is displayed as follows:

080 122 080 123 080 124 080 125 080 126 080 127
Fig.: 3-20
"Without function": "Off": "On":
No functions are assigned to the function key. The function key is in the "Off" position. The function key is in the "On" position.
8-10
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Binary input
State U 801 State U 802 State U 803 State U 804 State U 805 State U 806 State U 1001 State U 1002 State U 1003 State U 1004 State U 1005 State U 1006 State U 1201 State U 1202 State U 1203 State U 1204 State U 1205 State U 1206 State U 1401 State U 1402 State U 1403 State U 1404 State U 1405 State U 1406 State U 1601 State U 1602 State U 1603 State U 1604 State U 1605 State U 1606 State U 2001 State U 2002 State U 2003 State U 2004
152 126 152 129 152 132 152 135 152 138 152 141 152 162 152 165 152 168 152 171 152 174 152 177 152 198 152 201 152 204 152 207 152 210 152 213 190 001 190 005 190 009 190 013 190 017 190 021 192 001 192 005 192 009 192 013 192 017 192 021 153 086 153 089 153 092 153 095
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:

Without function: Low: High:
No functions are assigned to the binary signal input. Not energized. Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input mode.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-11

(continued)
Binary outputs
OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP:
State K 801 State K 802 State K 803 State K 804 State K 805 State K 806 State K 807 State K 808 State K 1001 State K 1002 State K 1003 State K 1004 State K 1005 State K 1006 State K 1007 State K 1008 State K 1201 State K 1202 State K 1203 State K 1204 State K 1205 State K 1206 State K 1207 State K 1208 State K 1401 State K 1402 State K 1403 State K 1404 State K 1405 State K 1406 State K 1407 State K 1408 State K 1601 State K 1602 State K 1603 State K 1604 State K 1605 State K 1606 State K 1607 State K 1608 State K 1801 State K 1802 State K 1803 State K 1804 State K 1805 State K 1806 State K 2001 State K 2002 State K 2003 State K 2004 State K 2005 State K 2006
150 168 150 171 150 174 150 177 150 180 150 183 150 186 150 189 150 216 150 219 150 222 150 225 150 228 150 231 150 234 150 237 151 008 151 011 151 014 151 017 151 020 151 023 151 026 151 029 169 001 169 005 169 009 169 013 169 017 169 021 169 025 169 029 171 001 171 005 171 009 171 013 171 017 171 021 171 025 171 029 173 001 173 005 173 009 173 013 173 017 173 021 151 200 151 203 151 206 151 209 151 212 151 215
8-12
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
OUTP: State K 2007 OUTP: State K 2008 The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:

151 218 151 221
Without function: Low: High:
No functions are assigned to the output relay. The output relay is not energized. The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output relay. LED indicators LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: LED: State H 1 green State H 2 yell. State H 3 yell. State H 4 red State H 5 red State H 6 red State H 7 red State H 8 red State H 9 red State H10 red State H11 red State H12 red State H13 red State H14 red State H15 red State H16 red State H17 red State H18 red State H19 red State H20 red State H21 red State H22 red State H23 red State H 4 green State H 5 green State H 6 green State H 7 green State H 8 green State H 9 green State H10 green State H11 green State H12 green State H13 green State H14 green State H15 green State H16 green State H18 green State H19 green State H20 green
085 180 085 000 085 003 085 006 085 009 085 012 085 015 085 018 085 021 085 024 085 027 085 030 085 033 085 036 085 039 085 042 085 181 085 130 085 133 085 136 085 139 085 142 085 145 085 056 085 059 085 062 085 065 085 068 085 071 085 074 085 077 085 080 085 083 085 086 085 089 085 092 085 160 085 163 085 166
Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-13

(continued)
LED: State H21 green LED: State H22 green LED: State H23 green The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:

085 169 085 172 085 176
Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37 Fig.: 3-37
"Inactive": "Active":
The LED indicator is not energized. The LED indicator is energized.
8.1.1.3 Local control panel
Logic State Signals

080 111
LOC: Edit mode
Signal that the protection unit is in edit mode. As a standard this signal is linked to L E D : F c t . a s s i g . H 1 7 r e d . LOC: Trig. menu jmp 1 EXT Signal that menu jump list 1 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting at L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t 1 .) LOC: Trig. menu jmp 2 EXT Signal that menu jump list 2 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting at L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t 2 .) LOC: Illumination on EXT Signal that the display illumination is switched on. Communication interface 1 COMM1: Command block. EXT COMM1: Sig./meas. Block EXT COMM1: Command blocking COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block. COMM1: IEC 870-5-103 COMM1: IEC 870-5-101 COMM1: IEC 870-5, ILS COMM1: MODBUS COMM1: DNP3 COMM1: COURIER Communication interface 3 COMM3: Reset No.tlg.err.EXT COMM3: Communications fault COMM3: Comm. Link failure COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. IEC: Comm. link faulty
003 173 037 074 003 174 037 075 003 219 003 218 003 221 003 223 003 230 103 041 037 101 030 231 030 230
Chapter 6.3
Fig.: 3-6 Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9 Fig.: 3-6 Fig.: 3-7, 3-8, 3-9 Fig.: 3-7 Fig.: 3-8 Fig.: 3-9 Fig.: 3-10 Fig.: 3-11 Fig.: 3-12 Fig.* 3-69 Fig.: 3-17 Fig.: 3-17
006 054 120 043 120 044 120 045
IEC 61850 Communication
105 180
Display when an Ethernet module has not initiated properly, i.e. if the MAC address is missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting!
8-14
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
GSSE: IED link faulty
105 181
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether. The GSSE sending device will attach a validity stamp to each GSSE. Up to that time a repetition of GSSE will be carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time period at which the next state signal must be received. Generic Object Orientated Substation Events GOOSE: IED link faulty
107 250
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time period at which the next state signal must be received. IRIG-B IRIGB: Enabled IRIGB: Synchron. Ready MEASI: Enabled MEASI: PT100 faulty MEASI: Overload 20mA input MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp. OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: OUTP: Block outp.rel. EXT Reset latch. EXT Outp. Relays blocked Latching reset
023 201 023 202
Fig.: 3-19 Fig.: 3-19 Fig.: 3-22 Fig.: 3-27 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-28 Fig.: 3-28 Fig.: 3-28 Fig.: 3-28 Fig.: 3-30 Fig.: 3-31 Fig.: 3-32 Fig.: 3-32 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-34 Fig.: 3-36 Fig.: 3-36
Measured data input
035 008 040 190 040 191 040 192
Binary outputs
040 014 040 015 021 015 040 088
MEASO: Enabled MEASO: Outp. Enabled EXT MEASO: Reset output EXT MEASO: Output reset MEASO: Valid BCD value MEASO: 1-digit bit 0 (BCD) MEASO: 1-digit bit 1 (BCD) MEASO: 1-digit bit 2 (BCD) MEASO: 1-digit bit 3 (BCD) MEASO: 10-digit bit 0 (BCD) MEASO: 10-digit bit 1 (BCD) MEASO: 10-digit bit 2 (BCD) MEASO: 10-digit bit 3 (BCD) MEASO: 100-dig. Bit 0 (BCD) MEASO: 100-dig. Bit 1 (BCD) MEASO: Value A-1 valid MEASO: Value A-1 output MEASO: Value A-2 valid MEASO: Value A-2 output
037 102 036 085 036 087 037 117 037 050 037 051 037 052 037 053 037 054 037 055 037 056 037 057 037 058 037 059 037 060 069 014 037 118 069 015 037 119
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-15

(continued)
Main function
MAIN: Healthy
060 001
Signal that the protection unit is operational. As a standard this signal is linked to L E D : F c t . a s s i g . H 1 g r e e n . MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: Enable protect. EXT Group reset 1 EXT Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT Reset IP,max,st. EXT Reset meas.v.en. EXT Group reset 2 EXT General reset EXT Disable protect. EXT Blocking 1 EXT Blocking 2 EXT Reset latch.trip EXT Trip cmd. Block. EXT M.c.b. trip V EXT
003 027 005 209 005 210 005 211 005 212 005 252 005 255 003 026 040 060 040 061 040 138 036 045 004 061 002 183 036 086 041 023 031 028 036 051 031 029 031 030 031 031 037 018 038 030 038 031 038 032 037 019 036 052 036 053 036 054 002 066 120 046 120 047 120 048 120 049 041 078 041 022 036 047 037 070 065 001 003 096 060 060 003 028 038 046 006 011 006 012
Fig.: 3-53 Fig.: 3-69 Fig.* 3-69 Fig.: 3-42 Fig.* 3-69 Fig.: 3-69 Fig.* 3-69 Fig.: 3-53 Fig.: 3-55 Fig.: 3-55 Fig.* 3-69 Fig.: 3-65 Fig.: 3-139, 3-199 Fig.: 3-210 Fig.: 3-139, 3-199 Fig.: 3-58 Fig.: 3-143
MAIN: M.c.b. trip VNG EXT MAIN: M.c.b. trip Vref EXT MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: Man.cl.cmd.enabl.EXT CB open 3p EXT CB closed 3p EXT CB closed A EXT CB closed B EXT CB closed C EXT Man. Trip cmd. EXT Man def. trip A EXT Man def. trip B EXT Man def. trip C EXT Parallel trip EXT
Fig.: 3-64 Fig.: 3-64 Fig.: 3-64 Fig.: 3-64 Fig.: 3-58, 3-195 Fig.: 3-58, 3-195 Fig.: 3-58, 3-195 Fig.: 3-58, 3-195 Fig.: 3-60 Fig.: 3-63
MAIN: Parallel trip A EXT MAIN: Parallel trip B EXT MAIN: Parallel trip C EXT MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: 8-16 Par. Trip (1p) EXT Transfer trip EXT Transfer trip A EXT Transfer trip B EXT Transfer trip C EXT Blocking 1p trip EXT Man. Close cmd. EXT Manual close EXT Test mode EXT Reset indicat. EXT Time switching EXT Min-pulse clock EXT Prot. Ext. Enabled Prot. Ext. Disabled Short circuit AG Short circuit BG
Fig.: 3-127, 3-144 Fig.: 3-58 Fig.: 3-147 Fig.: 3-71 Fig.* 3-69 Fig.: 3-67 Fig.: 3-67 Fig.: 3-53 Fig.: 3-53
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:
Short circuit CG CB open 3p CB open >=1p CB open A CB open B CB open C CB closed 3p CB closed >= 1p CB closed A CB closed B CB closed C CB pos.sig. unplaus. Protect. Not ready Test mode Blocked/faulty Trip cmd. Blocked Latch. Trip c. reset Manual trip signal Manual trip signal A Manual trip signal B Manual trip signal C Man. Close command Gen. Trip command Gen. Trip signal 1 Trip signal 1, A Trip signal 1, B Trip signal 1, C Trip signal 1, 1p
006 013 031 040 031 039 031 032 031 033 031 034 031 042 031 038 031 035 031 036 031 037 031 041 004 060 037 071 004 065 021 013 040 139 034 017 034 047 034 048 034 049 037 068 035 071 036 005 036 006 036 007 036 008 037 252 037 253 036 023 036 071 036 072 036 073 036 074 036 022 038 103 037 009 036 000 036 001 036 002 036 003 036 004 041 027 041 028 041 029 001 207 001 208 001 209 001 210 060 000 061 000
Fig.: 3-210
Fig.: 3-58 Fig.: 3-172 Fig.: 3-172 Fig.: 3-172
Fig.: 3-71 Fig.: 3-65 Fig.: 3-298 Fig.: 3-64 Fig.: 3-64 Fig.: 3-64 Fig.: 3-64 Fig.: 3-58 Fig.: 3-62 Fig.: 3-62 Fig.: 3-62 Fig.: 3-62 Fig.: 3-62 Fig.: 3-61, 3-119 Fig.: 3-61, 3-190 Fig.: 3-62 Fig.: 3-62 Fig.: 3-62 Fig.: 3-62 Fig.: 3-62 Fig.: 3-62 Fig.: 3-66 Fig.: 3-58 Fig.: 3-59, 3-210, 3-228 Fig.: 3-59 Fig.: 3-59 Fig.: 3-59 Fig.: 3-59 Fig.: 3-54 Fig.: 3-54 Fig.: 3-54 Fig.: 3-63
MAIN: Trip signal 1, 3p MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
Gen. Trip signal 2 Gen. Trip command 1 Trip command 1, A Trip command 1, B Trip command 1, C Gen. Trip command 2 Final trip Close command General starting Starting A Starting B Starting C Starting GF Rush restr. A trig. Rush restr. B trig. Rush restr. C trig. Send transfer trip Send transfer trip A Send transfer trip B Send transfer trip C Without function Without function
8-17

(continued)
Parameter subset selection
PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS:
Control via user EXT Activate PS 1 EXT Activate PS 2 EXT Activate PS 3 EXT Activate PS 4 EXT Control via user Ext.sel.param.subset PS 1 activated ext. PS 2 activated ext. PS 3 activated ext. PS 4 activated ext. Actual param. Subset PS 1 active PS 2 active PS 3 active PS 4 active
036 101 065 002 065 003 065 004 065 005 036 102 003 061 036 094 036 095 036 096 036 097 003 062 036 090 036 091 036 092 036 093
Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-72 Fig.: 3-73 Fig.: 3-73
Self-monitoring (see also Chapter 10)
SFMON: Warning (LED) SFMON: Warning (relay) SFMON: Warm restart exec. SFMON: Cold restart exec. SFMON: Cold rest. Checksum SFMON: Cold rest. SW update SFMON: Blocking HW failure SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty SFMON: Hardware clock fail. SFMON: Faulty DSP SFMON: Battery failure SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded SFMON: +15V supply faulty SFMON: +24V supply faulty SFMON: -15V supply faulty SFMON: Wrong module slot 1 SFMON: Wrong module slot 2 SFMON: Wrong module slot 3 SFMON: Wrong module slot 4 SFMON: Wrong module slot 5 SFMON: Wrong module slot 6 SFMON: Wrong module slot 7 SFMON: Wrong module slot 8 SFMON: Wrong module slot 9 SFMON: Wrong module slot 10 SFMON: Wrong module slot 11 SFMON: Wrong module slot 12 SFMON: Wrong module slot 13 SFMON: Wrong module slot 14 SFMON: Wrong module slot 15 SFMON: Wrong module slot 16 SFMON: Wrong module slot 17 SFMON: Wrong module slot 18
036 070
036 100 041 202 041 201 093 024 093 025 090 019 041 200 093 040 093 127 090 010 096 121 093 081 093 082 093 080 096 100 096 101 096 102 096 103 096 104 096 105 096 106 096 107 096 108 096 109 096 110 096 111 096 112 096 113 096 114 096 115 096 116 096 117
8-18
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
SFMON: Wrong module slot 19 SFMON: Wrong module slot 20 SFMON: Wrong module slot 21 SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 SFMON: Defect.module slot 2 SFMON: Defect.module slot 3 SFMON: Defect.module slot 4 SFMON: Defect.module slot 5 SFMON: Defect.module slot 6 SFMON: Defect.module slot 7 SFMON: Defect.module slot 8 SFMON: Defect.module slot 9 SFMON: Defect.module slot10 SFMON: Defect.module slot11 SFMON: Defect.module slot12 SFMON: Defect.module slot13 SFMON: Defect.module slot14 SFMON: Defect.module slot15 SFMON: Defect.module slot16 SFMON: Defect.module slot17 SFMON: Defect.module slot18 SFMON: Defect.module slot19 SFMON: Defect.module slot20 SFMON: Defect.module slot21 SFMON: Module A DPR faulty SFMON: Module A RAM faulty SFMON : Module Y DPR faulty SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty SFMON: Error K 801 SFMON: Error K 802 SFMON: Error K 803 SFMON: Error K 804 SFMON: Error K 805 SFMON: Error K 806 SFMON: Error K 807 SFMON: Error K 808 SFMON: Error K 1001 SFMON: Error K 1002 SFMON: Error K 1003 SFMON: Error K 1004 SFMON: Error K 1005 SFMON: Error K 1006 SFMON: Error K 1007 SFMON: Error K 1008 SFMON: Error K 1201 SFMON: Error K 1202 SFMON: Error K 1203 SFMON: Error K 1204 SFMON: Error K 1205 SFMON: Error K 1206 SFMON: Error K 1207 SFMON: Error K 1208
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
096 118 096 119 096 120 097 000 097 001 097 002 097 003 097 004 097 005 097 006 097 007 097 008 097 009 097 010 097 011 097 012 097 013 097 014 097 015 097 016 097 017 097 018 097 019 097 020 093 070 093 071 093 110 093 111 097 086 097 087 097 088 097 089 097 090 097 091 097 092 097 093 097 102 097 103 097 104 097 105 097 106 097 107 097 108 097 109 097 118 097 119 097 120 097 121 097 122 097 123 097 124 097 125
8-19

(continued)
SFMON: Error K 1401 SFMON: Error K 1402 SFMON: Error K 1403 SFMON: Error K 1404 SFMON: Error K 1405 SFMON: Error K 1406 SFMON: Error K 1407 SFMON: Error K 1408 SFMON: Error K 1601 SFMON: Error K 1602 SFMON: Error K 1603 SFMON: Error K 1604 SFMON: Error K 1605 SFMON: Error K 1606 SFMON: Error K 1607 SFMON: Error K 1608 SFMON: Error K 1801 SFMON: Error K 1802 SFMON: Error K 1803 SFMON: Error K 1804 SFMON: Error K 1805 SFMON: Error K 1806 SFMON: Error K 2001 SFMON: Error K 2002 SFMON: Error K 2003 SFMON: Error K 2004 SFMON: Error K 2005 SFMON: Error K 2006 SFMON: Error K 2007 SFMON: Error K 2008 SFMON: Undef. Operat. Code SFMON: Invalid arithm. Op. SFMON: Undefined interrupt SFMON: Exception oper.syst. SFMON: Protection failure SFMON: Checksum error param SFMON: Clock sync. Error SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM SFMON: Overflow MT_RC SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 SFMON : Invalid SW vers. Y SFMON: Time-out module Y SFMON: Inom not adjustable SFMON: M.c.b. trip Vref SFMON: M.c.b. trip VNG SFMON: M.c.b. trip V SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty SFMON: Vneg> triggered SFMON: Undervoltage SFMON: FF, V triggered SFMON: FF, Vref triggered 8-20
097 134 097 135 097 136 097 137 097 138 097 139 097 140 097 141 097 150 097 151 097 152 097 153 097 154 097 155 097 156 097 157 097 166 097 167 097 168 097 169 097 170 097 171 097 182 097 183 097 184 097 185 097 186 097 187 097 188 097 189 093 010 093 011 093 012 093 013 090 021 090 003 093 041 093 026 090 012 093 015 093 075 093 113 093 112 093 118 098 011 098 132 098 000 098 001 098 014 098 009 098 021 098 022
Fig.: 3-75
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. SFMON: Meas. Circ. V faulty SFMON: BUOC not active SFMON: BUOC active w/o ARC SFMON: BUOC active with ARC SFMON: Meas. Circ. I faulty SFMON: Zero-sequ. Starting SFMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty SFMON: Meas. Circuits GFSC SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3 SFMON: Hardware error COMM3 SFMON : Invalid SW vers DHMI SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. SFMON: Telecom. Faulty/PSIG SFMON: Op.mode PSIG inval. SFMON: Telecom.faulty/GSCSG SFMON: Not perm. F. Mod. T SFMON: Peripheral fault SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1 SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2 SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC SFMON: PT100 open circuit SFMON: Overload 20 mA input SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. SFMON: Setting error f<> SFMON: Setting error PSB SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync SFMON: Output 30 SFMON: Output 30 (t) SFMON: Output 31 SFMON: Output 31 (t) SFMON: Output 32 SFMON: Output 32 (t) SFMON: CB pos.sig. implaus. Operating data recording Monitoring signal recording Overload recording OP_RC: Reset record. EXT MT_RC: Reset record. EXT OL_RC: Reset record. EXT OL_RC: Record. in progress OL_RC: Overl. mem. overflow GF_RC: Reset record. EXT FT_DA: Trigger EXT
098 023 098 017 098 002 098 003 098 004 098 005 098 015 098 016 098 013 093 140 093 143 093 145 093 142 093 141 098 006 098 019 098 027 093 122 098 018 093 124 093 114 093 115 093 116 098 024 098 025 098 026 098 028 098 128 093 120 098 053 098 054 098 055 098 056 098 057 098 058 098 124
Fig.: 3-139 Fig.: 3-139 Fig.: 3-144 Fig.: 3-144 Fig.: 3-144 Fig.: 3-140 Fig.: 3-139 Fig.: 3-139 Fig.: 3-226
Fig.: 3-150 Fig.: 3-154 Fig.: 3-228 Fig.: 3-139 Fig.: 3-36 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-27 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-25 Fig.: 3-277
005 213
Fig.: 3-69 Fig.* 3-69 Fig.* 3-69 Fig.: 3-77 Fig.: 3-78 Fig.* 3-69 Fig.: 3-80
005 240
005 241 035 003 035 007
Ground fault recording Fault data acquisition Fault recording
005 242
036 088
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-21

(continued)
Fault recording
FT_RC: Record. Trig. Active FT_RC: Reset record. EXT FT_RC: Trigger EXT FT_RC: Trigger FT_RC: Record. In progress FT_RC: System disturb. Runn FT_RC: Fault mem. Overflow FT_RC: Faulty time tag DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: Blocking Z1 EXT Blocking Z1,ze EXT Blocking Z2 EXT Blocking Z3 EXT Blocking Z4 EXT Blocking Z5 EXT Blocking Z6 EXT Blocking Z7 EXT Blocking Z8 EXT Zone extension EXT
002 002
Fig.: 3-86 Fig.* 3-69 Fig.: 3-86 Fig.: 3-86 Fig.: 3-86 Fig.: 3-86 Fig.: 3-87
005 243 036 089 037 076 035 000 035 004 035 001 035 002
Distance protection
036 034 036 036 036 037 036 039 036 041 036 044 036 061 036 067 036 068 036 046
Fig.: 3-123 Fig.: 3-123 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-113, 3-117, 3-119, 3-127, 3-149 Fig.: 3-109 Fig.: 3-89 Fig.: 3-59, 3-82, 3-83, 3-85, 3-99, 3-100, 3-104, 3-106, 3-107, 3-119, 3-120, 3-123, 3-124, 3-127, 3-139, 3-141, 3-142, 3-149, 3-152, 3-170, 3-174, 3-210 Fig.: 3-100 Fig.: 3-100 Fig.: 3-100 Fig.: 3-100 Fig.: 3-100 Fig.: 3-100 Fig.: 3-100 Fig.: 3-100 Fig.: 3-100 Fig.: 3-100 Fig.: 3-92 Fig.: 3-91 Fig.: 3-91 Fig.: 3-91 Fig.: 3-99 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106
DIST: Enable ZE f. 1pG EXT DIST: Enabled DIST: General starting
038 025 036 104 036 240
DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: 8-22
Starting I>> A Starting I>> B Starting I>> C Starting V< A Starting V< B Starting V< C Starting Z< Starting Z< A Starting Z< B Starting Z< C Start. switch. to PG tIN> running VNG>> triggered tVNG>> elapsed Zero-sequ. starting Fault forward / LS Fault forwd. / LS, A Fault forwd. / LS, B Fault forwd. / LS, C Fault backward / BS
040 064 040 065 040 097 040 067 040 075 040 096 036 241 040 070 040 071 040 072 040 052 036 105 036 015 036 016 036 021 036 018 038 010 038 012 038 014 036 019
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST:
Fault backwd / BS, A Fault backwd / BS, B Fault backwd / BS, C Dir.using Vmeas Sys1 Dir.using Vmeas Sys2 Dir.using Vmeas Sys3 Dir.using Vmem Sys1 Dir.using Vmem Sys2 Dir.using Vmem Sys3 Forw. w/o meas. Sys1 Forw. w/o meas. Sys2 Forw. w/o meas. Sys3 tVmemory running Zone extension
038 011 038 013 038 015 038 045 038 105 038 108 038 047 038 106 038 109 038 044 038 104 038 107 040 034 036 065 036 103 039 029 038 022 039 028 001 094 002 067 001 095 001 096 001 097 001 098 001 099 001 100 001 101 037 200 036 026 035 079 036 027 036 028 036 029 036 030 036 031 037 127 037 128 036 009 035 072 035 074 035 073 041 084 040 056 040 057 040 058 040 059 037 129 037 130 038 039 037 210
Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-106 Fig.: 3-104 Fig.: 3-113, 3-117 Fig.: 3-113, 3-117 Fig.: 3-109 Fig.: 3-113, 3-117 Fig.: 3-109 Fig.: 3-119 Fig.: 3-119 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-126 Fig.: 3-119 Fig.: 3-119 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-120 Fig.: 3-124, 3-210 Fig.: 3-123 Fig.: 3-123 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-124 Fig.: 3-102 Fig.: 3-102
DIST: Zone extension HSR DIST: Zone ext. HSR 1pG DIST: Zone extension TDR DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: Zone ext. 1pG active Zone 1 starting Zone 1,ze starting Zone 2 starting Zone 3 starting Zone 4 starting Zone 5 starting Zone 6 starting Zone 7 starting Zone 8 starting Impedance in zone 6 t1 elapsed t1,ze elapsed t2 elapsed t3 elapsed t4 elapsed t5 elapsed t6 elapsed t7 elapsed t8 elapsed Trip signal Trip signal zone 1 Trip signal Z1,ze Trip sig. zone 2-8 Trip signal zone 2 Trip signal zone 3 Trip signal zone 4 Trip signal zone 5 Trip signal zone 6 Trip signal zone 7 Trip signal zone 8 With mutual comp. IN,par> triggered
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-23

(continued)
Power swing blocking
PSB: PSB: PSB: PSB: PSB: PSB: PSB: PSB: PSB: PSB: PSB: PSB:
Blocking init. EXT Enabled Z within polygon Operate delay runn. Blocking initiated Trip signal Trip signal OOS (a) Trip signal OOS (b) Trip signal stab. PS IP> triggered Ineg> triggered IN> triggered
036 069 040 095 036 024 036 058 036 032 036 025 006 035 006 192 006 030 036 012 036 011 036 010
Fig.: 3-131 Fig.: 3-129 Fig.: 3-131 Fig.: 3-131 Fig.: 3-138
Fig.: 3-131 Fig.: 3-131 Fig.: 3-131 Fig.: 3-142 Fig.: 3-140 Fig.: 3-140 Fig.: 3-141 Fig.: 3-141 Fig.: 3-141 Fig.: 3-142 Fig.: 3-143 Fig.: 3-139 Fig.: 3-139 Fig.: 3-139 Fig.: 3-139 Fig.: 3-139 Fig.: 3-141 Fig.: 3-144 Fig.: 3-144 Fig.: 3-144 Fig.: 3-144 Fig.: 3-147 Fig.: 3-147 Fig.: 3-147 Fig.: 3-146, 3-147 Fig.: 3-147 Fig.: 3-146 Fig.: 3-146
Measuring-circuit monitoring
MCMON: Blocking FF,V EXT MCMON: Enabled MCMON: Meas. Circ. I faulty MCMON: Undervoltage MCMON: Phase sequ. V faulty MCMON: Vneg> triggered MCMON: FF, V triggered MCMON: FF, Vref triggered MCMON: Meas. Circ. V faulty MCMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. MCMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty MCMON: Zero-sequ. Starting MCMON: Peripheral fault MCMON: Meas. Voltage o.k. BUOC: Enabled BUOC: Active BUOC: Starting BUOC: Trip signal SOTF: SOTF: SOTF: SOTF: SOTF: SOTF: SOTF: SOTF: SOTF: SOTF: SOTF: SOTF: Trigger EXT Par. ARC running EXT Enabled tManual-close runn. Z1 extended Starting IN> Starting I> tIN> elapsed tI> elapsed Active Line dead Trip signal
002 182 040 094 040 087 038 038 038 049 041 079 035 081 038 100 038 023 040 078 037 020 041 080 038 024 038 048
Backup overcurrent-time protection (Backup DTOC)
040 093
037 021 036 013 036 014
Switch on to fault protection
002 127 039 063 040 069 036 063 035 076 001 187 006 128 001 188 006 129 006 146 006 147 036 064
Fig.: 3-147
8-24
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Protective signaling
PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG:
Enable EXT Disable EXT Test telecom. EXT Test telecom. 1 EXT Test telecom. 2 EXT Test telecom. 3 EXT Telec.faulty (A) EXT Telec.faulty (B) EXT Blocking EXT
037 025 037 026 036 038 038 085 038 086 038 087 004 064 008 094 036 049 036 255 006 037 036 048
Fig.: 3-148 Fig.: 3-148 Fig.: 3-175 Fig.: 3-175 Fig.: 3-175 Fig.: 3-175 Fig.: 3-150 Fig.: 3-150 Fig.: 3-148, 3-228 Fig.: 3-176 Fig.: 3-151, 3-156, 3-158, 3-161, 3-164, 3-167, 3-168, 3-176, 3-174, 3-193 Fig.: 3-151, 3-156, 3-158, 3-161, 3-164, 3-167, 3-168, 3-174 Fig.: 3-151, 3-156, 3-158, 3-161, 3-164, 3-167, 3-168, 3-174 Fig.: 3-151, 3-156, 3-158, 3-161, 3-164, 3-167, 3-168, 3-174 Fig.: 3-151 Fig.: 3-148 Fig.: 3-148 Fig.: 3-148 Fig.: 3-148 Fig.: 3-152 Fig.: 3-175 Fig.: 3-175 Fig.: 3-175 Fig.: 3-175 Fig.: 3-150 Fig.: 3-154 Fig.: 3-155, 3-157, 3-160, 3-163, 3-166, 3-174, 3-175 Fig.: 3-176 Fig.: 3-155, 3-157, 3-160, 3-163, 3-166, 3-174, 3-175 Fig.: 3-155, 3-157, 3-160, 3-163, 3-166, 3-174, 3-175
PSIG: Block. weak inf. EXT PSIG: Receive (B) EXT PSIG: Receive (A) EXT
PSIG: Chann. 1 receive EXT
038 091
038 092
038 093
PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG:
Weak inf. trigg. EXT Freq. mon. trig. EXT Ext. enabled Enabled Ready Not ready Transient blocking Test telecom. chann. Test telecom. ch. 1 Test telecom. ch. 2 Test telecom. ch. 3 Telecom. faulty Op.mode invalid Send
043 062 038 080 037 023 015 008 037 027 037 028 037 255 034 016 034 026 034 027 034 028 036 060 043 065 036 035
PSIG: Receive PSIG: Channel 1, send
006 036 038 081
PSIG: Channel 2, send
038 082
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-25

(continued)
PSIG: Channel 3, send
038 083
PSIG: Receive (signal) PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: PSIG: Z1 extended Weak infeed start. Trip V<, A Trip V<, B Trip V<, C Trip signal
037 029
035 075 043 064 006 152 006 153 006 154 038 007
Fig.: 3-155, 3-157, 3-160, 3-163, 3-166, 3-174, 3-175 Fig.: 3-156, 3-158, 3-161, 3-164, 3-167 Fig.: 3-168 Fig.: 3-173 Fig.: 3-173 Fig.: 3-173 Fig.: 3-173 Fig.: 3-156, 3-158, 3-161, 3-164, 3-167 Fig.* 3-69 Fig.: 3-178 Fig.: 3-178 Fig.: 3-187 Fig.: 3-187 Fig.: 3-187 Fig.: 3-187 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-180 Fig.: 3-179
ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC:
Reset counters EXT Enable EXT Disable EXT Test HSR A EXT Test HSR B EXT Test HSR C EXT Test HSR A-B-C EXT General starting EXT Blocking EXT CB drive ready EXT 1p-HSR enable EXT 3p-HSR enable EXT 3p-HSR(1p) enab. EXT Enable ext. ARC EXT 3p transfer trip EXT Ext. enabled Enabled Test HSR A Test HSR B Test HSR C Test HSR A-B-C Blocked Ready Not ready Reject test HSR Block. time running Cycle running Oper. time 1 running Oper. time 2 running Dead time running Dead time 1p running Dead time 3p running Max. dead time runn. tDiscrim running Dead time TDR runn. Reclaim time running (Re)close request (Re)close signal HSR
005 244 037 010 037 011 037 014 037 015 037 016 037 017 037 096 036 050 004 066 000 108 000 109 000 110 038 003 038 043 037 013 015 064 034 020 034 021 034 022 034 023 004 069 004 068 037 008 036 055 037 004 037 000 037 005 037 065 037 002 037 066 037 067 037 069 039 087 037 003 036 042 037 077 037 007
Fig.: 3-192 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-178 Fig.: 3-178 Fig.: 3-187 Fig.: 3-187 Fig.: 3-187 Fig.: 3-187 Fig.: 3-180 Fig.: 3-179 Fig.: 3-179 Fig.: 3-187 Fig.: 3-180 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-195, 3-210 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-195
8-26
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: Automatic synchronism check ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC:
(Re)close signal TDR Reclosure successful Sig.interr. CB trip Ext. 1p trip perm. 3p final trip Reset counters EXT Enable EXT Disable EXT AR close request EXT Blocking EXT Test close requ. EXT Enabl.close requ.EXT Close request EXT Ext. enabled Enabled Blocked Ready Not ready Test close request Close request Cycle running Operat.time running Close enable
037 006 036 062 036 040 039 086 036 043
Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.: 3-194 Fig.: 3-195 Fig.* 3-69 Fig.: 3-198 Fig.: 3-198 Fig.: 3-199 Fig.: 3-200 Fig.: 3-200 Fig.: 3-200 Fig.: 3-198 Fig.: 3-198 Fig.: 3-199 Fig.: 3-199 Fig.: 3-199 Fig.: 3-200 Fig.: 3-200 Fig.: 3-207 Fig.: 3-207 Fig.: 3-203, 3-204 Fig.: 3-203, 3-204 Fig.: 3-205, 3-206 Fig.: 3-207 Fig.: 3-209 Fig.: 3-209 Fig.: 3-210 Fig.: 3-209 Fig.: 3-209 Fig.: 3-209 Fig.: 3-209 Fig.: 3-226 Fig.: 3-212, 3-217 Fig.: 3-212, 3-217 Fig.: 3-212 Fig.: 3-212 Fig.: 3-224 Fig.: 3-224 Fig.: 3-224 Fig.: 3-224 Fig.: 3-224 Fig.: 3-224
006 074 037 049 037 061 000 106 037 048 037 064 037 063 037 062 037 092 018 024 038 018 037 079 037 082 034 019 034 018 038 019 037 093 037 083 037 085 037 084 037 086
ASC: Close enable,volt.ch ASC: Close enable,sync.ch ASC: Close rejection Ground fault (short-circuit) protection GFSC: Enable EXT GFSC: GFSC: GFSC: GFSC: GFSC: GFSC: GFSC: GFSC: Disable EXT Blocking EXT Ext. Enabled Enabled Ready Not ready Monitor. Triggered IN> triggered
039 095
039 096 043 068 039 097 038 094 039 093 039 094 038 095 039 088 039 089 038 096 043 061 039 090 039 091 038 097 038 098 038 099 039 092
GFSC: VNG> triggered GFSC: GFSC: GFSC: GFSC: GFSC: GFSC: GFSC: GFSC: Starting Direct.determ.enabl. Fault forward / LS Fault backward / BS t1 elapsed t2 elapsed t3 elapsed Trip signal
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-27

(continued)
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
GSCSG: Enable EXT GSCSG: Disable EXT GSCSG: Test telecom. EXT GSCSG: Telecom. Faulty EXT GSCSG: Blocking EXT GSCSG: Receive EXT GSCSG: Frequ.mon.trigd. EXT GSCSG: Ext. Enabled GSCSG: Enabled GSCSG: Ready GSCSG: Not ready GSCSG: Test telecom. Chann. GSCSG: Transient blocking GSCSG: Send signal GSCSG: Tripping time elaps. GSCSG: Telecom. Faulty GSCSG: Trip signal
043 050
Fig.: 3-227 Fig.: 3-227 Fig.: 3-237 Fig.: 3-228 Fig.: 3-228 Fig.: 3-230, 3-232, 3-233, 3-234, 3-236 Fig.: 3-230 Fig.: 3-227 Fig.: 3-227 Fig.: 3-228 Fig.: 3-228 Fig.: 3-237 Fig.: 3-231 Fig.: 3-232, 3-233, 3-236, 3-237 Fig.: 3-229 Fig.: 3-228 Fig.: 3-232, 3-233, 3-234 Fig.: 3-247
043 051 043 056 043 053 043 052 043 055
043 054 043 066 023 070 043 057 043 058 034 029 037 254 043 059
043 063 046 060 043 060
Definite-time overcurrent protection
DTOC: Block. dir. tIN> EXT DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: Blck. dir. tIN>> EXT Blk. dir. tIN>>> EXT Bl. dir. tIN>>>> EXT Blocking tI> EXT Blocking tI>> EXT Blocking tI>>>EXT Blocking tI>>>> EXT Blocking tIneg> EXT Blocking tIneg>> EXT Block. tIneg>>> EXT Block. tIneg>>>> EXT Blocking tIN> EXT Blocking tIN>> EXT Blocking tIN>>> EXT Blocking tIN>>>> EXT Enabled Starting I> Starting I>> Starting I>>> Starting I>>>> tI> elapsed tI>> elapsed tI>>> elapsed tI>>>> elapsed Starting Ineg> Starting Ineg>> Starting Ineg>>> Starting Ineg>>>>
002 176
002 177 002 178 002 179 041 060 041 061 041 062 041 100 041 102 041 103 041 104 041 105 041 063 041 064 041 065 041 101 040 120 035 020 035 021 035 022 035 023 040 010 040 011 040 012 035 032 035 024 035 025 035 026 035 027
Fig.: 3-240 Fig.: 3-240 Fig.: 3-240 Fig.: 3-240
Fig.: 3-238
Fig.: 3-240 Fig.: 3-240 Fig.: 3-240 Fig.: 3-240
8-28
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
DTOC: tIneg> elapsed DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: tIneg>> elapsed tIneg>>> elapsed tIneg>>>> elapsed Starting IN> Starting IN>> Starting IN>>> Starting IN>>>> Fault N forward Fault N backward tIN> elapsed tIN>> elapsed tIN>>> elapsed tIN>>>> elapsed Trip signal tIN>
035 033 035 034 035 035 035 036 035 028 035 029 035 030 035 031 035 047 035 048 035 037 035 038 035 039 035 040 035 043 035 044 035 045 035 046
Fig.: 3-240, 3-246 Fig.: 3-240 Fig.: 3-240 Fig.: 3-240
Fig.: 3-244 Fig.: 3-244 Fig.: 3-150, 3-247, 3-248 Fig.: 3-150 Fig.: 3-150 Fig.: 3-150 Fig.: 3-245, 3-247, 3-248 Fig.: 3-245 Fig.: 3-245 Fig.: 3-245 Fig.: 3-256 Fig.: 3-256 Fig.: 3-256 Fig.: 3-249 Fig.: 3-256 Fig.: 3-256 Fig.: 3-256 Fig.: 3-256 Fig.: 3-256 Fig.: 3-256 Fig.: 3-259 Fig.: 3-259
DTOC: Trip signal tIN>> DTOC: Trip signal tIN>>> DTOC: Trip sign. tIN>>>> Inverse-time overcurrent protection IDMT: Block. tIref,P> EXT IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: Block. tIref,neg>EXT Block. tIref,N> EXT Enabled Starting Iref,P> Trip signal tIref,P> Starting Iref,neg> Trip sig. tIref,neg> Starting Iref,N> Trip signal tIref,N> Neg.seq.syst. forw. Neg.seq.syst. backw. Blocking P> EXT Blocking P>> EXT Blocking Q> EXT Blocking Q>> EXT Blocking tP< EXT Blocking tP<< EXT Blocking tQ< EXT Blocking tQ<< EXT Enabled Starting P> Starting P>> Signal P> delayed Signal P>> delayed Trip signal P> Trip signal P>> Starting Q> Starting Q>> Signal Q> delayed
040 101
040 102 040 103 040 100 040 080 040 084 040 107 040 108 040 081 040 085 035 041 035 042
Directional power protection
035 082 035 083 035 084 035 085 035 050 035 051 035 052 035 053 036 250 035 086 035 089 035 087 035 090 035 088 035 091 035 092 035 095 035 093
Fig.: 3-278
Fig.: 3-281 Fig.: 3-281
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-29

(continued)
P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: Thermal overload protection
Signal Q>> delayed Trip signal Q> Trip signal Q>> Starting P< Starting P<< Signal P< delayed Signal P<< delayed tP< elapsed trans. tP<< elapsed trans. tP</tP<< elaps.trans Fault P< Fault P<< Trip signal P< Trip signal P<< Trip signal P< trans Trip sig. P<< trans. Starting Q< Starting Q<< Signal Q< delayed Signal Q<< delayed tQ< elapsed trans. tQ<< elapsed trans. tQ</tQ<< elaps.trans Fault Q< Fault Q<< Trip signal Q< Trip signal Q<< Trip sig. Q< trans. Trip sig. Q<< trans. Direction P forw. Direction P backw. Direction Q forw. Direction Q backw.
035 096 035 094 035 097 035 054 035 060 035 055 035 061 035 056 035 062 035 178 035 057 035 063 035 058 035 064 035 059 035 065 035 066 035 010 035 067 035 011 035 068 035 016 035 179 035 069 035 049 035 155 035 176 035 156 035 177 035 181 035 191 035 193 035 194
Fig.: 3-283 Fig.: 3-283
Fig.: 3-290 Fig.: 3-290 Fig.: 3-291 Fig.: 3-291 Fig.: 3-263 Fig.: 3-263 Fig.: 3-261 Fig.: 3-263 Fig.: 3-263 Fig.: 3-263 Fig.: 3-263 Fig.: 3-266 Fig.: 3-266 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-270 Fig.: 3-270
THERM: Replica block EXT THERM: Reset replica EXT THERM: Enabled THERM: Reset replica THERM: Starting k*Iref> THERM: Warning THERM: Trip signal V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: Blocking tV> EXT Blocking tV>> EXT Blocking tV< EXT Blocking tV<< EXT Blocking tVpos> EXT Blocking tVpos>> EXT Blocking tVpos< EXT Blocking tVpos<< EXT Blocking tVneg> EXT Blocking tVneg>> EXT
041 074 038 061 040 068 039 061 041 108 039 025 039 020
Time-voltage protection
041 068 041 069 041 070 041 071 041 090 041 091 041 092 041 093 041 094 041 095
8-30
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>:
Blocking tVNG> EXT Blocking tVNG>> EXT Enabled Ready Not ready Starting V>/>> A(-B) Starting V>/>> B(-C) Starting V>/>> C(-A) Starting V> Starting V> 3-pole Starting V>> tV> elapsed tV> 3-pole elapsed tV>> elapsed Starting V</<< A(-B) Starting V</<< B(-C) Starting V</<< C(-A) Starting V< Starting V< 3-pole Starting V<< tV< elapsed tV< elaps. Transient Fault V< tV< 3-pole elapsed tV< 3p elaps. Trans. Fault V< 3-pole tV<< elapsed tV<< elapsed trans. tV</<< elaps. Trans. Fault V<< Starting Vpos> Starting Vpos>> tVpos> elapsed tVpos>> elapsed Starting Vpos< Starting Vpos<< tVpos< elapsed tVpos< elaps. Trans. Fault Vpos< tVpos<< elapsed tVpos<< elaps.trans. Fault Vpos<< tVpos</<< elap.trans Starting Vneg> Starting Vneg>> tVneg> elapsed tVneg>> elapsed Starting VNG> Starting VNG>> tVNG> elapsed tVNG>> elapsed
041 072 041 073 040 066 042 003 042 004 041 031 041 032 041 033 041 030 041 097 041 096 041 034 041 098 041 035 041 038 041 039 041 040 041 037 042 005 041 099 041 041 042 023 041 110 042 006 042 024 041 111 041 042 042 025 042 007 041 112 042 010 042 011 042 012 042 013 042 014 042 015 042 016 042 026 041 113 042 017 042 027 041 114 042 018 042 019 042 020 042 021 042 022 041 044 042 008 041 045 041 046
Fig.: 3-272 Fig.: 3-272 Fig.: 3-264 Fig.: 3-264 Fig.: 3-264 Fig.: 3-266 Fig.: 3-266 Fig.: 3-266 Fig.: 3-266 Fig.: 3-266 Fig.: 3-266 Fig.: 3-266 Fig.: 3-266 Fig.: 3-266 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-267 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-269 Fig.: 3-270 Fig.: 3-270 Fig.: 3-270 Fig.: 3-270 Fig.: 3-272 Fig.: 3-272 Fig.: 3-272 Fig.: 3-272
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-31

(continued)
Over-/underfrequency protection
f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: Blocking f1 EXT Blocking f2 EXT Blocking f3 EXT Blocking f4 EXT Enabled Ready Not ready Blocked by V< Starting f1 Starting f1/df1 Delta f1 triggered Delta t1 elapsed Trip signal f1 Starting f2 Starting f2/df2 Delta f2 triggered Delta t2 elapsed Trip signal f2 Starting f3 Starting f3/df3 Delta f3 triggered Delta t3 elapsed Trip signal f3 Starting f4 Starting f4/df4 Delta f4 triggered Delta t4 elapsed Trip signal f4
006 075
Fig.* 3-69 Fig.: 3-277
042 103 042 104 042 105 042 106 042 100 042 101 042 140 042 102 042 107 042 108 042 109 042 110 042 111 042 115 042 116 042 117 042 118 042 119 042 123 042 124 042 125 042 126 042 127 042 131 042 132 042 133 042 134 042 135
Fig.: 3-273 Fig.: 3-273 Fig.: 3-273 Fig.: 3-275 Fig.: 3-277 Fig.: 3-277 Fig.: 3-277 Fig.: 3-277 Fig.: 3-277
8-32
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
CBF: Ready CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: Startup 3p Blocking EXT Starting trig. EXT Enable EXT Disable EXT Enabled Not ready Trip signal Starting Ext./user enabled CB failure Start 3p EXT Start A EXT Start B EXT Start C EXT Start enable EXT CB pos. implausible Startup A Startup B Startup C Trip signal t1 Trip signal t1, A Trip signal t1, B Trip signal t1, C Trip signal t2 Trip command t1 Trip command t1, A Trip command t1, B Trip command t1, C Trip command t2 Fault behind CB TripSig CBsync.super CBsync.superv A open CBsync.superv B open CBsync.superv C open Current flow A Current flow B Current flow C Current flow Phx CB faulty EXT
038 009
038 211 038 058 038 016 038 041 038 042 040 055 040 025 040 026 038 021 038 040 036 017 038 205 038 206 038 207 038 208 038 209 038 210 038 212 038 213 038 214 038 215 038 216 038 217 038 218 038 219 038 220 038 221 038 222 038 223 038 224 038 225 038 226 038 227 038 228 038 229 038 230 038 231 038 232 038 233 038 234
Fig.: 3-296 Fig.: 3-293 Fig.: 3-299 Fig.: 3-292 Fig.: 3-292 Fig.: 3-292, 3-293 Fig.: 3-293 Fig.: 3-299 Fig.: 3-299 Fig.: 3-292 Fig.: 3-297 Fig.: 3-296 Fig.: 3-295
Fig.: 3-296 Fig.: 3-296 Fig.: 3-295 Fig.: 3-297 Fig.: 3-297 Fig.: 3-297 Fig.: 3-297 Fig.: 3-297 Fig.: 3-297 Fig.: 3-297 Fig.: 3-298 Fig.: 3-298, 3-299 Fig.: 3-298 Fig.: 3-298 Fig.: 3-298 Fig.: 3-300 Fig.: 3-301 Fig.: 3-301 Fig.: 3-301 Fig.: 3-301 Fig.: 3-294 Fig.: 3-294 Fig.: 3-294 Fig.: 3-294 Fig.: 3-297
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-33

(continued)
Limit value monitoring
LIMIT: Enabled LIMIT: tI> elapsed LIMIT: tI>> elapsed LIMIT: tI< elapsed LIMIT: tI<< elapsed LIMIT: tVPG> elapsed LIMIT: tVPG>> elapsed LIMIT: tVPG< elapsed LIMIT: tVPG<< elapsed LIMIT: tVPP> elapsed LIMIT: tVPP>> elapsed LIMIT: tVPP< elapsed LIMIT: tVPP<< elapsed LIMIT: tVNG> elapsed LIMIT: tVNG>> elapsed LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin> LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>> LIMIT: tIDC,lin> elapsed LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> elapsed LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin< LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<< LIMIT: tIDC,lin< elapsed LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< elapsed LIMIT: Starting T> LIMIT: Starting T>> LIMIT: tT> elapsed LIMIT: tT>> elapsed LIMIT: Starting T< LIMIT: Starting T<< LIMIT: tT< elapsed LIMIT: tT<< elapsed
040 074 040 220 040 221 040 222 040 223 040 224 040 225 040 226 040 227 040 228 040 229 040 230 040 231 040 168 040 169 040 180 040 181 040 182 040 183 040 184 040 185 040 186 040 187 040 170 040 171 040 172 040 173 040 174 040 175 040 176 040 177
Fig.: 3-302 Fig.: 3-302 Fig.: 3-302 Fig.: 3-302 Fig.: 3-302 Fig.: 3-303 Fig.: 3-303 Fig.: 3-303 Fig.: 3-303 Fig.: 3-303 Fig.: 3-303 Fig.: 3-303 Fig.: 3-303 Fig.: 3-304 Fig.: 3-304 Fig.: 3-305 Fig.: 3-305 Fig.: 3-305 Fig.: 3-305 Fig.: 3-305 Fig.: 3-305 Fig.: 3-305 Fig.: 3-305 Fig.: 3-306 Fig.: 3-306 Fig.: 3-306 Fig.: 3-306 Fig.: 3-306 Fig.: 3-306 Fig.: 3-306 Fig.: 3-306
8-34
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Logic
LOGIC: Input 1 EXT LOGIC: Input 2 EXT LOGIC: Input 3 EXT LOGIC: Input 4 EXT LOGIC: Input 5 EXT LOGIC: Input 6 EXT LOGIC: Input 7 EXT LOGIC: Input 8 EXT LOGIC: Input 9 EXT LOGIC: Input 10 EXT LOGIC: Input 11 EXT LOGIC: Input 12 EXT LOGIC: Input 13 EXT LOGIC: Input 14 EXT LOGIC: Input 15 EXT LOGIC: Input 16 EXT LOGIC: Input 17 EXT LOGIC: Input 18 EXT LOGIC: Input 19 EXT LOGIC: Input 20 EXT LOGIC: Input 21 EXT LOGIC: Input 22 EXT LOGIC: Input 23 EXT LOGIC: Input 24 EXT LOGIC: Input 25 EXT LOGIC: Input 26 EXT LOGIC: Input 27 EXT LOGIC: Input 28 EXT LOGIC: Input 29 EXT LOGIC: Input 30 EXT LOGIC: Input 31 EXT LOGIC: Input 32 EXT LOGIC: Input 33 EXT LOGIC: Input 34 EXT LOGIC: Input 35 EXT LOGIC: Input 36 EXT LOGIC: Input 37 EXT LOGIC: Input 38 EXT LOGIC: Input 39 EXT LOGIC: Input 40 EXT LOGIC: Set 1 EXT LOGIC: Set 2 EXT LOGIC: Set 3 EXT LOGIC: Set 4 EXT LOGIC: Set 5 EXT LOGIC: Set 6 EXT LOGIC: Set 7 EXT LOGIC: Set 8 EXT LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT LOGIC: Reset 3 EXT LOGIC: Reset 4 EXT
034 000 034 001 034 002 034 003 034 004 034 005 034 006 034 007 034 008 034 009 034 010 034 011 034 012 034 013 034 014 034 015 034 086 034 087 034 088 034 089 034 090 034 091 034 092 034 093 034 094 034 095 034 096 034 097 034 098 034 099 034 100 034 101 034 102 034 103 034 104 034 105 034 106 034 107 034 108 034 109 034 051 034 052 034 053 034 054 034 055 034 056 034 057 034 058 034 059 034 060 034 061 034 062
Fig.: 3-308
Fig.: 3-308
Fig.: 3-307
Fig.: 3-307
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-35

(continued)
LOGIC: Reset 5 EXT LOGIC: Reset 6 EXT LOGIC: Reset 7 EXT LOGIC: Reset 8 EXT LOGIC: 1 has been set LOGIC: 2 has been set LOGIC: 3 has been set LOGIC: 4 has been set LOGIC: 5 has been set LOGIC: 6 has been set LOGIC: 7 has been set LOGIC: 8 has been set LOGIC: 1 set externally LOGIC: 2 set externally LOGIC: 3 set externally LOGIC: 4 set externally LOGIC: 5 set externally LOGIC: 6 set externally LOGIC: 7 set externally LOGIC: 8 set externally LOGIC: Enabled LOGIC: Output 1 LOGIC: Output 2 LOGIC: Output 3 LOGIC: Output 4 LOGIC: Output 5 LOGIC: Output 6 LOGIC: Output 7 LOGIC: Output 8 LOGIC: Output 9 LOGIC: Output 10 LOGIC: Output 11 LOGIC: Output 12 LOGIC: Output 13 LOGIC: Output 14 LOGIC: Output 15 LOGIC: Output 16 LOGIC: Output 17 LOGIC: Output 18 LOGIC: Output 19 LOGIC: Output 20 LOGIC: Output 21 LOGIC: Output 22 LOGIC: Output 23 LOGIC: Output 24 LOGIC: Output 25 LOGIC: Output 26 LOGIC: Output 27 LOGIC: Output 28 LOGIC: Output 29 LOGIC: Output 30 LOGIC: Output 31 8-36
034 063 034 064 034 065 034 066 034 067 034 068 034 069 034 070 034 071 034 072 034 073 034 074 034 075 034 076 034 077 034 078 034 079 034 080 034 081 034 082 034 046 042 032 042 034 042 036 042 038 042 040 042 042 042 044 042 046 042 048 042 050 042 052 042 054 042 056 042 058 042 060 042 062 042 064 042 066 042 068 042 070 042 072 042 074 042 076 042 078 042 080 042 082 042 084 042 086 042 088 042 090 042 092
Fig.: 3-307
Fig.: 3-307
Fig.: 3-308 Fig.: 3-210, 3-308
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
LOGIC: Output 32 LOGIC: Output 1 (t) LOGIC: Output 2 (t) LOGIC: Output 3 (t) LOGIC: Output 4 (t) LOGIC: Output 5 (t) LOGIC: Output 6 (t) LOGIC: Output 7 (t) LOGIC: Output 8 (t) LOGIC: Output 9 (t) LOGIC: Output 10 (t) LOGIC: Output 11 (t) LOGIC: Output 12 (t) LOGIC: Output 13 (t) LOGIC: Output 14 (t) LOGIC: Output 15 (t) LOGIC: Output 16 (t) LOGIC: Output 17 (t) LOGIC: Output 18 (t) LOGIC: Output 19 (t) LOGIC: Output 20 (t) LOGIC: Output 21 (t) LOGIC: Output 22 (t) LOGIC: Output 23 (t) LOGIC: Output 24 (t) LOGIC: Output 25 (t) LOGIC: Output 26 (t) LOGIC: Output 27 (t) LOGIC: Output 28 (t) LOGIC: Output 29 (t) LOGIC: Output 30 (t) LOGIC: Output 31 (t) LOGIC: Output 32 (t)
042 094 042 033 042 035 042 037 042 039 042 041 042 043 042 045 042 047 042 049 042 051 042 053 042 055 042 057 042 059 042 061 042 063 042 065 042 067 042 069 042 071 042 073 042 075 042 077 042 079 042 081 042 083 042 085 042 087 042 089 042 091 042 093 042 095
Fig.: 3-210, 3-228 Fig.: 3-308
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-37

(continued)
8.1.2 Device Local control panel
Control and Testing

031 080
DVICE: Service info 031 080 LOC: Param. change enabl. Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
003 010
COMM1: Sel.spontan.sig.test Signal selection for testing purposes. COMM1: Test spont.sig.start Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as starting. COMM1: Test spont.sig. end Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as ending.
003 180
Fig.: 3-13
003 184
Fig.: 3-13
003 186
Fig.: 3-13
COMM2: Sel.spontan.sig.test Signal selection for testing purposes. COMM2: Test spont.sig.start Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as starting. COMM2: Test spont.sig. end Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as ending.
103 180
Fig.: 3-15
103 184
Fig.: 3-15
103 186
Fig.: 3-15
COMM3: Rset.No.tlg.err.USER COMM3: Send signal for test COMM3: Log. State for test COMM3: Send signal, test COMM3: Loop back send COMM3: Loop back test COMM3: Hold time for test GSSE: Reset statistics Command to reset monitoring counters as listed below. GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags L
120 037 120 050 120 051 120 053 120 055 120 054 120 052
Page: 3-25 Page: 3-25 Page: 3-25 Page: 3-25 Page: 3-25 Page: 3-25 Page: 3-25
105 171
105 160
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1 to 16). GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags H
105 161
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 17 to 32). GSSE: Tx message counter Shows the number of GSSE messages sent. This counter is reset by GSSE: Reset c ounters. GSSE: Rx message counter
105 163 105 162
Shows the number of GSSE messages received. This counter is reset by GSSE: Reset c ounters.
8-38
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
GSSE: No. bin.state chang.
105 164
Number of state changes included in a GSSE sent. This counter is reset by GSSE: Reset c ounters. GSSE: Tx last sequence State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent with each GSSE. GSSE: Tx last message
105 166 105 165
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each GSSE. GSSE: No. Reject. Messages
105 167
Number of telegram rejections having occurred because of non-plausible message content. This counter is reset by GSSE: Res e t counters . GSSE: IED view selection
105 170
Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is to be displayed. GSSE: IED receiv. Messages Counter of the received GSSE telegrams. GSSE: IED Rx last sequence
105 173 105 172
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received with each GSSE. GSSE: IED Rx last message
105 174
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with each GSSE. GSSE: IED missed messages Number of missing GSSE messages (gaps in the continuous sequence numbering). This counter is reset by G SSE: Reset counters . GSSE: IED missed changes Number of missing state changes (gaps in the continuous sequence numbering). This counter is reset by G SSE: Reset counters . GSSE: IED time-outs
105 177 105 176 105 175
Number of GSSE received after the validity time period has elapsed. This counter is reset by GSSE: Res e t counters . Binary outputs OUTP: Reset latch. USER Reset of latched output relays from the local control panel. OUTP: Relay assign. F.test Selection of an output relay to be tested. OUTP: Relay test The relay selected for testing is triggered for the set time (OU T P : Hol d- t im e for t es t ). This control action is password-protected (see section entitled PasswordProtected Control Operations in Chapter 6). The test can only be carried out when protection is disabled. OUTP: Hold-time for test Setting the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered during functional testing.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613 003 044 003 043 003 042 021 009
Fig.: 3-28
Fig.: 3-29
Fig.: 3-29
Fig.: 3-29
8-39

(continued)
MEASO: Reset output USER Resetting the measured data output function.
037 116
Fig.: 3-32
Main function
MAIN: General reset USER Reset of the following memories:

003 002
Fig.: 3-68
All counters LED indicators Operating data memory All event memories Event counters Fault data Measured Ground Fault Data Measured overload data Recorded fault values
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'PasswordProtected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). MAIN: Reset indicat. USER Reset of the following displays:

021 010
Fig.: 3-68
LED indicators Fault data

021 005
MAIN: Rset.latch.trip USER Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel. MAIN: Reset IP,max,st.USER The display of the stored maximum phase current is reset. MAIN: Reset meas.v.en.USER The display of active and reactive energy output and input is reset. MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER The counters for counting close and trip commands are reset. MAIN: Group reset 1 USER MAIN: Group reset 2 USER Group resetting commands. MAIN: Man.trip cmd.Lx USER
003 033
Fig.: 3-39
003 032
Fig.: 3-51
003 007
Fig.: 3-58, 3-66 Fig.: 3-69 Fig.: 3-69
005 253 005 254
003 040
Fig.: 3-64
A 100 ms trip command is issued from the local control panel. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). Note: The command is only executed if the manual trip command has been configured as trip command 1 or 2.
8-40
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
MAIN: Man.trip cmd.L1 USER MAIN: Man.trip cmd.L2 USER MAIN: Man.trip cmd.L3 USER
003 017 003 018 003 019
Fig.: 3-64 Fig.: 3-64 Fig.: 3-64
A phase-selective trip command is issued from the local control panel for 100 ms. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled 'PasswordProtected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). MAIN: Man. close cmd. USER
018 033
Fig.: 3-58
A close command is issued from the local control panel for the set reclose command time. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). MAIN: Warm restart A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power supply is turned on. MAIN: Cold restart
000 085 003 039
A cold restart is carried out. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). A cold restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. The values with which the device operates after a cold restart are selected so as to block the device after a cold restart. Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset record. USER
100 001
Fig.: 3-74
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset. Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Reset record. USER Reset of the monitoring signal memory. Overload recording OL_RC: Reset record. USER Reset of the overload memory. Fault recording FT_RC: Trigger USER Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms. FT_RC: Reset record. USER Reset of the following memories:

003 006 003 041 100 003 003 008
Fig.: 3-75
Fig.: 3-78
Fig.: 3-86
Fig.: 3-87
LED indicators Fault memory Fault counter Fault data Recorded fault values
006 029
Power Swing Blocking
PSB: Reset counters Reset of the counters that are used for the enhanced counting-based tripping.
Page: 3-211
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-41

(continued)
Protective signaling
PSIG: Enable USER Protective signaling is enabled from the local control panel. PSIG: Disable USER Protective signaling is disabled from the local control panel. PSIG: Test telecom. USER A send signal is issued for 500 ms. PSIG: Test telecom. 1 USER PSIG: Test telecom. 2 USER PSIG: Test telecom. 3 USER A channel-selective send signal is issued for 500 ms.
003 132
Fig.: 3-148
003 131
Fig.: 3-148
015 009
Fig.: 3-175
015 027 015 028 015 029
Fig.: 3-175 Fig.: 3-175 Fig.: 3-175
ARC: Enable USER ARC: Disable USER ARC: Test HSR A-B-C USER A three-pole test HSR is triggered. ARC: Test-HSR A USER A test HSR is triggered in phase A. ARC: Test-HSR B USER A test HSR is triggered in phase B. ARC: Reset counters USER The ARC counters are reset. ARC: Test-HSR C USER A single pole test HSR is triggered with phase selectivity.
003 134
Fig.: 3-178
The auto-reclosing control function is enabled from the local control panel.
003 133
Fig.: 3-178
The auto-reclosing control function is disabled from the local control panel.
011 066
Fig.: 3-187
011 063
Fig.: 3-187
011 064
Fig.: 3-187
003 005
Fig.: 3-196
011 065
Fig.: 3-187
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Enable USER Automatic synchronism check is enabled from the local control panel. ASC: Disable USER Automatic synchronism check is disabled from the local control panel. ASC: Close request USER
003 136
Fig.: 3-198
003 135
Fig.: 3-198
018 004
Fig.: 3-200
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will trigger the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the CB if the check of the ASC is positive. This control action is password-protected (see section entitled PasswordProtected Control Operations in Chapter 6). ASC: Reset counters USER The ASC counters are reset. ASC: Test close requ USER
018 005 003 089
Fig.: 3-208
Fig.: 3-200
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will trigger the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to the CB if the check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
8-42
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection
GFSC: Enable USER
003 138
Fig.: 3-209
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is enabled from the local control panel. GFSC: Disable USER Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is disabled from the local control panel. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling GSCSG: Enable USER Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is enabled from the local control panel. GSCSG: Disable USER Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is disabled from the local control panel. GSCSG: Test telecom. USER A send signal is issued for 500 ms. Thermal overload protection THERM: Reset replica USER
022 061 023 086 003 139 003 140 003 137
Fig.: 3-209
Fig.: 3-227
Fig.: 3-227
Fig.: 3-237
Fig.: 3-263
Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function. Over-/underfrequency protection f<>: Reset meas.val. USER Resetting the measured event values f<> : m a x. fre qu . F or f> and f < > : m in . f r e qu . F or f<. Circuit Breaker Failure Protection CBF: Enable USER Circuit breaker failure protection is enabled from the local control panel. CBF: Disable USER Circuit breaker failure protection is disabled from the local control panel. Logic LOGIC: Trigger 1 LOGIC: Trigger 2 LOGIC: Trigger 3 LOGIC: Trigger 4 LOGIC: Trigger 5 LOGIC: Trigger 6 LOGIC: Trigger 7 LOGIC: Trigger 8 Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point of a 100 ms pulse.
034 038 034 039 034 040 034 041 034 042 034 043 034 044 034 045 003 015 003 016 003 080
Fig.: 3-292
Fig.: 3-292
Fig.: 3-308
Fig.: 3-308
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-43

(continued)
8.1.3 Operating data recording
Operating Data Recording

003 024
OP_RC: Operat. data record. Point of entry into the operating data log.
Fig.: 3-74
Monitoring signal recording
MT_RC: Mon. signal record. Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
003 001
Fig.: 3-75
8-44
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
8.2 8.2.1 Communication interface 3 Main function
Events Event Counters

120 042
COMM3: No. telegram errors MAIN: No. General start. Number of general starting signals. MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 1 Number of general trip commands 1. MAIN: No. trip cmds. 1, A MAIN: No. trip cmds. 1, B MAIN: No. trip cmds. 1, C Number of general trip commands 1 per phase. MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 2 Number of general trip commands 2. MAIN: No. final trip cmds. Number of final trip commands. MAIN: No. Close commands Number of close commands. MAIN: No.overfl.act.en.out
Page: 3-25 Fig.: 3-59
004 000
004 006
Fig.: 3-66
005 006 005 007 005 008
Fig.: 3-66 Fig.: 3-66 Fig.: 3-66
009 050
Fig.: 3-66
004 005
Fig.: 3-66
009 055
Fig.: 3-58
009 090
Fig.: 3-51
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy output was exceeded. MAIN: No.overfl.act.en.inp
009 091
Fig.: 3-51
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy input was exceeded. MAIN: No.ov/fl.reac.en.out
009 092
Fig.: 3-51
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy output was exceeded. MAIN: No.ov/fl.reac.en.inp
009 093
Fig.: 3-51
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy input was exceeded. Operating data recording OP_RC: No. oper. Data sig. Number of signals stored in the operating data memory. Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: No. monit. Signals Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory. Overload recording OL_RC: No. Overload Number of overload events. Fault recording FT_RC: No. of faults Number of faults. FT_RC: No. System disturb. Number of system disturbances.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613 004 010 004 020 004 101 004 019 100 002
Fig.: 3-74
Fig.: 3-75
Fig.: 3-77
Fig.: 3-86
Fig.: 3-86
8-45

(continued)
Power Swing Blocking
PSB: No. stab. PSwing Number of stable power swing trajectories. PSB: No. OOS-Swing Number of instable power swing trajectories.
006 025
Page 3-208
006 026
Page 3-208
ARC: No. of HSR A Number of high-speed reclosures in phase A. ARC: No. of HSR B Number of high-speed reclosures in phase B. ARC: No. of HSR C Number of high-speed reclosures in phase C. ARC: No. of HSR A-B-C Number of three-pole high-speed reclosures. ARC: Number TDR Number of time-delay reclosures.
004 001
Fig.: 3-196
004 002
Fig.: 3-196
004 003
Fig.: 3-196
004 004
Fig.: 3-196
004 008
Fig.: 3-196
Automatic synchronism check ASC: No. RC aft. Man.clos Number of reclosures after a manual close request. ASC: No. Close requests Number of close requests. ASC: No. Close rejections Number of close rejections. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection GFSC: No. of trip signals Number of trip signals.
004 009
Fig.: 3-208
009 033
Fig.: 3-208
009 034
Fig.: 3-208
009 054
Fig.: 3-225
8-46
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
8.2.2 Overload data acquisition
Measured Event Data

004 102
OL_DA: Overload duration Duration of the overload event.
Fig.: 3-76
Fault data acquisition
FT_DA: Fault duration Display of the fault duration. FT_DA: Running time Display of the running time. FT_DA: Meas. Loop selected Display of the measuring loop selected for determination of fault data. FT_DA: Fault current P p.u. Display of phase current A referred to Inom. FT_DA: Flt.volt. PG/PP p.u. Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to Vnom . FT_DA: Fault loop angle P Display of the fault angle. FT_DA: Fault curr. N p.u. Display of the ground fault current referred to IN,nom. FT_DA : Fault curr.N,par p.u FT_DA: Fault loop angle N Display of the ground fault angle. FT_DA: Fault react., prim. Display of the fault reactance as a primary quantity. FT_DA: Fault reactance,sec. Display of the fault reactance as a secondary quantity. FT_DA: Fault impedance, sec Display of the fault impedance as a secondary quantity. FT_DA : Fault locat. Percent Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %) referred to the setting F T_D A: L ine r eac tance PSx. FT_DA: Fault location Display of the fault location of the last fault in km. FT_DA: Load imped.post-flt.
008 010
Fig.: 3-79
004 021
Fig.: 3-79
004 079
Fig.: 3-83
004 025
Fig.: 3-83
004 026
Fig.: 3-83
004 024
Fig.: 3-83
004 049
Fig.: 3-83
004 059
Fig.: 3-83
Display of the ground fault current of the parallel line referred to IN,par,nom.
004 048
Fig.: 3-83
004 029
Fig.: 3-83
004 028
Fig.: 3-83
004 023
Fig.: 3-83
004 027
Fig.: 3-84
004 022
Fig.: 3-84
004 037
Fig.: 3-85
Display of the load impedance (in ) after the general starting condition of distance protection has ended. The display only appears if the fault has been detected by the fault data acquisition function of the P437. FT_DA: Load angle post-flt.
004 038
Fig.: 3-85
Display of the load angle (in degrees) after the general starting condition of time-overcurrent protection has ended. The display only appears if the fault has been detected by the fault data acquisition function of the P437.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-47

(continued)
FT_DA: Resid.curr. post-flt
004 039
Fig.: 3-85
Display of the residual current of the last fault referred to Inom. The display only appears if the fault has been detected by the fault data acquisition function of the P437. Automatic synchronism check ASC: Voltage Vref ASC: Volt. sel. meas.loop ASC: Volt. magn. diff.
004 087 004 088 004 091
Fig.: 3-197 Fig.: 3-197 Fig.: 3-205, 3-206
Display of the difference between amplitudes of the measurement loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request, referred to Vnom. The display only appears if ASC is operating. ASC: Angle difference
004 089
Fig.: 3-205, 3-206
Display of the difference between angles (in degrees) of the measurement loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request. The display only appears if ASC is operating. ASC: Frequ. difference
004 090
Fig.: 3-205, 3-206
Display of the difference between frequencies (in Hz) of the measurement loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request. The display only appears if ASC is operating. Ground fault (short-circuit) protection GFSC: Angle VNG/IN
009 098
Fig.: 3-224
Angle between residual current and neutral-displacement voltage when triggers IN> and VNG> are both operating. This display only appears when the ground fault (short-circuit) protection function is active. Definite-time overcurrent protection DTOC: Angle VNG/IN Angle between the residual current and the neutral-point displacement voltage Over-/underfrequency protection f<>: Max. frequ. for f> Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition. f<>: Min. frequ. for f< Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.
005 001 005 002 009 004
Fig.: 3-244
Page: 3-399
Page: 3-399
8-48
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
8.2.3 Overload recording
Event Recording
033 020 033 021 033 022 033 023 033 024 033 025 033 026 033 027
OL_RC: Overload recording 1 OL_RC: Overload recording 2 OL_RC: Overload recording 3 OL_RC: Overload recording 4 OL_RC: Overload recording 5 OL_RC: Overload recording 6 OL_RC: Overload recording 7 OL_RC: Overload recording 8 Point of entry into the overload log.
Fault recording
FT_RC: Fault recording 1 FT_RC: Fault recording 2 FT_RC: Fault recording 3 FT_RC: Fault recording 4 FT_RC: Fault recording 5 FT_RC: Fault recording 6 FT_RC: Fault recording 7 FT_RC: Fault recording 8 Point of entry into the fault log.
003 000 033 001 033 002 033 003 033 004 033 005 033 006 033 007
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
8-49
8-50
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
9 9.1
Commissioning Safety Instructions
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this manual, may work on or operate this device. When installing and connecting the device the warning notices at the beginning of chapter 5 must be observed. The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required. In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is required for proper operation of the unit. The cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm2 is required. Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is connected, always disconnect the device from the supply. The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation. In units with pin terminal connection, the threaded terminal block for connection to the current transformers is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals. The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock. The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected at the same time. (The selection for IEC : Eth e r n e t M e d i a should be noted.) The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage for the device is shut off. The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently, the female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore, when connecting the prescribed connecting cable be careful not to touch the socket contacts.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-1
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance with the maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see chapter entitled 'Technical Data'). When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must carry out a functional type test to conform to the requirements of the relevant protection/control application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device startup, during operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
9-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
9.2 Preparation
Commissioning Tests
After the P437 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, the commissioning procedure can begin. Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked again:

Is the protection device connected to the protective ground at the specified location? Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary voltage of the protection device? Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated. The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied. Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on. After voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various startup tests are carried out (see section entitled Self-Monitoring in Chapter 3). The LED indicators for Operation (H1) and Blocked/Faulty (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s, the P437 is ready for operation. By default (factory setting) or after a cold restart, the device type P437 and the time are displayed on the first line of the LCD after the device has started up. Once the change enabling command has been issued (see section entitled ChangeEnabling Function in Chapter 6), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings from the integrated local control panel is described in Chapter 6.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-3
9 Commissioning
(continued)
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting the P437 and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be made from the integrated local control panel.
Par/DvID/ folder:

DVICE: Device password 1 DVICE: Device password 2
Par/Conf/ folder:

PC: Name of manufacturer PC: Bay address PC: Device address PC: Baud rate PC: Parity bit COMM1: Function group COMM1 COMM1: General enable USER COMM1: Name of manufacturer COMM1: Line idle state COMM1: Baud rate COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Communicat. protocol COMM1: Octet comm. address COMM1: Octet address ASDU COMM2: Function group COMM2 COMM2: General enable USER COMM2: Name of manufacturer COMM2: Line idle state COMM2: Baud rate COMM2: Parity bit COMM2: Octet comm. address COMM2: Octet address ASDU COMM3: Function group COMM3 COMM3: General enable USER COMM3: Baud rate PC: Command blocking PC: Sig./meas.val.block. COMM1: Command block. USER C O M M 1 : S i g . / m e a s . b l o c k .U S E R COMM2: Command block. USER C O M M 2 : S i g . / m e a s . b l o c k .U S E R
Par/Func/Glob/ folder:

9-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Further instructions on these settings and control functions are given in Chapters 7 and 8. Note: The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol. If another protocol is being used for the communication interface, additional settings may be necessary. See Chapter 7 for further details.
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out again before the blocking is canceled:
Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the terminal connection diagram? Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs? Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal connection diagram? Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays? Have all settings been made correctly?
Now blocking can be cleared as follows (Par/Func/Glob/ folder):
MAIN: Protection enabled
"yes (on)"
Tests By using the signals and displays generated by the P437, it is possible to determine whether the P437 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the station. Signals are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into the event memory. In addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the appropriate signal in the menu tree. If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during testing, the trip commands can be blocked through M AIN : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U SER (Par/Func/Glob folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. If circuit breaker testing is desired, it is possible to issue a three-pole trip command for 100 ms through M AIN : M a n . tr i p c m d . U S E R (Oper/CtrlTest folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. Moreover it is possible to issue phase-selective trip commands via the local control panel or appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Selection of the trip command from the integrated local control panel is password-protected (see section entitled PasswordProtected Control Operations in Chapter 6). Note: The three-pole manual trip command is only executed if it has been configured for trip command 1 or 2.
If the P437 is connected at substation control level, the user is advised to activate the test mode via M AIN : T e s t m o d e U S E R (folder Par/Func/Glob) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. The telegrams are then identified accordingly (reason for transmission: test mode).
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-5
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the binary signal inputs By selecting the corresponding state signal (Oper/Cycl/Phys folder), it is possible to determine whether the signal that is present is recognized correctly by the protection device. The values displayed have the following meanings:

"Low": Not energized. "High": Energized. "Without function": No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected. Checking the output relays It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time setting at O U T P : H o l d - t i m e f o r t e s t in Oper/CtrlTest/ folder). First select the output relay to be tested (O U T P: R e l a y a s s i g n . f. te s t, Oper/CtrlTest/ folder). Test triggering then occurs via O U T P: R e l a y te s t (Oper/CtrlTest/ folder). It is password-protected (see section entitled Password-Protected Control Operations in Chapter 6). Note: Checking the output relays is possible only if the has been switched to "no (= off)" beforehand via M AIN : Pr o te c ti o n e n a b l e d (Par/Func/Glob/ folder).
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no inadvertent switching operations will take place. Checking the communications interfaces signals When using the IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101 or ILS-C interface protocols, each signal generated in the P437 can be transmitted to the connected control station for test purposes. First select the signal to be tested (C O M M x: Se l .s p o n t a n . s i g . t e s t, Oper/CtrlTest/ folder). The respective signal is transmitted according to C O M M x : T e s t s p o n t . s i g . s t a r t or C O M M x : T e s t s p o n t . s i g . e n d (Oper/CtrlTest/ folder). Signal generation is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). Checking the protection function Four parameter subsets are stored in the P437, one of which is activated. Before checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter subset is activated. The active parameter subset is displayed at P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t (Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder).
9-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking distance protection Before checking the distance protection function using a single-phase testing device, deactivate the measuring circuit monitoring function (M C M O N : E n a b l e d U S E R , Par/Func/Main/ folder) and the fuse failure monitoring function (M C M O N : F F ,V e n a b l e d U S E R , Par/Func/Main/ folder) since they would otherwise always operate and block distance protection after the set operate delay had elapsed. Furthermore, the signal at the binary signal input configured for M AIN : M .c .b . tr i p V EXT must have a logic value of 0. Checking starting The starting settings can be illustrated in a V-I diagram (see Figure 9-1 Example of the starting settings in a V-I diagram). The slope of the impedance line plotted in the V-I diagram is a function of the settings for underimpedance starting and the phase displacement between the measured variables (see Figure 9-2 Characteristic of underimpedance starting).
9-1
Example of the starting settings in a V-I diagram
Checking I> (Imin), V< and I>>: The phase displacement between the measured variables V and I should be selected so as to be smaller than the angle set at D IST : PSx. Checking Z<: The phase displacement between the measured variables V and I should be selected so as to be greater than the angle set at D IST : PSx. Note: The measured variables should be selected in accordance with the selected operate values such that only one starting measuring system operates. Operation of the checked starting threshold is possible by checking the phase-selective and starting-selective state signals ('Oper/Cycl/Log' folder). 9-7
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
9-2
Characteristic of underimpedance starting
When checking underimpedance starting using single-phase test current, we obtain the following relation for the operate condition for phase-to-phase starting:
V test = 2 Z< I test

V test e jtest I test e j0 = 2 Z < e jZ
For absolute value and angle this means:

V test I test = 2 Z<
test = Z
9-8
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
where:
Z<:
Starting Impedance Impedance Angle Test Voltage Test Current Phase angle between test voltage and test current
Z :
Vtest:
I test :
test:
In the range of the reactance limit, that is, for impedance angle Z in the range L < z < 110, the starting impedance is calculated as follows:
Z< = Xv sin Z
Xfw:
D I S T : X f w P S x setting
The limit angle L is defined by the point of intersection of reactance and resistance limits and is calculated as follows:
L = arc tan
Rfw :
X fw Rfw
D I S T : R f w , P G P S x or D I S T : R f w , P P P S x setting
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-9
9 Commissioning
(continued)
If underimpedance starting is to be checked under all angle conditions, then the starting impedances for the individual angle ranges are calculated according to the following formulas: Angle Range Starting Impedance
Z< = Z< = Z< = Rfw cos Z Rfw Z bw cos Z Z fw X fw Z bw sin Z Z fw
Z L
(180 + ) Z (180 + L ) (180 + L ) < Z 290
:
Zbw : Zfw
D IST : PSx setting D I S T : Z b w / Z f w P S x setting
When phase-to-ground starting conditions are checked, the D IST : Z e va l u a ti o n PSx setting must be taken into account. If ZPG=VPG / 2*/P is set, then the equations given for phase-to-phase starting apply. If, on the other hand, ZPG=VPG /(/P + kG*IN) is set, then the set complex ground factor kG must be taken into account if the setting for D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x is not equal to one and/or the setting for D IST : An g l e k G PSx is not equal to 0. When the test is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the operate condition is obtained:
V test I test
= (1 + k G ) Z <
V test e j test I test e

j 0
= 1 + k G e j G Z < e j Z
V test I test
= 1 + k G
+ 2 k G cos G Z<
test = arctan
or
cos Z + k G cos ( Z + G )
sin Z + k G sin( Z + G )
Z = arctan
cos test + k G cos ( test G )
sin test + k G sin( test G )
9-10
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
where:
Z<:
Starting Impedance Impedance Angle D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x setting D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x setting Test Voltage Test Current Phase angle between test voltage and test current
Z :
kG :
G :
Vtest:
I test :
test :
From the input measured variables, the P437 calculates the residual current IN and the neutral-displacement voltage VNG, which are used for zero-sequence starting. They are calculated according to the following formulas:
I N = I A + I B + IC
V NG =
1 V A G + V B G + V C G 3
For a single-phase test where |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0, the result of the calculation formula for VNG given above is that the D IST : VN G > PSx or D I S T : V N G > > P S x triggers operate if the test voltage exceeds the following value:
V V test = 3 VNG > nom 3
VNG>:
D I S T : V N G > P S x or D I S T : V N G > > P S x setting
For a single-phase test where |IB| = |IC| = 0, the following applies to currents:
I test = IN > Inom
IN>:
D I S T : I N > P S x setting
Operation of ground starting is only signaled by the LED indicator if starting also operates in a phase. The operation of ground starting can be observed, independently of the operation of phase starting, at D IST : Z e r o - s e q u . s t a r t i n g (Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder). The values determined by the for the residual current IN and the neutral-point displacement voltage VNG are displayed by the operating data display (current: M A I N : C u r r e n t I N p . u . and voltage: M AIN : Vo l t a g e V N G p . u . in the Oper/Cycl/Meas/ folder).
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-11
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking distance and directional measurement

When checking the impedance zones using single-phase test current we obtain the following relation for the operate condition for a phase-to-phase loop:
V test I test = 2 Z<

j 0
= 2 Z < e j Z
V test I test
= 2 Z<
test = Z
where:
Z<:
Tripping impedance Impedance Angle Test Voltage Test Current Phase angle between test voltage and test current
Z :
Vtest:
I test :
test :
Characteristics
With the P437, the user may choose between a polygonal and a circular tripping characteristic. This selection of the tripping characteristic will then govern calculation of the tripping impedances.
Circle characteristic
If the circle characteristic has been selected, the tripping impedance is set in the P437. If the setting Arc compensation: yes has also been selected, then the characteristic Impedance characteristic for distance and directional shown in Figure 9-3 determination for the Circle setting is obtained when measuring with sinusoidal quantities.
9-12
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
9-3 Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the Circle setting
The actual tripping impedance in the ranges 45 < Z < and 135 < Z < ( + 180 ) is then calculated as follows:
Z trip = Z (1 + sin )
The following relation applies in the range 45 < Z < : = Z The following relation applies in the range 135 < Z < ( + 180 ) : = Z + 180 where:
Z trip :
Z:
Actual tripping impedance settings D IST : Z 1 ( c i r c l e ) PSx to D IST : Z 4 ( c i r c l e ) P S x Impedance Angle settings D IST : 1 ( c i r c l e ) P S x to D IST : 4 ( c i r c l e ) P S x
Z :
:
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-13
9 Commissioning
(continued)
When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG must be taken into account if the setting for D IST : Ab s . va l u e k G PSx is not equal to one and/or the setting for D IST : An g l e k G PSx is not equal to 0. When the test is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the operate condition is obtained:
V test I test = 1 + kG Z<
V test e j test I test e j 0
= 1 + k G e j G Z < e j Z

V test I test = 1 + k G
2
+ 2 k G cosG Z <
test = arctan
or
Z = arctan
where:
Z<:
Tripping impedance Impedance Angle D I S T : A b s . v a l u e k G P S x setting D I S T : A n g l e k G P S x setting Test Voltage Test Current Phase angle between test voltage and test current
Z :
kG :
G:
Vtest:
I test :
test :
9-14
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping impedance in all fault cases.
Ztrip = kze Z1
where:
Ztrip: kze:
Actual tripping impedance Setting or Setting D I S T : k z e , P G H S R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P H S R P S x D I S T : k z e , P G T D R P S x or D I S T : k z e , P P T D R P S x DIST: Z1 (circle) PSx
Z1:
Whether zone extension factors kze HSR are active or not is controlled by the following protective functions:

Switch on to fault protection An appropriately configured signal input. Protective signaling.
If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to zone extension factor kze TDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing function. Regardless of the readiness of protective signaling, zone extension factor kze HSR may be activated during the reclose command if set accordingly.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-15
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Polygon (quadrilateral) characteristic

The tripping impedance is calculated in the range of the reactance limits (for impedance angle Z this means in the range L < Z < 90) as follows:
Z< = X sin Z
X:
Setting to
DIST: X1 (polygon) DIST: X6 (polygon)
PSx PSx
The limit angle L is defined by the point of intersection of reactance and resistance limits and is calculated as follows:
L = arc tan
X R+ X tan
R:
Setting to or to
DIST: R1,PG (polygon) PSx DIST: R6,PG (polygon) PSx DIST: R1,PP (polygon) PSx DIST: R6,PP (polygon) PSx D IST : 1 ( p o l y g o n ) D IST : 6 ( p o l y g o n ) PSx PSx
Setting to
9-4
Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the Polygon setting
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-16
9 Commissioning
(continued)
In the range of the resistance limits (for impedance angles this means in the range of 0 < Z < L), the tripping impedance is calculated according to the following formula:
Z< =
R cos Z sin Z tan
When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG must be taken into account if the setting for DIST: Abs . value k G PSx is not equal to one and/or the setting for DIST: Angle k G PSx is not equal to 0. When the test is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the operate condition is obtained:
V test I test = 1 + kG Z<

j 0
= 1 + k G e j G Z < e j Z
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-17
9 Commissioning
(continued)

V test I test = 1 + k G
2
+ 2 k G cosG Z <
test = arctan
or
Z = arctan
where:
Z<:
Tripping impedance Impedance Angle DIST: Abs . value k G PSx setting DIST: Angle k G PSx setting Test Voltage Test Current Phase angle between test voltage and test current
Z :
kG :
G:
Vtest:
I test :
test :
In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping impedance in all fault cases. Rtrip = kze R1 Xtrip = kze X1 where: Rtrip: Xtrip: kze: Actual tripping resistance Actual tripping reactance Setting or Setting Setting DIST: kze,PG HSR PSx or DIST: kze,PG HSR PSx DIST: k z e,PG TDR PSx or DIST: k z e,PP TDR PSx DIST: R1,PG (polygon) PSx DIST: R1,PP (polygon) PSx DIST: X1 (polygon) PSx or
R1: X1:
9-18
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Whether the zone extension factors kze HSR are active or not is controlled by the following protective functions:

Switch on to fault protection An appropriately configured binary signal input. Protective signaling.
If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to the zone extension factor kze TDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing function. Regardless of the readiness of protective signaling, the zone extension factor kze HSR may be activated during the reclose command if set accordingly. Checking the voltage memory The voltage stored by the voltage memory is used in certain cases for direction determination. If the voltage memory is to be tested using a single-phase test device, checking should only be done for an A-B fault. The voltage memory is cleared, if the following two conditions are fulfilled:
Voltage is greater than the threshold set at DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx. The frequency is in the range 0.95 f nom < f < 105 . f nom .
With the starting signal, the voltage memory is decoupled from the synchronizing voltage (VA-B), and the stored voltage can be used for directional measurement for 2 s maximum. The determines, on the basis of the magnitude of the fault voltage, whether the direction will be determined using the fault voltage, the stored voltage, or the set angle (DIST: n (polygon) PSx, n: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6). The following possibilities exist:
Angle for Direction Determination with:
V memory Enabled Not enabled X: F:
0.002 Vnom < Vmeas < DIST: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx X F
Vmeas < 0.002 Vnom X
Angle determined using the stored voltage Angle determined using the selected measured variables
V meas : Selected measuring voltage
The method for determining X is described in the section entitled Distance and Directional Measurement in Chapter 3.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-19
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The user can check to make sure connection to the systems current and voltage transformers involves the correct phase by consulting the operating data displays for load angle (MAIN: Load angle phi A, MAIN: Load angle phi B, and MAIN: Load angle phi C in the Oper/Cycl/Meas/ folder). The load angles for all three phases must be approximately equal. The load angles are only determined if at least 5% of the nominal device current is flowing. Checking measuring-circuit monitoring Both the current- and voltage-measuring circuits are monitored. Operation of the monitoring functions can be observed by selecting the logic state signals MCMON: Meas. circ. V,I faulty (Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder ) or MCMON: M. c ir c . V,Vref flty. (Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder). The monitoring signals can also be entered into the monitoring signal memory and identified by reading out the monitoring signal memory. Current-measuring circuits Monitoring of current-measuring circuits functions only if 0.125 Inom flows in at least one phase. The P437 determines the absolute value of the negative-sequence component, from the three phase currents; the negative-sequence component is calculated according to the following formula: Phase sequence A-B-C: 1 I neg = I A + a2 I B + a IC 3
I neg
Phase sequence A-C-B: 1 = I A + a I B + a 2 IC 3
a = e j 120
a 2 = e j 240
The operate condition for the current measuring circuits is:

I neg (Ineg > ) I P,max
with Ineg >: MCMON: Ineg > setting With a single-phase test current we obtain:
I neg = 1 I 3 test
I P,max = I test
For the operate condition that means:
1 I ( I neg > ) I test 3 test

0.333 (Ineg >) Therefore operation of the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits with singlephase test current is only possible if the threshold operate value is set at less than 0.333. 9-20
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
For two-phase test current in phase opposition we obtain:

I neg = 1 1 I + a2 ( I test ) = I test 3 test 3
IP,max = Itest For the operate condition that means:

1 3 I test ( Ineg >) I test
0.577 (Ineg> ) Therefore operation of the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits with a twophase test current in phase opposition is only possible if the threshold operate value is set at less than 0.577. If the threshold operate value satisfies the respective condition, then the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits operates with a test current greater than 0.125 Inom after the set operate delay of + 300 s has elapsed. Voltage-measuring circuits Negative-sequence monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuits is enabled if at least one phase-to-ground voltage exceeds the value 0.7 Vnom/3. Other enabling criteria that can be activated if desired are the following (selection of enabling criteria at MCMON: Op. mode volt. mon. in the Par/Func/Main/ folder):

One of the phase currents must exceed 0.05 Inom. The signal at the binary signal input configured for MAIN: CB c los ed s ig. EXT must have a logic value of 1.
If negative-sequence monitoring has been enabled, the P437 determines the absolute value of negative-sequence voltage according to the following formula: Phase sequence A-B-C:
V neg =
1 1V A G + a 2 1V B G + a 1V C G 3 1 1V A G + a 1V B G + a 2 1V C G 3
0
( (
) )
Phase sequence A-C-B:
V neg =
a = e j 120 0 a 2 = e j 240
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-21
9 Commissioning
(continued)
The trigger threshold of Vneg is set permanently at 0.2 Vnom/3. The result of a singlephase test using |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0 and also of the calculation formula for Vneg given above is that the trigger operates when the test voltage exceeds the following value:
V test 3 0.2 Vnom 3
A trip signal is issued once the set operate delay has elapsed. Checking backup overcurrent-time protection The switch to backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) provided it has been appropriately set is brought about by the measuring-circuit monitoring function or the tripping of the voltage transformer miniature circuit breaker on the line side. If the current exceeds the set operate value (BUOC: I> PSx), then starting occurs in the corresponding phase(s). After the set time delay (BUOC: tI> PSx ) has elapsed, the P437 trips. If MAIN : N eutr al point tr eat is set to Low-impedance-grounding, then SN starting occurs if the residual current IN calculated by the exceeds the operate value set at BU OC : IN > PSx. After the set time delay has elapsed (BUOC: tIN> PSx) , the trips. When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the BUOC function is blocked. If the BUOC is set to activate the ARC, then timer stages BUOC: tI> PSx and BUOC: tIN> PSx are blocked when the ARC is ready. The trip signal is then issued instantaneously for phase starting or with an 80 s delay for zero-sequence starting. Timer stage tIN> is also blocked by phase starting or while the ARC hold time is elapsing. The P437 calculates the resultant current IN according to the following formula:
I N = I A + I B + IC
In the case of a single-phase test (for example, IB = IC = 0), the following test current is obtained:
B
I test = IN > Inom
at which the operate value (BUOC: IN> PSx) is reached.
9-22
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking protective signaling The protective signaling function can only be checked if protective signaling is ready. This can be determined by checking logic state signal PSIG: R eady (Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder). If protective signaling is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
Protective signaling is not enabled. (This can be determined by checking PSIG: E nabled in the Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder.) This may be due to the following reasons:

PSIG: Enabled USER (Par/Func/Log/ folder) is set to No. PSIG: Enable PSx ( in one of the Par/Func/PSx/ folders, depending on the parameter subset) is set to No. Protective signaling has been disabled via an appropriately configured signal input (PSIG: Dis able EXT). (This can be determined by checking logic state signal PSIG: Ext. enabled in the Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder.)
Protective signaling is being blocked by triggering a correspondingly configured binary signal input (PSIG: Bloc k ing EXT ). A fault has been detected in the communications channel. (This can be determined by checking logic state signal PSIG: Telec om. faulty in the Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder.)
If the conditions for testing are satisfied, it is possible to generate a send signal for test purposes from the integrated local control panel (PSIG: Tes t telec om. USER in the Oper/CtrlTest/ folder) or by triggering an appropriately configured binary signal input. This pulse will be present for 500 ms and is extended for the set reset time. If the with echo setting has been selected in the protection device at the remote station, then the received signal will be returned.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-23
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the autoreclosing function The auto-reclosing function (ARC) can only be checked if it is ready. This may be determined by checking logic state signal ARC: R eady (Oper/Cycl/Log/). If the ARC function is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
The ARC function is not enabled. (This can be determined by checking logic state signal AR C : Enabled, ( Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder)). This can have the following causes:

ARC: Enabled USER ('Par/Func/Log' folder) is set to No. ARC: Enable PSx ( in one of the Par/Func/PSx/ folders, depending on the parameter subset) is set to No. The ARC function has been disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal input AR C : D is able EXT . (This can be determined by checking logic state signal AR C : Ext. enabled , Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder)
The ARC function is blocked by Switch On To Fault protection, backup DTOC protection, Ground Fault protection, Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection Signaling, a manual trip command or via an appropriately configured signal input (ARC: Bloc k ing EXT). (This can be determined by checking logic state signal ARC: Enabled , Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder). There is no signal with a logic value of 1 at the binary signal input configured for ARC: CB drive ready EXT . There is no signal with a logic value of 1 at the binary signal input configured for MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT . The circuit breaker position signal is only necessary if the setting at AR C : C B c los . pos . s ig. PSx is 'Yes'. An ARC cycle is in progress. (This can be determined by checking logic state signal ARC: Cycle running in the Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder.) An ASC cycle is in progress. (This can be determined by checking logic state signal ASC: Cycle running , Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder).
A test HSR can be executed for testing purposes from the integrated local control panel or by triggering binary signal inputs. The test HSR function first issues a trip command and then issues a reclose command after the set dead time has elapsed.
9-24
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the automatic synchronism check The automatic synchronism check can only take place if it is ready. This can be determined by checking logic state signal ASC: R eady. The possible reasons for the ASC function not being ready are as follows:
The ASC function is not enabled. (This can be determined by checking logic state signal ASC: Enabled , ( Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder)). This can have the following causes:

ASC: Enabled USER (Par/Func/Main/ folder) has been set to No. ASC: Enable PSx (Par/Oper/PSx/ folder, depending on the parameter subset) has been set to No. The ASC function has been disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal input (ASC: Dis able EXT). (This can be determined by checking logic state signal ASC : Ext. enabled , Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder.)
A logic 1 signal is present at the binary signal inputs configured for MAIN: M.c .b. tr ip V EXT or MAIN: M.c.b. trip Vref EXT. The ASC function will be blocked by triggering the binary signal input configured for ASC: Bloc k ing EXT.
The setting determines whether a close enable may be carried out in case of blocking. For test purposes, a close request can be generated for 500 ms via the integrated local control panel ASC: Tes t c los e r equ USER (Oper/CtrlTest/ folder) or by triggering an appropriately configured binary signal input (ASC: Tes t c los e r equ. EXT). The check can only be carried out if there is no ARC cycle running. The P437 checks whether enabling is permitted or not according to the set conditions. If a positive decision is reached, then there is an ASC : C los e enable signal. No (re-)close command takes place! If the check determines that enabling is not permitted, the signal ASC: Close rejection is issued.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-25
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the ground fault (short-circuit) protection function The automatic synchronism check function (ASC) can only be checked if it is ready. It can be interrogated via the logic state signal GFSC: R eady ( Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder). If the ground fault short-circuit protection is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
The ASC function is not activated. (This can be determined by checking logic state signal GFSC: Enabled, Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder). This may be due to the following reasons:

GFSC: Enabled USER (Par/Func/Main/ folder) has been set to No. GFSC: Enable PSx (Par/Func/Glob/ folder, depending on the parameter subset) has been set to No. The ground fault short-circuit protection has been disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal input (GFSC: Dis able EXT ). (This can be determined by checking logic state signal GFSC : Ext. enabled , Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder).
On the binary signal input configured to MAIN: M.c .b. tr ip V EXT a logic 1 signal is present.
The ground fault short-circuit protection calculates the neutral displacement voltage VN-G via the three phase-to-ground voltages according to the following formula:
V NG =
1 V A G + V B G + V C G 3
In the case of a single-phase test using |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0, the result of the calculation formula for VNG given above is that trigger GFSC: VNG> operates when the test voltage exceeds the following value:
V test = 3 VNG > VNG > : Vnom 3
Setting GFSC: VNG>
The operation of the trigger can be determined by checking logic state signal GFSC: VNG> triggered (Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder)
9-26
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling Ground fault short-circuit protection signaling can be checked via the integrated local control panel (GSCSG: Tes t telec om. USER ) or by triggering an appropriately configured binary signal input (GSC SG: Text telec om. EXT ). The P437 then generates a send signal for 500 ms. Completion of commissioning Before the protection device is released for operation, the user should make sure that the following steps have been taken:
All memories have been reset. (Reset at MAIN: General reset (password-protected) and MT_R C : R es et r e c o r d i n g , both in Oper/CtrlTest/ folder.) Blocking of output relays has been canceled. (OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER , Par/Func/Glob/ folder, setting No.) Blocking of the trip command has been canceled. (MAIN: Trip cmd. block. USER , Par/Func/Glob/ folder, setting No.) Protection has been activated (on). (MAIN: Protection enabled, Par/Func/Glob/ folder, setting Yes (on).)
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling Operation (H1) should be on.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
9-27
9-28
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10 Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and possible methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation only, and in cases of doubt it is better to return the P437 to the manufacturer. Please follow the packaging instructions in the section entitled Unpacking and Packing in Chapter 5 when returning equipment to the manufacturer. Problem:
Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel. Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection points. Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct. The P437 is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this manual, may work on or operate this device.
Before checking further, disconnect the P437 from the power supply.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
Check to make sure that fuse F1 on power supply module V is not fused. If the fuse is defective, it should not be replaced without determining the cause of failure. If a fuse is replaced without eliminating the problem, there is the danger that the damage will spread. Required fuses: VA,nom = 24 V DC: VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC: Type M3.5-250V Type M2-250V
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10-1
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
The P437 issues an Alarm signal on LED H3. Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory (see the section entitled Monitoring Signal Memory Readout in Chapter 6). The table below lists possible monitoring or warning indications (provided that a configuration setting has been entered at SF M O N : F c t. a s s i g n . w a r n i n g ) , the faulty area, the P437 response, and the mode of the output relay configured for 'Warning' and 'Blocked/faulty'.
SFMON: Warning (LED) Warning configured for LED H3. SFMON: Warning (relay) Warning configured for an output relay. Key: -: Yes: Updating:
1)
036 070
036 100
No reaction and/or no output relay triggered. The corresponding output relay is triggered. The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the monitoring signal is still present. The 'Blocked/faulty' output relay only operates if the signal has been configured at M AIN : F c t. a s s i g n . fa u l t . The 'Warning' output relay only operates if the signal has been configured at SF M O N : F c t. a s s i g n m . w a r n i n g .
093 024
: :
2)
SFMON: Cold rest. checksum
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the memory (NOVRAM). 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Cold rest. SW update A cold restart has been carried out following a software update. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Blocking HW failure Supplementary warning that this device is blocked. 'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes
090 019
Warm restart / Device blocking Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

093 025
10-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty Multiple signal: Output relay defective. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Hardware clock fail. The hardware clock has failed. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Faulty DSP The DSP Coprocessor has detected an error. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Battery failure Battery voltage too low. Replace battery. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: +15V supply faulty The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: +24V supply faulty The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: -15V supply faulty The -15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/Updating / Updating -/-/Yes / Yes -/-/Updating / Updating Yes / Yes 1)
041 200
093 040
093 127

090 010
096 121

093 081

093 082

093 080
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10-3
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Wrong module slot 1 SFMON: Wrong module slot 2 SFMON: Wrong module slot 3 SFMON: Wrong module slot 4 SFMON: Wrong module slot 5 SFMON: Wrong module slot 6 SFMON: Wrong module slot 7 SFMON: Wrong module slot 8 SFMON: Wrong module slot 9 SFMON: Wrong module slot 10 SFMON: Wrong module slot 11 SFMON: Wrong module slot 12 SFMON: Wrong module slot 13 SFMON: Wrong module slot 14 SFMON: Wrong module slot 15 SFMON: Wrong module slot 16 SFMON: Wrong module slot 17 SFMON: Wrong module slot 18 SFMON: Wrong module slot 19 SFMON: Wrong module slot 20 SFMON: Wrong module slot 21 Module in wrong slot. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 SFMON: Defect.module slot 2 SFMON: Defect.module slot 3 SFMON: Defect.module slot 4 SFMON: Defect.module slot 5 SFMON: Defect.module slot 6 SFMON: Defect.module slot 7 SFMON: Defect.module slot 8 SFMON: Defect.module slot 9 SFMON: Defect.module slot 10 SFMON: Defect.module slot11 SFMON: Defect.module slot12 SFMON: Defect.module slot13 SFMON: Defect.module slot14 SFMON: Defect.module slot15 SFMON: Defect.module slot16 SFMON: Defect.module slot 17 SFMON: Defect.module slot 18 SFMON: Defect.module slot19 SFMON: Defect.module slot20 SFMON: Defect.module slot21 Defective module in slot x. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: 10-4
096 100 096 101 096 102 096 103 096 104 096 105 096 106 096 107 096 108 096 109 096 110 096 111 096 112 096 113 096 114 096 115 096 116 096 117 096 118 096 119 096 120

097 000 097 001 097 002 097 003 097 004 097 005 097 006 097 007 097 008 097 009 097 010 097 011 097 012 097 013 097 014 097 015 097 016 097 017 097 018 097 019 097 020
-/Updating / Updating Yes / Yes 1)

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Module A DPR faulty Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only detected during device startup. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Module A RAM faulty RAM fault on communication module A. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty -/Yes / Yes -/-/Yes / Yes -/-
093 070
093 071
093 110
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty Fault in the program or data memory of the analog module. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Error K 801 SFMON: Error K 802 SFMON: Error K 803 SFMON: Error K 804 SFMON: Error K 805 SFMON: Error K 806 SFMON: Error K 807 SFMON: Error K 808 SFMON: Error K 1001 SFMON: Error K 1002 SFMON: Error K 1003 SFMON: Error K 1004 SFMON: Error K 1005 SFMON: Error K 1006 SFMON: Error K 1007 SFMON: Error K 1008 SFMON: Error K 1201 SFMON: Error K 1202 SFMON: Error K 1203 SFMON: Error K 1204 SFMON: Error K 1205 SFMON: Error K 1206 SFMON: Error K 1207 SFMON: Error K 1208 SFMON: Error K 1401 SFMON: Error K 1402
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
-/Yes / Yes -/093 111
-/Yes / Yes -/097 086 097 087 097 088 097 089 097 090 097 091 097 092 097 093 097 102 097 103 097 104 097 105 097 106 097 107 097 108 097 109 097 118 097 119 097 120 097 121 097 122 097 123 097 124 097 125 097 134 097 135
10-5
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Error K 1403 SFMON: Error K 1404 SFMON: Error K 1405 SFMON: Error K 1406 SFMON: Error K 1407 SFMON: Error K 1408 SFMON: Error K 1601 SFMON: Error K 1602 SFMON: Error K 1603 SFMON: Error K 1604 SFMON: Error K 1605 SFMON: Error K 1606 SFMON: Error K 1607 SFMON: Error K 1608 SFMON: Error K 1801 SFMON: Error K 1802 SFMON: Error K 1803 SFMON: Error K 1804 SFMON: Error K 1805 SFMON: Error K 1806 SFMON: Error K 2001 SFMON: Error K 2002 SFMON: Error K 2003 SFMON: Error K 2004 SFMON: Error K 2005 SFMON: Error K 2006 SFMON: Error K 2007 SFMON: Error K 2008 Output relay K xxx defective. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Undef. operat. code Undefined operation code. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. Invalid arithmetic operation. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Undefined interrupt Undefined interrupt. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/Updating / Updating Yes / Yes 1)
097 136 097 137 097 138 097 139 097 140 097 141 097 150 097 151 097 152 097 153 097 154 097 155 097 156 097 157 097 166 097 167 097 168 097 169 097 170 097 171 097 182 097 183 097 184 097 185 097 186 097 187 097 188 097 189
093 010

093 011

093 012
10-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Exception oper.syst. Interrupt of the operating system. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Protection failure Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has detected an error. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Checksum error param A checksum error involving the settings in the memory (NOVRAM) has been detected. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Clock sync. error
093 013

090 021

090 003

093 041
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is greater than 10 ms. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM -/Yes / Yes -/093 026
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module (digital). This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are deleted. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Overflow MT_RC Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. Software overloaded. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/Yes / Yes -/-/Yes / Yes -/093 015
-/ Yes / Yes -/090 012
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10-7
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y Incorrect or invalid software for analog module has been downloaded. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Time-out module Y -/Yes / Yes -/-/Yes / Yes -/-
093 075
093 113
093 112
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog I/O module. It has detected an error. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Inom not adjustable Transformer module T is not suitable for setting Inom. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: M.c.b. trip Vref The m.c.b. monitoring the reference voltage transformer has tripped. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: M.c.b. trip VNG The m.c.b. monitoring the neutral-displacement voltage has tripped. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of Ground fault protection (GFSC and GSCSG) (if operated with measured neutral-displacement voltage) Yes / Yes 2) Yes / Yes 1)
098 000
-/Yes / Yes -/093 118
-/Yes / Yes -/098 011
Blocking of automatic synchronism check (ASC) Yes / Yes 2) -/098 132
'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: M.c.b. trip V The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction:
'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: 10-8
Blocking of distance protection, direction measurement of inverse-time overcurrent protection and time-voltage protection, and switching to backup overcurrent-time protection, if applicable Yes / Yes 2) -/P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty
098 001
Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected a fault in the phase sequence of the phase-to-ground voltages. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/Yes / Yes 2) -/-
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10-9
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Vneg> triggered
098 014
The negative-sequence monitoring function of measuring-circuit monitoring has been triggered. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Undervoltage -/Yes / Yes 2) -/098 009
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected an undervoltage. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: FF, V triggered The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the voltagemeasuring circuit. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: FF, Vref triggered -/Yes / Yes 2) -/098 022
-/Yes / Yes 2) -/098 021
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the reference voltage-measuring circuit. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. -/Yes / Yes 2) -/098 023
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits for phase-to-ground voltages or the reference voltage faulty. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Meas. circ. V faulty Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits faulty. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: BUOC not active Depends on type of fault. Yes / Yes 2) -/098 002
Depends on type of fault. Yes / Yes 2) -/098 017
Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been blocked, but the unit has not switched to backup overcurrent-time protection. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Depends on type of fault. Yes / Yes 2) -/-
10-10
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: BUOC active w/o ARC
098 003
Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been blocked, and the unit has switched to backup overcurrent-time protection. ARC is not activated by the backup overcurrent-time protection function. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: BUOC active with ARC Depends on type of fault. Yes / Yes 2) -/098 004
Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been blocked, and the unit has switched to backup overcurrent-time protection. ARC is activated by the backup overcurrent-time protection function. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the current-measuring circuits. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Zero-sequ. starting The zero-sequence starting of distance protection has been triggered without phase starting. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty -/Yes / Yes 2) -/098 016
-/Yes / Yes 2) -/098 015
Multiple signal: Multiple signaling: Current- or voltage-measuring circuits faulty. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Meas. circuits GFSC Ground fault (short-circuit) protection monitoring has been triggered. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3 The device has detected a hardware fault in the InterMiCOM interface (Communication Interface 3). 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/Yes / Yes 2) -/Depends on type of fault. Yes / Yes 2) -/093 140
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10-11
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Hardware error COMM3
093 143
The has detected a hardware error in the effective connection InterMiCOM (communication interface 3). 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 -/Yes / Yes -/093 142
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k fa i l . has elapsed indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. The receive signals are set to their user-defined default values. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. -/Yes / Yes 2) -/093 141
The threshold set for timer stage C O M M 3 : L i m i t te l e g r . e r r o r s was exceeded and the receive signals are set to their user-defined default values. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Telecom. faulty/PSIG The transmission channel of protective signaling is faulty. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Op.mode PSIG inval. Blocking of protective signaling Yes / Yes 2) -/098 019
-/Yes / Yes 2) -/098 006
The operating mode settings for protective signaling and ground fault (shortcircuit) protection signaling are not identical. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Telecom.faulty/GSCSG -/Yes / Yes 2) -/098 027
The transmission channel of ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is faulty. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Blocking of ground fault (shortcircuit) protection signaling Yes / Yes 2) -/-
10-12
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Peripheral fault Multiple signal. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of the analog module. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1 SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2 Depends on type of fault. Yes / Yes 2) -/Depends on type of fault. Yes / Yes 2) -/-
098 018
093 124
093 114 093 115
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels of analog I/O module Y. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC Depends on type of fault. Yes / Yes 2) -/093 116
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog I/O module Y. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: PT100 open circuit Depends on type of fault. Yes / Yes 2) -/098 024
The P437 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance thermometer. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Overload 20mA input The 20 mA input of analog module Y is overloaded. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Depends on type of fault. Yes / Yes 2) -/Depends on type of fault. Yes / Yes 2) -/098 025
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10-13
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp.
098 026
The P437 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Setting error f<> The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for 'overfrequency' monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and nominal frequency). This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f / Delta t operating mode. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Setting error PSP Blocking of the over-/under frequency protection function Yes / Yes 2) -/098 128
The settings that have been made for the Power Swing Blocking protection function are not valid. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync The settings are limited to valid values. Yes / Yes 2) -/093 120
The M AIN : M i n - p u l s e c l o c k EXT function has been configured for a binary input of analog I/O module Y. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: SFMON: Output 30 SFMON: Output 30 (t) SFMON: Output 31 SFMON: Output 31 (t) SFMON: Output 32 SFMON: Output 32 (t) The time of day is not synchronized. Yes / Yes 2) -/098 053 098 054 098 055 098 056 098 057 098 058
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by selection at SF M O N : F c t. a s s i g n . w a r n i n g . The warning signals are also recorded in the monitoring signal memory. 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/Yes / Yes -/-
10-14
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: CB pos.sig. unplaus.
098 124
The plausibility logic was triggered during the acquisition of the circuit breaker's (CB) status signals. (See chapter 3, "Main Functions of the P437 (Function Group MAIN)", section "Acquisition and processing of CB status signals). 1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: 'Warning' output relay: 'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/Yes / Yes 2) -/-
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
10-15
10-16
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
11 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this manual, may work on or operate this device. The P437 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are selected to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary. Maintenance procedures in the power supply area Electrolytic capacitors are installed in the power supply area because of dimensioning requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the recommended temperature range (+55C or 131F), the useful life of these components is 80,000 hours, or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the electrolytic capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 to 10 years. When the operating temperatures are approx. +45C inside the devices, the required maintenance interval can be increased by about 1 year. The P437 is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply. Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per year over a period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually constant until capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual capacity is reached. With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only a few A during device storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during device operation, the result is a correspondingly long service life. It is therefore recommended that the lithium battery only be replaced after the maintenance interval cited above. Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible without soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the auxiliary voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.
Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
11-1
11 Maintenance
(continued)
The relevant components are located on the following modules:
Electrolytic capacitor: on power supply module V. Lithium battery: on power supply module V. Only components approved by Schneider Electric may be used (see Chapter 13).
Note:
Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.
11-1
Component drawing for power supply module V.
11-2
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
11 Maintenance
(continued)
There is a danger of explosion if the electrolytic capacitor and battery are not properly replaced. Always check to make sure that the polarity of the electrolytic capacitor and the battery is correct.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
!
Note:
The replaced components (electrolytic capacitor and battery) must be disposed of in compliance with applicable national regulations.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new commissioning tests as described in Chapter 9 must be carried out.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
11-3
11 Maintenance
(continued)
Routine functional testing The P437 is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection tested for proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to 12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be performed at intervals of 2 to 3 years 4 years at the maximum. The P437 incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis. Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions that cannot be checked by the selfmonitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The respective device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such cases. In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the outside are checked by the self-monitoring function. Analog input circuits The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-monitoring function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the devices general functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is still necessary to test from the device terminals in order to make sure that the analog measuring circuits are functioning correctly. The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a suitable testing instrument. A "small" measured value (such as the nominal current in the current path) and a "large" measured value (such as the nominal voltage in the voltage path) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D converter. This makes it possible to check the entire dynamic range. The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous measurements. In addition, a dynamic test can be used to check transmission performance and the phase relation of the current transformers and the anti-aliasing filter. This can best be done by measuring the trigger point of the first zone when there is a two-phase ungrounded fault. For this test, the short-circuit current should be dimensioned so that a loop voltage of approximately 2 V is obtained at the device terminals with the set impedance. Furthermore, a suitable testing instrument that correctly replicates the twophase ungrounded fault should be used for this purpose. This dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of a few less passive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range.
11-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
11 Maintenance
(continued)
Additional analog testing of such factors as the impedance characteristic or the starting characteristic is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing is completely digital and is based on the measured analog current and voltage values. Proper operation was checked in conjunction with type testing. Binary opto inputs The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read out (Oper/Cycl/Phys folder). This check should be performed for each input being used and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring. Binary outputs With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even twophase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no monitoring function for the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing relays must be triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing purposes, triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special control function (Oper/CtrlTest/ folder).
!
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Serial Interfaces The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface also includes the communication module. The complete communication system, including connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally monitored as long as a link is established through the control program or the communication protocol.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
11-5
11-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
12 Storage
12 Storage Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of -25C to +70C (-13F to +158F) must be maintained during storage (see chapter entitled 'Technical Data'). The relative humidity must be controlled so that neither condensation nor ice formation will result. If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every 4 years. Recharge the capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P437 for approximately 10 minutes. If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply module is used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working memory of the processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required and discharges rapidly. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is recommended to remove the power supply module from the mounting rack during long storage periods. The contents of the event memory should be previously read out and stored separately!
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
12-1
12-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
13 Accessories and Spare Parts The P437 is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators that are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips supplied. Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location. The label strips can be filled in using a Stabilo brand pen containing water-resistant ink (Type OH Pen 196 PS). Description Cable bushings Lithium battery, Type 1/2 AA 3.6 V Electrolytic capacitor 100 F, 385 V DC Only the following brands of capacitor are permitted: Philips Type PUL-SI/159/222215946101 Panasonic Type TS-HA/ECOS 2GA 101 Nichicon Type LGQ 2G 101 MHSZ Nichicon Type LGU 2G 101 MHLZ Fuse for VA,nom = 24 V DC: M3.5-250V Fuse for VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC: M2-250V Resistor 200 84 TE frame Operating program for Windows 255.002.696 88512-4-9650723-301 On request (MiCOM S1) Order No. 88512-4-0337414-301
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
13-1
13-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
14 Order Information
14 Order Information P437

MiCOM P437
PCS Cell No. P437 Distance Protection Device Basic device: Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection, Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, basic complement with 4 binary inputs, 8 output relays and 6 function keys Mounting option and display: Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display Current transformer: Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14) 2) Parallel Line Mutual Compensation CT: Without Inom = 0,1 A (T24) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T24) 2) Voltage transformer: Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (4-pole) Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (5-pole) Additional binary I/O options: Without With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays) With 3 binary modules (add. 18 binary inputs and 24 output relays) With 4 binary modules (add. 24 binary inputs and 32 output relays) 3) Power supply and additional outputs: VA,nom = 24 VDC VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays Further add. options: Without With analog module Switching threshold on binary inputs: >18 V (standard variant) >90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) >73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) 8) 8) 8)
1234 P437-
6 9
7 N
9 10 11 -308
12, 13 AA -4xx -408 -409 -613
14 0
15 A
16 A
17 A
18 A -8xx
AN3N N N
N N N N
-46x -9x x -9x x
7 8
3 4 9 0 1 9 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 2 Without order extension no. -461 -462 -463 -464 -90 0 -91 -92
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V) >146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
With communication / information interface: Only IRIG-B input For clock synchronization Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 only Protocol can be switched between: IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to wire, RS485, isolated For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector For connection to glass fibre, ST connector Protocol IEC61850 For connection to 100 MBit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to 100 MBit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) With guidance / protection interface: Protocol InterMiCOM For connection to wire, RS485, isolated For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector For connection to glass fiber, ST connector For connection to wire, RS232, isolated Language: English (German) 4) Px40 English (English) 4) German (English) 4) French (English) 4) Spanish (English) 4) Polish (English) 4) Russian (English)
4) 7)
1 2 4 -94 6 7
-95 1 2 4 5 Without order extension no. Not yet available - on request Not yet available - on request Not yet available - on request Not yet available - on request Not yet available - on request -800 -801 -802 -803 -804 -805
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
14-1
14 Order Information
(continued)
Information about ordering options

2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined! 3) This option is excluded if the InterMiCOM (-95x) is ordered 4) Second included language in brackets 7) Hardwareoption, supports cyrillic letters instead of special West. Europe characters 8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
Language version In order to display the Russian data model, the corresponding order extension number (-805) must be added upon ordering so that the hardware option supporting Cyrillic characters is integrated. With this ordering option, reference menu texts (English) will be available for display. However, other Western European languages containing extra characters will not be fully supported. Consequently, selecting the "Russian / English" ordering option means that it will not be possible to download Western European data models into the device. Binary inputs' switching threshold The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18V. Special versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also "Technical Data" chapter) are provided for applications where a higher switching threshold is expressly required.
14-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
Appendix
A Glossary B Signal List C Overview of Changes
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
AN-1
Appendix
(continued)
A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B B1 B2 B 2.1 B 2.1.1 B 2.1.2 B 2.1.3 B 2.1.4 B 2.1.5 B3 B 3.1 B 3.1.1 B 3.1.1.1 B 3.1.1.2 B 3.1.1.3 B 3.1.2 B 3.1.3 B 3.1.3.1 B 3.1.3.2 B 3.1.3.3 B 3.1.3.3.1 B 3.1.3.3.2 B 3.1.3.3.3 B 3.1.3.3.4 B 3.1.3.3.5 B 3.1.3.3.6 B 3.1.3.3.7 B 3.1.3.3.8 B 3.1.3.4 B 3.1.3.4.1 B 3.1.3.4.2 B 3.1.3.4.3 B 3.1.3.5 B 3.1.3.6
Glossary Function Groups Modules Symbols Examples of Signal Names Symbols used List of Signals Internal Signal Names Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard) Interoperability Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters) Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) Application Layer Basic Application Functions Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 Interoperability Physical Layer Electrical Interface Optical Interface Transmission Rate Link Layer Application Layer Transmission Mode for Application Data Common Address of ASDU Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction System Functions in Monitor Direction Status Indications in Monitor Direction Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction Fault Indications in Monitor Direction Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction Measurands in Monitor Direction Generic Functions in Monitor Direction Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction System Functions in Control Direction General Commands in Control Direction Generic Functions in Control Direction Basic Application Functions Miscellaneous
A-1 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-10 A-11 B-1 B-1 B-8 B-8 B-8 B-9 B-10 B-11 B-17 B-20 B-20 B-20 B-20 B-20 B-20 B-21 B-21 B-21 B-21 B-21 B-21 B-22 B-23 B-24 B-25 B-27 B-27 B-28 B-29 B-29 B-29 B-30 B-31 B-31
AN-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
Appendix
(continued)
Overview of Changes P437-301-401-601 P437-301-401-601-701 P437-302-402-602 P437-302-402-602-702 P437-302-402-602-703 P437-303-402/403-603 P437-302-402-603-704 P437-302-402-603-705 P437-303-402/403-604 P437-304-404/405-605 P437-304-404/405-605-706 P437-304-404/405-605-707 P437-304-404/405-605-708 P437-304-404/405-605-709 P437-304-404/405-605-710 P437-304-404/405-606 P437-304-404/405-607 P437-304-404/405-608 P437-304-404/405-608-711 P437-306-406/407-609 P437-306-406/407-609-712 P437-306-406/407-609-713 P437-307-408/409-610 P437-307-408/409-610-714 P437-307-408/409-610-715 P437-307-408/409-611 P437-308-408/409-612
C-1 C-1 C-1 C-1 C-1 C-1 C-1 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-4 C-4 C-4 C-5 C-5 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-7 C-9 C-9 C-9 C-12 C-12 C-12 C-14
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
AN-3
AN-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
Appendix A - Glossary
A1
Function Groups
Auto-reclosing control Automatic synchronism check Backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) Circuit breaker failure protection Communication interface 1 Communication interface 2 Communication interface 3 Distance protection Definite-time overcurrent protection Device Over-/underfrequency protection Fault data acquisition Function keys Fault recording Ground fault (short-circuit) protection Generic Object Oriented Substation Event Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling Generic Substation State Event Inverse-time overcurrent protection Communication interface IEC 61850 Binary input IRIG-B interface LED indicators Limit value monitoring Local control panel Logic Main function Measuring-circuit monitoring Measured data input Measured data output Monitoring signal recording Overload data acquisition Overload recording Operating data recording Binary and analog output Directional Power Protection PC link Power swing blocking Protective signaling Parameter subset selection Self-monitoring Switch on to fault protection Thermal overload protection Time-voltage protection
ARC: ASC: BUOC: CBF: COMM1: COMM2: COMM3: DIST: DTOC: DVICE: f<>: FT_DA: F_KEY: FT_RC: GFSC: GOOSE: GSCSG: GSSE: IDMT: IEC: INP: IRIGB: LED: LIMIT: LOC: LOGIC: MAIN: MCMON: MEASI: MEASO: MT_RC: OL_DA: OL_RC: OP_RC: OUTP: P<>: PC: PSB: PSIG: PSS: SFMON: SOTF: THERM: V<>:
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
A-1
(continued)
A2
A: B: L: P: T: V: X: Y:
Modules
Communication module Bus module Local control module Processor module Transformer module Power supply module Binary I/O module Analog I/O module
A-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
(continued)
A3
Symbols
Graphic symbols for block diagrams Binary elements in compliance with DIN 40900 part 12, September 1992, IEC 617-12: modified 1991 Analogue information processing in compliance with DIN 40900 part 13, January 1981 To document the linking of analogue and binary signals, additional symbols have been used, taken from several DIN documents. As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom. Other flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left side of the signal flow, output signals on the right side. Symbol Description To obtain more space for representing a group of related elements, contours of the elements may be joined or cascaded if the following rules are met:
There is no functional linkage between elements whose common contour line is oriented in the signal flow direction. Note: This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations with two or more signal flow directions, such as for symbols with a control block and an output block. There exists at least one logical link between elements whose common contour line runs perpendicularly to the signal flow direction. Components of a symbol A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination and one or more qualifiers.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
A-3
(continued)
Symbol
Description Control block A control block contains an input function common to several symbols. It is used for the collective setting of several trigger elements, for example.
Output block An output block contains an output function common to several symbols.
Settable control block The six digits represent the address under which the function shown in the text after the colon may be set.
Settable control block with function blocks The digits in the function block show the settings that are possible at this address. The text below the symbol shows the setting and the corresponding unit or meaning.
A-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
(continued)
Symbol
Description State input Only the state of the binary input variable is read.
Rising edge-triggered input Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 causes operation.
Negation of an output The value up to the boundary line is negated at the output.
Negation of an input The input value is negated before the boundary line.
Falling edge-triggered input with negation Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 causes operation.
AND element The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables are 1. OR element The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input variable is 1. Threshold element The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input variables are 1. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number. (m out of n) element The output variable will be 1 only if the variable is 1 at only one input. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number if the number of inputs is increased or decreased accordingly.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
A-5
(continued)
Symbol
Description Delay element The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs after a time delay of t1 relative to the corresponding transition at the input. The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs after a time delay of t2 relative to the corresponding transition at the input. t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values (in seconds or strobe ticks). Monostable flip-flop The output variable will be 1 if the input variable changes to 1. The output variable will remain 1 for 100 ms, regardless of the duration of the input value 1 (non-retriggerable). Without a 1 in the function block, the monostable flipflop is retriggerable. The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be changed to any other dwell time duration. Analog-digital converter An analog input signal is converted to a binary signal.
Subtractor The output variable is the difference between the two input variables. A summing element is obtained by changing the minus sign to a plus sign at the symbol input. Schmitt Trigger with binary output signal The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal exceeds a specific threshold. The output variable remains 1 until the input signal drops below the threshold again. Memory, general Storage of a binary or analog signal.
A-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
(continued)
Symbol
Description Non-stable flip-flop When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse sequence is generated at the output. The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse sequence starts with the input variable transition (synchronized start). If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse sequence ends with the ending of the 1 signal at the input (synchronized stop). Amplifier The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is also 1. Band pass filter The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of the input signals. All other frequencies (above and below 50 Hz) are attenuated. Counter At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to 1 are counted and stored in the function block. At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable from 0 to 1 resets the counter to 0. Electromechanical drive in general, here a relay, for example.
Signal level converter with electrical isolation between input and output. L+ = pos. voltage input L- = neg. voltage input U1 = device identifier
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
A-7
(continued)
Symbol
Description Input transducer with conductor and device identifiers (according to DIN EN 60445) Conductor identifiers for current inputs: for A: A1 and A2 for B: B1 and B2 for C: C1 and C2 for N: N1 and N2 Conductor identifiers for voltage inputs via transformer 1: for A: 1U for B: 1V for C: 1W for N: 1N via transformer 2: for A: 2U for B: 2V Device identifiers for current transformers: for A: T1 for B: T2 for C: T3 for N: T4 for voltage transformer 1: for A: T5 for B: T6 for C: T7 for N: T8 for VG-N transformer: T90 for voltage transformer 2: for A: T15 Change-over contact with device identifier
Special symbol Output relay in normally-energized arrangement (closed-circuit operation).
A-8
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
(continued)
Symbol
Description PC interface with pin connections
Multiplier The output variable is the result of the multiplication of the two input variables.
Divider The output variable is the result of the division of the two input variables.
Comparator The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) are equal to the function in the function block. Formula block The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) satisfy the equation in the function block
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
A-9
(continued)
A4
Examples of Signal Names
All settings and signals relevant for protection are shown in the block diagrams of Chapter 3 as follows: Signal Name FT_RC: Fault recording n
305 100
Description Internal signal names are not coded by a data model address. In the block diagrams they are marked with a diamond. The small figure underneath the signal name represents a code that is irrelevant to the user. The internal signal names used and their origins are listed in Appendix B. Signal names coded by a data model address are represented by their address (shown in square brackets). Their origin is given in Chapters 7 and 8. A specific setting to be used later on is shown with its signal name, address, and the setting preceded by the setting arrow.
DIST: VNG>> triggered [ 036 015 ] MAIN: General reset [ 003 002 ] 1: Execute
A-10
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
(continued)
A5
Symbol t V V I I Z
Z
Symbols used
Meaning Time duration Voltage, potential difference Complex voltage Electrical current Complex current Complex impedance Modulus of complex impedance Frequency Temperature in C Sum, result Unit of electrical resistance Angle Phase angle. With subscripts: specific angle between a defined current and a defined voltage. Time constant Temperature difference in K (C)
f T
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
A-11
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
A-12
Appendix B - Signal List
B 1 Internal Signal Names Internal signal names are not coded by an external address. In the block diagrams they are marked with a diamond. Internal Signal ARC: 3p trip for 1p fault ARC: 3-pole RRC ARC: 3-pole transfer int. ARC: CB closed ARC: Close command ARC: Enable dist. trip Z1ze ARC: External trip A ARC: External trip B ARC: External trip C ARC: HSR A ARC: HSR A-B-C ARC: HSR B ARC: HSR C ARC: Meas.r. extd. ext.ARC ARC: Switch to tPmax ARC: TDR ARC: TDR permitted ARC: Test HSR A, internal ARC: Test HSR B, internal ARC: Test HSR C, internal ARC: Trip time elapsed ARC: tRRC running ARC: V> for RRC triggered ARC: Zone extension HSR ARC: Zone extension RC ARC: Zone extension TDR ASC: Active ASC: Close enable w.block ASC: Close reject.w.block ASC: Gen. close request ASC: Manual close request ASC: Select.meas.loop P-G ASC: Test Figure 3-173 3-195 3-195 3-179 3-195 3-192 3-195 3-195 3-195 3-195 3-195 3-195 3-195 3-192 3-193 3-195 3-195 3-187 3-187 3-195 3-181 3-195 3-189 3-191 3-191 3-191 3-199 3-199 3-199 3-200 3-200 3-197 3-200
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
B-1

(continued)
BUOC: IA> triggered BUOC: IB> triggered BUOC: IC> triggered BUOC: IN> triggered BUOC: SN BUOC: Trip A BUOC: Trip B BUOC: Trip C CBF: Start >1p CBF: Start A CBF: Start B CBF: Start C COMM1: Selected protocol DIST: |meas| DIST: corr DIST: F DIST: X DIST: Z DIST: 1-pole starting DIST: 1VA-B (stored) DIST: Dist. decision zone n DIST: Dist.decis. Z1ze, A DIST: Dist.decis. Z1ze, B DIST: Dist.decis. Z1ze, C DIST: Dist.decis. Z1ze, x DIST: Dist.decis.Z1 stored DIST: Dist.decision Z1, A DIST: Dist.decision Z1, B DIST: Dist.decision Z1, C DIST: Dist.decision Z1, x DIST: Enable V<, Z<, A DIST: Enable V<, Z<, B DIST: Enable V<, Z<, C DIST: Enable ZA-B starting DIST: Enable ZA-G starting DIST: Enable ZB-C starting DIST: Enable ZB-G starting DIST: Enable ZC-A starting B-2
3-144 3-144 3-144 3-144 3-144 3-144 3-144 3-144 3-295 , 3-296 3-295 3-295 3-295 3-6 3-110 3-105 3-105 3-105 3-107 3-99 3-104 3-112 3-122 3-122 3-122 3-113, 3-117 3-113, 3-117 3-122 3-122 3-122 3-113, 3-117 3-93 3-93 3-93 3-95 3-95 3-95 3-95 3-95
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
DIST: Enable ZC-G starting DIST: Enable ZP-G DIST: I>> triggered DIST: I>>> triggered DIST: IA>(Ibl) trigg. DIST: IA>(Ibl) trigg. DIST: IA>> triggered DIST: IB>(Ibl) trigg. DIST: IB>> triggered DIST: IC>(Ibl) trigg. DIST: IC>> triggered DIST: Multipole starting DIST: N1,bw DIST: N1,bw, A DIST: N1,bw, B DIST: N1,bw, C DIST: N1,fw DIST: N1,fw, A DIST: N1,fw, B DIST: N1,fw, C DIST: N2,bw DIST: N2,fw DIST: N3,bw DIST: N3,fw DIST: N4,bw DIST: N4,fw DIST: N5,bw DIST: N5,fw DIST: N6,bw DIST: N6,fw DIST: N7,bw DIST: N7,fw DIST: A,corr. DIST: A-kG DIST: B,corr. DIST: B-kG DIST: C,corr. DIST: C-kG
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-95 3-95 3-90 3-90 3-90 3-93 3-90 3-93 3-90 3-93 3-90 3-99 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-121 3-102 3-97 3-102 3-97 3-102 3-97 B-3

(continued)
DIST: kG DIST: kG,par DIST: meas DIST: RF DIST: Select.meas.loop A-B DIST: Select.meas.loop A-G DIST: Select.meas.loop B-C DIST: Select.meas.loop B-G DIST: Select.meas.loop C-A DIST: Select.meas.loop C-G DIST: Select.meas.loop P-G DIST: Select.meas.loop P-P DIST: Signal block start.G DIST: Start. IN> triggered DIST: Start. VNG> triggered DIST: Start. ZPP< triggered DIST: Starting A DIST: Starting B DIST: Starting blocked DIST: Starting C DIST: Starting G DIST: Starting N1 DIST: Timer st. 1 elapsed DIST: tIN> elapsed DIST: Trip signal Z1, A DIST: Trip signal Z1, B DIST: Trip signal Z1, C DIST: Trip zone 1,ze DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, A DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, B DIST: Trip zone 1,ze, C DIST: Trip zone 1 DIST: Trip zone 1, A DIST: Trip zone 1, B DIST: Trip zone 1, C DIST: Trip zone 2 DIST: Trip zone 3 DIST: Trip zone 4 B-4
3-97 3-102 3-103 3-114 3-101 3-101 3-101 3-101 3-101 3-101 3-101 3-101 3-127 3-91 3-91 3-98 3-99 3-99 3-89 3-99 3-92 3-99 3-119 3-91 3-127 3-127 3-127 3-123 3-123 3-123 3-123 3-123 3-123 3-123 3-123 3-124 3-124 3-124
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
DIST: Trip zone 5 DIST: Trip zone 6 DIST: Trip zone 7 DIST: Trip zone 8 DIST: tVNG>> elapsed DIST: VA< triggered DIST: VB< triggered DIST: VC< triggered DIST: Vmeas DIST: VNG>> exceeded DIST: Voltage mem. enabled DIST: VPP< triggered DIST: XF DIST: ZA< start. triggered DIST: ZB< start. triggered DIST: ZC< start. triggered f<>: fMeas f<>: No. periods reached f<>: Vmeas FT_DA: A,corr. FT_DA: B,corr. FT_DA: C,corr. FT_DA: meas FT_DA: Outp. fault location FT_DA: Output meas. values FT_DA: Select. meas.loop PG FT_DA: Select.meas.loop A-B FT_DA: Select.meas.loop A-G FT_DA: Select.meas.loop B-C FT_DA: Select.meas.loop B-G FT_DA: Select.meas.loop C-A FT_DA: Select.meas.loop C-G FT_DA: Vmeas GFSC: NG filtered GFSC: Blocked GFSC: Curr.-dep. trip sig. GFSC: N filtered GFSC: VNG
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
3-124 3-124 3-124 3-124 3- 91 3- 94 3- 94 3-94 3-103 3-91 3-104 3-94 3-114 3-98 3-98 3-98 3-275 3-275 3-274 3-81 3-81 3-81 3-82 3-80 3-80 3-82 3-82 3-82 3-82 3-82 3-82 3-82 3-82 3-212 3-209, 3-210 3-223 3-212 3-211, 3-212 B-5

(continued)
GFSC: Volt.-dep trip sig. GFSC: Voltage showing GSCSG: Bl. PSIG weak infeed GSCSG: Blocking ARC GSCSG: Frequ.mon. triggered GSCSG: Send internal signal GSCSG: Trip A GSCSG: Trip A GSCSG: Trip C IDMT: Direct. decision y IDMT: meas LOC: Reset key active MAIN: (VPG)/3 MAIN: Blck.1 sel.functions MAIN: Blck.2 sel.functions MAIN: Inrush stabil. trigg MAIN: Protection active MAIN: Reset LED MAIN: Time tag MAIN: Trip 1,A MAIN: Trip 1,B MAIN: Trip 1,C MAIN: Trip A MAIN: Trip B MAIN: Trip C MAIN: Trip signal 1 MCMON: Set FF, V MCMON: Vneg>, FF trigg. MEASO: Enable MEASO: Reset meas.val.outp. PSB: Asyn. power swing P<>: P P<>: Q P<>: P+ P<>: PP<>: Q+ P<>: QPSB: Block. sel. zone B-6
3-219 3-211 3-232 3-171 3-235 3-230 3-232, 3-233, 3-236, 3-237 3-235 3-235 3-235 3-260 3-250 3-69 3-43 3-55 3-55 3-54 3-53 3-68 3-67 3-60 3-60 3-60 3-60, 3-61 3-60, 3-61 3-60, 3-61 3-62 3-142 3-142 3-31 3-32 3-129 3-279 3-279 3-279 3-279 3-279 3-279 3-131
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
PSB: Ready PSB: Spos PSIG: Ch. 1 receive weak inf. PSIG: Ch. 1 transient bl. PSIG: Ch. 2 receive weak inf. PSIG: Ch. 2 transient bl. PSIG: Ch. 3 receive weak inf. PSIG: Ch. 3 transient bl. PSIG: Frequ. monit. ch. 1 PSIG: Frequ. monit. ch. 2 PSIG: Frequ. monit. ch. 3 PSIG: Frequ. monit. trigg. PSIG: Inhibit weak inf. A PSIG: Inhibit weak inf. B PSIG: Inhibit weak inf. C PSIG: Receive PSIG: Timer stage elapsed PSIG: Trip channel 1 PSIG: Trip channel 2 PSIG: Trip channel 3 PSIG: Trip enable PSIG: Trip enable, ch. 1 PSIG: Trip enable, ch. 2 PSIG: Trip enable, ch. 3 PSIG: Trip time elapsed PSIG: Trip V< PSIG: V< triggered PSIG: Weak inf. blocked PSIG: Weak inf. ready SOTF: ARC blocked SOTF: Line dead trig. en. V<>: Vneg V<>: VNG V<>: Vpos
3-144 3-129 3-172, 3-173, 3-174 3-152 3-172, 3-173, 3-174 3-152 3-172, 3-173, 3-174 3-152 3-151 3-151 3-151 3-151 3-173, 3-174 3-173, 3-174 3-173, 3-174 3-164 3-149 3-156, 3-158, 3-161, 3-164, 3-167 3-156, 3-158, 3-161, 3-164, 3-167 3-156, 3-158, 3-161, 3-164, 3-167 3-161 3-164, 3-167 3-161 3-164, 3-167 3-161 3-164, 3-167 3-161 3-164, 3-167 3-149 3-174 3-174 3-170 3-171, 3-174 3-147 3-145, 3-147 3-268 3-271 3-268
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
B-7

(continued)
B 2 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard) This section incorporates Section 8 of EN 60870-5-101 (1996), which includes a general definition of the telecontrol interface for substation control systems. B 2.1 Interoperability
This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets and other options from which subsets are to be selected in order to implement specific telecontrol systems. Certain parameters such as the number of bytes (octets) in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This means that only one value of the defined parameter is allowed per system. Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of subsets that are suitable for the given application. This section combines the parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system components supplied by different manufacturers, then it is necessary for all partners to agree on the selected parameters. The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked. Note:
1
The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain parameters for specific parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling factors for individually addressable measured values. Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters) x Multipoint-party line configuration Multipoint-star configuration
B 2.1.1 x x
Point-to-point configuration Multiple point-to-point configuration
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
B-8

(continued)
B 2.1.2
Physical Layer 2 (Network-Specific Parameters)

3
Transmission Rate (Control Direction) Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28 Standardized 100 bit/s 200 bit/s 300 bit/s x x 600 bit/s 1,200 bit/s
Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28 Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s x x x 2,400 bit/s 4,800 bit/s 9,600 bit/s
Balanced interface X.24/X.27
2,400 bit/s 4,800 bit/s 9,600 bit/s 19,200 bit/s 38,400 bit/s
56,000 bit/s 64,000 bit/s
Transmission Rate (Monitor Direction) 2 Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28 Standardized 100 bit/s 200 bit/s 300 bit/s x x 600 bit/s 1,200 bit/s Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28 Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s x x x 2,400 bit/s 4,800 bit/s 9,600 bit/s 2,400 bit/s 4,800 bit/s 9,600 bit/s 19,200 bit/s 38 400 bit/s 56,000 bit/s 64,000 bit/s Balanced interface X.24/X.27
2 3
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101. The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be identical. B-9
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
B 2.1.3
Link Layer 4(Network-Specific Parameters)
Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1, and the fixed time-out interval are used exclusively in this companion standard. Link Transmission Procedure x Balanced transmission Address Field of the Link x Not present (balanced transmission only) x Unbalanced transmission x One octet x Two octets Frame Length 240 Maximum length L (number of octets) x Structured x Unstructured
5
4 5
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101. Balanced only.

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
B-10

(continued)
B 2.1.4
Application Layer
Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion standard. Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter) x One octet Information Object Address (System-Specific Parameter) x One octet x Two octets x Three octets Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter) x One octet x Two octets (with originator address) x Structured x Unstructured x Two octets 1
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101. B-11
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Selection of Standard ASDUs Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter) x x x x x x x x x x x x < 1> < 2> < 3> < 4> < 5> < 6> < 7> < 8> < 9> <10> <11> <12> <13> <14> x x <15> <16> = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Single-point information Single-point information with time tag Double-point information Double-point information with time tag Step position information Step position information with time tag Bit string of 32 bit Bit string of 32 bit with time tag Measured value, normalized value Measured value, normalized value with time tag Measured value, scaled value Measured value, scaled value with time tag Measured value, short floating point value Measured value, short floating point value with time tag Integrated totals Integrated totals with time tag M_SP_NA_1 M_SP_TA_1 M_DP_NA_1 M_DP_TA_1 M_ST_NA_1 M_ST_TA_1 M_BO_NA_1 M_BO_TA_1 M_ME_NA_1 M_ME_TA_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_TB_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_TC_1 M_IT_NA_1 M_IT_TA_1
B-12
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
x x x
<17> <18> <19> <20> <21>
= = = = =
Event of protection equipment with time tag Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag Packed single-point information with status change detection Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor
M_EP_TA_1 ME_EP_TB_1 M_EP_TC_1 M_PS_NA_1 M_ME_ND_1
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
B-13

(continued)
Process Information in Monitor Direction 7 (Station-Specific Parameter) x x x <45> <46> <47> <48> <49> <50> <51> = = = = = = = Single command Double command Regulating step command Set point command, normalized value Set point command, scaled value Set point command, short floating point value Bit string of 32 bit C_SC_NA_1 C_DC_NA_1 C_IT_NA_1 C_RC_NA_1 C_SE_NB_1 C_SE_NC_1 C_BO_NA_1
System Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter) x <70> = End of initialization ME_EI_NA_1
Incorrectly identified with control direction in IEC 870-5-101.

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
B-14

(continued)
System Information in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter) x x x x x <100> <101> <102> <103> <104> <105> <106> = = = = = = = Interrogation command Counter interrogation command Read command Clock synchronization command Test command Reset process command Delay acquisition command 9
8
C_IC_NA_1 C_CI_NA_1 C_RD_NA_1 C_CS_NA_1 C_TS_NB_1 C_RP_NC_1 C_CD_NA_1
8 9
The command procedure is formally processed, but there is no change in the local time in the station. See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101. B-15
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Parameter in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter) x x <110> <111> <112> <113> = = = = Parameter of measured value, normalized value Parameter of measured value, scaled value Parameter of measured value, short floating point value Parameter activation P_ME_NA_1 P_ME_NB_1 P_ME_NC_1 P_AC_NA_1
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter) <120> <121> <122> <123> <124> <125> <126> = = = = = = = File ready Section ready Call directory, select file, call file, call section Last section, last segment Ack file, ack section Segment Directory F_FR_NA_1 F_SR_NA_1 F_SC_NA_1 F_LS_NA_1 F_AF_NA_1 F_SG_NA_1 F_DR_TA_1
B-16
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
B 2.1.5
Basic Application Functions
10
Station Initialization (Station-Specific Parameter) x Remote initialization
General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter) x x x x x x x Global Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 x x x x x x Group 7 Group 8 Group 9 Group 10 Group 11 Group 12 Addresses per group have to be defined. x x x x Group 13 Group 14 Group 15 Group 16
Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter) x Clock synchronization
10
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101. B-17
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter) x Direct command transmission Direct set point command transmission Select and execute command Select and execute set point command C_SE ACTTERM used x No additional definition Short pulse duration (Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Long pulse duration (Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Persistent output Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific Parameter) Counter request x Counter freeze without reset Counter freeze with reset x x x General request counter Request counter group 1 Request counter group 2
Counter reset
Request counter group 3
Addresses per group have to be specified
Request counter group 4
B-18
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Parameter Loading (Object-Specific Parameter) x Threshold value Smoothing value Low limit for transmission of measured value High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter Activation (Object-Specific Parameter) Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter) File transfer in monitor direction File transfer in control direction F_FR_NA_1 F_FR_NA_1
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
B-19

(continued)
B 3 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 This section incorporates Section 8 of IEC 60870-5-103, including definitions applicable to the P437. B 3.1 B 3.1.1 B 3.1.1.1 x x Interoperability Physical Layer Electrical Interface
EIA RS 485 No. of loads 32 for one device
Note: EIA RS 485 defines the loads in such a way that 32 of such loads can be operated on one line. For detailed information see EIA RS 485, Section 3. B 3.1.1.2 x x x Optical Interface
Glass fiber Plastic fiber F-SMA connector BFOC/2.5 connector
B 3.1.1.3 x x
Transmission Rate
9,600 bit/s 19,200 bit/s
B-20
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
B 3.1.2
Link Layer
There are no selection options for the link layer. B 3.1.3 B 3.1.3.1 Application Layer Transmission Mode for Application Data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4 is used exclusively in this companion standard. B 3.1.3.2 x Common Address of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (identical to the station address) More than one COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
B 3.1.3.3
Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
B 3.1.3.3.1
INF x x x x x < 0> < 0> < 2> < 3> < 4> < 5>
System Functions in Monitor Direction

Description End of general interrogation Time synchronization Reset FCB Reset CU Start / restart Power on
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
B-21

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.2
INF x x x x x x <16> <17> <18> <19> <20> <21> <22> x x x x x x x x <23> <24> <25> <26> <27> <28> <29> <30>
Status Indications in Monitor Direction

Description Auto-recloser active Teleprotection active Protection active LED reset Blocking of monitor direction Test mode Local parameter setting Characteristic 1 Characteristic 2 Characteristic 3 Characteristic 4 Auxiliary input 1 Auxiliary input 2 Auxiliary input 3 Auxiliary input 4 036 090 036 091 036 092 036 093 034 000 034 001 034 002 034 003 PSS: Group 1 Enabled PSS: Group 2 Enabled PSS: Group 3 Enabled PSS: Group 4 Enabled LOGIC: Input 1 EXT LOGIC: Input 2 EXT LOGIC: Input 3 EXT LOGIC: Input 4 EXT P437 Designations Address Description 015 064 015 008 003 030 021 010 037 075 037 071 ARC: Enabled PSIG: Enabled MAIN: Protection enabled MAIN: Reset indicat. USER COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block. MAIN: Test mode
B-22
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.3
INF x x x x <32> <33> <35> <36> 11 <37> x x x x <38> <39> <46> <47>
Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction

Description Measurand supervision I Measurand supervision V Phase sequence supervision Trip circuit supervision I>> back-up operation VT fuse failure Teleprotection disturbed Group warning Group alarm P437 Designations Address Description 040 087 038 023 038 049 041 200 037 021 004 061 036 060 036 100 004 065 MCMON: Meas. circ. I faulty MCMON: Meas. circ. V faulty MCMON: Phase sequ. V faulty SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty BUOC: Active MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT PSIG: Telecom. faulty SFMON: Warning (relay) MAIN: Blocked/faulty
11
The message content is formed from the OR operation of the individual signals. B-23
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.4
INF <48> <49> <50> <51> <52>
Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction

Description Ground fault A Ground fault B Ground fault C Earth fault forward, i.e. line Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar P437 Designations Address Description
B-24
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.5
INF x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x <64> <65> <66> <67> <68> <69> <70> <71> <72> <73> <74> <75> <76> <77> <78> <79> <80> <81> <82> <83>
Fault Indications in Monitor Direction

Description Start /pick-up L1 Starting C Starting C Starting GF General trip Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip I>> (back-up operation) Fault location X in ohms Fault forward/line Fault reverse/busbar Teleprotection signal transmitted Teleprotection signal received Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 P437 Designations Address Device Description 036 001 036 002 036 003 036 004 036 071 036 072 036 073 036 074 036 014 004 029 036 018 036 019 036 035 037 029 036 026 036 027 036 028 036 029 036 030 036 031 MAIN: Starting A MAIN: Starting B MAIN: Starting C MAIN: Starting GF MAIN: Gen. trip command 1 MAIN: Trip command 1, A MAIN: Trip command 1, B MAIN: Trip command 1, C BUOC: Trip signal FT_DA: Fault react., prim. DIST: Fault forward / LS DIST: Fault backward / BS PSIG: Send PSIG: Receive (signal) DIST: t1 elapsed DIST: t2 elapsed DIST: t3 elapsed DIST: t4 elapsed DIST: t5 elapsed DIST: t6 elapsed
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
B-25

(continued)
INF x x <84> <85> <86> <87> <88> <89> <90> <91> <92> <93>
Description General starting Breaker failure Trip measuring system L1 Trip measuring system L2 Trip measuring system L3 Trip measuring system E Trip I> Trip I>> Trip IN> Trip IN>>
P437 Designations Address Device Description 036 000 036 017 MAIN: General starting CBF: CB failure
B-26
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.6
INF x x x <128> <129> <130>
Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction

Description CB on by AR CB on by long-time AR AR blocked P437 Designations Address Description 037 007 037 006 037 008 ARC: (Re)close signal HSR ARC: (Re)close signal TDR ARC: Not ready
B 3.1.3.3.7
INF x <144>
Measurands in Monitor Direction

Description Measurand I P437 Designations Address Description 006 041 MAIN: Current B p.u.
12
13
<145>
Measurands I, V
006 041 005 045 006 041 005 045 004 051 004 053 005 011 005 013 005 041 006 041 007 041 005 043 006 043 007 043 004 051 004 053 004 040
MAIN: Current B p.u. MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u. MAIN: Current B p.u. MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u. MAIN: Active power P p.u. MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u. MAIN: Current (IP) p.u. MAIN: Volt.(VPG)/3 p.u. MAIN: Current A p.u. MAIN: Current B p.u. MAIN: Current C p.u. MAIN: Voltage A-G p.u. MAIN: Voltage B-G p.u. MAIN: Voltage C-G p.u. MAIN: Active power P p.u. MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u. MAIN: Frequency f
14
<146>
Measurands I, V, P, Q
15
<147>
Measurands IN, VEN
16
<148>
Measurands IA,B,C, VA,B,C, P, Q, f
12 13
only with setting only with setting 14 only with setting 15 only with setting 16 only with setting
COMM1: COMM1: COMM1: COMM1: COMM1:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat Transm.enab.cycl.dat Transm.enab.cycl.dat Transm.enab.cycl.dat Transm.enab.cycl.dat
to "ASDU 3.1 p. IEC" to "ASDU 3.2 p. IEC" to "ASDU 3.3 p. IEC" to "ASDU 3.4 p. IEC" to "ASDU 9 p. IEC" B-27
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.8
INF <240> <241> <243> <244> <245> <249> <250> <251>
Generic Functions in Monitor Direction

Description Read headings of all defined groups Read values or attributes of all entries of one group Read directory of a single entry Read value or attribute of a single entry General interrogation of generic data Write entry with confirmation Write entry with execution Write entry abort
B-28
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
B 3.1.3.4
Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction
B 3.1.3.4.1
INF x x < 0> < 0>
System Functions in Control Direction

Description Initiation of general interrogation Time synchronization
B 3.1.3.4.2
INF x x x x x x x x <16> <17> <18> <19> <23> 17 <24> 18 <25> 19 <26> 20
General Commands in Control Direction

Description Auto-recloser on/off Teleprotection on/off Protection on/off LED reset Activate characteristic 1 Activate characteristic 2 Activate characteristic 3 Activate characteristic 4 P437 Designations Address Description 015 060 015 004 003 030 021 010 003 060 003 060 003 060 003 060 ARC: General enable USER PSIG: General enable USER MAIN: Protection enabled MAIN: Reset indicat. USER PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER
17 18
Switches Switches 19 Switches 20 Switches
PSS: PSS: PSS: PSS:
Param.subs.sel.USER Param.subs.sel.USER Param.subs.sel.USER Param.subs.sel.USER
to "Parameter set 1" to "Parameter set 2" to "Parameter set 3" to "Parameter set 4" B-29
P437/EN M/Bd8-S // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
B 3.1.3.4.3
INF <240> <241> <243> <244> <245> <248> <249> <250> <251>
Generic Functions in Control Direction

Description Read headings of all defined groups Read values or attributes of all entries of one group Read directory of a single entry Read value or attribute of a single entry General interrogation of generic data Write entry Write entry with confirmation Write entry with execution Write entry abort
B-30
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
B 3.1.3.5 x x x
Basic Application Functions
Test mode Blocking of monitor direction Disturbance data Generic services
Private data Miscellaneous
B 3.1.3.6
Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value. In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words, there is only one choice for each measurand. Measured value Max. MVAL = nom. value multiplied by 1,2 Current A Current B Current C Voltage A-G Voltage B-G Voltage C-G Enabled power P Reactive power Q Frequency f Voltage A-B or 2,4 x x x x x x x x x x
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
B-31

(continued)
B-32
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
Appendix C - Overview of Changes
P437 Overview of Changes Version P437-301-401-601 Release: 09.06.2000 P437-301-401-601-701 Release: 28.08.2000 Hardware Diagram Software COMM1 P437-302-402-602 Release: 20.11.2000 Hardware Diagram Software IRIG-B P437-302-402-602-702 Release: 20.02.2001 Hardware Diagram Software COMM1 P437-302-402-602-703 Release: 27.07.2001 Hardware Diagram Software MAIN Realization of a single-pole enabling/disabling of the protection via the binary input function 003 026 MAIN: Disable protect. EXT. An additional variant with ring terminal connection is now available. As an alternative there is now an optional communication module available, providing two serial interfaces and an IRIG-B input for time synchronization. The optional binary (I/O) module X(6O)T is now available with rapidresponse output by 4 thyristors. This new module is fitted to slot 18 as an alternative to the binary (I/O) module X(6O). Installing the devices into a panel is now possible in two variants: with and without angle brackets. The dimensional drawings for the cases and the required panel cutouts are included in the supporting documents supplied with the devices. Also included in the supporting documents are assembly diagrams and terminal connection diagrams. Diagram The updated diagram 402 now includes the additional COMM2 interface. Diagram 403 describes the variant with ring terminal connection. Various modifications of protocols to be consistent with MiCOM standards. No modifications No modifications New function used for clock time synchronization as per IRIG-B standard. No modifications No modifications Bug fixing in MODBUS protocol As an alternative there is now an optional communication module available providing an IRIG-B input for clock time synchronization. The updated diagram 402 now includes the new IRIG-B interface. No modifications No modifications Changes Initial product release
P437-303-402/403-603 Release: 28.01.2002
Hardware
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
C-1

(continued)
Version Software COMM2 FT_DA SFMON DIST
Changes Additional communication interface for remote access, protocol as per IEC 60870-5-103. Extended setting range for fault location output Correction in the range of peripheral fault signals SFMON: Meas. circ. V faulty Minimum starting time is now reduced to less than 10 ms. Distance zones may now be blocked individually via binary input signals, e.g. D I S T : B l o c k i n g Z 1 E X T . The Power Swing Blocking function has been revised completely. An Out of Step tripping has also been added. The permissive signaling scheme logic is further accelerated by processing the send and trip decisions within the distance task. Improved weak-infeed logic. PSIG ARC ASC GFSC GSCSG New functionality with equal-priority enabling or disabling of a function via any device interface.
PSB PSIG
P437-302-402-603-704 Release: 13.02.2002
Hardware Diagram Software f<>
No modifications No modifications Bug fixing No modifications No modifications Russian character set was corrected No modifications No modifications The acquisition of pole-selective CB status signals has been added, and the application of these status signals adapted to and enhanced in functions ARC, PSIG, GSCSG and MCMON. The new functionality of equal-priority enabling or disabling of a function via any device interface, first introduced with version 603, now is modified in such a way, that the functions are enabled by default.
P437-302-402-603-705 Release: 09.08.2002
Hardware Diagram Software LOC Hardware Diagram Software MAIN
P437-303-402/403-604 Release: 29.10.2002
PSIG ARC ASC GFSC GSCSG MEASO
Scaling of the BCD output of measurands now allows the setting of an output values range. This feature is required if signed event measurands are assigned to the BCD output (such as fault location or short-circuit reactance, etc.).
C-2
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Version P437-304-404/405-605 Release: 19.11.2002 Diagram Hardware
Changes Communication module A, with communication interface COMM3 (InterMiCOM), may be fitted to slot 16 as an alternative to module X 6I8O. The order information section has been extended. The upgraded connection diagrams P437.404 (for pin terminal connection) and P437.405 (for ring terminal connection) now include the connection scheme for communication interface COMM3. The value range of primary power measured values has been extended. New input signals allow direct transfer tripping without use of 'protective signaling scheme logic' (function group PSIG). COMM1(2) Bug fixing concerning the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol: For autoreclose, high-speed and time-delayed reclosing commands (function type 80h, information nos. 80h and 81h) were transmitted as part of the response to a general interrogation. The trip signal of back-up overcurrent (BUOC) was transmitted with ASDU 1 (instead of ASDU 2). New function group: COMM3 (InterMiCOM protection signaling interface) allows the configuration of end-end channel-aided schemes, without requiring discrete carrier equipment. The blocking signaling scheme logic is further accelerated by processing the send and trip decisions within the distance task. In case of DIST general starting instantaneously the blocking is send. The status signal G SC SG : T e l e c o m . fa u l ty was made available in conjunction with the implementation of the protective interface. Residual current measuring system: it is now possible to select whether the residual current value calculated from the three phase currents or the current value measured by the fourth CT is to be applied. DTOC ground fault protection is now able to operate in directional mode. IDMT Residual current measuring system: it is now possible to select whether the residual current value calculated from the three phase currents or the current value measured by the fourth CT is to be applied. The enable logic within the parameter subsets has been enhanced to the same state that the other devices in the MiCOM Px3x range provide. Accuracy of tripping time is improved. In particular, the 'IEC extremely inverse' characteristic is now within the claimed tolerance range. f<> Measurements of minimum frequency during an underfrequency situation and maximum frequency during an overfrequency situation have been added.
Software MAIN
COMM3
PSIG
GSCSG DTOC
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
C-3

(continued)
Version P437-304-404/405-605-706 Release: 30.01.2003 Hardware Diagram Software IDMT
Changes No modifications No modifications
The direction characteristic for short circuit direction measurement based on negative-sequence current and voltage is now corrected. When ANSI/IEEE characteristics with reset behavior according to characteristic are selected, the trip signal now resets as soon as 3% of the reset time has been exceeded. In previous versions the trip signal was only reset when the reset time had elapsed completely.
DTOC
DTOC ground fault protection stages set with no time delay (e.g. D T O C : tIN > = 0 s, etc.) are processed with a higher priority so as to ensure tripping times of < 30 ms. Accuracy of tripping time is improved. In particular, the 'IEC extremely inverse' characteristic is now within the claimed tolerance range. Bug notice: With this version only non-directional timer stage t3 will not operate when timer stage t2 is set to blocked!
GFSC
P437-304-404/405-605-707 Release: 12.02.2003
Hardware Diagram Software COMM3
No modifications No modifications
Minor modifications so that telegram errors on communication channels with heavy noise interference are better identified. Binary signal inputs with a higher switching threshold are now available. Installation is only recommended if the application specifically requires such binary signal inputs. No modifications
P437-304-404/405-605-708 Release: 28.07.2003
Hardware
Diagram Software COMM1(2) DIST
Advanced communications software was designed to cope with communication problems with ESC field units. Bug fixing: The distance protection function could fail to operate when angle settings 0 and zone extension factors kze > 2 were combined. Bug fixing: Voltage-measuring circuit monitoring was incorrectly blocked by the general starting (instead of the distance protection starting). This bug does not apply to the processing of the m.c.b. trip signal input and the fuse failure monitoring function. Bug fixing: If configured into the trip command 1 the signal (120 046) M AIN : T r a n s fe r tr i p . EXT did not lead to a start of ARC. This version has no release!
MCMON
ARC
P437-304-404/405-605-709 Release: ---
C-4
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Version P437-304-404/405-605-710 Release: --P437-304-404/405-606 Release: 11.11.2003 Hardware Diagram
Changes This version has no release!
This version is project-specific and only available on request! The Ethernet communication module is now available. The upgraded terminal connection diagrams include the Ethernet communication module interfaces:

P437.406 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection) P437.406 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
Software UCA2 P437-304-404/405-607 Release: 03.05.2004 Hardware Diagram Software UCA2 SFMON The UCA2 communication protocol was enhanced by GOOSE signals, event signals and fault transmission. A number of device bugs previously lead to a blocking with the second entry to the monitoring signal memory (i.e. if the recurring fault was already stored in the monitoring signal memory see Chapter 10 in the Technical Manual). This reaction was changed in such a manner that device blocking will only occur if a renewed appearance of the same device fault lies within a set "memory retention time" (021.018) S F M O N : M o n . s i g . r e t e n t i o n . This makes it possible to tolerate sporadic faults, resulting from control actions, without having to clear the monitoring signal memory in the interim. This makes it possible to tolerate sporadic faults, resulting from control actions, without having to clear the monitoring signal memory in the interim. The significance of the time stamp was modified to accommodate this new feature. The time stamp now represents the last appearance of the fault. DIST The transient blocking has been extended to block any distance zone trip decisions for 2 cycles after the global direction decision changed from backwards to forwards (only). Bug fixing: A transient undervoltage starting could occur with the switching on of a feeder, which led to an overreaction when the function SOTF was applied, with the operating mode set to Trip with starting. PSB Operating mode Z was added to the power swing detection function. The alteration speed of the resistance component of positive-sequence impedance, when entering the power swing detection polygon, is interpreted. In order to better control transient effects with the protection of seriescompensated lines the direction determination of the DTOC ground fault protection now operates with a 2-cycle Fourier filter. Initial implementation of the UCA2 communication protocol. No modifications No modifications
DTOC
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
C-5

(continued)
Version P437-304-404/405-608 Release: 23.07.2004 Hardware Diagram Software COMM1
Bug fixing: DNP3: Double transmission of spontaneous signals is now reliably prevented. MODBUS: Status signals of LED indicators are now supported. IEC870-5-101: Conversion from the 3-byte time tag (only for time of day) to the 7-byte time tag (time of day and date) at C O M M 1 : T i m e t a g l e n g t h is now supported.
COMM2
It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively after transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the COMM2/PC interface). (addr. 103 203 C O M M 2 : Po s i ti ve a c k n . fa u l t) The signal 036 050 AR C : Bl o c k i n g EXT is now stored in the fault record (previously only the resulting signal 004 069 AR C : Bl o c k e d was recorded). The CB close time (e.g. time from close command to closing of CB contacts) can now be set at addr. 000 032 M AIN : tC B,c l o s e . This time duration may be applied in the function ASC for the new functionality "switch on at point of synchronism". New signals: 037 252 M A I N : T r i p s i g n a l 1 , 1 p 037 253 M A I N : T r i p s i g n a l 1 , 3 p These signals (figure 3-61 in the P437 -610 Technical Manual) correspond to the previous signals M AIN : 1 - p o l e tr i p and M AIN : 3 - p o l e tr i p as shown in figure 3-50 in the P437 -602 Technical Manual.
FT_RC
MAIN
PSIG
New signal: 037 255 PSIG: Transient blocking This signal (figure 3-144 in the P437 -610 Technical Manual) corresponds to the previous signal PSIG : tr a n s i e n t b l o c k e d as shown in figure 3-126 in the P437 -602 Technical Manual.
ARC
HSR was extended by the 3-pole (only for 1p) operating mode. With this setting there is a three-pole HSR only with single-pole ground faults. The operating mode may now be set via binary signal inputs. The setting range of the discrimination time has been extended to 0.00 ... 600.00 s.
C-6
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Version ASC
Changes New functionality "Switch on at point of synchronism": In slightly asynchronous networks the reclose command can be controlled in such a way that it will be issued at the exact point of synchronism. The close command conditions can now be set individually for ARC and manual closing. The reference voltage Vref and the voltage from the corresponding measuring loop are stored as event data. GSCSG New signal: 037 254 G SC SG : Transient blocking This signal (figure 3-222 in the P437 -610 Technical Manual) corresponds to the previous internal signal GSC SG : tr a n s i e n t b l o c k e d as shown in figure 3-191 in the P437 -602 Technical Manual.
P437-304-404/405-608-711 Release: 10.2004
Hardware Diagram Software COMM1 COMM2 PC FT_DA
No modifications No modifications
The fault location X in Ohms (F T _ D A : F a u l t r e a c t . , p r i m . addr. 004 029, function type 80h, information no. 49h) is now suppressed at the interface (i.e. the telegram is not sent), if its value is 'Not measured. Bug fixing: Fault locations of numerical values > 655.35 % were falsely displayed as small values. The output of the primary short-circuit reactance F T _ D A : F a u l t r e a c t . , p r i m . (addr. 004 029) is now made in the same way as the fault location. The measuring window for fault data acquisition is determined by the distance element only if the fault duration is shorter than 55 ms.
PSIG
The blocking logic for the weak-infeed logic was extended. With the occurrence of a general starting no longer an immediate output of the send signal is done (as introduced with version -605) when the operating mode was set to Blocking scheme. It is now only possible to send the blocking signal within the distance protection task after the distance directional decision backward or 'zone 6' decision is determined (depending on the operating mode set for sending).
ARC
Function change: There is no longer a zone extension with a rapid reclosure (RRC) when the parameter at A R C : Z o n e e x t . d u r . R C P S x ( addr. 015 088) is set to Following HSR. The new hardware variant now offers, per ordering option, two additional operating thresholds for the binary signal inputs: >73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V) (Order ext. No. -463) >146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) (Order ext. No. -464) Installation of the standard variant is still generally recommended if the application does not specifically require such binary signal inputs with higher operating thresholds. C-7
P437-306-406/407-609 Release: 25.02.2005
Hardware
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Version Diagram Software COMM1
Changes No modifications
Bug fixing: Where the Courier protocol was selected a device warm restart occurred when individual communication parameters were changed (e.g. baud rate, address, etc.). The recording duration for binary signals is now limited to 1 minute in order to prevent recording of endless events. The direct transfer trip function has now been extended by dedicated send signals so as to avoid latching, which could occur when the trip signal was used as a send signal. Bug fixing: An erroneous loop selection could occur with a two-phase short circuit fault between phases C and A, which then led to incorrect distance and directional decisions, when only the overcurrent starting for phase A was triggered and phase C starting was only activated because of a current plausibility check [setting 010 040 M AIN : T r a n s fe r fo r 1 p to P or G = f(Imed,Imax)] Bug fixing: In one case an unwanted overreaction of the fuse failure monitoring function was observed, which led to distance protection blocking when a short circuit in the power system had occurred. In the new version the functional sequence has been enhanced and the default value for the negative voltage threshold was set to a higher value (addr. 031 056 M C M O N : V n e g > , FF = 0.16 Vnom). The function parameters are now available in the parameter subsets so as to provide adjustment to changed operating conditions. An additional sensitive ground overcurrent threshold is now available. Bug notice: Unfortunately this current threshold is permanently active (not limited to the duration of the 'manual close' time) and can therefore not be applied as intended. This is corrected with version -610.
FT_RC MAIN
DIST
MCMON
SOTF
PSIG
The tripping logic in the Zone extension operating mode has been accelerated by additionally processing this logic within the distance protection task. Now typical tripping times of 20 30 ms can be obtained (without delay from signal transmission). The weak-infeed logic has been extended by an external blocking option (addr. 036 255 P S I G : B l o c k . w e a k i n f . E X T ).
ARC
Bug fixing: The change of operating mode via binary inputs previously was only accepted if the relay was switched from off-line mode back to on-line mode. The residual current stage has been enhanced with a minimum trip time and a minimum trip current threshold. Bug notice: In this version the directional dependence of the residual current stage is not operational. This is corrected with version -610.
IDMT
C-8
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Version P437-306-406/407-609-712 Release: project-specific Hardware Diagram Software PSIG
Bug fixing: When PSIG : O p e r a ti n g m o d e P S x = Release scheme and P S I G : O p e r . m o d e s e n d P S x = Direction-dependent are combined, a send signal with interruptions may occur. No modifications No modifications
P437-306-406/407-609-713 Release: 30.10.2005
Hardware Diagram Software ASC
Bug fixing: In version 608 the internal timer clock was corrupted during the ASC operative time. This led to implausible time tags added to binary signals, which in turn made fault records difficult to interpret. Protection functions were in no way affected. Bug fixing: In version 608 the offset angle ASC : Ph i o ffs e t PSx was considered too small by a factor of 10 (for instance when set to 90 an internal value of only 9 was considered).
P437-307-408/409-610 Release: 26.02.2006
Hardware
A processor board with a DSP coprocessor is now available. This coprocessor provides a better overall performance of the supplementary functions of the device. The descriptions of the binary signal inputs and output relays have now been aligned to Px3x standard, i.e. they are generally identified by the slot number (1 or 2 digits) and consecutive number (2 digits). Example: K2001 instead of K201 (= first output on slot 20). Note: Software version 610 is compatible with all previous hardware releases.
Diagram
Software IEC GOOSE GSSE
The new communication protocol per IEC 61850 is implemented. Function groups GOOSE and GSSE: Implementation of communication procedures for the exchange of binary information in an Ethernet network section. Function group GSSE is compatible to previous UCA2-GOOSE. Function group GOOSE is acc. to IEC 61850-GOOSE. This firmware does not support the UCA2 communication protocol. Bug fixing: The signal L O G IC : O u tp u t 3 2 ( t) 042 095 was missing in the selection tables for the function assignment to output relays, LED indicators and the InterMiCOM communication interface. The mean acquisition time for binary input signals has been reduced: with DSP: mean value is 2.1 ms (range 0...6 ms) without DSP: mean value is 6.5 ms (range 0...12 ms).
UCA2 OUTP LED COMM3 INP
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
C-9

(continued)
Version MAIN
Changes In view of the '3-pole (only for 1p)' ARC operating mode the phaseselective direct transfer trip logic has been modified so that no 3-pole transfer trip will occur with single-pole faults. A distance-based phase selection logic has been implemented, which allows phase selective 1-pole tripping of ground faults by integrated supplementary functions (e.g. GFSC or DTOC ground fault protection) or from external parallel protection devices operating in 3-pole mode (e.g. phase comparison protection). Priority control of clock synchronization is now settable. Bug fixing: Signal L O G IC : O u tp u t 3 2 ( t) was missing in the function assignment selection list of the trip commands. SFMON In the course of platform harmonization the configuration table of the user defined alarm condition has been supplemented by the instantaneous outputs 3032 and the timed outputs 3032 (t) of the programmable LOGIC:
098 053 098 054 098 055 098 056 098 057 098 058 SFMON: SFMON: SFMON: SFMON: SFMON: SFMON: Output Output Output Output Output Output 30 ~ 042 090 L O G I C : 3 0 ( t ) ~ 042 091 L O G I C : 31 ~ 042 092 L O G I C : 3 1 ( t ) ~ 042 093 L O G I C : 32 ~ 042 094 L O G I C : 3 2 ( t ) ~ 042 095 L O G I C : Output Output Output Output Output Output 30 30 (t) 31 31 (t) 32 32 (t)
These logic outputs are included in the warning signals by setting SF M O N : F c t. a s s i g n . w a r n i n g and they are also recorded in the monitoring signal memory. These signals can be used to create an alarm signal under complex application conditions. This signaling has no influence on the device's operation (i.e. no warm restart or blocking). FT_RC Bug fixing: The logging of the following signals was done in the next processing cycle, typically 10 ms later than when the actual state changed: 037 254 G SC SG : T r a n s i e n t b l o c k i n g 035 047 D T O C : F a u l t N fo r w a r d 035 048 D T O C : Fault N backward It can be selected whether grading timers are triggered from the general starting condition or with the respective zone starting signal. Zone 1 and 2 now can be blocked during 1-pole HSR dead time. The reactance reach of the zones can now be set separately for phaseground and phase-phase measuring loops. The max. settable reach value has been extended to 400 . The ground fault starting condition has been made settable by an 'OR'-linked or an 'AND'-linked condition of the IN> and VNG> thresholds, if the system star point is low-impedance grounded. MCMON Fuse failure detection is now blocked during CB open conditions.
DIST
C-10
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Version SOTF
Changes The function has been supplemented by a 'Line dead' detector e.g. SOTF will only be active if the line has been de-energized for at least a set minimum time period. Bug fixing: The residual current stage introduced in SOTF with version P437 -609 is now active only during the manual close time. PSIG In view of the '3-pole (only for 1p)' ARC operating mode the weak-infeed logic has been modified so that no 3-pole trip will occur with single-pole faults. The function is now also available when DIST is blocked by a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit (MCMON) and BUOC is not configured (external backup protection), but it is without rapid reclosure (RRC). By setting a parameter, either the internally calculated value or the measured value for the neutral-point displacement voltage can now be used. The directional measurement has been enhanced by a settable compensation reactance (zero-sequence current compensation method) to allow correct operation on series-compensated lines irrespective of the power system's supply conditions. GSCSG DTOC The user-settable blocking conditions have been expanded so as to deal safely with time-critical applications in conjunction with the ARC function. Triggering of the residual current timer stages can now occur either when the current threshold is exceeded or, additionally when a directional decision is made (settable). Negative-sequence and residual current stages may now be set so that they are blocked during the 1-pole dead time of the high-speed reclosure (HSR) of an ARC cycle. The directional dependence of the ground fault stages may now be blocked by a binary signal input function; when blocked the respective stage operates as non-directional. IDMT Directional measurement, based on the negative-sequence current has been adapted to the new method as implemented in GFSC, and the previously fixed compensation impedance has been replaced by a settable compensation reactance. Bug fixing: With version P437 609 the ground fault stage operated always as nondirectional, regardless of the setting. CBF LOGIC The complete revision of the circuit breaker failure protection function now includes a current flow break criterion. Bug fixing: Signal L O G IC : O u tp u t 3 2 ( t) 042 095 was missing in the function assignment selection list of the 32 equations.
ARC
GFSC
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
C-11

(continued)
Version P437-307-408/409-610-714 Release: 20.09.2006 Hardware Diagram Software MCMON
Changes No changes No changes
Bug fixing: From version 610 the Ineg monitoring was without function. The signal M C M O N M e a s . c i r c . I fa u l ty (0 4 0 0 8 7 ) could not become active. Bug fixing: Correct BUOC tripping times were re-established. With version -610 a change was implemented to allow that ARC remains ready in case of a voltage measurement circuit failure, even if no BUOC protection is configured. Unfortunately, due this change, the BUOC then tripped instantaneously, if ARC was ready. Also a HSR cycle was initiated from the BUOC trip, even if the BUOC operating mode is set to "without ARC". No changes No changes
BUOC
P437-307-408/409-610-715 Release: 09.10.2006
Hardware Diagram Software IEC
Bug fixings: The inactivity timer is removed, which caused a disconnection of the device (server) after approx. 49 days (with no messages received from the client). After unintentional disconnection or interruption of the communication between a remote PC (setting software MiCOM S1) and the relay via tunneling feature, the communication unit of the relay remained in an open status for the tunnel and no further connection from remote PC to this relay was possible. Only after a warm restart of the device (e.g. power-down-up-cycle) the relay is again available for a new remote connection. This problem is now solved by introducing a connection monitoring timer.
COMM1 P437-307-408/409-611 Release: 28.02.2007 Hardware Diagram Software IEC GOOSE GSSE COMM1
Minor corrections in Modbus and IEC 60870-5-101 protocols (new communication firmware module 3.18). No changes No changes
Enhancements of protocol implementation:

2nd SNTP server VLAN priority
Bug fixing: The following spontaneous messages were missing: 034.047 MAIN Manual trip signal A 034.048 MAIN Manual trip signal B 034.049 MAIN Manual trip signal C
C-12
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Version DIST
Changes Improved measuring logic to provide fast 3-pole tripping in case of phase-phase-ground faults, with one phase-ground loop impedance getting significantly slower into zone 1. The underimpedance starting logic has been improved to pick up faster in case of faults with almost no change in current magnitude. The directional characteristic is now settable. PSB Separate counters for number of stable swings as well as number of pole slips have been implemented. These counters are accomplished by settable levels at which binary signals are raised that could be used for tripping purposes. Bug fixing:
The Z detection did not operate in all cases, if the apparent impedance moved from the left to the right into the power swing detection zone. The maximum blocking timer was not correctly re-triggered each time when entering the power swing detection zone. Thus it could by chance time out during a consecutive power swing cycle.
SOTF PSIG
The SOTF dead line detection logic could now be enabled or disabled. Transient blocking timer is now always started upon reset of DIST backward direction decision. Weak-Infeed Logic blocking feature has been modified to provide poleselective blocking by CB auxiliary contact information (52a inputs). The scheme logic has been enhanced to cope 3-ended line applications. The binary signal PSIG : R e c e i ve EXT was renamed to PSIG : R e c e i ve ( A) EXT (036 048) and a new signal PSIG : R e c e i ve ( B) EXT (006 037) was added. For a 3-ended line application, the setting P S I G : 3 e n d e d l i n e p r o t P S x can now be set to Yes, which has the effect of an (internally calculated) logical and of these two binary signals. After all, the result is made available in PSIG : R e c e i ve (006 036), which takes the place of the previous PSIG : R e c e i ve EXT (036 048).
PSIG
The distance dependent send logic has been modified for improved operation in case of 2pG faults: If fault direction signals forward and backward are present at the same time, the send signal is based on the selective Z1 decision only (not on Z1e). Bug fixing: In distance-dependent blocking scheme, the PSIG tripping time was not started, if the zone timing setting was 001.236 DIST Zone timer start = With zone starting.
ARC
Zone 1 extension tripping during reclosing is now executed from ARC, even if PSIG is in operation. The duration of the zone extension is as long as the set reclose command (015.067 MAIN Close cmd.pulse time), efen if the reclose command is stopped because of the close-signal from the CB (015.042 MAIN RC inhib.by CB close = Yes).
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
C-13

(continued)
Version ASC
Changes The selection of voltage control conditions (operating modes) has been enlarged by an exclusive-OR condition, i.e. (re-)closing is enabled, if exactly one side is dead while the other side must be live (setting abbreviated N V&Vref or V&n Vref means (NOT V AND Vref) OR (V AND NOT Vref)). In operating mode Vref & Z1 but not V the meaning of Z1 has been changed to DIST zone Z1 trip OR protective signaling Z1e trip, so reclosure is possible if the primary fault is on the line. GFSC The user settable blocking condition of the function has been changed to an m-out-of-n selection, using the same enlarged list as for GSCSG. Consequentially, the previous setting 002.137 GFSC: Block. w. DIST start is removed. For ground faults with small neutral displacement voltage an optional virtual current polarisation has been implemented. This feature uses a faulty phase selector, which is based on the measured change of phase currents. Along with the signaling scheme (GSCSG) the priority of the function has been changed to provide faster 1-pole trips. GSCSG The selection list for user defined blocking conditions (002.180 GSCSG: Fct.assign. blocking) has been further expanded by internal trip decisions as well as parallel and transfer trip signals. The tripping timer is now started from 039.088 GFSC IN> triggered signal only. Transient blocking timer is now always started upon reset of a GSCSG backward direction decision. P<> Directional power protection function is now available. The device is now equipped with a new HMI, which provides 6 additional keys and LED indicators. The freely configurable LED indicators (H 4 H 16, H 18 H 23) are provided as multi-color LEDs and, depending on the trigger signal, will show red, green or amber (mixture of red and green) light. No changes.
P437-308-408/409-612 Release: 31.12.2007
Hardware
Diagram Software LOC
Two menu jump lists can be defined independently for any of the function keys. The L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y setting was renamed to L O C : F c t . R e a d k e y (080 110).
C-14
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Version IEC
Changes Implementation of active monitoring of the communications data links to logged-on clients with the parameter I E C : T C P k e e p - a l i v e t i m e r (104 062). (This active monitoring now replaces previous passive monitoring by parameter IEC : In a c ti vi ty ti m e r (104 050).) Implementation of an automatic switchover to daylight saving time, activated by parameter IEC : Sw i tc h .d a yl .s a v.ti m e (104 219). Switchover times for the automatic switch to daylight saving time are governed by the following settings: IEC : D a yl .s a v.ti m e s ta r t (104 220) IEC : D a yl .s a v.ti m e s t. d (104 221) IEC : D a yl .s a v.ti m e s t. m (104 222) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + (104 223) IEC: Dayl.sav.time end (104 225) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e e n d d (104 226) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e e n d m (104 227) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . e n d 0 : 0 0 + (104 228) Instead of setting a router address and target network, so as to establish a communication link to a client situated exterior to the local network, now only the setting of the gateway address is required via I E C : G a t e w a y a d d r e s s (104 011). Now 'unbuffered reports' are available for all logical nodes. The previous I E C : D e a d b a n d ^ v a l u e (104 051) was split into various measurement-specific values: IEC: Dead band IP (104 230) IEC: Dead band IN (104 231) IEC: Dead band VPP (104 232) IEC: Dead band VPG (104 233) IEC: Dead band f (104 234) IEC: Dead band P (104 235) IEC: Dead band phi (104 236) IEC: Dead band Z (104 237) I E C : D e a d b a n d m i n / m a x (104 238) IEC: Dead band ASC (104 239) IEC: Dead band temp. (104 240) IEC: Dead band 20mA (104 241) F_KEY LED SFMON The new function group F_KEY has been introduced to do all the settings related to the function keys. The function group LED was enhanced to do the color-specific settings related to the multi-colored LEDs. The following signals have been added to the selection lists for the warning (Alarm) signaling: SFMON M.c.b. trip VNG (098 132) SFMON Setting error PSB (098 128)
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
C-15

(continued)
Version MAIN
Changes The reset functions have been extended: Now there are two group reset parameters available, each of which will "simultaneously" reset several memories. The assignment of eligible memories to the two group reset parameters is configurable. The group reset is now issued by a manual reset from the local control panel, and may also be created by linking it to a binary signal input or a function key. In similar fashion a selection of memories to be reset may be assigned to the CLEAR key situated on the local control panel. Now each time the CLEAR key is pressed not only the LED indicators and the display are reset but the selected memory is also reset immediately. The signal SF M O N M .c .b . tr i p VN G ( 0 9 8 1 3 2 ) has been added to the selection lists for a relay fault (Blocked/faulty) signaling. DIST Bug fixing: In the unlikely case that mutual compensation is used and the ground factor angle kG of the line was set > 0, the impedance measurement of phase-ground loops was using a wrong neutral current compensation. This error affects only standard processor hardware without DSP coprocessor (up to -306). It results in false directional decisions, which would have been identified during normal commissioning tests. The following parameters are now set in units of Vnom/3 (instead of Vnom): D IST : VN G > PSx (010 056) (010 076) (010 096) (011 016) D IST : VN G > > PSx (010 062) (010 082) (011 002) (011 022) The Out of Step tripping feature is enhanced by a new Counting-based Tripping features and settable OOS detection zones, which allow different operation, depending on whether the electrical center of the power swing is on the protected line or outside. A new option S O T F : A c t i v a t i o n m o d e P S x allows for switching the function permanently active during dead line condition. The undervoltage threshold of the dead line detector is changed to the new value 0.7 Vnom/3. Furthermore, the dead line detector is accomplished by an undercurrent detector and an operate-delay timer. The overcurrent protection is enhanced by an additional phase overcurrent detection. PSIG A new option P S I G : S t a r t c o n d . t V < P S x (006 148) allows for having the weak-infeed timer triggered only if the undervoltage condition and the weak-infeed starting are both present. The signal D IST G e n e r a l s t a r t i n g ( 0 3 6 2 4 0 ) has been added to the selection lists for user-defined GFSC blocking conditions. The current reversal condition has been changed so that transient blocking gets established each time the G F SC F a u l t b a c k w a r d / B S 0 3 9 0 9 1 ) decision resets (whether or not a forward decision comes up is of no relevance any more). The GSCSG Trip timer is now triggered by G F SC F a u l t fo r w a r d / L S (0 3 9 0 9 0 ) decision instead of starting condition only.
PSB
SOTF
GFSC GSCSG
C-16
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Version GSCSG
Changes The blocking of the function in case of a voltage measuring circuit failure is now changed in the same way as done with GFSC since version -610: If GFSC operates on measured VNG, then the functions get only blocked, if this VNG measuring circuit is defect, otherwise, if GFSC operates on VNG calculated from the 3 phase voltages, then the functions get blocked, if the 3phase voltage measuring circuit is defect. The signal D IST G e n e r a l s t a r t i n g ( 0 3 6 2 4 0 ) has been added to the selection lists for user-defined GSCSG blocking conditions. Send logic has been modified to prevent Echo after current reversal conditions or if the receive signal is still present, while local GFSC already resets. The following parameters are now set in units of Vnom/3 (instead of Vnom): D T O C : VN G > PSx (010 045) (010 060) (010 080) (011 139) The signal C BF fa i l u r e ( 0 3 6 0 1 7 ) is now available as compatible IEC-60870-5-103 spontaneous message. The following parameters are now set in units of Vnom/3 (instead of Vnom): L IM IT : VN G > (014 043) L IM IT : VN G > > (014 044) No changes. No changes.
DTOC CBF LIMIT
P437-308-408/409-613 Release: 15.06.2009
Hardware Diagram Software IEC
COMM1
MAIN
FT_DA
MMXU: Limitation of number of reports: Only those measured values out of a report are transmitted the value of which has changed by a delta greater than the dead band. (Previously all values were transmitted whenever one of the values changed by a delta greater than the dead band.) Bug fixing: Comtrade fault transmission: Error with 5A nominal current. The rated secondary current (1A/5A) is taken into account for scaling of the measured values. Wrong Comtrade filename with IEC 61850 fault extraction in case of a fault number greater than 999. Bug fixing: In the MODBUS protocol only the eight VDEW channels were transmitted, but not the analog channels Vref and IIN,par. Under special circumstances discrepancies obetween the timestamps of a spontaneous message and the operating data recording were possible. Circuit breaker position signaling operates correctly now even if only the binary input M AIN : C B c l o s e d 3 p EXT is configured. The option COMM1 for the source of clock synchronization was renamed to COMM1/IEC. Bug fixing: The setting parameter M A I N : G r o u n d s t a r t i n g P S x was without function, ground starting always occured based upon IN> OR VNG>. Without clock synchronization via IRIG-B or IEC steps in system time were possible. Bug fixing: The calculation of (004 029) F T _ D A: F a u l t r e a c t . , p r i m . used only Vnom = 100V. C-17
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Version FT_RC
Changes Bug fixing: The following messages were not logged in the fault recording: (036 024) P S B : Z w i t h i n p o l y g o n (006 192) P S B : T r i p s i g n a l O O S ( b ) The selection of formulae for calculating the PG impedances of the starting measuring system (to avoid under impedance startings due to apparent impedances) was enhanced by another option, which uses the real value of the ground factor kG: V PG Z PG = I P (1 + kG ) This calculation method is selected by setting D I S T : Z e v a l u a t i o n P S x to ZPG=VPG/IP*(1 + kG). The following parameters have new default values: DIST: Zv,LE PSx 0 DIST: Zv,LL PSx 0 D I S T : k , L E K U P S x 1,50 DIST: k,LL KU P S x 1,50 DIST: k,LE LU P S x 1,50 DIST: k,LL LU P S x 1,50 The duration of a starting signal issued at an instable power swing was limited to 100 ms. (006 035) P S B : T r i p s i g n a l O O S ( a ) (006 192) P S B : T r i p s i g n a l O O S ( b ) The counter (006 188) P S B : N o . O O S - S w i n g ( b ) was removed, and therefore (006 026) was renamed from P S B : N o . O O S - S w i n g ( a ) to PSB: No. OOS-Swing. Bug fixing: The counters (for the number of stable and instable cycles of the last power swing) were reset when the max. blocking time elapsed.
DIST
DIST
PSB
C-18
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(continued)
Version PSIG
Changes For 3-ended line applications there are now separate signals for transmission errors, related to the two transmission channels: (004 064) PSIG : T e l e c .fa u l ty ( A) EXT (008 094) PSIG : T e l e c .fa u l ty ( B) EXT The echo is issued (in consideration of the operating delay and the CB status signals) as soon as at least one PSIG signal is received (independent of PSIG : 3 e n d e d l i n e p r o t P S x ) and there is no distinct general starting. The following change was introduced with version -611: If for a 2pG fault or for an inter-system fault on double circuit lines there are forward and backward (reverse) decisions present at the same time, then the send signal is based on the selective Z1 decision only (not on Z1e). This was again modified as of the current version -613, so that this is not the case with the setting P S I G : 3 e n d e d l i n e p r o t P S x = Yes, because this functionality could result in an under functioning of the Protective Signaling in case of 3-ended line applications (different lengths of the line parts, different feed-in power). The default value of the parameter PSIG : Ec h o o n r e c e i ve PSx was changed to Without. Bug fixing: After changing an offline parameter no more echo was issued until the warm restart. CBF LOGIC The setting parameter (011 067) C BF : tC BF is no longer useful and was therefore removed. Increase of the number of logic inputs from 16 to 40.
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
C-19
P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
C-20
Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE Phone: Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 Publishing: Schneider Electric 11/2010
www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P437/EN M/Bd8 // AFSV.12.10331 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613
2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
MiCOM P437
Distance Protection Device P437/EN AD/Ae8
(AFSV.12.10960 D) Version P437 -308 -408/409 -613 P437 -308 -408/409 -614
Upgrade Documentation
P437, Changes in software version -613 to -614
In the new versions of the Distance Protection Device MiCOM P437, several enhanced features and changes on existing features have been included. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below: References Released 15.06.2009 Version P437-308-408/409-613 Documentation Technical Manual P437/EN M/Bd8 (AFSV.12.10331 EN)
Note: The software versions P437-61x constitute a product line that was developed independent to versions P437-63x. (The main difference is that the device versions with software versions P437-63x feature the phase 2 implementation of function group IEC whereas software versions P437-61x continue with the phase 1 implementation.)
P437/EN AD/Ae8 // AFSV.12.10960 D /// P437-308-408/409-614

(continued)
1 Version P437-308-408/409-614
Overview Changes Hardware Diagram No change No change
Release: 07.01.2011
Software PC The following menu point has been removed: P C : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 183) Note: Compatibility even with older versions of the operating program continues to be guaranteed. In order to guarantee full compatibility with PACiS the neutral-point displacement voltage (calculated and measured) as well as the residual current (calculated and measured) were assigned to the node MMXU so that the node MSQI now includes only the positive-sequence and negative-sequence values. The data point C O M M 1 : - 1 0 3 p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 178) may now be used to select between the 103 protocol variants Private and Compatible. The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the VDEW implementation. Note: As before this setting is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled. The data point C O M M 1 : M O D B U S p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 214) may now be used to select between the MODBUS protocol variants Private and Compatible. The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the MODBUS implementation in the MiCOM Px20 and Px40 protection devices. The protocol variant Private corresponds to the first implementation of the MODBUS protocol. Note: As before this setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled. The menu points C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 161) and C O M M 2 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (103 161) can no longer be set by using a selection list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may now be defined as free text. The default is SE but, in individual cases, it may become necessary to enter texts differing from the default. Notes: These parameters can only be set using the operating program and it is not possible to set them locally using the integrated local control panel (HMI). The maximum text length is 8 characters and designations exceeding this will be truncated. The parameter C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled. The default setting of passwords for function keys has been changed. A password is now no longer required when pressing a function key. However, it remains possible to configure a password for each individual function key.
IEC
COMM1
COMM1
COMM1, COMM2
F_KEY
P437/EN AD/Ae8 // AFSV.12.10960 D /// P437-308-408/409-614
P437/EN AD/Ae8 // AFSV.12.10960 D /// P437-308-408/409-614
Customer Care Centre

http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P437/EN AD/Ae8 // AFSV.12.10960 D /// P437-308-408/409-614
MiCOM P437
Distance Protection Device P437/EN AD/Bk8
(AFSV.12.10541 D) Version P437 -308 -408/409 -613 P437 -308 -408/409 -630
Upgrade Documentation
Contents
1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5
Overview Functional Details Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC) Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE) Power Swing Blocking (Function group PSB) Protective Signaling (Function group PSIG) Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC)
5 7 7 19 30 34 36
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-3

(continued)
In the new version of the P437 several enhanced features and changes on existing features have been included. These are described with references to the Technical Manual listed below. References Released 15.06.2009 Version P437-308-408/409-613 Documentation Technical Manual P437/EN M/Bd8 (AFSV.12.10331 D)
U-4
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
1 Version P437-308-408/409-630 Release: 10.09.2009
Overview Changes
Hardware
No changes
Diagram Software IEC GOOSE
No changes
Phase 2 of the IEC 61850 communications protocol has been implemented. See section "Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)" for a detailed description of the numerous function enhancements carried out. Enhancement of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol: These signals are now transmitted spontaneously in the private range: (008 094) P S I G : T e l e c . f a u l t y ( B ) E X T (040 055) C B F : E n a b l e d The default setting of passwords for function keys has been modified. Now no password entry is required when a function key is pressed. A password may still be configured individually for each function key. New signal: (009 109) MAIN: Time synchronized
COMM1
F_KEY
MAIN FT_RC
Bug fixing: In the offline operation mode the fault trigger (036 089) F T _ R C : T r i g g e r E X T was not functioning. Bug fixing: Up to version P437-612 these signals were signaled as not ending: (038 045) D I S T : D i r . u s i n g V m e a s S y s 1 (038 105) D I S T : D i r . u s i n g V m e a s S y s 2 (038 108) D I S T : D i r . u s i n g V m e a s S y s 3 (038 047) D I S T : D i r . u s i n g V m e m S y s 1 (038 106) D I S T : D i r . u s i n g V m e m S y s 2 (038 109) D I S T : D i r . u s i n g V m e m S y s 3 (038 044) D I S T : F o r w . w / o m e a s . S y s 1 (038 104) D I S T : F o r w . w / o m e a s . S y s 2 (038 107) D I S T : F o r w . w / o m e a s . S y s 3 (The distance protection function was in no way affected.) In addition calculation of the impedance angle was corrected which, with distorted current signals, may have led to erroneous zone decisions by the distance protection function.
DIST
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-5

(continued)
Version PSB
Changes With the operating mode set to 'S' the threshold value can be exceeded when the apparent power is at a low value. This is caused by a natural fluctuation of the measured value during normal operations. It resulted in the irritating signals (036 058) P S B : O p e r a t e d e l a y r u n n . To cope with this problem the apparent power is now measured only after it has entered the power swing polygon. The settable extension of the blocking effect is now available which will become active after a current trigger has started or after the maximum blocking time period has elapsed. Load blinding is now available within the power swing polygon. With (008 248) P S B : B l o c k i n g E X T a blocking signal is now available with which PSB protection can be blocked. The designation texts for the following data points have been corrected: (006 187) PSB: negX (OOS) was previously: PSB: negX (OOS) (006 026) PSB: No. OOS-Swing was previously: PSB: No. OOS PSIG ASC The three-ended line feature has been extended by phase-selective input signals. When the operating mode is set to 'Vref & Z1 but not V' (see data points A S C : A R O p . m o d e v - c h k . P S x and A S C : M C o p . m o d e v - c h k . P S x ) the meaning of the condition 'Z1' has been changed such that it is now no longer dependent on the tripping signals issued by individual protections but on the recognition that the General trip has occurred during operative time 1 of the ARC. A test triggering by RC parameters is now available for functional testing. CBF The designation text for the parameter at 022 160 was modified: The label for the threshold value was changed from I> to I< for consistency with the characteristic.
U-6
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
2 2.1
Functional Details Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)
As a further option the device provides the interface protocol according to Ethernetbased communication standard IEC 61850. As of firmware version 630 of the P437, the implementation and configuration of the IEC communication interface are now different from previous design versions. IEC 61850 IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard. The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability for two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation. This communication standard IEC 61850 has now created an open and common basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level, for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands. For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal images. The following documentation providing the description of the IEC 61850 data model used with this unit is available:
An XML-based IDC file in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language) with a description of data, properties and services, available from the unit, that are to be imported into the configuration tool "IED Configurator or into a system configurator. A PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available services. MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available object types. ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with the device data model as per IEC 61850.
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-7

(continued)
Ethernet Module The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection of which of the two interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter [IC ]: M e d i a . Note: Setting parameters from the IEC function group and identified by "[IC ]:..." provide information only. They are set with the "IED Configurator", but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program.
There are two ordering variants available for the fiber-optic interface: the ST connector and the SC connector both for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm (a third variant ST connector for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm is pending). The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s. The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote access with the MiCOM S1 support software (function group COMM2). Notes: The unit may be equipped with the optional Ethernet module only as an alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the Ethernet-based communication protocol IEC 61850 is available only as an alternative to function group COMM1.
Configuration and enabling The IEC function group can be included in the configuration by setting the parameter I E C : F u n c t i o n g r o u p I E C . This parameter is visible only if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After having included the parameter I E C : F u n c t i o n g r o u p I E C in the configuration the parameter I E C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R and the parameters for internal clock tracking are visible and freely configurable. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting IEC: General enable USER. The setting parameters from the IEC function group as well as the related function groups GOOSE and GSSE are not automatically active in the unit. The unit features two memory "banks" one of which includes the active setting parameters. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for parameters from the IED Configurator and the operating system. Specific project-related extensions of the IEC 61850 parameters from the IED Configurator are loaded into the unit by downloading a .MCL file. The inactive communication parameters are activated by executing the command I E C : S w i t c h C o n f i g . B a n k . This command may also be issued from the IED Configurator.
U-8
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
System configurator PACiS SCE
.iid .scd .icd
IED Configurator
IED Configurator
.mcl
.x3v
S&R 103 Operating program
19Z7001 A_EN
U-1
Configuration according to IEC 61850-6
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-9

(continued)
IEC 61850 parameters separate from protection device parameters!

IED Processor module Operating program Device parameter s
Parameter download
Control PC
Parameter switch
IED Configurator
Ethernet module
Parameter upload
IEC 61850 parameter Bank 1
IEC 61850 parameter Bank 2
Bank switching to enable the device parameters
New approach to IED parameter management

19Z7002 A_EN
U-2
Saving configuration parameters
Client Log-on Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as defined in the 'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the devices. A 'server' is always that unit which provides information to other units. A client may log on to this server in order to receive information, for instance 'reports'. In its function as server the unit P437 can supply up to 16 clients, linked into the network, with spontaneous or cyclic information.
U-10
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
Clock Synchronization With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined as standard for Ethernet. Here the unit functions as an SNTP client. For clock synchronization one can choose between the operating modes Anycast from SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all units in the network, and in the second operating mode the unit requests a unit-specific time signal during a settable cycle. Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably performed by the first server. The second server is reverted to if no only signal is received from the first server. When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the MAIN function then, by selecting "COMM1/IEC", synchronization per IEC 61850 is automatically active but only if this communication protocol is applied. Generating datasets, reporting The specific project related feature of the units communications behavior is determined by the configuration of datasets, reports and high priority transmission methods. A piece of information must be included in a dataset so as to be transmitted as a signal. A dataset is a list to transmit certain data objects. The selection of data objects and the resulting length of the dataset is determined by the application; merely the maximum size of a dataset to be transmitted by GOOSE (see next section) is limited to 1500 bytes. Data objects provided by the unit are available for selection with a structure as specified by IEC 61850. Within the quality descriptor for each piece of information the invalid bit and the test bit are served according to the units state; the other attributes are not set. Any number of datasets may be created with the IED Configurator. Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory. The knowledge of dataset content is imperative for decoding and evaluating received signals. Configuration files possess a listing of all datasets with a description of all data objects included. Next to their use with high priority transmission methods (see following section) datasets are used mainly for reporting. The unit provides up to sixteen unbuffered reports and eight buffered reports independent of the number of clients logged-on. Management is arranged into sixteen Unbuffered Report Control Blocks (urcbA to urcbP) and eight Buffered Report Control Blocks (brcbA to brcbH). Whereas with unbuffered reporting pieces of information may be lost during a communications failure, the buffered report control blocks support a buffered transmission which is required for the uninterrupted writing of events. A pre-defined dataset may be assigned to each report which will then determine which data object will be transmitted with the relevant report. Assigning datasets is not limited; the same dataset may be referenced in various reports or even in GOOSEs. The unit can serve up to sixteen clients. Each client can log-on to any number of available reports, but one report is always allocated exclusively to only one client. The client is then able to activate the wanted report for himself and to set the transmission behavior to his requirements. The system concept with intended clients must be taken into account when datasets are assigned to the reports. Reports are not received by the unit.
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-11

(continued)
Transmitting modeled signals not provided by the IEC 61850 data model In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional number of up to 16 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the unit to be transmitted via reporting. A selection of state signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting I E C : S i g G G I O 1 s e l e c t i o n . The data object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the sequence given for the m out of n selection for the state signals. The indexes SigGGIO1.ST.ind1 to SigGGIO1.ST.ind16 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data objects. Fault Transmission Including fault transmission for IEC 61850 in the configuration is possible only with the IED Configurator. Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer". COMTRADE fault files in the unit are transmitted uniformly either as ASCII or binary formatted files. Fault transmission can be cancelled from the configuration.
U-12
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
High priority transmission of information Whereas normal server-client services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level the high priority transmission of information is carried out directly at Ethernet level. Furthermore messages in such a particular form can be received by all participants in the relevant sub-network, independent of their server or client function. They are deployed in instances where high speed transmission of information is wanted between two or more devices. Applications, for example, are reverse interlocking, transfer trip or decentralized substation interlock. The standard IEC 61850 provides two modes for high priority transmission of information: the GSSE and the GOOSE. The GSSE (also named UCA2-GOOSE ) is used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by 'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. The GOOSE enables transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary information, integer values or analog measured values. Communication with the MiCOM S1 support software via the Ethernet Interface Direct access by the MiCOM S1 support software via the Ethernet interface on the device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is supported only by the associated MiCOM S1 support software (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client communication. Available are all the familiar functions offered by the MiCOM S1 support software such as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data.
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-13

(continued)
Function group IEC presents the following parameters, measured values and signals: Parameters listed in italic letters provide information only. They are set with the IEC 61850 configuration tool "IED Configurator", but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program. Configuration parameters in the operating program IEC: Function group IEC Canceling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. IEC: General enable USER Enabling and disabling function group IEC.
104 000 056 059
104 043 IEC: Switch Config. Bank This parameter can only be sent individually. Accepting the previously set communication parameters as the active communication settings.
IEC: Active Config. Name

Name of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
104 045
IEC: Active Config. Vers.

Version number of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
104 046
IEC: Inact. Config. Name

Name of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
104 047
IEC: Inact. Config. Vers.

Version number of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
104 048
IEC: IED name
104 057
Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the Logical Device Name. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
U-14
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
IEC: IP address
104 001
IP address of the unit set for the server function in the system. Note: With P437 software versions previous to -630 this parameter was used to set the IP address. Now it is only an information parameter ('read only'), for which a value can be set by using the "IED configurator" with Communications: IP Address.
IEC: Subnet mask
104 005
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network. Note: With P437 software versions previous to -630 this parameter was used to set the sub-network. Now it is only an information parameter ('read only'), for which a value can be set by using the "IED configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask.
IEC: Gateway address
104 011
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for communication links to clients outside of the local network. Note: With P437 software versions previous to -630 this parameter was used to set the network gateway. Now it is only an information parameter ('read only'), for which a value can be set by using the "IED configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address.
IEC: SNTP server 1 IP

IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.
104 202
IEC: SNTP server 2 IP

IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization
104 202
104 064 IEC: SigGGIO1 selection Optional signal assignment for a transmission per communication protocol IEC 61850 based on the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
IEC: Diff. local time Time difference between UTC and local time at the units substation. IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time Time difference of the daylight saving time to standard time.
104 206
104 207
104 219 IEC: Switch.dayl.sav.time This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time is wanted. 104 220 IEC: Dayl.sav.time start 104 221 IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. d 104 222 IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. m These three parameters define the date for switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. By combining the three parameters I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t a r t (values "first", "second", "third", "fourth", "last"), I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . d (seven weekdays) and I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . m (month) a setting, for example, such as "on the last Sunday in March" can be carried out. 104 223 IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 + Time period in minutes after midnight when daylight saving time is switched to standard time. If for example the clock is advanced one hour from 2:00 AM to 3:00 AM the parameter I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + is set to 120 (minutes).
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-15

(continued)
104 225 IEC: Dayl.sav.time end 104 226 IEC: Dayl.sav.time end d 104 227 IEC: Dayl.sav.time end m 104 228 IEC: Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+ These parameters define the date and time of day for the clock changeover from daylight saving time to standard time. Settings are made similar to the changeover to daylight saving time.
Parameter, unit identification DVICE: MAC address module A MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This address is set during manufacture and can only be read. Function parameters associated with IEC 61850, general function COUNT: Iec61850 pulsQty
104 061
221 096
Setting the scaling factor to transmit the counter value via communication protocol IEC 61850. According to the standard the resulting value is calculated as: Value transmitted = updated value * pulsQty. Operation, cyclic values, logic state signals IEC: Comm. link faulty
105 180
Display when an Ethernet module is not operational, i.e. if the MAC address is missing or there is an implausible parameter setting. Configuration parameters in the IED Configurator
IED Details: SCL File ID

Identification of the .mcl configuration file. The preset value may be changed on demand by, for example, entering a bay name.
IED Details: SCL File Version

Specific value to identify the IEC 61850 data model and configuration. The preset value may be changed on demand by, for example, identifying the revision states during engineering.
IED Details: Name
Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the Logical Device Name. Further specific values listed in the column "Template Details" only provide information. They are preset and cannot be modified.
U-16
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
Communications: Connected Sub-Network

Optional name available to identify the Ethernet.
Communications: Access Point

Part of the communications control; preset, cannot be modified.
Communications: IP Address
Explicitly assigned IP address of the unit for the server function in the system.
Communications: SubNet Mask

The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Communications: Gateway Address

This parameter defines the IPv4 address of the network gateway for communication links to clients outside of the local network.
Communications: Media
Network hardware provided as fiber optics or twisted pair copper wires.
Communications: TCP Keepalive

Communication monitoring at TCP level; preset.
Communications: Database Lock Timeout

Return time period for setting procedures that have commenced; preset.
SNTP: Poll Rate (seconds)

Polling interval for clock synchronization; preset.
SNTP: Accepted Stratum level

Quality criterion to accept an SNTP server for clock synchronization; preset, cannot be modified.
SNTP: IP Address
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.
SNTP: virtual key "Use Anycast"

Appointing any server in the local network to provide clock synchronization. Further specific values listed in the column "External server parameters" may be accepted when imported from an XML configuration file.
Dataset Definitions: Name

Explicitly assigned name for the dataset.
Dataset Definitions: Location

Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory.
Dataset Definitions: Contents

Content (data objects, data attributes) of a dataset
Dataset Definitions: Display GOOSE Capacity

Checking the length of a dataset for less than 1500 bytes to permit transmission in GOOSE messages. The display is irrelevant when the dataset is only used in reports.
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-17

(continued)
Report Control Blocks: Report Type

Report type Unbuffered
updating saving
Buffered
Report Control Blocks: Report ID

Report ID consisting of the Device Name and the Report Control Block.
Report Control Blocks: Dataset Reference

Name of the dataset assigned to the report.
Report Control Blocks: Configuration Revision

Revision status of the configuration.
Measurements: Unit multiplier

Multiplication factor; not supported.
Measurements: Scaled measurement range Min

Lower measuring range limit value; not supported.
Measurements: Scaled measurement range Max

Upper measuring range limit value; not supported.
Measurements: Dead band

Multiplier for the smallest display value of the measured value. In order to have the current measured value sent when it has changed from the value last sent the result of the set dead band value multiplied by the smallest display value must exceed the smallest display value.
Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.measCyc: Value

Transmission of measured values: Time interval in seconds between two dead band evaluations.
Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.enCyc: Value

Cyclic transmission of measured values without dead band check: Time interval in seconds between transmissions of two energy count values.
Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.comtrade: Value

Transmission of COMTRADE fault files formatted either as ASCII or binary files.
Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.distExtr: Value

Canceling fault transmission or including it in the configuration. Further specific values listed in the column "Data type only provide information. They are preset and cannot be modified.
U-18
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
2.2
Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)
For high priority exchange of information between individual units (IEDs) in a local network, the unit provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the standard IEC 61850. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission of information for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals. GOOSE Messages are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. GOOSE messages therefore remain in the local network to which the unit is logged-on. Configuration and enabling Function group GOOSE can be configured using the parameter G O O S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G O O S E . This parameter is visible only if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. Once the GOOSE is configured, all parameters associated to this function group are then visible and settable. Further setting parameters from function group GOOSE are set with the IED Configurator, but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (MMI) or with the operating program. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GOOSE: General enable USER.
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-19

(continued)
Device A
IEC 61850 Mapping S1 Studio System/GosGGIO2
Device B
S1 Studio GOOSE: Input 1 ... 32
GOOSE: Output 1 ... 32
System/GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 ... 32 IED Configurator System/LLN 0/Datasetx IED Configurator System/GosGGIO1
Pos1.stVal ... Pos32.stVal
IED Configurator System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08
MCL
IED Configurator System/DevGosGGIO3 Pos1.stVal ... Pos32.stVal Fixed assignment
S1 Studio
Ext.Dev 1 32
19Z7003 A_EN
U-3
GOOSE configuration
U-20
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
Sending GOOSE The GOOSE can send up to eight different GOOSE messages which are managed in eight GOOSE Control Blocks (gcb01 to gcb08). Information content depends on the respective dataset assigned to GOOSE. The maximum size of a dataset to be sent by GOOSE is limited to 1500 bytes. A control display is shown by the IED Configurator to check this limit. When defining the datasets for GOOSE it is advised to select the individual data attributes and not the overlapping data objects. By this the amount of data is kept within a limit and decoding is guaranteed on the receiving end. In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional number of up to 32 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the unit to be transmitted via GOOSE, as it is also possible with reporting. Selection of binary state signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting G O O S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). The data object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the function assignments for the GOOSE outputs. The indexes GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data objects. When a state change occurs with a selected state signal or a measured value changes which is greater than the dead band set for the relevant data point then the complete GOOSE is sent. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter [ I C ] : M i n i m u m C y c l e T i m e . The cycles for the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the parameter [ I C ] : I n c r e m e n t . Should no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed [IC ]: M a xi m u m C yc l e T i m e , then GOOSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the maximum cycle time. In order to have unambiguous identification of a GOOSE sent, characteristics such as [IC]: Multicast MAC Address, [IC]: Application ID (hex), [ I C ] : V L A N I d e n t i f i e r ( h e x ) , [ I C ] : V L A N P r i o r i t y and [IC]: GOOSE Identifier must be entered in the IED Configurator settings. Further characteristics are [IC]: Dataset Reference and [IC]: Configuration Revision. Each GOOSE is given the state change index and the number of send repetitions.
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-21

(continued)
Receiving GOOSE With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. For each state signal or contact position signal to be received a specific GOOSE message is to be selected, which will contain the information wanted, by setting [IC ]: M u l ti c a s t M AC Ad d r e s s , [IC]: Application ID (hex), [IC]: Source Path, [IC]: GOOSE Identifier and [IC ]: D a ta Se t R e fe r e n c e . With the further setting of [ I C ] : D a t a O b j I n d e x / T y p e , which corresponds to the GOOSE position index and the information structure of the sending unit, the required information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The identification features "VLAN identifier" and [ I C ] : C o n f i g u r a t i o n R e v i s i o n that are also included in the GOOSE received will not be evaluated. These parameters characterizing the information may be taken either from unit or project planning documentation of the sending unit or from a configuration file which is conform to IEC 61850. The IED Configurator will support the import of .IID, .SCD and .MCL files when the "browse function" (virtual key) is applied. The selection and acceptance of parameters from an existing project planning is distinguished by a simplified and very reliable data input. Should the data type of the selected data object provide quality information then this can be evaluated. When activating [I C ] : Q u a l i t y O b j I n d e x the distance of the quality descriptor to the data object (if not preset) must be given as well as the quality criterion, which is to be tested. A signal is rejected when one of the bits ([IC ]: In va l i d i ty Q u a l i ty b i ts , see displayed bar with bit state) is received as a set bit. These parameters are usually described in a configuration file and are accepted from there during an import action. Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without this GOOSE having been received again (e.g. because of a fault in communications), the received signals will automatically be set to their respective default values [ I C ] : D e f a u l t I n p u t V a l u e . Which of the possible state values will set the desired security grade depends on the relevant application. The following configuration (shuttling to the unit functions) of the logic state signals received from the logic node GosGGIO1 (G O O S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary signal inputs (optocoupler inputs). The virtual key "Unmap" may be used to remove the link of a binary signal input to an external data point. In such a case all entries for this binary signal input are deleted.
U-22
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
The function group GOOSE presents the following parameters, measured values and signals: Configuration parameters in the operating program GOOSE: Function group GOOSE
056 068
Canceling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. Parameters included in this function group are only effective when function group IEC is configured and enabled and when the parameters in this function group have been activated by setting the parameter IEC: S w i t c h C o n f i g . B a n k . GOOSE: General enable USER Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.
106 001
106 011 GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 106 013 GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig. 106 015 GOOSE: Output 3 fct.assig. 106 017 GOOSE: Output 4 fct.assig. 106 019 GOOSE: Output 5 fct.assig. 106 021 GOOSE: Output 6 fct.assig. 106 023 GOOSE: Output 7 fct.assig. 106 025 GOOSE: Output 8 fct.assig. 106 027 GOOSE: Output 9 fct.assig. 106 029 GOOSE: Output 10 fct.assig. 106 031 GOOSE: Output 11 fct.assig. 106 033 GOOSE: Output 12 fct.assig. 106 035 GOOSE: Output 13 fct.assig. 106 037 GOOSE: Output 14 fct.assig. 106 039 GOOSE: Output 15 fct.assig. 106 041 GOOSE: Output 16 fct.assig. 106 043 GOOSE: Output 17 fct.assig. 106 045 GOOSE: Output 18 fct.assig. 106 047 GOOSE: Output 19 fct.assig. 106 049 GOOSE: Output 20 fct.assig. 106 051 GOOSE: Output 21 fct.assig. 106 053 GOOSE: Output 22 fct.assig. 106 055 GOOSE: Output 23 fct.assig. 106 057 GOOSE: Output 24 fct.assig. 106 059 GOOSE: Output 25 fct.assig. 106 061 GOOSE: Output 26 fct.assig. 106 063 GOOSE: Output 27 fct.assig. 106 065 GOOSE: Output 28 fct.assig. 106 067 GOOSE: Output 29 fct.assig. 106 069 GOOSE: Output 30 fct.assig. 106 071 GOOSE: Output 31 fct.assig. 106 073 GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig. Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE outputs. Signals configured here can be included as GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 in the datasets.
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-23

(continued)
107 006 GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 107 016 GOOSE: Input 2 fct.assig. 107 026 GOOSE: Input 3 fct.assig. 107 036 GOOSE: Input 4 fct.assig. 107 046 GOOSE: Input 5 fct.assig. 107 056 GOOSE: Input 6 fct.assig. 107 066 GOOSE: Input 7 fct.assig. 107 076 GOOSE: Input 8 fct.assig. 107 086 GOOSE: Input 9 fct.assig. 107 096 GOOSE: Input 10 fct.assig. 107 106 GOOSE: Input 11 fct.assig. 107 116 GOOSE: Input 12 fct.assig. 107 126 GOOSE: Input 13 fct.assig. 107 136 GOOSE: Input 14 fct.assig. 107 146 GOOSE: Input 15 fct.assig. 107 156 GOOSE: Input 16 fct.assig. 107 157 GOOSE: Input 17 fct.assig. 107 158 GOOSE: Input 18 fct.assig. 107 159 GOOSE: Input 19 fct.assig. 107 160 GOOSE: Input 20 fct.assig. 107 161 GOOSE: Input 21 fct.assig. 107 162 GOOSE: Input 22 fct.assig. 107 163 GOOSE: Input 23 fct.assig. 107 164 GOOSE: Input 24 fct.assig. 107 165 GOOSE: Input 25 fct.assig. 107 166 GOOSE: Input 26 fct.assig. 107 167 GOOSE: Input 27 fct.assig. 107 168 GOOSE: Input 28 fct.assig. 107 169 GOOSE: Input 29 fct.assig. 107 170 GOOSE: Input 30 fct.assig. 107 171 GOOSE: Input 31 fct.assig. 107 172 GOOSE: Input 32 fct.assig. Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE inputs (GosGGIO1\Pos1.stVal to GosGGIO1\Pos32.stVal) to a binary logical state signal on the unit so that they can be processed further by the protection, control or logic functions. Signals configured here contain the received and pre-processed state of data attributes configured for GOOSE receipt.
U-24
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
Physical State Signals
GOOSE: Output 1 state GOOSE: Output 2 state GOOSE: Output 3 state GOOSE: Output 4 state GOOSE: Output 5 state GOOSE: Output 6 state GOOSE: Output 7 state GOOSE: Output 8 state GOOSE: Output 9 state GOOSE: Output 10 state GOOSE: Output 11 state GOOSE: Output 12 state GOOSE: Output 13 state GOOSE: Output 14 state GOOSE: Output 15 state GOOSE: Output 16 state GOOSE: Output 17 state GOOSE: Output 18 state GOOSE: Output 19 state GOOSE: Output 20 state GOOSE: Output 21 state GOOSE: Output 22 state GOOSE: Output 23 state GOOSE: Output 24 state GOOSE: Output 25 state GOOSE: Output 26 state GOOSE: Output 27 state GOOSE: Output 28 state GOOSE: Output 29 state GOOSE: Output 30 state GOOSE: Output 31 state GOOSE: Output 32 state Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.
106 010 106 012 106 014 106 016 106 018 106 020 106 022 106 024 106 026 106 028 106 030 106 032 106 034 106 036 106 038 106 040 106 042 106 044 106 046 106 048 106 050 106 052 106 054 106 056 106 058 106 060 106 062 106 064 106 066 106 068 106 070 106 072
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-25

(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 state GOOSE: Input 2 state GOOSE: Input 3 state GOOSE: Input 4 state GOOSE: Input 5 state GOOSE: Input 6 state GOOSE: Input 7 state GOOSE: Input 8 state GOOSE: Input 9 state GOOSE: Input 10 state GOOSE: Input 11 state GOOSE: Input 12 state GOOSE: Input 13 state GOOSE: Input 14 state GOOSE: Input 15 state GOOSE: Input 16 state GOOSE: Input 17 state GOOSE: Input 18 state GOOSE: Input 19 state GOOSE: Input 20 state GOOSE: Input 21 state GOOSE: Input 22 state GOOSE: Input 23 state GOOSE: Input 24 state GOOSE: Input 25 state GOOSE: Input 26 state GOOSE: Input 27 state GOOSE: Input 28 state GOOSE: Input 29 state GOOSE: Input 30 state GOOSE: Input 31 state GOOSE: Input 32 state Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state. Logic State Signals
106 200 106 201 106 202 106 203 106 204 106 205 106 206 106 207 106 208 106 209 106 210 106 211 106 212 106 213 106 214 106 215 106 216 106 217 106 218 106 219 106 220 106 221 106 222 106 223 106 224 106 225 106 226 106 227 106 228 106 229 106 230 106 231
107 180 GOOSE: IED01 link faulty Display whether GOOSE receipt of the configured signal is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time interval before the reception of the next state signal.
(Addresses 107 180107 215 for IED01 to IED32.)

107 250 GOOSE: IED link faulty Display which appears as soon as receipt of at least one of the configured GOOSEs is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time interval before the reception of the next state signal.
U-26
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
Configuration parameters in the IED Configurator
GOOSE Publishing: Multicast MAC Address

Virtual MAC address that the sending unit provides as the destination; preset.
GOOSE Publishing: Application ID (hex)

Explicitly assigned ID number of the GOOSE.
GOOSE Publishing: VLAN Identifier (hex)

ID number of the virtual LAN with which the GOOSE is sent; preset.
GOOSE Publishing: VLAN Priority

Priority with which the GOOSE is sent in the virtual LAN; preset.
GOOSE Publishing: Minimum Cycle Time

First send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.
GOOSE Publishing: Maximum Cycle Time

Continuous send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.
GOOSE Publishing: Increment

Specification factor for the transition of time intervals for GOOSE send repetitions from the first to the continuous repetition.
GOOSE Publishing: GOOSE Identifier

GOOSE ID consisting of the Device Name and the GOOSE Control Block.
GOOSE Publishing: Dataset Reference

Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE.
GOOSE Publishing: Configuration Revision

Revision status of the configuration.
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-27

(continued)
GOOSE Publishing: Multicast MAC Address

Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.
GOOSE Publishing: Application ID (hex)

ID-number of the GOOSE.
GOOSE Publishing: Source Path

Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Publishing: GOOSE Identifier

ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Publishing: Dataset Reference

Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Publishing: Configuration Revision

Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.
GOOSE Publishing: Data Obj Index

Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.
GOOSE Publishing: Data Type

Structure of the data object; possible settings:

Unknown Boolean Int8 Int16 Int32 UInt8 UInt16 UInt32 Float BStr2 SPS DPS
Unknown Boolean integer, 8 digits integer, 16 digits integer, 32 digits positive integer, 8 digits positive integer, 16 digits positive integer, 32 digits floating-point number binary state, with 2 digits single-pole signal two-pole signal
GOOSE Publishing: Quality Obj Index

Distance of the quality descriptor to the data object if not preset. The quality of the received information is to be tested if such has been configured.
U-28
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
GOOSE Publishing: Invalidity Quality bits

Quality criterion, which is to be tested.

Invalid / Questionable Source Test OperatorBlocked Overflow OutofRange BadReference Oscillatory Failure OldData Inconsistent Inaccurate
Invalid / questionable Information source is faulty Sending unit is set to test mode Blocked by operator Measured value has exceeded its capacity Measured value has exceeded its range Referenced value is faulty Value is volatile Faulty Information is out-of-date Information is unreliable Information is inaccurate
and

GOOSE Publishing: Evaluation Expression

Criteria to check the received information content by comparing it with a set integer value; the parameter is not supported in the unit. Equal to Compared to: equal Not equal to Compared to: unequal Greater than Compared to: greater Less than Compared to: less Pass through Do not compare
GOOSE Publishing: Default Input Value

Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed False Default: not set True Default: set Last Known Value Default: retain last value received Double Point: Intermediate (00) Default: switching device in intermediate position Double Point: Off (01) Default: switching device open Double Point: On (10) Default: switching device closed Double Point: Bad state (11) Default: switching device in intermediate position
P437/EN AD/Bk8 // AFSV.12.10541 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-29

(continued)
2.3 Load blinding (Operating mode Z)
Power Swing Blocking (Function group PSB)
In the case of parallel lines (i.e. double-circuit lines) with a high rate of power transmission to neighboring networks the failure of one three-phase system may lead to a short-time (typically 20 to 30 minutes) increase in the power flow rate on the remaining line. Here the positive-sequence impedance locus will then lie within the load blinding area of the distance protection starting characteristic. This is displayed in figure U-, with the following fault sequence: 1. Operation under load conditions (blue area, "2 operational systems") 2. Fault on the parallel line will lead to a selective disconnection of this parallel line 3. Operation under overload conditions on the remaining system (red area, "1 faulted system") 4. Start of a power swing due to instable network conditions.
X
150
Power swing polygon Starting characteristic

100
50
-50
50
100
-50
Load area 1 faulted system
Load area 2 operational systems

47Z2000A_EN
U-4
Impedance trajectory with a fault in one three-phase system
U-30
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
It is therefore not possible to selectively set the power swing polygon where: The setting for the resistance reach Rfwd of the starting polygon is such that the impedance locus could possibly not leave the power swing polygon after the initial short-circuit fault has been cleared, and therefore power swing blocking cannot be enabled when a power swing occurs. It is also possible that because of load variations the impedance locus will leave the power swing polygon for a short-time and then return, which could cause power swing blocking to be enabled erroneously (resulting in a protection malfunction if a chance short-circuit fault should then occur). The setting for the starting impedance in the load area Zfwd (minimum load impedance) is such that power swing blocking may occur too late if a power swing has started in the normal blue area and then crosses the starting characteristic in the power swing polygon area (above the angle ).
To cope with this problem a load blinding feature is now available for the power swing polygon: The time for a measurement sample to be taken to determine the speed of resistance change may be set at P S B : A c t i v a t i o n c o n d . d Z (with two selection options 'Power Swing polygon' and 'PS-polygon + 3pStart'): With the 'Power Swing polygon' setting ("entry into the power swing polygon"), the function will operate as before, i.e. when the positive-sequence impedance locus enters the power swing polygon, the speed of change of the positive-sequence impedances real component is measured and evaluated. With the 'PS-polygon + 3pStart' setting ("power swing polygon + 3-phase start"), the speed of change of the positive-sequence impedances real component is measured under these conditions only: [The updated positive-sequence impedance locus determined lies within the power swing polygon] AND
[A 3-phase - without ground - start has occurred] OR ( [A 2-phase - without ground - start has occurred] AND ["The negative-sequence current value is sufficiently small"] )
The result is that the state "positive-sequence impedance locus in the power swing polygon" will now also be a simple enabling condition for the Z method. In this case whether the positive-sequence impedance is now being measured for the first time within the power swing polygon or it was already there during a previous measurement is irrelevant. Crucial for a measurement decision is the onset of the (distance) general start. In theory, a 3-phase start (without ground) is to be expected, as power swing occurrences are symmetrical (i.e. the same measurement conditions are to be found in all 3 phases).The result is that with the onset of a phase-ground start there will be no power swing occurence (i.e. when with the onset of a start there is also a phase-ground start or it is already present, then the blocking effect can no longer be set). In practice all currents and voltages will be unbalanced (mainly because of unbalanced lines, but asymmetrical loads and infeeds, as well as measurement errors by transformers and even by the protection device itself are also to be considered) so that possibly one of the three phase-phase starting systems will trigger first. Therefore, with a high R1 reach for zone 1, the 2-phase start may have already led to a trip command during a power swing event, even before a 3-phase start has activated power swing blocking. Therefore, in order to also have control of this state, the power swing blocking
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-31

(continued)
function carries out the R measurement at the onset of the 2-phase start, but only if currents are adequately balanced. To ensure this, the negative-sequence current is measured continuously. With the onset of the first 2-phase start, caused by a power swing event, the Ineg value must not be significant, i.e. in this case: Ineg < 0.1 Inom + 0.2 IP,max On the other hand, the device will make a (2-phase) short-circuit decision when the negative-sequence current value exceeds this value. In order for power swing blocking to become effective in time with such a selection of sampling times, it will be implemented after the distance protection start and before the distance zone detection. This is the preferred approach when looking at a parallel undervoltage start. The reach of the undervoltage start is basically not definable in the impedance plane and can therefore not be covered safely by a purely impedance-defined power swing polygon. Since it is now possible to select the sampling times of power swing events, the first occurence of the undervoltage condition can be ascertained in time if the power swing polygon is set to a sufficient size. Overlapping of the power swing polygon with the area of minimum load impedance is permitted. According to the basic Z principle, the decision is taken only once (in this case with the onset of above mentioned starting conditions). If a power swing event is detected, power swing blocking is set and stored until the reset condition is met. The power swing blocking is adapted (extended) when this new acquisition method is used. The blocking effect is lifted if one of the following conditions is met: Behavior with a shortcircuit fault during a power swing event A short-circuit fault condition may occur during a power swing event. With the Z operating mode, blocking is lifted because one current trigger (IP>, Ineg>, IN>) has operated. Until now this would occur instantaneously. As distance measurement was already active during the blocking the following problems could be encountered: 1. The zone-time grading measurement is already running (since the general start or since the zone entry because of the power swing event). For example a short-circuit fault has occurred in backup zones: this will then lead to an instantaneous triggering when power swing blocking is lifted (which is an overreaction). When a general starting is present for a length of time the measurement window of the distance measurement is shifted backwards in time so as to prevent incorrect decisions at fault clearance (tripping by an upstream protection device). If no change in starting occurs when power swing blocking is lifted, (i.e. a 3pole fault is detected) then distance measurement operates, for the time being, with the previous measured values from the power swing area which were collected before the short-circuit fault had occurred. Therefore distance and zone decisions are of no use. The general start is terminated (only with the setting 'PS-polygon + 3pStart'), or (as before) the positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing polygon, or (at least) one current trigger (IP>, Ineg>, IN>) is triggered, or the maximum blocking time has been reached.
2.
U-32
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
With protection systems where phase-differential protection is applied along with distance protection, the overreaction as given under item 1. can be avoided if, after the current short-circuit trigger has operated, blocking of distance protection is lifted with a short release delay (100 ms), which will then give preference to the selective differential protection. Such a short release delay is of no use with protection systems where two distance protection devices are used. For this a new release delay for blocking is available. It is set at P S B : A b o r t d e l a y (in the range from 0.00 s to 1.00 s with the default value = 0.00 s). This release delay will become active when blocking is lifted because a current trigger has operated (IP>, Ineg>, IN>). For technical reasons this release delay will also be activated when the maximum blocking time has elapsed so that, including this release delay, the set maximum blocking time may be exceeded.
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-33

(continued)
2.4
Protective Signaling (Function group PSIG)
The three-ended line protection feature introduced with version -611 of the P437 has been extended by phase-selective input signals:
PSIG: 3ended line prot PSx [ * ] 0 1 0: No 1: Yes PSIG: Receive (A) EXT [ 036 048 ] PSIG: Receive (B) EXT [ 006 037 ] PSIG: Chan.A 1 receive EXT [ 038 091 ] PSIG: Chan.B 1 receive EXT [ 008 241 ] PSIG: Chan.A 2 receive EXT [ 038 092 ] PSIG: Chan.B 2 receive EXT [ 008 242 ] PSIG: Chan.A 3 receive EXT [ 038 093 ] PSIG: Chan.B 3 receive EXT [ 008 243 ] & & & & & & PSIG: Receive [ 006 036 ]
& &
PSIG: Channel 1 receive [ 008 244 ]
& &
& &
PSIG: 3ended line prot PSx 006 039 006 046 006 047 006 048 47Z2004B_EN
U-5
Three-ended line protection (This diagram replaces figure 3-176 in the complete technical manual of the P437 -613.)
By this the logic shown in diagrams 3-151, 3-156, 3-158, 3-161, 3-164, 3-167, 3-168 and 3-171 in the complete technical manual of the P437 -613 has been changed such that in place of the previous input signals P S I G : C h a n n . x r e c e i v e E X T (x=1,2,3) these new input signals P S I G : C h a n n e l . x r e c e i v e x (x=1,2,3) are used. An exception to this is the echo function where the A and B input signals, always linked by an OR, are entered (see Fig. U-6).
U-34
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
GSCSG: Ready [ 043 057 ] GSCSG: Channel mode [ 023 078 ] 2: Common channel GFSC: Direct. determ.enabl. [ 043 061 ]
PSIG: Echo on receive PSx [ * ] 0 1 2 0: Without 1: On receive 2: On receive & V< PSIG: Op. delay echo PSx [ * ]
PSIG: No. telecom. ch. PSx [ * ] 1 3 1: 1 channel 3: 3 channels PSIG: V< triggered PSIG: Pulse dur. echo PSx [ * ]
PSIG: Send [ 036 035 ]
305 162
PSIG: Receive (A) EXT [ 036 048 ] PSIG: Receive (B) EXT [ 006 037 ] PSIG: Frequ. monit.trigg.
305 152
PSIG: Chan.A 1 receive EXT [ 038 091 ] PSIG: Chan.B 1 receive EXT [ 038 241 ] PSIG: Frequ. monit. ch. 1
305 169
305 170
305 171
DIST: General starting [ 036 240 ] MAIN: CB open 3p [ 031 040 ]

*
PSIG: Echo on receive PSx 015 003 024 002 024 062 025 022
PSIG: Op. delay echo PSx 015 022 024 008 024 068 025 028
PSIG: Pulse dur. PSIG: No. echo PSx telecom. ch. PSx 015 023 015 026 024 009 024 012 024 069 024 072 025 029 025 032
47Z2042A_EN
U-6
Echo function (This diagram replaces figure 3-174 in the complete technical manual of the P437 -613.)
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-35

(continued)
2.5 Voltage-checking feature
Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC)
At A S C : A R t m i n v - c h e c k P S x or A S C : M C t m i n v - c h e c k P S x different operating modes can now be selected for the voltage-checking feature. An operating mode can be set separately for each parameter subset (see the complete technical manual of the P437 -613, page 3-307). Where the operating mode is set to 'Vref & Z1 but not V' the significance of 'Z1' has been modified several times during the development of the P437. Basically this condition should guarantee that the voltage-checked reclose control will only occur after a highspeed trip issued to clear a line fault. With a time-delayed trip (ARC start via operative time 2) the reclose control should only occur after a voltage input is received from the remote end, including a synchronism check (V, f, ). Originally 'Z1' was actually the condition that would make distance protection trip in zone 1. This was sufficient with plain protection systems. As of version -611 of the P437, the significance of '&Z1' was then extended to '[Trip with DIST Z1] OR [Trip with Z1,ze and PSIG]'. Perhaps this approach did not suffice for applications with line differential protection operating concurrently. Causes for problems were for example: States during the loss of the protective signaling interface and faults at the remote end of the line Extremely short fault duration (2 periods) with a "too fast" trip command by L-DIFF and CB, so that DIST starting has already dropped out before the PSIG enable signal has been received. High ohmic faults where DIST does not start but L-DIFF does.
The line selective trip signals from L-DIFF operating in parallel (or DIFF operating in parallel) have been mapped to binary signal inputs on the P437 (MAIN: Parallel trip A EXT etc.). Together with this trip a start by the ARC will also occur. In order to address these problems the condition 'Z1' is now (i.e. as of version 630 of the P437) no longer dependent on individual protection functions but rather on the recognition that the trip has occurred during operative time 1 of ARC. Test starting with AR parameters As of P437 -608 the ASC function is enhanced by separate operating modes monitoring values for manual (MC) and automatic (AR) reclosure. An MC parameter is used with the test ASC triggering. With the present version, P437 630, there are now additional triggering parameters available so that the function may be tested with AR parameters. Furthermore previous triggering parameters have been given modified designations that now explicitly point out the MC operating mode: Triggering parameter for Auto-reclose control Manual close command ASC: AR close requ. USER ASC: MC close requ. USER ASC: AR close request EXT ASC: MC close request EXT A S C : Close request AR ASC: Close request MC ASC: Test AR close r.USER ASC: Test MC close r.USER ASC: Test AR close r. EXT ASC: Test MC close r. EXT ASC: Test AR close requ. ASC: Test MC close requ.
U-36
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630

(continued)
ARC: (Re)close request [ 037 077 ]
ASC: Gen. close request

306 012
ARC: Cycle running [ 037 000 ] ASC: Close request y [ **
ASC: Manual close request

305 000
] 0
500ms
0: don't execute 1: execute
ASC: y close requ. USER [ ** ] 0 1 500ms
ASC: y close request EXT [ ** ]
50ms
ASC: Enabl.close requ.EXT [ 037 063 ]
50ms
INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx [ 152 xxx ] Ux1 Ux2 Ux3 Ux4 Uxx Address 037 063
ASC: Test y close r.USER [ ** ] ASC: Test

305 004
0 1 100ms 1 1 500ms
0: don't execute 1: execute ASC: Test y close r. EXT [ ** ] ASC: Test y close requ. [ ** ]
Parameter y = MC y = AR
ASC: y close request EXT 037 062 008 236
ASC: y close requ. USER 018 004 008 238
ASC: Close request y 034 018 008 239
ASC: Test y close r. EXT 037 064 000 106
ASC: Test y close r.USER 018 005 008 237
ASC: Test y close requ. 034 019 008 240
47Z2072A_EN
U-7
Close request ("AR") for the auto-reclose control or for the manual close command ("MC"). (This diagram replaces figure 3-200 in the complete technical manual of the P437 -613.)
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
U-37
U-38
P437/EN AD/Ak8 // AFSV.12.10540 D /// P437-308-408/409-630
P437/EN AD/Am8 // AFSV.12.10970 D /// P437-308-408/409-631

(continued)
Version PSIG
Changes Bug fixing: Tripping times were always longer than 40 ms when the operating mode was set to Release scheme with direction-dependent tripping. This was because the execution of a process contained in the distance protection function was not terminated immediately with the start of the tripping condition. This delay was added, under certain conditions, to an intentional time-delay set at data point P S I G : T r i p p i n g t i m e P S x .
P437/EN AD/Am8 // AFSV.12.10970 D /// P437-308-408/409-631

www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P437/EN AD/Am8 // AFSV.12.10970 D /// P437-308-408/409-631

www.schneider-electric.com Publication: P437/EN M/Am8 Version: -613 -614 -630 -631

Micom p437

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micom p437

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P437

Distance Protection Device P437/EN M/Am8

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

3.9 3.10 3.10.1 3.10.2 3.10.3

(Function Group OUTP) (Function Group MEASO)

3-43 3-46 3-49 3-54 3-60

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

(Function Group LED) (Function Group MAIN)

(Function Group ASC)

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

1 Application and Scope

Application and Scope

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

1 Application and Scope

25 67N 85-67N 50/51 P,Q,N

ASC GFSC GSCSG DTOC

CBF LIMIT LOGIC

IEC, GOOSE, GSSE IEC 61850 communications protocol

Measured Value Functions

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

1 Application and Scope

Further functions Further functions

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

1 Application and Scope

Recording and Data Acquisition

Overload rec. Ground flt. rec.

50/51 P,Q,N DTOC

51/67 P,Q,N IDMT

27/59 P,Q,N V<>

protection communication InterMiCOM MEASI/MEASO always available

Distance Protection P437

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

1 Application and Scope

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

1 Application and Scope

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

Technical Data Conformity

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

2.3 2.3.1 Type tests

Tests Type Tests

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

2.6 Local control panel

BA-no. -951 (InterMiCOM)

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

BA-no. -952 (InterMiCOM)

BA-no. -954 (InterMiCOM)

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

2.9 2.9.1 Definitions

Deviations Deviations of the Operate Values

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613

P437/EN M/Ad8 // AFSV.12.10330 EN /// P437-308-408/409-613